BEx Tutorial and User Guide

%XVLQHVV�([SORUHU

��

5HOHDVH ��$

SAP Online Help Business Information Warehouse

Business Explorer 30A 2

&RS\ULJKW

© Copyright 2001 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without theexpress permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without priornotice.

Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary softwarecomponents of other software vendors.

Microsoft®, WINDOWS®, NT®, EXCEL®, Word®, PowerPoint® and SQL Server® are registeredtrademarks ofMicrosoft Corporation.

IBM®, DB2®, OS/2®, DB2/6000®, Parallel Sysplex®, MVS/ESA®, RS/6000®, AIX®, S/390®, AS/400®,OS/390®, and OS/400® are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.

ORACLE® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation.

INFORMIX®-OnLine for SAP and Informix® Dynamic ServerTM

are registered trademarks of InformixSoftware Incorporated.

UNIX®, X/Open®, OSF/1®, and Motif® are registered trademarks of the Open Group.

HTML, DHTML, XML, XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide WebConsortium,Massachusetts Institute of Technology.

JAVA® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.

JAVASCRIPT® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technologyinvented and implemented by Netscape.

SAP, SAP Logo, R/2, RIVA, R/3, ABAP, SAP ArchiveLink, SAP Business Workflow, WebFlow, SAPEarlyWatch, BAPI, SAPPHIRE, Management Cockpit, mySAP.com Logo and mySAP.com aretrademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over theworld. All other products mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respectivecompanies.



,FRQV

,FRQ 0HDQLQJ

Caution

Example

Note

Recommendation

Syntax

7\SRJUDSKLF�&RQYHQWLRQV

7\SH�6W\OH 'HVFULSWLRQ

([DPSOH�WH[W Words or characters that appear on the screen. These include fieldnames, screen titles, pushbuttons as well as menu names, paths andoptions.

Cross-references to other documentation

([DPSOH�WH[W Emphasized words or phrases in body text, titles of graphics and tables

EXAMPLE TEXT Names of elements in the system. These include report names,program names, transaction codes, table names, and individual keywords of a programming language, when surrounded by body text, forexample, SELECT and INCLUDE.

Example text Screen output. This includes file and directory names and their paths,messages, names of variables and parameters, source code as well asnames of installation, upgrade and database tools.

([DPSOH�WH[W Exact user entry. These are words or characters that you enter in thesystem exactly as they appear in the documentation.

�([DPSOH�WH[W! Variable user entry. Pointed brackets indicate that you replace thesewords and characters with appropriate entries.

EXAMPLE TEXT Keys on the keyboard, for example, function keys (such as F2) or theENTER key



%XVLQHVV�([SORUHU ��

Query Design: BEx Query Designer .................................................................................................. 15

Functions of the BEx Query Designer ............................................................................................ 17

Defining New Queries..................................................................................................................... 22

Restricting Characteristics .......................................................................................................... 25

Restricting Characteristics: Hierarchies...................................................................................... 28

Selecting Hierarchies .................................................................................................................. 30

Restricting Key Figures............................................................................................................... 31

Calculating Key Figures .............................................................................................................. 32

Percentage Functions ............................................................................................................. 34

Data Functions ........................................................................................................................ 36

Boolean Operators .................................................................................................................. 38

Defining Exception Cells ............................................................................................................. 40

Using Variables........................................................................................................................... 42

Variables for Characteristic Values ......................................................................................... 45

Variables for Hierarchies and Hierarchy Nodes...................................................................... 47

Variables for Texts .................................................................................................................. 48

Variables for Formulas ............................................................................................................ 49

Processing with Customer Exits.............................................................................................. 50

Delivered Variables ................................................................................................................. 51

Translating Currencies................................................................................................................ 52

Saving Queries ........................................................................................................................... 53

Query Properties ............................................................................................................................ 54

Properties of the Query Components............................................................................................. 55

Tabular Query Display.................................................................................................................... 56

Displaying and Changing Existing Queries in the Query Designer ................................................ 57

Creating Reusable Structures ........................................................................................................ 58

Deleting Query Objects .................................................................................................................. 59

Copying Queries between InfoCubes............................................................................................. 60

Editing Sender/Receiver Assignments for the RRI in BW.............................................................. 62

Creating InfoSet Queries as Receiver Reports........................................................................... 64

Web Application Design: BEx Web Application Designer.................................................................. 65

BEx Web Application Designer....................................................................................................... 67

Creating Web Applications with the BEx Web Application Designer.......................................... 69

From Web Template to Web Application .................................................................................... 72

Determining Web Template Properties....................................................................................... 74

Designing the Layout of Web Templates.................................................................................... 76

Working with the Library for Web Items...................................................................................... 78

Setting Up the BEx Web Application Designer ........................................................................... 80



Web Items ...................................................................................................................................... 81

Generic Attributes ....................................................................................................................... 82

Tables ......................................................................................................................................... 85

Charts.......................................................................................................................................... 88

Editing Charts.......................................................................................................................... 89

Configuring Preview Windows............................................................................................. 91

Undoing Changes ................................................................................................................ 92

Formatting the Chart Background ....................................................................................... 93

Formatting Chart Plot Areas ................................................................................................ 94

Changing the Filling and Border of Surfaces....................................................................... 95

Changing the Size of Chart Elements ................................................................................. 97

Changing the Position of Chart Elements ........................................................................... 99

Removing Chart Elements................................................................................................. 100

Chart Types ....................................................................................................................... 101

Editing Chart Types of Class 1 ...................................................................................... 104



Changing the Chart Type............................................................................................... 116

Axes and Gridlines............................................................................................................. 117

Showing and Hiding Axes .............................................................................................. 118

Changing the Position of the Tick Marks ....................................................................... 119

Changing the Scale........................................................................................................ 120

Changing the Point of Intersection of Axes.................................................................... 121

Reversing the Order of Categories and Values ............................................................. 123

Formatting Axes and Axis Labels .................................................................................. 124

Changing the Start and End Points of a Value Axis ...................................................... 125

Changing the Value Axis Interval................................................................................... 126

Changing Minor Tick Mark and Minor Tick Mark Label Intervals................................... 127

Adding a Value Range ................................................................................................... 128

Formatting Value Ranges .............................................................................................. 129

Formatting the Value Range Title .................................................................................. 130

Changing the Title and Values of a Value Range.......................................................... 131

Showing and Hiding Grid Lines...................................................................................... 133

Editing Gridlines ............................................................................................................. 134

Data Series and Data Points ............................................................................................. 135

Plotting a Data Series to a Secondary Axis ................................................................... 137

Formatting Data Series .................................................................................................. 138

Smoothing Lines ............................................................................................................ 140

Adding, Changing and Removing Trendlines ................................................................ 141

Formatting Trendline Equations..................................................................................... 143

Adding and Removing Error Bars .................................................................................. 144



Editing Error Bars........................................................................................................... 146

Adding and Removing Normal Distributions .................................................................. 147

Editing a Normal Distribution ......................................................................................... 148

Formatting the Title of a Normal Distribution ................................................................. 149

Formatting the Tachometer Needle Label ..................................................................... 150

Changing the Value Range of a Tachometer ................................................................ 151

Rotating Pie and Ring Charts ........................................................................................ 152

Deactivating the Color Change for a Pie or Ring........................................................... 153

Changing the Ring Width ............................................................................................... 154

Changing the Depth of 3D Charts.................................................................................. 155

Formatting Walls and Floors .......................................................................................... 156

Changing Quadrants ...................................................................................................... 157

Showing and Hiding Drop Lines..................................................................................... 158

Formatting Data Points .................................................................................................. 159

Changing the Distance between Groups of Data Points ............................................... 160

Changing the Overlapping of Data Points...................................................................... 161

Titles, Data Labels and Legends ....................................................................................... 162

Adding and Removing Chart Titles ................................................................................ 163

Adding and Removing Axis Titles and Units .................................................................. 164

Formatting Chart Titles, Axis Titles and Units................................................................ 165

Adding Data Labels........................................................................................................ 166

Formatting Data Labels.................................................................................................. 168

Removing Data Labels................................................................................................... 169

Changing Texts of Titles, Units and Data Labels........................................................... 170

Adding and Removing Legends..................................................................................... 171

Formatting Legend Texts and Symbols ......................................................................... 172

Formatting the Legend Background............................................................................... 173

Data Tables ....................................................................................................................... 174

Showing and Hiding Data Tables................................................................................... 175

Formatting Data Tables.................................................................................................. 176

Changing the Page Layout ................................................................................................ 177

Printing Charts ................................................................................................................... 179

Dropdown Boxes....................................................................................................................... 180

Radio Button Groups ................................................................................................................ 182

Checkboxes .............................................................................................................................. 184

Generic Navigation Block.......................................................................................................... 186

Hierarchical Context Menu........................................................................................................ 188

Filters ........................................................................................................................................ 189

Label ......................................................................................................................................... 191

Text Elements ........................................................................................................................... 193

List of Exceptions...................................................................................................................... 195



List of Conditions ...................................................................................................................... 196

Alert Monitor.............................................................................................................................. 197

Role Menu................................................................................................................................. 199

Tickers ...................................................................................................................................... 201

Maps ......................................................................................................................................... 202

Map Attributes ....................................................................................................................... 204

Array Attributes .................................................................................................................. 216

Map Renderer.................................................................................................................... 218

Single Documents..................................................................................................................... 220

List of Documents ..................................................................................................................... 221

Web Templates ............................................................................................................................ 223

Object Tags............................................................................................................................... 225

Object Tag for the Properties of Web Templates.................................................................. 226

Object Tag for Data Provider................................................................................................. 227

Object Tag for Web Items ..................................................................................................... 228

Command URLs ....................................................................................................................... 229

Calling up a Web Template................................................................................................... 230

Calling Parameterized Web Templates ............................................................................. 235

Switching Web Templates..................................................................................................... 236

Personalizing the Web Template .......................................................................................... 237

Removing Personalization..................................................................................................... 238

Creating Bookmarks.............................................................................................................. 239

Changing Icon Directory........................................................................................................ 240

Releasing a Web Template................................................................................................... 241

Calling up the Variables Screen............................................................................................ 242

Default Variables for Web Applications................................................................................. 243

Changing the Values of Variables......................................................................................... 247

Adjusting and Enhancing the Context Menu......................................................................... 248

Modifying the Context Menu.............................................................................................. 249

Enhancing the Context Menu ............................................................................................ 254

Command Sequences........................................................................................................... 257

Using Forms.............................................................................................................................. 258

Language-Dependent Texts ..................................................................................................... 260

Data Provider................................................................................................................................ 261

Saved Query Views ...................................................................................................................... 263

Properties of Query Views ........................................................................................................ 265

Calling Dialog Query Properties ............................................................................................... 267

Back, Forwards, and Back to Start ........................................................................................... 268

Filtering ..................................................................................................................................... 269

Removing Filters ....................................................................................................................... 272

Calling Value Help .................................................................................................................... 273



Drilldown ................................................................................................................................... 274

Remove Drilldown..................................................................................................................... 275

Switching Characteristics/Structures ........................................................................................ 276

Swapping Axes ......................................................................................................................... 277

Setting the Navigational State................................................................................................... 278

Sort............................................................................................................................................ 280

Setting Properties of Display Attributes .................................................................................... 282

Results Row Position ................................................................................................................ 283

Suppression of Result Rows..................................................................................................... 284

Define Display........................................................................................................................... 285

Calling Dialog Characteristic Properties ................................................................................... 286

Currency Translation................................................................................................................. 287

Calling a Dialog for Currency Translation ................................................................................. 288

Defining and Changing Exceptions........................................................................................... 289

Calling a Dialog for Defining Exceptions................................................................................... 291

Setting the Status of an Exception............................................................................................ 292

Creating and Changing Conditions........................................................................................... 293

Calling a Dialog for Defining Conditions ................................................................................... 295

Setting the Status of a Condition .............................................................................................. 296

Displaying Documents .............................................................................................................. 297

Saving the Query View ............................................................................................................. 298

Properties of Value Cells .......................................................................................................... 299

Calling a Dialog for Cell Properties........................................................................................... 300

List Calculation.......................................................................................................................... 301

Operations for Display Hierarchies ........................................................................................... 303

Goto using Report/Report Interface.......................................................................................... 306

Exporting Data .......................................................................................................................... 307

BW Stylesheets ............................................................................................................................ 308

Use of JavaScript Functions......................................................................................................... 312

Sending Instructions ................................................................................................................. 313

Execute URL in the Same Window....................................................................................... 314

Executing an URL in a New Window .................................................................................... 315

URL from a New Window in the Opening Window................................................................ 316

Closing Windows................................................................................................................... 317

Executing a Form in a New Window ..................................................................................... 318

Executing a Form in the Opening Window............................................................................ 319

Enhancing the Context Menu with JavaScript .......................................................................... 320

Adding a Menu Entry using JavaScript ................................................................................. 321

Command Processing ........................................................................................................... 323

Logon Language ....................................................................................................................... 326

Web Design API for Tables .......................................................................................................... 327



Table Interface .......................................................................................................................... 328

Attributes ............................................................................................................................... 329

Datasets............................................................................................................................. 331

AXIS_INFO .................................................................................................................... 332

AXIS_DATA ................................................................................................................... 334

CELL_DATA................................................................................................................... 336

TXT_SYMBOLS............................................................................................................. 338

Events.................................................................................................................................... 339

Manipulating Cell Contents ................................................................................................... 340

Headers ............................................................................................................................. 342

Scaling Factors .................................................................................................................. 343

Characteristic Values......................................................................................................... 344

Attribute Values ................................................................................................................. 346

Structural Components ...................................................................................................... 347

Data Cells .......................................................................................................................... 348

Error Cells .......................................................................................................................... 349

Labeling Area of the Navigation Block .............................................................................. 350

Filter Area of the Navigation Block .................................................................................... 352

Service Methods.................................................................................................................... 354

Analysis & Reporting: BEx Web Applications .................................................................................. 356

Navigation Functions in Web Applications ................................................................................... 357

Selecting and Changing Filter Values....................................................................................... 360

Translating Currencies.............................................................................................................. 362

Changing Characteristic Properties .......................................................................................... 363

Changing Key Figure Properties............................................................................................... 365

Changing Query Properties ...................................................................................................... 366

Defining and Changing Exceptions........................................................................................... 368

Defining and Changing Conditions ........................................................................................... 370

Using Variables in Web Applications............................................................................................ 372

Variable Screens....................................................................................................................... 373

Personalizing Variables ............................................................................................................ 375

Using Documents in Web Applications ........................................................................................ 377

Creating New Documents ......................................................................................................... 378

Navigating in Maps ....................................................................................................................... 379

Example of Interaction in Maps ................................................................................................ 380

BEx Mobile Intelligence.................................................................................................................... 381

Creating Mobile Applications........................................................................................................ 383

Supported Web Items ............................................................................................................... 384

Alert Scenario ............................................................................................................................... 386

Offline Scenario ............................................................................................................................ 387

Analysis & Reporting: BEx Analyzer ................................................................................................ 388



BEx Toolbar Functions ................................................................................................................. 390

Opening..................................................................................................................................... 394

Saving ....................................................................................................................................... 395

Refreshing Queries ................................................................................................................... 396

Changing Queries ..................................................................................................................... 397

Goto .......................................................................................................................................... 399

OLAP Functions for Active Cells............................................................................................... 401

Formatting ................................................................................................................................. 408

Layout ....................................................................................................................................... 410

Tools ......................................................................................................................................... 412

Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 414

Evaluating Query Data ................................................................................................................. 416

Navigation and Navigation Functions ....................................................................................... 417

Exception Reporting.................................................................................................................. 420

Defining Exceptions............................................................................................................... 422

Conditions/Exceptions: Inserting, Changing, Deleting Rows ............................................ 426

Displaying Exceptions: Alert Monitor..................................................................................... 427

Conditions ................................................................................................................................. 429

Defining Conditions ............................................................................................................... 431

Using Conditions ................................................................................................................... 434

Selecting Filter Values .............................................................................................................. 436

Filter Values: Formulating Selection Conditions ................................................................... 439

BEx Map.................................................................................................................................... 441

Geographical Data Analysis with BEx Map........................................................................... 443

Analyzing Data Geographically Using the BEx Map ......................................................... 445

Saving Query Variants .............................................................................................................. 449

Query Properties....................................................................................................................... 450

Working with Hierarchies .......................................................................................................... 453

Translating Currencies.............................................................................................................. 455

Information Functions ............................................................................................................... 456

Queries in Workbooks .................................................................................................................. 458

Cell Areas of a Query................................................................................................................ 459

Creating Workbook Templates ................................................................................................. 461

Removing Queries from Workbooks......................................................................................... 462

Detaching Queries .................................................................................................................... 463

Positioning Query Cell Areas.................................................................................................... 464

Displaying Text Elements ......................................................................................................... 466

Background Information on Excel Functions ............................................................................ 468

Sheet Protection ....................................................................................................................... 470

Integration with Visual Basic for Applications ........................................................................... 471

Formatted Reporting: Crystal Reports Integration ........................................................................... 476



Organizing: BEx Browser ................................................................................................................. 482

Selecting and Opening Documents.............................................................................................. 484

Working with the Business Explorer Browser............................................................................... 485

BEx Browser: Administration ........................................................................................................ 487

Creating Logos and Folder Symbols ........................................................................................ 488

Business Explorer Browser on the Web....................................................................................... 490

Step-By-Step Instructions ................................................................................................................ 491



%XVLQHVV�([SORUHU

3XUSRVH

The Business Explorer is the SAP Business Information Warehouse component that provides flexiblereporting and analysis tools for strategic analyses and decision-making support within a company.These tools include query, reporting and OLAP functions. As an employee with authorization for theBusiness Explorer, you can evaluate old and current data to varying levels of detail and from differentperspectives on the Web and also in MS Excel.

The Business Explorer allows a large spectrum of users access to the information in SAP BW. Usingthe Enterprise Portal (for example, through an iView, which you can call up alongside the applicationsfrom which you extracted data), using the internet (Web Application Design) or using mobile devices(WAP-enabled mobile telephones, Personal Digital Assistants).

,QWHJUDWLRQ

The following graphic illustrates the integration of the Business Explorer as an analysis and reportingcomponent within the Business Information Warehouse:

)XQFWLRQV

The following overview shows the functional areas of the Business Explorer:



,

%XVLQHVV�([SORUHU

•Query design usingthe Desktop or Web•Multi-dimensional(OLAP) analyses(MS Excel or Web-based)•Geographicalanalyses•Ad-hoc reporting•Alerts•Publishing iViews•Seamlessintegration of Web-and MS Excel-basedanalyses

�� !� "��#��

$ #��"��%&�'��(�� )+*, ��-�"��"

./��0*,'�'��1�� 2��"��

3��45��)%&�'�� 6 ��5�� 1��

798;:!<>=@?A:2B9CEDGF>HJIKF9=58&=5L�MON79FEFOC�M

PQ82RTSVU9=V:;LA?AF>=OMXWSVU9=V:9L�?AFO=EB;C!Y[Z�8!B!M

•Layouts exact toone pixel•Wizard-basedlayout definition•Static, formattedreports•Form-basedreports•Pre-definedCrystal Reportsin BusinessContent•Publishing onthe Web•Convenientprinting options

•Online andoffline scenarios•WAP device andPDA support•Automatic devicerecognition•Publishing usingthe WebApplicationDesigner•Device-specificoutput•Alerts, charts•Integration intothe mobile portal

•Web ApplicationDesign•Interactive analyticalContent on das Web•Information cockpitsand dashboards•Basis for creatinganalytical applications•Creation of iViewsfor the portal•Wizard-basedvisualisation APIs foradditional, highlyindividual Web design

•Single point-of-access

•Role-based dataretrieval

•Personalization ,collaboration,profile generation

•Integration ofunstructured data

4XHULHV��5HSRUWLQJ�DQG�$QDO\VLV

The Business Information Warehouse database is structured into self-contained business data areas(InfoProviders). You analyze the dataset of the Business Information Warehouse by defining queriesfor InfoProviders in the BEx Query Designer [Seite 15]. By selecting and combining InfoObjects(characteristics and key figures) or reusable structures in a query, you determine the way in which younavigate through and evaluate the data in the selected InfoProvider.

Multi-dimensional data sources (OLAP reporting) make it possible to analyze data on severaldimensions at the same time (such as, time, location, product). You can carrying out any number ofvariant analyses (for example, plan-actual comparison, fiscal year comparison). The data, displayed inthe form of a pivot table, serves as the start point for a detailed analysis to answer a variety ofquestions. A large number of interaction options, such as sorting, filtering, swapping characteristics orrecalculating values allow flexible navigation through data. You can also display data in graphics (forexample, bar charts or pie charts). In addition, you can evaluate geographical data (for example,characteristics such as customer, sales region, country) on a map. Furthermore, using exceptionreporting, you can establish those objects that deviate from the norm or are critical, send messagesautomatically (through background processing in the Reporting Agent) by email or SMS regardingvalues that deviate from the norm or calculate the values at a glance in an alert monitor.

In the Business Information Warehouse, you can analyze data in the following areas of the BusinessExplorer:

• In the BEx Analyzer [Seite 388] (MS Excel-based) in the form of queries

• In BEx Web applications [Seite 356]

Integration of the two areas is seamless. You can display queries from the BEx Analyzer with one clickin a standard view in the Web browser. Similarly, you can export a Web application to MS Excel 2000.

:HE�$SSOLFDWLRQ�'HVLJQ

Web application design allows you to use the generic OLAP navigation in Web applications, as well asbusiness intelligence cockpit, for simple or highly individual scenarios. You can implement highlyindividual scenarios with customer-defined interface elements by using standard markup languagesand Web design APIs. Web application design incorporates a broad spectrum of Web-based businessintelligence scenarios, which you can adjust to meet your individual needs using standard Webtechnologies.

Using the BEx Web Application Designer [Seite 67], the desktop application for creating Webapplications, you can create HTML pages that have BW-specific contents such as tables, charts or



maps. You can save Web applications as URLs and access them through the intranet or throughmobile devices. You can also save Web applications as iViews and integrate them into an enterpriseportal.

The Web application wizard is an assistant that is integrated into the Web Application Designer. Youcan use this to help you create Web applications on the basis of an automatic, step-by-step sequenceand to simplify design activities.

)RUPDWWHG�5HSRUWLQJ

The integration of Crystal Reports into BW enhances the functional area of the Business Explorer.With Crystal Reports, you can now create formatted reports. When you create formatted reports, it isimportant that you can specify the layout design precisely (to one pixel) and also have convenient printoptions.

See Formatted Reporting: Crystal Reports Integration [Seite 476]

0RELOH�,QWHOOLJHQFH

With BEx Mobile Intelligence, you can call up Web applications, which you created with the WebApplication Designer, on the move. BEx Mobile Intelligence supports the following devices:

• WAP-enabled mobile telephones

• PDA (Personal Digital Assistant) with Microsoft Windows CE 3.0 Operating System andPocket Internet Explorer

The BW 3.0 Web Application Server automatically recognizes what kind of mobile device is beingused to call up the mobile application (WAP device or PDA). In the case of PDAs, you can call up yourmobile applications either online, or use them offline in the form of static, precalculated HTML pages.The preliminary calculation takes places with the help of the Reporting Agent. An additional feature ofMobile Intelligence is that you can send a message using SMS to a mobile terminal as soon as adefined exception occurs in the mobile application.

See BEx Mobile Intelligence [Seite 381]



4XHU\�'HVLJQ��%([�4XHU\�'HVLJQHU

8VH

You analyze the dataset of the Business Information Warehouse by defining queries for InfoProvidersin the BEx Query Designer. By selecting and combining InfoObjects (characteristics and key figures)or reusable structures in a query, you determine the way in which you navigate through and evaluatethe data in the selected InfoProvider.

,QWHJUDWLRQ

You can call up the BEx Query Designer from the following components:

• BEx Analyzer

• BEx Web Publisher

• Crystal Reports

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The Business Information Warehouse must contain at least one InfoProvider.

)XQFWLRQV

The BEx Query Designer contains the following functions:

• You can use the queries that you define in the query designer for OLAP reporting and also fortabular reporting. For further information, see Tabular Query Display [Seite 56]

• You can parameterize the queries by defining variables for characteristic values, hierarchies,hierarchy nodes, texts or formulas.

• You can select InfoObjects more precisely by:

• Restricting characteristics and key figures by characteristic values, characteristic valueintervals and hierarchy nodes.

• Defining reusable calculated and restricted key figures.

• Defining reusable structures [Seite 58]

• Defining exceptions [Seite 422]

• Defining conditions [Seite 431]

• Defining exception cells [Seite 40]

The significant components of the query definition are the filter and navigation components:

• The selections in the ILOWHU have a limiting effect on the whole query. With the filter definition, youselect certain characteristic values or key figures that are to be reported on. All of the InfoProviderdata is aggregated using the filter selection of the query. You cannot change the filter selection inthe navigation.

• For the QDYLJDWLRQ, you select user-defined characteristics and determine the content of the rowsand columns of the query. You use this selection to determine the data areas of the InfoProviderover which you want to navigate. The way in which the contents of the rows and columns arearranged, determines the default view of the query and with it, the rows and columns axis in theresults area.

After it is inserted into the Web browser, a query is displayed in the predefined initial view. Bynavigating through the query, you can generate different views of the InfoProvider data, bydragging one of the user-defined characteristics into the rows or columns of the query, forexample, or filtering a characteristic according to a single characteristic value.

With the definition of a query, you can evaluate the InfoProvider data specifically and quickly. Themore precisely the query is defined, the quicker its execution and navigation.



You define the queries by:

• Selecting an InfoProvider for which the query is defined

• Selecting reusable structures that already contain characteristic or key figure combinations (forexample, contribution margin schema)

• Selecting characteristics from the InfoProvider

• Restricting selected characteristics to characteristic values, characteristic value intervals orhierarchy nodes

• Defining and using variables for characteristic values, formulas and texts

• Selecting key figures from the InfoProvider

• Formulating calculated key figures

• Restricting key figures by combining them with characteristics

• Defining exception cells

• Arranging the characteristics and key figures in rows or columns and thereby establishing an initialview for the query analysis.



)XQFWLRQV�RI�WKH�%([�4XHU\�'HVLJQHU

8VH

This section contains an overview of the functions available in the BEx Query Designer.

)XQFWLRQV

3URFHHG�DV�IROORZV�WR�FUHDWH�D�TXHU\�

• By FOLFNLQJ�on the plus or minus symbol of the directories you can expand or compress thedirectories. You can, for example, display the list of all of the key figures in the InfoProvider byexpanding the key figure node in the InfoProvider tree.

• Using GUDJ�DQG�GURS� you can drag characteristics and key figures from the InfoProvider into thedirectories of the Query Designer (ILOWHU��URZV��FROXPQV��IUHH�FKDUDFWHULVWLFV).

• Using the ULJKW�PRXVH�EXWWRQ you call up all the functions that are available in the current contextmenu. First, select the query component you want to work with (for example, a characteristic) andthen, using the right mouse button, select a menu entry (for example, 3URSHUWLHV) from the contextmenu.

• By GRXEOH�FOLFNLQJ�on an item of the Query Designer, you call up a dialog box containing afunction that is executed by default on this item. If, for example, you double-click on acharacteristic, the dialog box for restricting the characteristic appears. If you double-click on acalculated key figure, for example, then the &DOFXODWHG�.H\�)LJXUH dialog box, in which you canmake changes, appears.

The standard functions for an element in the Query Designer are shown in the contextmenu in bold type.

7RROEDU�)XQFWLRQV

��

��

� �� ! ��#"��%$&��'

( �*)+��

,��-��

./�10��2�

./�10��2��34��56565

� ��1�7��

��8 ��*�#� !

9 ! ��#� !

� ��:;�<��=9>��<��5<565

��? � ! ��2�#��1�

9@"�� 8�A��

��$B"��7��C7 ��D��*�

� ��

⇔9@"��E��

F � 8 "�� 8 ��( �G=�

9 ! ��7� � ��H%��

I ��<�

F ��'��

9@"��E��JLK � ! '�� :;�6��#� ! �M

� �4XLW�DQG�8VH�4XHU\

Click on this symbol to leave the Query Designer and use the query that you have defined. The formatin which the query is used depends on which tool you called the Query Designer from.



%([�:HE�$SSOLFDWLRQ�'HVLJQHU:

You called the Query Designer from the Web Application Designer using the path 7RROV�→ �4XHU\'HVLJQHU�and from there you defined or changed a query and saved it. If you now choose 4XLW�DQG8VH�4XHU\��the Query Designer session ends and you are able to use the defined query as a dataprovider.

6HH�DOVR�

Creating Web Applications with the BEx Web Application Designer [Seite 69]

%([�$QDO\]HU:

If you have created or changed the query, you can insert it into a workbook to enable you to navigatein and analyze the query data.

The query is saved only locally in the workbook. If you want the query to be generally (publicly)available in the Business Information Warehouse you must save it using the function 6DYH or 6DYHDV..�.and give it a unique technical name.

6HH�DOVR�

Evaluating Query Data [Seite 416]

&U\VWDO�5HSRUWV:

You called the Query Designer from Crystal Reports and defined or changed a query (in table display)and saved it. You can now use the query as a data source for a formatted report in the Crystal ReportsDesigner

� �([LW�4XHU\

Choose ([LW�4XHU\�if you want to leave the Query Designer. Your entries will not be saved.

� �'LVSOD\�4XHU\�RQ�WKH�:HE

When you have defined and saved your query, you can display it directly on the Web in a standardview. The query is embedded automatically into a standard Web template.

You determine the standard Web template in the 6$3�5HIHUHQFH�,0*�→ %XVLQHVV�,QIRUPDWLRQ:DUHKRXVH�→�6HWWLQJV�5HOHYDQW�IRU�5HSRUWLQJ�→�:HE�%DVHG�6HWWLQJV�→�'HWHUPLQH�6WDQGDUG:HE�7HPSODWH�

� �1HZ�4XHU\

If you want to create a query, select the symbol for 1HZ�4XHU\. You reach the BEx Open dialog whereyou choose the InfoProvider whose data you want to use as the basis for your query. You can selectthe InfoProvider either from the InfoProviders in your history or from the list of all availableInfoProviders under ,QIR$UHDV�

6HH�DOVR�

Defining New Queries [Seite 22]

� �2SHQ�4XHU\

Choose 2SHQ�4XHU\ to get to the BEx Open dialog. Here, all existing queries are available in yourhistory, favorites, roles or listed according to InfoArea. In InfoAreas, you get a list of all existing queriesin the Business Information Warehouse for which you have display authorization.

� �6DYLQJ�4XHULHV

If you want to save a query, enter a new technical name,�and a GHVFULSWLRQ for the name of the query.You can save the query in your IDYRULWHV or UROHV. The query is saved in the list of queries in theBusiness Information Warehouse, and can be opened using 2SHQ�4XHU\ .



6HH�DOVR�

Saving Queries [Seite 53]

� �6DYH�4XHU\�$V��

If you have changed a query, and want to save it under a new technical name or under the name of anexisting query, select 6DYH�TXHU\�DV��. Enter the new technical name. You can save the query in yourIDYRULWHV or UROHV.

6HH�DOVR�


� �'HOHWH�4XHU\

Select 'HOHWH�4XHU\, if you want to delete a query. You can only delete the query if it is no longerbeing used (that is, if it is not used in any workbook, Web template, Crystal Report or Reporting Agentsetting).

� �([FHSWLRQ

You can define exceptions for a query. Exceptions are variations in key figure values that you defineyourself. They are displayed in a different color in the query view. This allows you to see at a glance,any unusual deviations from the results you expect to get.

Under the small arrow next to the exception symbol , you can:

• Change exceptions

• Define new exceptions

6HH�DOVR�

Exception Reporting [Seite 420]

� �&RQGLWLRQ

Choose &RQGLWLRQ, if you want to define conditions for a query. You can specify threshold valueconditions for the key figure values in every characteristic. For example, you can specify all salesfigures under or above a certain threshold value. In the query, the selected characteristics aredisplayed with the restricted key figures.

Under the small arrow next to the condition symbol , you can:

• Changing conditions

• Define new conditions

6HH�DOVR�

Conditions [Seite 429]

� �'HILQLQJ�&HOOV��

You can define formulas and selection conditions explicitly for cells in queries with two structures. Inthis way you can override the cell values that are created implicitly from the intersection of thestructure components. This function allows you to design much more detailed queries.

'HILQLQJ�&HOOV�� is only available for queries with two structures. For queries with only onestructure, the symbol is deactivated.

6HH�DOVR�

Defining Exception Cells [Seite 40]



� �4XHU\�3URSHUWLHV

Choose 4XHU\�3URSHUWLHV, if you want to change the description of the query, or you want to makesettings for the 5HVXOWV�3RVLWLRQ, 'LVSOD\�2SWLRQV��1XPEHU�'LVSOD\�and 6XSSUHVVLRQ�RI�=HURHV for thequery. In the query properties, you can also set 5HOHDVH�IRU�2/(�'%�IRU�2/$3. You can also reachany available documents about the objects used in the query from here.

6HH�DOVR�

Query Properties [Seite 54]

� �&KHFN�4XHU\

If you have saved a new or changed query, you can check the query definition for errors using thisfunction.

� �4XHU\�:KHUH�8VHG�/LVW

With the 4XHU\�:KHUH�8VHG�/LVW, you can see the objects (workbooks, Web templates, CrystalReports or Reporting Agent settings) in which the query is used.

� �4XHU\�'LVSOD\��!�&KDQJH

Using this function you can toggle between the display and change mode.

6HH�DOVR�

Displaying and Changing Existing Queries in the Query Designer [Seite 57]

�&KDQJH�4XHU\��*OREDO�'HILQLWLRQ�

Choose the function &KDQJH�4XHU\��*OREDO�'HILQLWLRQ�, if you are currently in the local query definition,and want to change to the global definition.

� �7DEOH�'LVSOD\

You can design a query for OLAP reporting and also for tabular reporting by activating or deactivatingthe 7DEOH�'LVSOD\ mode when you define a query.

6HH�DOVR�

Tabular Query Display [Seite 56]

� �7HFKQLFDO�1DPH

You can show or hide the technical names of the query components (InfoObjects, structures,variables, and so on) using this function.

� �&RQWH[W�0HQX

The &RQWH[W�0HQX function allows you to display the context menu without using the right mousebutton (for example, using a touch screen). Select a directory from the InfoProvider tree or the querydefinition, and choose the &RQWH[W�0HQX function. The context menu for the item you highlightedappears.

� �+HOS

Choose +HOS to go to the Business Information Warehouse online documentation. The 4XHU\�'HVLJQ�%([�4XHU\�'HVLJQHU�section in the documentation for the Business Explorer is displayed automaticallythere.

Using the small arrow next to the help symbol under the entry $ERXW��you can see the versionof the Query Designer with the number of the support package and the revision. You can give thisinformation to SAP in any problem messages.



'HILQLQJ�1HZ�4XHULHV

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The Business Information Warehouse must contain at least one InfoProvider.

You have called up the Query Designer from the BEx Web Application Designer, from the BExAnalyzer or from Crystal Reports:

%([�:HE�$SSOLFDWLRQ�'HVLJQHU:

In the Web Application Designer, you chose 7RROV�→ 4XHU\�'HVLJQHU�and chose 1HZ�4XHU\� fromthe Query Designer toolbar.

%([�$QDO\]HU:

In the BEx toolbar, you chose 2SHQ�→ 4XHULHV�and then, in the BEx Open dialog, you chose 1HZ� .

&U\VWDO�5HSRUWV:

You called up the Query Designer and chose 1HZ�4XHU\� from the Query Designer toolbar.

You get to the InfoProvider selection in the Query Designer automatically in the tabledisplay. The procedure for defining a query is aligned with the procedure for defining aquery in OLAP reporting. Therefore, note the differences for the table display [Seite 56]when you are defining a query for use in formatted reporting with Crystal Reports.

3URFHGXUH

You get to the selection screen for all InfoProviders for which you can define a new query.

1. From your history, or from all available InfoProviders under InfoAreas, select the InfoProviderwhose data you want to base your query on.

If you want to show the technical name of the InfoProvider, choose the symbol 7HFKQLFDO1DPH�2Q�2II.

2. The available objects in the ,QIR3URYLGHU you selected are displayed as a directory tree in the leftpart of the Query Designer.

The right-hand area contains empty directories for the filter selection, the rows, the columnsand the free characteristics of the query. The preview of the results area for the query can befound in the lower right area of the screen. This area is also still empty.

Proceed as follows to create a query:

• &OLFN�on the plus or minus symbol of the directories you can expand or compress thedirectories. You can, for example, display the list of all of the key figures in theInfoProvider by expanding the key figure node in the InfoProvider tree.

• Drag characteristics and key figures using GUDJ�DQG�GURS from the InfoProvider into thedirectories of the Query Designer (ILOWHU��URZV��FROXPQV��IUHH�FKDUDFWHULVWLFV).

• Call up all the functions that are available in the current context menu using the ULJKWPRXVH�EXWWRQ. First, select the query component you want to work with (for example, acharacteristic) and then, using the right mouse button, select a menu entry (for example,3URSHUWLHV) from the context menu.

• 'RXEOH�FOLFN�on a query component to call up a dialog box containing a function that isexecuted by default on this query component. If, for example, you double-click on acharacteristic, the dialog box for restricting the characteristic appears. If you double-clickon a calculated key figure, for example, then the &DOFXODWHG�.H\�)LJXUH dialog box, inwhich you can make changes, appears.



The standard functions for an element in the Query Designer are shown in the contextmenu in bold type.

3. Make the selections for the ILOWHU of the query. Note that the filter selection has a restricting effecton the entire query, meaning that all of the InfoProvider data is aggregated with the filter selection.Select the characteristics or the key figure upon which the query should be based from thedirectory tree of the InfoProvider.

− &KDUDFWHULVWLFV

Expand the required dimension directory and first select one or more characteristics of theInfoProvider that you wish to restrict to one or more values, a variable, a value interval ora hierarchy node. Expand this characteristic and, using drag-and-drop, put a single valuein the filter of the Query Designer. Or drag the characteristic into the )LOWHU area of theQuery Designer. Using the right mouse button, select 5HVWULFW from the context menu. Nowselect a characteristic value interval or a hierarchy node (6HH�DOVR� RestrictingCharacteristics [Seite 25]).

− .H\�)LJXUHV

Decide whether all of the query data refers to the number values of a key figure orwhether the query is to be based on several key figures. If the query refers to the numbervalues of RQH�NH\�ILJXUH, select the corresponding key figure from the InfoProvider treeand drag it to the )LOWHU area of the query definition using drag-and-drop. You can also usea restricted or calculated key figure (VHH�DOVR� Restricting Key Figures [Seite 31] andCalculating Key Figures [Seite 32]).

4. Determine which characteristics, key figures or structures you want to use for QDYLJDWLQJ�in�thequery data. Using drag-and-drop, either drag the corresponding directories of the characteristicsfrom the InfoProvider tree to the directories 5RZV��&ROXPQV or )UHH�&KDUDFWHULVWLFV in the right-hand screen area of the Query Designer or drag the structure directories into the rows or columns.

If you have not selected any key figures for the filter, then define one or more NH\�ILJXUHVeither in the rows or columns of the query. From the .H\�)LJXUHV directory of the InfoProvidertree, drag a key figure into a directory of the Query Designer using drag-and-drop (either 5RZor &ROXPQ). The key figure is stored in the new directory .H\�)LJXUH.

You can also define a QHZ�FDOFXODWHG�NH\�ILJXUH and use it for the query. For example,instead of “Sales revenue”, define the key figure “Price” that is calculated using “Salesrevenue” divided by “Quantity”. Highlight the .H\�)LJXUHV directory in the InfoProvider tree andchoose 1HZ�&DOFXODWHG�.H\�)LJXUH from the context menu (right mouse click).

You can UHVWULFW�NH\�ILJXUHV to characteristic values, characteristic value intervals orhierarchy nodes by highlighting the key figure and choosing (GLW from the context menu (rightmouse click). A restricted key figure would be “Sales revenue in 1st quarter”, for example.

By placing the characteristics, key figures or structures either in the rows or columns directoryof the Query Designer, you configure the first QDYLJDWLRQDO�VWDWH of the query (start view). Inthe lower right area you can see a preview of the results area of the query in the start viewthat you selected.

You can change the arrangement of the key figures and characteristics in the rows andcolumns using drag-and-drop until the preview shows the results area you want.

5. When you have created the query, you can check the query definition by choosing &KHFN�4XHU\ from the toolbar.

6. Select the symbol for 4XHU\�3URSHUWLHV from the toolbar if you want to change the 'HVFULSWLRQ�settings for 5HVXOW�3RVLWLRQ, 'LVSOD\�2SWLRQV and 1XPEHU�'LVSOD\, or .H\�'DWH for the query. Seealso Query Properties [Seite 54].

7. Save the query. Enter a 7HFKQLFDO�1DPH�and a 'HVFULSWLRQ for naming the query. The 7HFKQLFDO1DPH must uniquely identify the query, meaning that the name is only allowed to appear once



across all InfoProviders of the Business Information Warehouse. The technical name can be up to30 characters long and must begin with a letter.

5HVXOW

The query has been saved and you can now:

• Add the query to a workbook in the BEx Analyzer: Choose 4XLW�DQG�8VH�4XHU\

• Display the query in the Web browser in a standard view: Choose 'LVSOD\�4XHU\�RQ�WKH�:HE�

• Use the query in the Web Application Designer as a data provider for Web items.

• Use the query in the table display in Crystal Reports as a data source for formatted reports

You can analyze the query data in the Business Explorer.

6HH�DOVR�

Creating Reusable Structures [Seite 58]


Properties of the Query Components [Seite 55]

Functions of the BEx Query Designer [Seite 17]


Authorizations for the Query Definition [Extern]



5HVWULFWLQJ�&KDUDFWHULVWLFV

8VH

When defining a query, you can restrict characteristics to single characteristic values, value ranges,hierarchy nodes or characteristic value variables.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You want to restrict a characteristic to one or more values in the query definition or when defining arestricted key figure. You have selected the characteristic and chosen 5HVWULFW from the context menu(right mouse click).

3URFHGXUH

When you select characteristics in the query definition, you can use the same functions as the F4 Helpin the executed query. Select the )L[HG�YDOXH�tabstrip and follow the notes in Selecting Filter Values[Seite 436].

The following functions are the same:

Note that here, all values are displayed that are available in the master data table, thatmeans, all values, for which there are data records in the InfoProvider. No restriction iscarried out on values with display authorization.

• 6HOHFWLQJ�VLQJOH�YDOXHV

• 6HOHFWLQJ�YDOXH�UDQJHV

• 6HOHFWLQJ�KLHUDUFK\�QRGHV

• 6HDUFKLQJ�IRU�YDOXHV

• 'HOHWLQJ�YDOXHV�IURP�WKH�VHOHFWLRQ�ZLQGRZ

• ([FOXGLQJ�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�YDOXHV

• 'LVSOD\LQJ�YDOXH�NH\V

You can choose from the following additional functions in the query definition:

6HOHFWLQJ�YDULDEOHV

When you select characteristic values in the query definition, you can also select variables instead offixed values. These act as benchmarks and are only filled with fixed values when the query isexecuted.

6HOHFWLQJ�VLQJOH�YDOXH�YDULDEOHV

1. Choose VLQJOH�YDOXH in the top left area of the selection field and �IODW�OLVW��as hierarchy.

2. Select the 9DULDEOHV�tabstrip.

3. Select one (or, in exceptional cases, more than one) variable from the list of available variablesdisplayed in the left-hand window, and drag the variable(s) into the 6HOHFWLRQ box on the right(alternatively, use the pushbutton with the arrow pointing to the right to move the values).

6HOHFWLQJ�YDOXH�UDQJH�OLPLWV

1. Choose YDOXH�UDQJH from the top left of the selection field, and the operator that you want to use(top right).


3. If you have chosen the operator EHWZHHQ, first select both the upper and lower interval limits fromthe list of available variables displayed in the left-hand window and drag them using drag and drop



(or using the arrow pointing to the right) in the 6HOHFWLRQ window on the right-hand side of thescreen.

If you choose one of the operators LV�JUHDWHU�WKDQ�RU�HTXDO�WR, LV�OHVV�WKDQ�RU�HTXDO�WR, LVJUHDWHU�WKDQ� or LV�OHVV�WKDQ, select a value from the list of available variables in the left-handwindow, drag it across, and drop it into the 6HOHFWLRQ window on the right (alternatively use thebutton with the arrow pointing to the right to move the variable across into the 6HOHFWLRQwindow).

6HOHFWLQJ�LQWHUYDOV�ZLWK�YDULDEOHV�DQG�D�IL[HG�OLPLW

1. In the top left corner of the selection field, choose YDOXH UDQJH�and EHWZHHQ as operator.

2. Select the fixed limit on the tabstrip )L[HG�9DOXHV.

3. Select the variable limit on the tabstrip 9DULDEOHV.

4. Finally, choose the arrow button pointing to the right.

6HOHFWLQJ�LQWHUYDOV�ZKRVH�XSSHU�DQG�ORZHU�OLPLWV�UHIHU�WR�WKH�VDPH�YDULDEOH

1. In the top left corner of the selection field, choose YDOXH UDQJH�and EHWZHHQ as operator.

2. Select the required variable from the 9DULDEOHV tabstrip and drag it into the 6HOHFWLRQ box on theright (or use the arrow icon pointing to the right).

3. Now specify offsets for the upper and lower limits. (see below: 6HOHFWLQJ�YDULDEOH�RIIVHWV)

Please note that you cannot combine other values, hierarchy nodes or variables with avariable of the type 6HOHFWLRQ�RSWLRQ�or 4XHU\�YDULDEOH.

6HOHFWLQJ�YDULDEOH�RIIVHWV

You can only use this function for characteristic value variables of the type VLQJOH�YDOXH.

1. Select the required variable in the right-hand window.

2. Choose YDULDEOH�RIIVHWV�from the context menu (right mouse click)� This brings you to the dialogwindow (QWHULQJ�YDULDEOHV�RIIVHWV.

3. Enter the required offset.

4. Choose 2..

You want to select the period of the last 5 years for evaluating your data.

− In the top left corner of the selection field, choose YDOXH UDQJH�and EHWZHHQ asoperator.

− Select the variable FXUUHQW�FDOHQGDU�\HDU�from the 9DULDEOHV tabstrip and drag it intothe 6HOHFWLRQ box on the right (or use the arrow icon pointing to the right).

− Choose YDULDEOH�RIIVHWV�from the context menu (right mouse click)� The 9DULDEOHV�±2IIVHWV�popup appears for both the upper and lower interval limits.

− For the lower limit, enter the offset 5.

− Do not enter an offset for the upper limit.

− Choose 2..

6HOHFWLQJ�IL[HG�YDULDEOH�KLHUDUFKLHV�KLHUDUFK\�QRGHV

You can also restrict characteristics by hierarchy or hierarchy node, on a fixed or variable basis. SeeRestricting Characteristics: Hierarchies [Seite 28]



'LUHFW�HQWU\

You cannot use this function if you want to restrict the characteristic. You cannot make adirect entry when you are selecting structure elements (for example, key figures) or valuesfrom a hierarchy.

1. In the entry field (bottom left) specify a characteristic value in external format.

Instead of characteristic values in external format, you can also enter variables in the form of&<variable name>& (ampersand (&) at the beginning and at the end of the entry, and withoutblank spaces).

2. Choose the button with the arrow pointing to the right.

The system checks whether this value exists. If the value does not exist, you get a warning.However, you can still use the value in the variable.

Note the following conventions for making entries for value ranges and intervals:

9DOXH�UDQJH: <operator><value>, for example, >= 1995

,QWHUYDOV: <lower limit>�<upper limit>, for example, A01; B99

Interval with a variable limit, for example &VAR&; 2000

5HVXOW

You have now restricted a characteristic by certain characteristic values. Choose 2..�You return tothe query definition. Save your entries and execute the query.

If you have restricted a characteristic to a variable value, before the query is executed, adialog box appears for you to enter variable values manually (provided that the variable isflagged as UHDG\�IRU�LQSXW). Enter the required values and choose 2.. The query is nowexecuted with the chosen values.

The query is created according to your selection conditions. The selected characteristic values aredisplayed in the filter cells, on the right, next to the corresponding characteristic. Only thecharacteristic values you selected are included in the results area.



5HVWULFWLQJ�&KDUDFWHULVWLFV��+LHUDUFKLHV

8VH

In the query definition you can restrict characteristics by hierarchy or hierarchy node, on a fixed orvariable basis.

Choose from the following options:

• )L[HG�KLHUDUFK\�QRGH�±�IL[HG�KLHUDUFK\

Report on department A (fixed hierarchy node) for the hierarchy valid for 1999 (fixedhierarchy)

• 9DULDEOH�KLHUDUFK\�QRGH�±�IL[HG�KLHUDUFK\

Report on chosen department (variable hierarchy node) for the hierarchy valid for 1999(fixed hierarchy)

• )L[HG�KLHUDUFK\�QRGH�±�YDULDEOH�KLHUDUFK\

Report on department A (fixed hierarchy node) for the hierarchy valid for the currentcalendar year (variable hierarchy).

• 9DULDEOH�KLHUDUFK\�QRGH�±�YDULDEOH�KLHUDUFK\

Report on a chosen department (variable hierarchy node) for the hierarchy valid for thecurrent calendar year (variable hierarchy).

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You use this function if hierarchies exist for the characteristic that you want to restrict.

Further information on hierarchies is available in the Hierarchies [Extern] section of the AdministratorWorkbench documentation.

3URFHGXUH

)L[HG�KLHUDUFK\�±�IL[HG�KLHUDUFK\�QRGH

1. In the top left of the selection field, choose 6LQJOH�YDOXHV and the required hierarchy from the topright corner.

2. Select the )L[HG�YDOXHV�tabstrip.

3. In the list of available hierarchy nodes in the left-hand window, navigate to the hierarchy node youwant to use.

4. Select the required hierarchy node and drag it into the 6HOHFWLRQ box on the right (or use the arrowicon pointing to the right). Next to the name of the hierarchy node you see the name of thehierarchy in brackets.

)L[HG�KLHUDUFK\�±�YDULDEOH�KLHUDUFK\�QRGH

1. In the top left of the selection field, choose 6LQJOH�YDOXHV and the required hierarchy from the topright corner.


3. Select the required variable from the list of available variables on the left-hand side.



4. Select the required variable and drag it into the 6HOHFWLRQ box on the right (or use the arrow iconpointing to the right).

9DULDEOH�KLHUDUFK\�±�IL[HG�KLHUDUFK\�QRGH

1. In the top left of the selection field, choose 6LQJOH�YDOXHV and a hierarchy that contains therequired hierarchy node, from the top right corner.

2. Select the )L[HG�YDOXHV�tabstrip.


�� Select the required hierarchy node and drag it into the 6HOHFWLRQ box on the right (or use the arrowicon pointing to the right).

5. Highlight a hierarchy node in the right-hand box and choose 6HOHFW�YDULDEOH�KLHUDUFK\�from thecontext menu (right mouse button). You get to the popup 6HOHFW�YDULDEOH�IRU�KLHUDUFK\.

6. Select a variable hierarchy. See also: Selecting Hierarchies [Seite 30]

7. Choose 2..

9DULDEOH�KLHUDUFK\�±�YDULDEOH�KLHUDUFK\�QRGH

1. In the top left of the selection field, choose 6LQJOH�YDOXHV and a hierarchy that contains therequired hierarchy node, from the top right corner.


3. Select the required variable from the list of available variables on the left-hand side.

4. Select the required variable and drag it into the 6HOHFWLRQ box on the right (or use the arrow iconpointing to the right).

5. Highlight a hierarchy node in the right-hand box and choose 6HOHFW�YDULDEOH�KLHUDUFK\�from thecontext menu (right mouse button). You get to the popup 6HOHFW�YDULDEOH�IRU�KLHUDUFK\.

6. Select a variable hierarchy. See also: Selecting Hierarchies [Seite 30]

7. Choose 2..

5HVXOW

You have restricted a characteristic according to a node within a hierarchy. Choose 2.. You return tothe query definition. Save your entries and execute the query.

If you have restricted a characteristic to a variable hierarchy and/or a hierarchy node,before the query is executed, a dialog box appears for you to enter variable valuesmanually (provided that the variable is flagged as UHDG\�IRU�LQSXW�in the variablemaintenance). Enter the required values and choose 2.. The query can now beexecuted, with the values you have selected to fill the variable.



6HOHFWLQJ�+LHUDUFKLHV

8VH

You select hierarchies at the following stages in the query definition:

• when you select a variable hierarchy for a hierarchy node (see also: Restricting Characteristics:Hierarchies [Seite 28]).

• when you select a display hierarchy for a characteristic (see also: Properties of the QueryElements [Seite 55]).

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You use this function if hierarchies exist for the characteristic that you want to restrict.

Further information on hierarchies is available in the Hierarchies [Extern] section of theAdministrator Workbench documentation.

3URFHGXUH

6HOHFWLQJ�IL[HG�KLHUDUFKLHV

1. Select the required fixed hierarchy from the list of available hierarchies.

2. Choose 2..

You need this function only when you are selecting a fixed display hierarchy for acharacteristic.

6HOHFWLQJ�YDULDEOH�KLHUDUFKLHV

A hierarchy becomes variable if at least one of its elements (name, version, key date)is variable.

1. Select a hierarchy from the list of available hierarchies.

2. Choose the 9DULDEOHV button from the field on the right (name, version, key date) according towhich you want to select for the hierarchy. The selection list now displays the available variables.

3. Select the variable you want to use.

4. Choose 2..

Note that it is possible to fill the fields for version and key date, only if the characteristichas version-dependent or time-dependent hierarchies.



5HVWULFWLQJ�.H\�)LJXUHV

8VH

You can define a query by using drag and drop to drag the key figure of the InfoProvider into theQuery Designer directories .

You can also restrict the key figures of the InfoProvider in the Query Designer. Restricted key figuresare key figures for the InfoProvider that are restricted (filtered) by one or more characteristicselections. The key figures that are restricted by one or more characteristic selections can be basickey figures, calculated key figures or key figures that are already restricted.

3URFHGXUH

1. Drag and drop a key figure into a directory in the Query Designer. Alternatively, select the headerof the directories for 5RZV or &ROXPQV and, using the right mouse button, select 1HZ�6WUXFWXUHfrom the context menu.

2. Select the structure directory, and, using the right mouse button, choose 1HZ�6HOHFWLRQ from thecontext menu. The 1HZ�6HOHFWLRQ screen appears.

The WH[W�ILHOG,�in which you can enter a description of the restricted key figure, is found in theupper part of the screen.

Underneath the text field, on the left, is the directory of all the objects available in theInfoProvider. The field for the definition of the new selection (which is still empty) is on theright-hand side of the screen.

3. Using drag and drop, choose a key figure from the InfoProvider, and restrict it using a selection ofone or more characteristic values.

4. Choose 2.. The newly restricted key figure is defined in the structure.



&DOFXODWLQJ�.H\�)LJXUHV

8VH

You can recalculate the key figures of an InfoProvider in the Query Designer using formulas.Calculated key figures consist of formula definitions in which basic key figures, restricted key figures orkey figures that are already calculated play a role.

3URFHGXUH

1. Create a 1HZ�6WUXFWXUH in the 5RZV or &ROXPQV of the Query Designer by highlighting the row orcolumn directory using the right mouse button and selecting 1HZ�6WUXFWXUH in the context menu.

2. Using drag and drop, drag a (basic) key figure of the InfoProvider into the directory of the newstructure.

3. Select the structure directory, and choose 1HZ�IRUPXOD. The formula definition screen appears.

A text field, in which you enter a description of the formula, is found in the upper part of thescreen.

The HQWU\�ILHOG�IRU�WKH�IRUPXOD is underneath the text fields. In the bottom left of the screenare all of the RSHUDQGV available for the formula definition. These are:

− The structure elements that you have already defined for the structure

− The cells that you have defined as exception cells

− All formula variables

On the right-hand side of the screen, you see the IXQFWLRQV that are available as operators:

− Basic functions

− Percentage functions [Seite 34]

− Data functions [Seite 36]

− Mathematical functions

− Trigonometric functions

− Boolean operators [Seite 38]

Between the operands and the functions are the symbols for the basic arithmetic operations.To the right of the functions is a number block.

Proceed as follows if you wish to define a formula:

− Choose the operands you want to use, and insert them in the entry field for the formula bydouble-clicking or by using drag and drop.

− Choose the calculation functions you want to use by either clicking on the symbols for thebasic arithmetic operations, double-clicking on the functions, or using drag and drop.

− Select the numerical values for the formula by clicking on the number block.

4. Define your formula using the available operands and operators.

If, when defining a formula, you want to use a variable that is not contained in theoperands, you must create the variable first. Highlight the )RUPXOD�9DULDEOH�entry andusing the right mouse button on the context menu, choose 1HZ�)RUPXOD. You reach thevariable wizard that takes you through a step-by-step process for defining a new variable.

Note that when you execute a query, the key figures are always calculated as the VDPHXQLW. That is, a formula is semantically incorrect if, for example, a currency unit (for



example, USD) is added to a weight unit (for example, kg). If you want to calculate valuesregardless of the unit, use the function 9DOXH�ZLWKRXW�'LPHQVLRQ��ZLWKRXW�8QLWV�� See DataFunctions [Seite 36].

5. Check the formula definition and choose )RUPXOD�6\QWD[�&KHFN� .

The )RUPXOD�6\QWD[�&KHFN� function checks only the correctness of the syntax in theformula. It does not check whether the formula makes sense semantically, for example, ifit contains the same units.

6. Enter a description of the formula column.

7. Choose 2.. The newly calculated key figure is defined in the structure.

7HFKQLFDO�1RWHV�DERXW�WKH�)RUPXOD�2SHUDWRUV

7HVW�RI��([SUHVVLRQ!� ��

The test for whether a mathematical expression is 0 is used to avoid problems based on roundingoperations through the inquiry abs (<Expression>) < 10**-6. In other words, all values in the interval [-10**-6, 10**-6] = [-0,000001; 0,000001] are taken as 0.

5HVXOW�IRU�1RQ�'HILQHG�0DWKHPDWLFDO�2SHUDWLRQV

If an operation which is not allowed or not defined mathematically (for example, division by 0, squareroots of negative values) is executed, the character for “division by 0” or “data does not exist” (seecustomizing table RSADMIN) is given and is not calculated further.

You can suppress this reaction that causes the expression to lead to errors by compounding theoperators NDIV0() or NOERR() (see Data Function [Seite 36]).

When you use these operators, check that the result can be interpreted meaningfully bythe user, even in the case of errors.

$%$3�&RGLQJ�IRU�&DOFXODWLQJ�2SHUDWRUV

In problematic cases, take a look at the functions of the operators in the ABAP coding (includeLRRK0F10, form LOC_RECHNEN).



3HUFHQWDJH�)XQFWLRQV

8VH

Functions that you can use as operators for defining a calculated key figure.

)XQFWLRQV

3HUFHQWDJH�'HYLDWLRQ��

�2SHUDQG�!��2SHUDQG�!

This gives the percentage deviation between operand 1 and operand 2 It is identical to the formula100 * (<Operand1> - <Operand2>) / abs(<Operand2>) , if <Operand2> does not equal zero and Div0if <Operand2> equals zero.

3ODQ�6DOHV % $FWXDO�6DOHV��expresses, as a percentage, the difference between the plansales and the actual sales.

3HUFHQWDJH�6KDUH��$�

�2SHUDQG�!��$��2SHUDQG�!

This gives the percentage share of operand 1 and operand 2 It is identical to the formula100 * <Operand1> / abs(<Operand2>), if <Operand2> is not equal to 0, and Div0, if <Operand2> isequal to 0.

)L[HG�&RVWV�%A &RVWV expresses what proportion the fixed cost of a product is of the totalcost.

3HUFHQWDJH�6KDUH�RI�WKH�5HVXOW��&7�

�&7��2SHUDQG!

This shows how high the percentage share is, with regard to the result. The result being the outcomeof aggregating the second highest level (interim result).

If a characteristic has been drilled down upon in both the rows and the columns, this relationship is notunique, causing the system to display the warning, and relevant symbol for, 'DWD�GRHV�QRW�H[LVt (seecustomizing table RSADMINC).

<HDU 5HJLRQ 6DOHV �&7�µ6DOHV¶

1999 North 30 50

South 30 50

Result for 1999 60 33.3333

2000 North 60 50

South 60 50

Result for 2000 120 66.6667

overall results 180 100



3HUFHQWDJH�6KDUH�RI�WKH�2YHUDOO�5HVXOW��*7�

�*7��2SHUDQG!

This shows how high the percentage share is, with regard to the overall result. The overall result beingthe outcome of aggregating the highest level. The dynamic filters (filters that have not beendetermined already in the query definition) also play a role in calculating the overall result.

<HDU 5HJLRQ 6DOHV �*7�µ6DOHV¶

1999 North 30 16.6667

South 30 16.6667

Result for 1999 60 33.3333

2000 North 60 33.3333

South 60 33.3333

Result for 2000 120 66.6667


3HUFHQWDJH�6KDUH�RI�WKH�5HSRUW�5HVXOW��&7�

This is much the same as %GT.

Unlike the process of calculating the overall result, dynamic filters are QRW used whencalculating the report result. This means that, independently of the filter status and thenavigation status, the same value is always normalized.



'DWD�)XQFWLRQV

8VH


)XQFWLRQV

9DOXH� ��LI�RSHUDQG��!��RWKHUZLVH��QXPHUDWRU�

&2817��([SUHVVLRQ!�

Delivers the value 1 if the <Expression> is <> 0, otherwise 0.

9DOXH� ��LI�RSHUDQG� ��RWKHUZLVH��

'(/7$��([SUHVVLRQ!�

Delivers the value 1 if the <Expression> is 0, otherwise 1.

The function is identical to the NOT operator and should no longer be used.

1',92��[��(TXDOV��ZKHQ�GLYLGHG�E\��RWKHUZLVH�[

1',9��([SUHVVLRQ!�

Is 0 if the calculation of <Expression> causes a division by 0. Otherwise, the result if the value of theexpression.

It is used:

• To avoid error messages

• So that you can continue to calculate a defined result.

9DOXHV�ZLWKRXW�'LPHQVLRQV��ZLWKRXW�8QLWV�

12',0��([SUHVVLRQ!�

Delivers purely numerical values of <Expression> and suppresses units and currencies.

Using this function, you can avoid the “mixed currency” character (see customizing tableRSADMINC).

12(55��[��(TXDOV��IRU�XQGHILQHG�FDOFXODWLRQV��RWKHUZLVH�[

12(55��([SUHVVLRQ!�

Is 0 if the calculation of <Expression> leads to an arithmetical error. Otherwise, the result if the valueof the expression. It is used to avoid error messages or so that you can continue to calculate a definedresult.

NOERR(SQRT(-1)) = 0

5HVXOW

680&7��2SHUDQG!

Delivers the result of the operands to all rows or columns (compared to Percentage Functions [Seite34] %&7).



<HDU 5HJLRQ 6DOHV 680&7�³6DOHV´

1999 North 30 60

South 30 60

Result for 1999 60 180

2000 North 60 120

South 60 120

Result for 2000 120 180


2YHUDOO�5HVXOWV

680*7��2SHUDQG!

Delivers the overall results for the operands (compare to Percentage Functions [Seite 34] %*7).

<HDU 5HJLRQ 6DOHV 680*7�³6DOHV´

1999 North 30 180

South 30 180

Result for 1999 60 180

2000 North 60 180

South 60 180

Result for 2000 120 180


5HSRUW�5HVXOWV

68057��2SHUDQG!

Delivers the report results of the operands (for the difference between overall and report results, seealso Percentage Functions [Seite 34] %*7� and %57).



%RROHDQ�2SHUDWRUV

8VH


)XQFWLRQV

5HODWLRQDO�2SHUDWRUV�� !�� !��! �

�([SUHVVLRQ�!��2SHUDWRU!��([SUHVVLRQ�!

The result is 1 if the relationship denoted by <Operator> between expression <Expression1> and<Expression2> holds (that is <Expression> <Operator> <Expression2> is true), otherwise the result is0. Only numerical values of <Expression1> and <Expression2> are compared without taking units intoaccount.

Example: &RVWV��6DOHV delivers 1 if sales are larger than costs and 0 if costs are largerthan or equal to sales.

/RJLFDO�$1'��$1'�

�([SUHVVLRQ�!�$1'��([SUHVVLRQ�!

The result is 1 if <Expression1> and <Expression2> (both) do not equal 0. Otherwise the result is 0.Only the numerical values of <Expression1> and <Expression2> are considered, without taking unitsinto account.

/RJLFDO�25��25�

�([SUHVVLRQ�!�25��([SUHVVLRQ�!

The result is 1 if <Expression1> or <Expression2> does not equal 0. Otherwise the result is 0. Only thenumerical values of <Expression1> and <Expression2> are considered, without taking units intoaccount.

/RJLFDO�([FOXVLYH�25��;25�

�([SUHVVLRQ�!�;25��([SUHVVLRQ�!

The result is 1 if either <Expression1> or <Expression2> (but not both) does not equal 0. Otherwisethe result is 0. Only the numerical values of <Expression1> and <Expression2> are considered,without taking units into account.

/RJLFDO�127��127�

127��([SUHVVLRQ!

The result is 1 if <Expression> is 0, otherwise the result is 0. Only the numerical value of<Expression> is considered without taking units into account.

/($)

The result is 0 for results rows or real (inner) nodes of a hierarchy, and the value 1 for elementaryrows or the leaves of a hierarchy.

This operator allows you to carry out various calculations on results rows and elementary rows.

&RQGLWLRQDO�&DOFXODWLRQV��,)�7+(1�(/6(�

Conditional calculations can be made using Boolean operators An expression of the formIF<Logic Expression> THEN <Expression1> ELSE <Expression2> can also be made using a formulaof the form<Logic Expression> * <Expression1> + NOT <Logic Expression> * <Expression2>



([DPSOH��,)�$FWXDO�&RVWV�!�3ODQ�&RVWV�7+(1�3ODQ�&RVWV��3ODQ�'HYLDWLRQ�(/6($FWXDO�&RVWV

can be written as the following formula:

�$FWXDO�&RVWV�!�3ODQ�&RVWV� �3ODQ�&RVWV��3ODQ�'HYLDWLRQ��$FWXDO�&RVWV�� 3ODQ&RVWV�� $FWXDO�&RVWV

or

�$FWXDO�&RVWV�!�3ODQ�&RVWV� �3ODQ�&RVWV��3ODQ�'HYLDWLRQ��(NOT��$FWXDO�&RVWV�!�3ODQ&RVWV�)� $FWXDO�&RVWV



'HILQLQJ�([FHSWLRQ�&HOOV

8VH

When you define selection criteria and formulas for structure components, when there are twostructure components of a query, generic cell definitions are created at the intersection of the structurecomponents that determine the values to be presented in the cell.

Cell-specific definitions allow you, along with implicit cell definition, to define explicit formulas andselection conditions for cell and in this way, to override implicitly created cell values. This functionallows you to design much more detailed queries.

In addition, you can define cells that have no direct relationship to the structure components. Thesecells are not displayed and serve as containers for help selections or help formulas.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The query contains two structures. You can only define exception cells for queries that have twostructures. In one structure you use, for example, the characteristic values and in the other, the keyfigures. If these prerequisites are fulfilled, you can define cells.

$�FHOO�LV�WKH�LQWHUVHFWLRQ�EHWZHHQ�WZR�VWUXFWXUH�HOHPHQWV� The term &HOOV�for thefunction 'HILQLQJ�([FHSWLRQ�&HOOV should not be confused with the term &HOOV�in MS Excel.The formulas or selection conditions that your define for a cell always take effect at theintersection between two structure elements. If a drilldown characteristic has two differentcharacteristic values, then the cell definition always takes effect at the intersectionbetween the characteristic value and the key figure.

3URFHGXUH

In the Query Designer toolbar, choose 'HILQH�&HOOV�� to get to the cell definition functions.

1HZ�6HOHFWLRQ

�� Mark a cell in the &HOO�'HILQLWLRQ�dialog box and, using the right mouse button, choose 1HZ6HOHFWLRQ�from the context menu�

2. Define your selection by, for example, dragging a key figure and the characteristic values, bywhich you want to restrict the key figure, using drag and drop, to the right-hand area of the 1HZ6HOHFWLRQ dialog box.

3. Enter a description for the selection and select 2..

1HZ�)RUPXOD

�� Mark a cell in the &HOO�'HILQLWLRQ�dialog window and, using the right mouse button, choose 1HZ)RUPXOD�from the context menu�

2. Define your formula using the available operands and functions. See also Restricting Key Figures[Seite 31].

3. Enter a description for the formula and select 2..

1HZ�&HOO�5HIHUHQFH

You can use every cell that you define in a formula. If you want to use the value further from theimplicit, generic cell definition that is automatically created at the intersection of the two structurecomponents of a query, select this cell in the &HOO�'HILQLWLRQ dialog box and, using the right mousebutton, choose 1HZ�&HOO�5HIHUHQFH� A description appears automatically in the cell that arise from thetwo structure components. You can only reference to this cell. That is, you can use the implicit celldefinition further and do not have to create this values manually in a new selection.

)XQFWLRQV�RI�([SOLFLWO\�'HILQHG�&HOOV�

Select a defined cell and choose the required function from the context menu (right mouse button).



• (GLW

• 'HOHWLRQ

• :KHUH�8VHG�/LVW

Before you delete a cell, you can check which formulas the defined cell is used in the where-used list.

• 3URSHUWLHV

Choose 3URSHUWLHV if you

− Want to change the description of the cell

− Want to change the highlighting of the cell

− Want to hide the cell. That is, if you do not want to see the values of the cell

$GGLWLRQDO�&HOOV

Choose $GGLWLRQDO�&HOOV��if you require additional cells for help selections or help formulas. You canuse the functions 1HZ�6HOHFWLRQ�and 1HZ�)RUPXOD that appear in the context menu to defineadditional cells that are not displayed in the query and only serve as objects for help selections andhelp formulas. For example, you define an invoice in an additional cell and use this in a “real” cell tocalculate a duplicated invoice.

In the additional cells that are already defined in the context menu, you can:

• Edit the cell definition

• Delete the cell definition

• Display the where-used list for the cell

• Change the description of the cell under 3URSHUWLHV�



8VLQJ�9DULDEOHV

'HILQLWLRQ

Variables are parameters of a query that are set in the query definition and are not filled with values(processed) until the query is inserted into a workbook. They function as a store for characteristicvalues, hierarchies, hierarchy nodes, texts and formula elements, and can be processed in differentways.

Variables in the Business Information Warehouse are global variables, meaning that they are definedin the variable maintenance and are then available for the definition of DOO�queries.

7KH�IROORZLQJ�YDULDEOH�W\SHV�DUH�DYDLODEOH�

• Variables for Characteristic Values [Seite 45]

• Variables for Hierarchies and Hierarchy Nodes [Seite 47]

• Variables for Texts [Seite 48]

• Variables for Formulas [Seite 49]

8VH

Variables make the IOH[LEOH�VHWWLQJ�RI�TXHULHV (parameterization of the query) possible. If you usevariables in the query definition in the Business Explorer, do not select any fixed characteristic values,hierarchies, hierarchy nodes, texts, or formula elements. Instead, set up variables as place holders.These are filled with values when the query is inserted into a workbook. 2QH query definition can beused as the foundation for many different queries if you use variables.

You want to create RQH query for DOO�the people responsible for customer groups, whoeach only evaluate the data for one customer group. In the query definition, you set up avariable for the characteristic ‘customer group’. Just before the query is executed, decidefor which customer group(s) you want the query to apply to.

The variable definition consists of the maintenance of basic data and detail statements in the variablemaintenance.

5HDG\�IRU�,QSXW

You can determine whether the variables selected are UHDG\�IRU�LQSXW or not when you open andinsert the query into a workbook. If you choose 5HDG\�IRU�LQSXW in the variable definition, a dialog boxappears when you insert the query into a workbook. You can then enter the value(s) you want to use,confirm default value(s), or change default values.

‘Ready for input’ is available for the processing types, manual entry / default value, customer exit, SAPexit, and authorizations.

&KDQJHDEOH�ZLWK�4XHU\�1DYLJDWLRQ

In the variable maintenance screen, if you choose the option &KDQJHDEOH�ZLWK�4XHU\�1DYLJDWLRQ, whenyou execute the query, you can not only select the values that you entered in the variables popup, butyou can also use other values as dynamic filters for the query: Selecting Filter Values [Seite 436]).

Please note that this function is not possible if you are using the variable as part of astructure in the query definition.

You can use this function for variables of characteristic values and hierarchy nodes.



3URFHVVLQJ�7\SHVYou must establish a processing type for each variable type. The processing type identifies in whichway the variable is processed when the query is inserted in the workbook.

The following�SURFHVVLQJ�W\SHV are available:

• Manual entry / default value

• Automatic replacement using a given replacement path

• Processing with customer exits [Seite 50]

• Processing with an SAP exit (from SAP system fields) for delivered variables [Seite 51]

• Processing with authorizations

Depending on the variable type, select the corresponding processing type. Depending on the variabletype, only certain processing types are sensible. The following table gives an overview of possiblecombinations of variable type and processing type.

3URFHVVLQJ�W\SHV�RI�WKH�YDULDEOH�W\SHV�

3URFHVVLQJW\SH

&KDUDFWHULVWLF�YDOXHV

+LHUDUFKLHV +LHUDUFK\QRGHV

7H[W )RUPXODV

Manual Entry/ DefaultValue

; ; ; ; ;

ReplacementPath

; � � ; ;

SAP Exit ; ; ; ; ;

Customer Exit ; ; ; ; ;

Authorization ; � ; � �

0DQXDO�(QWU\��'HIDXOW�9DOXH

The processing type PDQXDO�HQWU\��GHIDXOW�YDOXH is available for DOO�YDULDEOH�W\SHV. If a variable isprocessed with this processing type, you can enter the value you want to use for the variable manuallyin the dialog box before you insert the query into the workbook. When you create the variables, youdetermine whether you enter a default value or not using the GHIDXOW�YDOXH�GDWD.

Using UHDG\�IRU�LQSXW, you control that the variable with the processing type PDQXDO�HQWU\��GHIDXOW�YDOXHV�is processed automatically by the default value. Enter a default value, anddeactivate ‘ready for input’. When you insert the query into the workbook, the variabledoes not appear in the variable dialog box - the variable is processed by the default value.

5HSODFHPHQW�3DWK

The processing type UHSODFHPHQW�SDWK can be used for YDULDEOHV�IRU�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�YDOXHV��WH[WVDQG�IRUPXODV. If a variable is processed using a UHSODFHPHQW�SDWK, then it is replaced automaticallywith the corresponding characteristic value.

If you specify a variable as a characteristic value, you do not have to give a text for thecharacteristic value straight away. Instead, you can fill the text field dynamically, accordingto the characteristic that you used for the variable when you executed the query. Define atext variable with automatic replacement for this.

When creating the variables, maintain the UHSODFHPHQW�SDWK�GDWD. You choose whether it is replacedby the IURP or WR�YDOXH�and by the NH\ or the QDPH�of the characteristic value. In addition, you candetermine the RIIVHW�VWDUW�and RIIVHW�OHQJWK for the output.



Variables for characteristic values [Seite 45] with the processing type UHSODFHPHQW�SDWK� are replacedby the results of a query. In the 5HSODFHPHQW�3DWK�'DWD�field, choose�5HSODFH�ZLWK�D�4XHU\�5HVXOW,and select the query containing the result that you want to reuse as a variable. You can now use thedata result of the selected query, as a variable in a different query.

The processing type UHSODFHPHQW�SDWK takes place automatically, meaning DOZD\VZLWKRXW�UHDG\�IRU�LQSXW�when executing.

&XVWRPHU�([LW

You can find information on the functions of the customer exit, in the section Processing withCustomer Exits [Seite 50].

6$3�([LW

You can create variables with this processing type in SAP Systems only. This means that customerscannot create variables of the type SAP exit. They are a component of the delivered BusinessInformation Warehouse Business Content. You can find information on these variables in the sectionDelivered Variables [Seite 51].

$XWKRUL]DWLRQ

The processing type $XWKRUL]DWLRQ can be used for 9DULDEOHV�IRU�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�YDOXHV�DQGKLHUDUFK\�QRGHV.

Authorizations [Extern] are maintained in the transaction RSMM. If there are severalhierarchy nodes, take the hierarchy node that you want to use automatically as the basisfor the authorization, and make it the default variable hierarchy node.

When you create a variable, if you choose 3URFHVV�ZLWK�$XWKRUL]DWLRQ, the variable is automaticallyfilled with the values of the user’s authorization. Now, when the user opens a query, the data isautomatically selected according to his or her authorizations.

Please note that when they are automatically filled, variables do not have to be ready forinput, which means you do not necessarily get a dialog box when you open the query. Theuser opens the query with the authorization variable, and can only see the data thatcorresponds to his or her authorizations.



9DULDEOHV�IRU�&KDUDFWHULVWLF�9DOXHV

'HILQLWLRQ

Characteristic value variables are parameters for a query. You set these variables in the querydefinition, and they are filled with values when you execute the query. They act as placeholders forcharacteristic values, and are processed using any processing type.

In some cases, it is possible to use variables for texts, as well as for characteristic values.

If you specify a variable as a characteristic value, for example, you do not have to give atext for the characteristic value straight away. Instead, you are able to fill the text fielddynamically, according to the characteristic that you used for the variable when youinserted the query into the workbook. Define a text variable with automatic replacementfor this.

8VH

You need to use a variable for characteristic values, if you want to specify one or more FKDUDFWHULVWLFYDOXHV that you do not want to be included permanently in the query definition. A characteristic valuevariable is the placeholder for either a single value, an interval, or a set of selection options. Withselection options, it is possible to make several restrictions, meaning that you are able to combinesingle values and intervals (7 and 3 to 19 and 43, for example). Characteristic value variables forintervals and selection options are available with the processing type 0DQXDO�HQWU\��3URSRVHG�YDOXHand�&XVWRPHU�([LW.

To define a characteristic value variable, maintain the following detail statements, depending on theprocessing type:

• Use the 3DUDPHWHU�VHOHFWLRQ function to determine whether you want the characteristic valuevariable to be processed by a single value, an interval, or a set of selection options.

• Select the &KDUDFWHULVWLF, for which you want the variable to act as a placeholder.

• Decide whether you want to have the option of being able to modify the variable when youexecute the query. Choose 5HDG\�IRU�LQSXW, if you want the variable to be ready for input when youinsert the query into the workbook. You specify the required value(s) or modify the default valuesin a dialog box.

If you have chosen VHOHFWLRQ�RSWLRQ as the parameter selection for the characteristicvalue variable, it is advisable to select the ready for input function. When you execute thequery, you are able to make further selections in a dialog box that appears.

• If you have chosen the selection option to use as a parameter selection for the characteristic valuevariable, choose the values that you want to use for VLJQ (L for LQFOXGLQJ, for example) and RSWLRQ((4 for HTXDO, for example) .

• 5HTXLUHG�HQWU\�ILHOGV�

• 5HTXLUHG�YDULDEOH�HQWU\� The user has to enter a variable.

• 2SWLRQDO�YDULDEOH�HQWU\� The entry field may be left empty if you so wish.

• 5HTXLUHG��LQLWLDO�YDOXH�QRW�DOORZHG� The user has to specify a variable. It is not possible tospecify the initial value (#).

• Choose &DQ�EH�FKDQJHG�LQ�TXHU\�QDYLJDWLRQ if you want to keep the option that allows you tochoose the value area, or the value, from the dynamic filters of the query.

• With the processing type 0DQXDO�HQWU\��GHIDXOW�YDOXH�you have the option of specifying defaultvalue data. For a single value, specify a default value. For an interval, specify two default valuesthat describe the interval you want to use.



If you choose 5HDG\�IRU�LQSXW, you do not have to specify a default value for thecharacteristic value variable.

• With the UHSODFHPHQW�SDWK�processing type,�it is possible to replace variables for characteristicvalues with the result of a query. In the 5HSODFHPHQW�3DWK�'DWD�field, choose�5HSODFH�ZLWK�D4XHU\�5HVXOW, and select the query containing the result that you want to reuse as a variable. Youare now able to use the data result for the query you have chosen, as a variable, capable ofreturning characteristic values, in another query.

You want to insert the result for the query 7RS��SURGXFWV as a variable in the query 6DOHV±�&DOHQGDU�\HDU��PRQWK.

• Choose &KDUDFWHULVWLF�YDOXH as the type of variable, give the variable a name and adescription, and choose 5HSODFHPHQW�SDWK as processing type.

• Choose (QWHU. The next step is to specify the detailed information.

• Choose the characteristic 3URGXFW that you have used in the query 7RS��3URGXFWV�

• Choose 4XHU\�UHVXOW as the replacement.

• Choose the query 7RS��3URGXFWV.

• Save your entries.

You are now able to insert the variable into the query 6DOHV�±�&DOHQGDU�\HDU��PRQWK��Thisallows you to determine how the sales for these five, top-selling products has developedmonth for month.



9DULDEOHV�IRU�+LHUDUFKLHV�DQG�+LHUDUFK\�1RGHV

'HILQLWLRQ

Variables for hierarchies and hierarchy nodes are the parameters of a query that are set up in thequery definition and are not filled with values (processed) until the query is inserted into the workbook.The variable for hierarchies functions as a bookmark for a hierarchy for a characteristic. The variablefor hierarchy nodes functions as a bookmark for a node of a characteristic hierarchy. The variables forhierarchies and hierarchy nodes can be processed using the processing types 0DQXDO�HQWU\��'HIDXOWYDOXH��&XVWRPHU�H[LW�RU�6$3�H[LW. The processing type 5HSODFHPHQW�SDWK is not available withvariables for hierarchies and hierarchy nodes. The processing type $XWKRUL]DWLRQ�can only be usedwith variables for hierarchy nodes.

Variables for hierarchies and hierarchy nodes are used in a similar way to variables forcharacteristic values.

8VH

If the KLHUDUFK\ on a characteristic or the restriction of a characteristic to a KLHUDUFK\�QRGH are notfixed in the query definition then you need a variable for hierarchies or hierarchy nodes.

In order to define a characteristic value variable, maintain the following detail statements depending onthe processing type:

• The SDUDPHWHU�VHOHFWLRQ�for a variable for hierarchies or hierarchy nodes is the single value.

• Select the &KDUDFWHULVWLF, for which you want the variable to act as a placeholder.

• Decide whether there should be the possibility of still being able to modify the variable wheninserting the query in the workbook. Choose 5HDG\�IRU�LQSXW, if you want the variable to be readyfor input when you insert the query into the workbook. You can then enter the required value(s) orthe default value in a dialog box.

• 5HTXLUHG�HQWU\�ILHOGV�

• 5HTXLUHG�YDULDEOH�HQWU\� The user has to enter a variable.

• 2SWLRQDO�YDULDEOH�HQWU\� The entry field may be left empty if you so wish.

• 5HTXLUHG��LQLWLDO�YDOXH�QRW�DOORZHG� The user has to specify a variable. It is not possible tospecify the initial value (#).

• Choose &DQ�EH�FKDQJHG�LQ�TXHU\�QDYLJDWLRQ if you want to keep the option that allows you tochoose the value area, or the value, from the dynamic filters of the query.

• With the processing type 0DQXDO�HQWU\��'HIDXOW�YDOXH�you have the opportunity to enter a singlevalue as default value for the hierarchy name (variable for hierarchies). The default value for avariable for hierarchy nodes consists of the hierarchy name and one of the nodes assigned to thishierarchy.

If you select 5HDG\�IRU�,QSXW� then you do not have to enter a default value for the variablefor hierarchies or hierarchy nodes.



9DULDEOHV�IRU�7H[WV

'HILQLWLRQ

Variables are parameters of a query that are set in the query definition and are not filled with values(processed) until the query is inserted into a workbook. They act as bookmarks for characteristicvalues, and are processed using any processing type other then $XWKRUL]DWLRQ.

8VH

As a rule you use text variables in combination with variables for characteristic values. If you use acharacteristic value variable in the structure element of the query definition, then it is recommendedthat you set up a text variable for the text. Define the text variable so that it is based on thecharacteristic with the characteristic value variable, and uses the processing type 5HSODFHPHQW�SDWK.

You can use text variables in all text fields of the query definition (query name, structure name andstructure element name).

In order to define a variable for text, maintain the following detail statements depending on theprocessing type:

• Processing by 5HSODFHPHQW�SDWK:

Enter the characteristic that has the value you want to replace the text with. Choose whetherthe text variable should be replaced by the )URP or the 7R�YDOXH�and the .H\ or the 1DPH�ofthe characteristic value. Using the 2IIVHW�VWDUW�and 2IIVHW�OHQJWK� you can establish the startand length of the text output.

You want to create a text variable for the fiscal year. You select the key for the display andestablish the offset start with value 2 and offset length as 2. The fiscal year is four digits;the output of the value begins on the third digit and shows 2 digits. Therefore, in theexecuted query, the text variable for fiscal year 1997 is replaced by the value “97”.

• Processing using 0DQXDO�HQWU\��GHIDXOW�YDOXH��6$3�H[LW or 8VHU�H[LW

Decide whether the possibility of being able to modify the text variable when inserting thequery should exist. Choose 5HDG\�IRU�,QSXW, if you want the variable to be ready for inputbefore you insert the query into the workbook. With the processing type 0DQXDO�HQWU\��GHIDXOWYDOXH, you can enter a default value for the text.

Enter the required WH[W�OHQJWK. The text length determines the number of characters that areavailable with the insertion of the query into the workbook, in order to enter text manually or tomodify the suggested text.

If you choose 5HDG\�IRU�,QSXW, you do not have to enter a default value for the textvariable.

6HH�DOVR�

Delivered Variables [Seite 51]



9DULDEOHV�IRU�)RUPXODV

'HILQLWLRQ

Formula variables are parameters of a query that are set in the query definition and are not filled withvalues (processed) until the query is inserted into a workbook. They function as a store for individualformula elements. Formula variables can be processed with all processing types apart from$XWKRUL]DWLRQ.

8VH

As a rule, you use variables for formulas if you want a formula component (a number) to be enteredwhen the query is inserted into a workbook, rather than it being fixed.

You can, for example, use a formula variable for the interest rate in order to process thecurrent interest rate, after you have inserted the query in the workbook.

In order to define a variable for a formula, maintain the following detail statements depending on theprocessing type:

• Enter the formula data dimension indicator, currency and unit. The dimension indicator ('LPHQVLRQ,') determines whether a formula variable is interpreted as a single number, a quantity, anamount, a price, or as a quota. The default value for the dimension indicator is “single number”.Depending on the selected dimension indicator, you determine a unit for the quantity, a currencyfor an amount, and a currency and a unit for a price.

• Processing by 5HSODFHPHQW�SDWK:

Choose the FKDUDFWHULVWLF�which you want the formula variable for, for example, calendar year.Choose whether you want replace the formula variable with the IURP or the WR�YDOXH�and theNH\ or the QDPH�of the characteristic value. You can use 2IIVHW�VWDUW�and 2IIVHW�OHQJWK�toestablish the start and length of the characteristic value display.

Calendar year:

Choose the option of replacing the formula variable with the NH\ and the IURP�YDOXH, forexample 1990. Choose 3, for example, for the RIIVHW�VWDUW. This means the four-digit yearformat is only displayed from the third digit. Choose the RIIVHW�OHQJWK 2. This means that90 is displayed for the key, 1990.

Replacing with 9DOXH�RI�DQ�DWWULEXWH: You can also replace a number with the value of anattribute. To do this, specify the attribute.

• Processing with 0DQXDO�HQWU\��GHIDXOW�YDOXH��6$3�H[LW or &XVWRPHU�H[LW

Decide whether you want the option of modifying the formula variable when inserting thequery into the workbook. Choose 5HDG\�IRU�LQSXW, if you want the variable to be ready for inputwhen you insert the query into the workbook. With the processing type 0DQXDO�HQWU\��GHIDXOWYDOXH, you have the option of entering a default value for the formula value. When you processwith the SAP or Customer exits, the variables are replaced with the SAP or customer’s ownprogramming.



3URFHVVLQJ�ZLWK�&XVWRPHU�([LWV

&XVWRPHU�([LW�IRU�9DULDEOHV

If you need to use a processing type other than PDQXDO�HQWU\��GHIDXOW�YDOXH��UHSODFHPHQW�SDWK��6$3H[LW, or DXWKRUL]DWLRQ� then a customer exit gives you the option of setting up a processing type forvariables, tailor-made to your specific needs.

You can process DOO�YDULDEOH�W\SHV (characteristic value variables, node variables, hierarchyvariables, formula variables and text variables) using the processing type customer exit. In the variablemaintenance, select the processing type FXVWRPHU�H[LW for the current variable.

The customer exit is a preconceived enhancement that you can configure with customer-specific logic.You can find detailed general information on customer exits and their use in the sectionEnhancements to the Standard [Extern] of the documentation %&�&KDQJHV�WR�WKH�6$3�6WDQGDUG�

8VH

The processing type customer exit for variables allows you to determine default values for variablesusing a function module exit. Here we are dealing with the function module (;,7B6$3/556�B��.

You want to move one characteristic value from another. The InfoProvider only containsthe calendar day. You now want to see the cumulated value of the relevant period(beginning with the first day of a quarter).

For the first day of the quarter, use a variable with customer exit processing. If you nowenter the current calendar day (11.15.2000, for example), the 11.01.2000 comes up in thecustomer exit as the start date, which means the cumulated value of this period can bedisplayed.

,WHP 6DOHV�� 6DOHV�±��

A 5 263

B 7 157

C 2 67

$FWLYLWLHV

Create a project in the transaction CMOD. Choose the SAP enhancement 565�� and assign it tothe enhancement project. Activate the project.

You can get further information on working with the enhancement for global variables inreporting in the help for enhancement. Call up the transaction SMOD. Enter the name ofthe enhancement (RSR00001), choose 'RFXPHQWDWLRQ and then (GLW → 'LVSOD\6XEREMHFW�

You can get general information about working with customer exits under +HOS�→$SSOLFDWLRQ�+HOS�in transaction CMOD�

6HH�DOVR�

Using Variables [Seite 42]



'HOLYHUHG�9DULDEOHV

8VH

SAP delivers a number of variables. There are variables that are processed via automatic replacementusing a predefined replacement path (processing type SAP Exit).

If you want to define a query that only ever displays the data from the current month, youdrag the delivered variable for the characteristic value “current month” (technical name0CMONTH) into the query filter.

Before you can use delivered variables you must first activate them. You can get further information onactivating the query objects under Installing Business Content [Extern].

,QWHJUDWLRQ

You can find the delivered variables in the Metadata Repository [Extern] if you search for variablesusing the search function (see Searching for Metadata [Extern]).

The technical name of a delivered SAP object always begins with a number.

6HH�DOVR�




7UDQVODWLQJ�&XUUHQFLHV

8VH

You can define currency translation in the Query Designer for individual components of the query. Youcan define the currency translation for:

• A structural component

• a restricted or a calculated key figure

3URFHGXUH

1. Highlight the component of the query, for which you wish to define the currency translation.

2. Using the right mouse button select 3URSHUWLHV in the context menu.

3. Enter a translation type and also, where necessary, a target currency.

4. Save your entries.

5HVXOW

When inserting the query into the workbook, the currencies of the data are translated according to thetranslation type established in the Query Designer.

6HH�DOVR�




6DYLQJ�4XHULHV

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You have created a new query or changed an already existing one.

3URFHGXUH

1. Choose 6DYH�4XHU\� or 6DYH�4XHU\�$V�� from the toolbar.

2. Enter a WHFKQLFDO�QDPH�for the query. This name must uniquely identify the query, meaning thatthe name is allowed to appear only once in the entire Business Information Warehouse. Thetechnical name can be up to 30 characters long and must begin with a letter.

3. Enter a 'HVFULSWLRQ�for the query. Save the query in your favorites or roles.

5HVXOW

The query has been saved and you can now:

• Use the query in the Web Application Designer as a data provider for Web items.

• Insert the query into a workbook in the BEx Analyzer

• Use the query in the Crystal Report Designer as a data source for a formatted report



4XHU\�3URSHUWLHV

,QWHJUDWLRQ

You call up the properties dialog box for a query by clicking on the in the Query Designer toolbar.

)XQFWLRQV

Select QXHU\�3URSHUWLHV if you want to change the GHVFULSWLRQ of the query, or make settings for the ,.H\�'DWH�of the query, 'LVSOD\�2SWLRQV��5HVXOWV�3RVLWLRQ�and�1XPEHU�'LVSOD\.

• 4XHU\�.H\�'DWH:

• 'LVSOD\�2SWLRQV:

• Adjusting format after refreshing

• Suppressing repeated key values

• Displaying scaling factors for key figures

• Displaying document links

• Displaying drag and relate links

• Number display

• Result position

Here, you determine whether the result is displayed on the bottom right, bottom left, topright or top left.

• Displaying signs

• Displaying zeroes

You can also 5HOHDVH�IRU�2/(�'%�IRU�2/$3 in the query properties. The query properties also displayinformation on the ODVW�FKDQJH to the query. In addition, using the 'RFXPHQWV�button, you can get tothe available documents that relate to the query in the Administrator Workbench.



3URSHUWLHV�RI�WKH�4XHU\�&RPSRQHQWV

8VH

The various components of a query have specific properties that depict important functions.

,QWHJUDWLRQ

You call up the properties dialog box in the Query Designer from the context menu of a component ofthe query. Click with the right mouse button on the component and choose 3URSHUWLHV�

)XQFWLRQV

The next section considers the properties of the following components of the query:

• Characteristic

• Structure

• Structure component (selection / formula)

&KDUDFWHULVWLF�3URSHUWLHV

Using the characteristic properties, you control the characteristic and results display (key/name, resultsuppression, normalizing, cumulating).

You can select a presentation hierarchy for the characteristic.

6WUXFWXUH�3URSHUWLHV

The properties of a structure consist of the WHFKQLFDO�QDPH of the structure, a GHVFULSWLRQ�andinformation on the last time the structure was changed.

6HOHFWLRQ�)RUPXOD�3URSHUWLHV

In addition to the description, you can also determine whether the properties of a structure componenthave highlighting.

Depending on whether you display the properties of a calculated or a restricted key figure,only one selection of the settings mentioned here is available.

You can hide the selection or formula. Using the property dialog, you determine whether a currencytranslation takes place, by entering the translation type and the target currency. You define theaggregational behavior, and the exception aggregations. You determine the type of number display(display factor, number of decimal places, +/- sign switch) and the “Priority rules” if there is a formulacollision.



7DEXODU�4XHU\�'LVSOD\

8VH

You can use all queries defined in the BEx query designer for OLAP reporting and also for tabularreporting [Extern].

)XQFWLRQV

By (de) selecting the 7DEXODU�'LVSOD\�mode when defining a query, you can create a query for OLAPreporting and for tabular reporting. You get access to the OLAP reporting mode by default. When yousave the query, both display types are automatically saved in a query object in the databank.

If you define the query in one mode, the system automatically generates a standard presentation forthe other mode. In addition, all queries that already exist automatically have a default presentation forthe tabular display. Therefore, you can use all defined queries for OLAP reporting in the BEx Analyzerand in BEx Web applications and also for formatted reporting within the scope of Crystal Reportsintegration.

Queries that have two structures are only available in the multidimensional display andare only suitable for OLAP reporting.

Characteristics and key figures are displayed in the columns in the tabular display. Unlike with OLAPreporting, there are no free characteristics and no rows. You can use filters in the tabular display andassign characteristics, key figures and attributes freely in the columns. For example, you can put a keyfigure column between two characteristic columns. The column display is fixed and is determinedwhen the query is designed. In tabular reporting, the interaction options are limited to filters, filteringand drilling down according to, sorting according to and navigation in hierarchies Navigation functionsthat would change the geometry of the tabular list (that is the number and position of the columns),such as swapping or adding drilldowns, are not allowed in tabular reporting.

The tabular query display is particularly suitable for formatted and form-based reporting. For formattedreports it is important that you can specify the layout design to one pixel and also have convenientprint options.

Switching between the two display types:

When you switch a query defined for OLAP reporting to the tabular display, all InfoObjects are movedautomatically from the rows into the columns. Similarly, when you switch a query that was defined inthe tabular display to a multi-dimensional display, all characteristics are displayed in the rows and allkey figures are displayed in the columns. The filter settings remain the same in both cases. Freecharacteristics from the multi-dimensional display change to filters when you switch to tabular display.

If you remove an InfoObject from the query definition in one mode, the change is also made in theother mode. The InfoObject is also removed from the query there. In other words, FKDQJHV�WR�WKHGHILQLWLRQ�HIIHFW�ERWK�GLVSOD\�W\SHV. If you change the position of the InfoObject in the columns inthe tabular display, this does not effect the multi-dimensional display for OLAP reporting. In otherwords, FKDQJHV�WR�WKH�SRVLWLRQ�RI�REMHFWV�HIIHFW�RQO\�WKH�VHOHFWHG�GLVSOD\�W\SH.

$FWLYLWLHV

Choose in the Query Designer symbol list to switch between both modes.

You can find further information about the integration of formatted reporting, see Formatted Reporting:Crystal Reports Integration [Seite 476]



'LVSOD\LQJ�DQG�&KDQJLQJ�([LVWLQJ�4XHULHV�LQ�WKH�4XHU\'HVLJQHU

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

At least one query must have been created.

'LVSOD\LQJ�4XHULHV

From the BEx Web Application Designer:

1. Choose 7RROV�→ 4XHU\�'HVLJQHU�In the Web Application Designer.

2. In the Query Designer symbol toolbar, choose 2SHQ�4XHU\� The BEx Open Dialog appears.

3. From here, select a query from the queries in your history, favorites or roles, or from queriesassigned to the InfoAreas.

You can display them in the Query Designer:

• By double-clicking on them

• By selecting and choosing Change

From the BEx Analyzer:

1. Choose 2SHQ → 4XHULHV in the BEx toolbar. The BEx Open Dialog appears.

2. From here, choose a query from the queries in your history, favorites or roles, or from queriesassigned to the InfoAreas. Then select it.

3. Choose &KDQJH.

&KDQJLQJ�4XHULHV

1. Display the query in the Query Designer.

2. You can now make FKDQJHV in the query definition. The procedure for changing the query is thesame as for creating a new query (VHH�DOVR� Defining New Queries [Seite 22]).

3. You have two different possibilities for saving the query:

− You can save the changed query. Choose 6DYH�4XHU\�in the symbol toolbar.

− You can save the changed query as a new query. Choose 6DYH�4XHU\�$V�in the symboltoolbar. Enter a new technical name, a new short text and a new description.

4. You can also GHOHWH the query. Choose 'HOHWH�4XHU\�in the symbol toolbar. You can onlydelete the query if it is no longer being used. That is, if it is not used in any workbook, Webtemplate, Crystal Report or Reporting Agent setting.

Using the function 'LVSOD\��!� &KDQJH you can toggle between the display andchange modes.

6HH�DOVR�


Functions of the BEx Query Designer [Seite 17]



&UHDWLQJ�5HXVDEOH�6WUXFWXUHV

8VH

6WUXFWXUHV are freely-definable reports that consist of combinations of characteristics and key figures(for example, as basic key figures, calculated or restricted key figures) from the InfoProvider. Astructure can, for example, be a plan / actual comparison or a contribution margin schema.

You can use structures in several different queries. To do this, you have to save the InfoProvider thatyou want to use again. These structures are then called UHXVDEOH�VWUXFWXUHV.

So it is easier to tell the difference, structures that are not saved as reusable structuresare called local structures. /RFDO�VWUXFWXUHV are only used in one query.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

In the Business Information Warehouse at least one InfoProvider that is filled with data must beavailable.

3URFHGXUH

1. Start the Query Designer.

In the menu toolbar in the Web Application Designer, choose 7RROV�→ 4XHU\�'HVLJQHU�Choose 1HZ�4XHU\ .

Business Explorer Analyzer

In the BEx toolbar, choose 2SHQ → 4XHULHV. In the BEx Open Dialog, you access theselection screen displaying all available queries in your history, favorites and roles or assignedto the InfoAreas. Choose 1HZ

2. You get to the selection screen for all InfoProviders for which you can define a new query. Fromthe list of all available InfoProviders, select the InfoProvider for which you want to create thereusable structure. The available objects in the ,QIR3URYLGHU you selected are displayed as adirectory tree in the left hand side of the Query Designer.

3. In the 5RZV or &ROXPQV directory of the Query Designer, choose 1HZ�6WUXFWXUH from the contextmenu (right mouse button).

4. Create a new VWUXFWXUH. Select the characteristics and key figures of the InfoProvider that youwant to use in the new structure and drag them into the structure directory. Where necessary,restrict a characteristic or a key figure. Where necessary, define a new calculated key figure.

5. Highlight the new structure. From the context menu (right mouse-click), choose 6DYH�DV... andenter a 7HFKQLFDO�QDPH, and a 'HVFULSWLRQ.

5HVXOW

The reusable structure is in the structure list of the InfoProvider tree and can be used when you createnew queries.

6HH�DOVR�

Defining New Queries [Seite 22]



'HOHWLQJ�4XHU\�2EMHFWV

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You have already defined at least one query, or a structure, or a restricted or calculated key figure.

3URFHGXUH

1. From the main menu, choose %XVLQHVV�([SORUHU → 'HOHWH�4XHU\�2EMHFWV�� This brings you to aselection screen.

2. Choose the type of object to be deleted (query, structure, restricted key figure or calculated keyfigure).

3. Where necessary, restrict your search further, for example, to a certain InfoProvider, to certaintechnical names or to the last person to make a change..

4. Choose ([HFXWH. You get a list of all query objects, which match the selection criteria. The listcontains the technical name of the query objects, the name, and the long description of theInfoProvider, for which the objects are defined.

5. Choose &RQWLQXH, if you ZDQW�WR�GHOHWH�DOO�WKH�TXHU\�REMHFWV�LQ�WKH�OLVW. It is not possible todelete individual objects in this dialog window.

If you just want to delete individual query objects, you must either cancel, or make moreprecise restrictions in the selection screen.

2SWLRQ�RI�'HOHWLQJ�:RUNERRNV�DIWHU�'HOHWLQJ�4XHULHV

After you have deleted a query, you can decide whether you also want to delete all the workbooks thatcontained a query which has now been deleted. $OO�XVHUV�FDQ�GHOHWH�ZRUNERRNV�LQ�DQ\�RI�WKHLUIDYRULWHV�DQG�UROHV� This means there is no risk of accessing workbooks with deleted queries in.

5HVXOW

The query objects you specified are deleted.

6HH�DOVR�

Removing Queries from Workbooks [Seite 462]



&RS\LQJ�4XHULHV�EHWZHHQ�,QIR&XEHV

8VH

With this function you can copy queries and their subobjects (structures, calculatedkey figures and restricted key figures) between different InfoCubes.

The target InfoCube, that is, the InfoCube of the query copies, must contain all theInfoObjects of the source InfoCube (InfoCube of the original queries).

3URFHGXUH

�� In the start menu, choose 6$3�0HQX�→ %XVLQHVV�([SORUHU → &RS\�TXHULHV� Double-clicking on&RS\LQJ�4XHULHV brings you to the popup &RS\LQJ�TXHULHV�EHWZHHQ�,QIR&XEHV.

2. Select the required source and target InfoCube.

3. Choose�&RQWLQXH. This brings you to a selection box with all the queries of the source InfoCube.

4. Select a query from all those available.

You have the following options for the multiple selection of queries.

− To make several selections from the list, select the required queries with a mouse click andthe ctrl key.

− If you want to select several queries that follow each other in the list, you can select wholeblocks with the 6KLIW key.

5. Select &RS\�VHOHFWLRQV.

Make note of the following if you are working with reusable subobjects such as variables,structures, calculated key figures and restricted key figures:

− Variables are not dependent on InfoCubes, so variables are not copied.

− If you have selected several queries and they refer to subobjects that follow each other in thelist, only one copy is made for each of the subobjects. The references of the copied queriesremain.

− New subobjects are created when queries are copied again. This means the references to thealready copied queries are lost.

5HVXOW

The copied queries and the copied subobjects have their own names. The newnames are derived from the name of the original object and the added elements_<number>.

This does not affect variables, since they are not copied.

([DPSOH

The queries wHHNO\�UHSRUW��PRQWKO\�UHSRUW and DQQXDO�UHSRUW use FRPSDQ\�FRGH as avariable and the calculated key figure FRQWULEXWLRQ�PDUJLQ. If you now copy thequeries wHHNO\�UHSRUW�and PRQWKO\�UHSRUW into another InfoCube, the queries wHHNO\



UHSRUWB��and PRQWKO\�UHSRUW_� as well as the calculated key figure FRQWULEXWLRQPDUJLQ_� are created. The new queries now refer to the new key figure FRQWULEXWLRQPDUJLQ_� and the variable FRPSDQ\�FRGH.

If you then copy the queries TXDUWHUO\�UHSRUW and DQQXDO�UHSRUW, a new calculated keyfigure, FRQWULEXWLRQ�PDUJLQ_�� has to be created as a copy of FRQWULEXWLRQ�PDUJLQ.4XDUWHUO\�UHSRUWB� and DQQXDO�UHSRUWB� then refer to FRQWULEXWLRQ�PDUJLQ_��DQG�QRWFRQWULEXWLRQ�PDUJLQ_1��&RPSDQ\�FRGH is still used as a variable.



(GLWLQJ�6HQGHU�5HFHLYHU�$VVLJQPHQWV�IRU�WKH�55,�LQ�%:

8VH

With the sender/receiver assignment you make the necessary settings so that you can connect a BWquery to the Report-Report Interface (RRI) in the BEx Analyzer. You can assign receiver reports to asender report (a query in BW) within BW as well as in the R/3 System.

&UHDWLQJ�6HQGHU�5HFHLYHU�$VVLJQPHQWV

1. In the main menu of the SAP Business Information Warehouse, select %XVLQHVV�([SORUHU�→ 4XHU\→ -XPS�7DUJHWV� You reach the 0DLQWDLQ�6HQGHU�5HFHLYHU�$VVLJQPHQW�screen.

2. Choose the relevant tabstrip and enter the required data.

7DEVWULS :KDW�\RX�QHHG�WR�NQRZ

Query Specify the technical name of the sender query. You can alsochoose a query using input help.

InfoCube If you want to assign the same jump target to all queries in anInfoCube, enter the technical name of the required InfoCube. Youcan also choose the InfoCube using input help.

3. Choose &UHDWH� You reach the 0DLQWDLQ�6HQGHU�5HFHLYHU�$VVLJQPHQW�dialog box.

4. Choose a 5HSRUW�7\SH�from the following options:

− BW BEx query

− BW Web template

− InfoSet query (see Creating InfoSet Queries as Receiver Reports [Seite 64] ).

− Transaction

− ABAP/4 report

5. Choose a 7DUJHW�6\VWHP from the following options:

a. Local: The jump target is within BW.

b. Source system: The jump target is outside of BW

− One source system as a target system:

Specify the name of the source system. You can also choose the source system using inputhelp.

− $OO�source systems as target systems:

Set the indicator in the $OO�6RXUFH�6\VWHPV checkbox. Specify the source system, in which youwant first want to choose a report

Log on to this source system.

6. In the 5HSRUW field, enter a description. After you have saved your entry, this description isdisplayed as the 5HSRUW�7LWOH�

7. Choose &RS\� You reach the 0DLQWDLQ�6HQGHU�5HFHLYHU�$VVLJQPHQW�screen.


&KDQJLQJ�6HQGHU�5HFHLYHU�$VVLJQPHQWV

After you have created a receiver, you can make the following changes in the fields in the ALVGridthat are ready for input.

*URXS�GHVFULSWLRQ :KDW�\RX�QHHG�WR�NQRZ

Report title Specify a description.



Source system Choose the required source system using input help. You canassign DOO�source systems by entering “*”.

InfoSource If an InfoCube is filled from several InfoSources, you can specifyfrom which InfoSource you want to extract data. In the ,QIR6RXUFHcolumn, choose the InfoSource you want to use.

0DLQWDLQLQJ�5HFHLYHU�)LHOG�$VVLJQPHQWV�,QGLYLGXDOO\

In some circumstances, you may want to maintain field assignments individually.

Calling up specific reports takes a long time if selections are missing.

With jumping in BW, you can stop a called report from being started if it does not fill certain conditionsthat you determined previously as required entries.

1. Select the relevant target entry in the ALVGrid 5HFHLYHU

2. Choose 'HWDLO�RQ�RII� You get to the )LHOG�$VVLJQPHQWV dialog box.

3. Make the relevant changes to the individual fields:

*URXS�GHVFULSWLRQ 6WDQGDUG�VHWWLQJV $OWHUQDWLYH

Type Generic • Variable

• InfoObject

• Table field

• URL parameter

• Deletion

Selection type * • Parameters

• Single values

• Interval

• Selection option

• Hierarchy nodes

Required entries No Yes

When the system calls the receiver, the settings made in the )LHOG�$VVLJQPHQWV�dialog box areset. The system suggests all other field assignments generically.

4. Choose &ORVH�

5HVXOW

The assigned jump targets are shown in the BEx Analyzer in the context menu of the function *RWR�

6HH�DOVR�

Goto [Seite 399]



&UHDWLQJ�,QIR6HW�4XHULHV�DV�5HFHLYHU�5HSRUWV

8VH

You can assign an InfoSet query as a receiver report to a sender query in BW.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

On the 0DLQWDLQ�6HQGHU�5HFHLYHU�$VVLJQPHQW�screen, you have created a sender/receiver assignmentfor a query or for an InfoCube and have chosen ,QIR6HW�4XHU\�as the receiver report type.

&UHDWLQJ�,QIR6HW�4XHULHV�DV�5HFHLYHU�5HSRUWV�ZLWKLQ�%:

1. If you want the receiver query to be stored within BW, choose /RFDO as the 7DUJHW�6\VWHP�

2. The 5HSRUW field is not ready for input. Call up the F4 help for this field. You reach the $GG�$%$3��4XHU\ dialog box.

3. Choose the query area. We recommend that you choose the global area in BW. If you do not setthe indicator in the relevant checkbox, you work in the standard area, which has limited functionsin BW.

4. Specify the name of the user group. You can also choose a user group using input help.

5. Specify the name of the query. You can also choose a query using input help.

6. If necessary, specify the name of the variant. You can also choose the variant using input help.

7. Choose &RS\� You reach the 0DLQWDLQ�6HQGHU�5HFHLYHU�$VVLJQPHQW�dialog box. The systemhas copied the selected query.

8. Choose &RS\� You reach the 0DLQWDLQ�6HQGHU�5HFHLYHU�$VVLJQPHQW��screen. The receiverquery is listed in the ALVGrid.


&UHDWLQJ�,QIR6HW�4XHULHV�DV�5HFHLYHU�5HSRUWV�RXWVLGH�RI�%:

If you want the receiver query to be outside BW, choose RQH�source system or DOO�source systems asthe 7DUJHW�6\VWHP� (See Editing Sender/Receiver Assignments for the RRI in BW [Seite 62])

The procedure now continues as above (with the exception of step 6).



:HE�$SSOLFDWLRQ�'HVLJQ��%([�:HE�$SSOLFDWLRQ�'HVLJQHU

8VH

The Web Application Design allows you to use the generic OLAP navigation in your BW data in Webapplications as well as business intelligence cockpits for simple or highly individual scenarios.

,QWHJUDWLRQ

The following graphic show the Web Application Design as a central functional area of the BusinessExplorer:

,

Business Explorer

•Query designusing the desktopor Web•Multi-dimensional(OLAP) analysesAnalyse (Web-based or MSExcel)•Geographicalanalyses•Ad-hoc reporting•Alerts•Publishing iViews•Seamlessintegration of Weband MS Excel-based analyses

��

! ��#"��$��%��#��& �� ')(* ��"��

+,��-(.%�%��/�� 0��

1��23��#��'$��%�� 4 ��&��3�& ��&�� /��

57678�9;:=<>8�?7@=ACBEDGFHBI:36J:LK�MONPRQ�5JB=BE@#MST6VUXWLYI:387KZ<>BI:;M[N

W3Y7:387KZ<>BE:;?I@�\^]�6�?JM

•Layouts exactto one pixel•Wizard-basedlayout definition•Static, for-matted reports•Form-basedreports•Pre-definedCrystal Reportsin BusinessContent•Publishing onthe Web•Convenientprint options

•Online andoffline scenarios•WAP-device andPDA support•Automatic devicerecognition•Publishing usingthe WebApplicationDesigner•Device-specificoutput•Alerts, charts•Integration intothe mobile portal

•Web ApplicationDesign•Interactiveanalytical Contenton the Web•Information cockpitsand dashboards•Basis for creatinganalyticalapplications•Creation of iViewsfor the portal•Wizard-basedvisualisation•APIs for additional,highly-individualWeb design



•Personalization,collaboration,profile generation


)XQFWLRQV

Using the BEx Web Application Designer [Seite 67], the desktop application for creating Webapplications, you can create HTML pages that have BW-specific contents such as tables, charts ormaps. These objects, which retrieve BW data from a data provider and place it in a Web Applicationas HTML, are known as Web items. For more information on the available Web items, see Web Items[Seite 81].

You can save the Web applications as a URL and access them through the intranet or through mobiledevices. In addition, you can save Web applications as iViews and integrate them into an enterpriseportal.

The Web Application Wizard is an assistant that is integrated into the Web Application Designer. Youcan use this to help you create Web applications on the basis of an automatic, step-by-step sequenceand to simplify design activities. The Web Application Wizard helps you to be able to use WebApplication Design confidently and to create you first Web Applications.

The Web Application Design from the Business Explorer also allows you to create highly individualscenarios with user-defined interface elements by using standard markup languages and Web designAPIs. You can adjust and enhance Web templates [Seite 223] (the HTML pages that determine thestructure of Web applications) individually. For further information, see:

Object Tags [Seite 225]

Command URLs [Seite 229]

Using Forms [Seite 258]



Data Provider [Seite 261]

Saved Query Views [Seite 263]

Using JavaScript Functions [Seite 312]

In addition, using a Web design application programming interface (Web design API), you can changethe display of tables or navigation blocks in Web applications. See Web Design API for Tables [Seite327]

The Web Application Design incorporates a broad spectrum of Web-based business intelligencescenarios, which you can adjust to meet your individual needs using standard Web technologies.



%([�:HE�$SSOLFDWLRQ�'HVLJQHU

'HILQLWLRQ

The BEx Web Application Designer is a desktop application for creating Web applications with BW-specific contents. Using the BEx Web Application Designer, you create an HTML page that containsBW-specific contents, such as various queries, graphics or maps. This HTML page (described belowas a Web applications) provides the basis for not only Web applications with complex interaction, butalso for cockpits and iViews.

8VH

For a detailed guide to creating Web applications, see Creating Web Applications with the BEx WebApplication Designer [Seite 69]. Background information is described under From Web Template toWeb Application [Seite 72].

6WUXFWXUH

As well as menu bars and application toolbars, the BEx Web Application Designer consists of threebasic screen areas:

• The :HE�,WHPV window

• The 7HPSODWH window

• The 3URSHUWLHV�window



7KH�:HE�,WHPV�:LQGRZ

The :HE�,WHPV�window offers a pool of Web items [Seite 81] that you can use to create your Webapplication.

A Web item is the visualization type (for example tables, maps, graphics) used to displaydata from a data provider [Seite 261].

The window consists of two areas:

• In the top part of the window, divided onto two tabstrips, are the selection option categories forWeb items.

− Selection of standard template items

− Selection of the Web items saved in the library. See also Working with the Library for WebItems [Seite 78].

• Underneath the selection are is the help area with the explanatory text for the Web item that youselected in the top part of the screen.

7KH�7HPSODWH�:LQGRZ

The 7HPSODWH�window contains the Web templates that you edit in the design process and that formthe basis for your Web applications.

The HTML page published in the Web is called a Web application. A Web template [Seite223] is the HTML page that you use to determine the structure of the Web application.

At the bottom of the 7HPSODWH�window there are three tabstrips that you can use to change the view ofthe template or the current HTML editor.

• /D\RXW

You determine the layout of the Web application in the layout view. See Designing the Layoutof Web Templates [Seite 76] for the available options.

• +70/

The HTML view displays the layout view corresponding to the HTML.

• 2YHUYLHZ

In the overview view, all of the Web items are listed with information about the template item,the data provider and the query or view.

7KH�3URSHUWLHV�:LQGRZ

In the 3URSHUWLHV�window, you define the properties of templates and Web items. It is divided into threeareas:

• In the header of the window, in the dropdown box, you choose what you are defining properties for– the template or specific Web items.

• In the central area, you specify the properties for the template or specific Web item (depending onthe settings in the dropdown box).

• In the bottom part of the screen, context-sensitive help is displayed.



&UHDWLQJ�:HE�$SSOLFDWLRQV�ZLWK�WKH�%([�:HE�$SSOLFDWLRQ'HVLJQHU

8VH

You can use the BEx Web Application Designer to create a BEx Web application – an HTML pagewith BW-specific content- in a straight forward way.

You can find background information to the following steps under From Web Template ToWeb Application [Seite 72].

We recommend that you create your first Web application with the BEx Web Application wizard, inorder to make yourself more familiar with the Web Application Designer. Choose or 7RROV�→:L]DUG�to start the Web Application wizard.

3URFHGXUH

1. Create a template.

To create a new Web template [Seite 223], choose or :HE�7HPSODWH�→ 1HZ. (When youstart the Web Application Designer, a new Web template is created to start with).

2. Insert a Web item [Seite 81]

a. Drag a Web item from the 6WDQGDUG�tab strip of the :HE�,WHPV�window onto the Web templateusing drag-and-drop. The Web item appears in the Web template.

When you select a Web item in the :HE�,WHP�window, you get an explanatory text in thearea underneath the Web items.

b. Give the Web item a name by overwriting the previously created text under the name on the*HQHUDO�tab strip in the 3URSHUWLHV�window.

3. Create the data binding.

a. Describe the data provider [Seite 261] on the *HQHUDO tab page in the 'DWD�3URYLGHU�area inthe 3URSHUWLHV�window. Do this by overwriting the previously created text under 1DPH, or byoverwriting a new data provider using the pushbutton and the suggested text.

b. Select a query with or a view with respectively to assign a data provider to the Webitem.

To create a new query, call the Query Designer by choosing 7RROV�→ 4XHU\�'HVLJQHU

To create a view, proceed as follows: To create a view on the basis of a query or anotherview, choose 7RROV�→ 9LHZ�'HILQLWLRQ�→ %DVHG�RQ�D�TXHU\�or %DVHG�RQ�DQRWKHU�YLHZ��Inthe %([�2SHQ�dialog box, select an existing query or an existing view. The standardtemplate appears in a browser window. Define you view there, enter the 'HVFULSWLRQ�and7HFKQLFDO�1DPH�and choose 6DYH�9LHZ� You can now use this view as a data provider.

4. Make settings for the Web items.

a. Choose the :HE�,WHP�tab strip to change the special settings for the item.

b. Specify the properties by entering concrete values or by selecting the respective checkbox.



Click on each property to get notes for the individual properties. The notes are shown inthe area underneath the properties.

5. Adding further Web Items.

Repeat steps 2 – 4 to integrate further Web items.

Pay attention to the position of the cursor in your template when adding further Webitems. The cursor position determines where the new Web item is added. Also refer toDesigning the Layout of Web Templates [Seite 76].

Make sure you make the data binding and item-specific settings for the right Web item. Tomake changes to the respective Web item, select it in the layout view. In the header of the3URSHUWLHV�window, the system displays for which Web item you can change the settings.As an alternative to selecting the individual Web items, you can also use this dropdownbox to toggle between the properties of individual Web items.

6. Creating the layout of a template

In the Web Application Designer, you can create your Web template analogous to the well-known HTML editor. Also refer to Creating a Layout for Web Templates. [Seite 76].

7. Changing the template properties.

To change the template properties, select the template in the header of the 3URSHUWLHV�windowfrom the dropdown box. From Determining Web Template Properties [Seite 74], you can seewhich settings you can change concretely.

8. Storing and Publishing Web Templates

a. To save your template, choose or :HE�7HPSODWH�→ 6DYH�

b. To view your Web application in the Browser, choose or :HE�7HPSODWH�→ 3XEOLVK�LQ%URZVHU�

You must save the template before publishing it in the Web. You are therefore requestedto save when publishing if you did not do it before. Refer to From Web Template to WebApplication [Seite 72]

To assign a Web template to a role, choose 3XEOLVK�→ ,Q�5ROH�

To put the URL of a Web template on a clipboard, choose 3XEOLVK�→ &RS\�85/�WR&OLSERDUG��To do this, you have to have saved the template once already.

5HVXOW

The browser is started along with your created Web application.

3URFHVVLQJ�7HPSODWHV�)XUWKHU

You have the following options for processing the template further using an external HTML editor:

• To further process a template using an external HTML editor, choose :HE�7HPSODWH�→ ([SRUW�WR)LOH��Your template, that is the HTML file, is stored on a file system of your choice. From there, youcan call it up with your HTML editor.

• To call up a template that you have edited in the HTML editor (that is the edited HTML file) in theWeb Application Designer again and edit it there, store the file on your file system again. In the



Web Application Designer, choose :HE�7HPSODWH�→ ,PSRUW�IURP�)LOH�and specify the name andlocation of the saved file.

• To download a template directly from the server, that is, without opening the Web ApplicationDesigner, choose :HE�7HPSODWHV�→ 'RZQORDG�)LOH�IURP�6HUYHU��The template, that is the HTMLfile, is stored on your file system.

• To upload a template that you edited in an HTML editor directly to the server, that is, withoutopening it in the Web Application Designer, store the file on your file system again. In the WebApplication Designer, choose :HE�7HPSODWH�→ 8SORDG�)LOH�IURP�6HUYHU�and specify the name andlocation of the saved file.



)URP�:HE�7HPSODWH�WR�:HE�$SSOLFDWLRQThe purpose of the design process is to create an HTML page with BW-specific content, called theWeb application.

The Web page executed in the browser is described as a Web application.

&UHDWLQJ�D�:HE�7HPSODWH

The starting point is the Web template. The Web template [Seite 223] is an HTML document that isused to define the structure of a Web application and that contains placeholders for Web items, DataProviders and BW URLs [Seite 229].

A Web template is referred to as a :HE�DSSOLFDWLRQ only when the data is actuallydisplayed in the Web browser.

A look at the HTML layer shows that the HTML page has a basic structure and an object tag wascreated for the template.

In the course of the design process, you change this Web template by embedding placeholders forWeb items and Data Providers. You can make these changes in the HTML layer.

,QWHJUDWLQJ�:HE�,WHPV�DQG�&KDQJLQJ�WKH�6HWWLQJV�DQG�/D\RXW

The Web items [Seite 81] on the standard tabs are used as template. By pulling it to your Webtemplate, it becomes a concrete version of a Web item, called an object. The Web item has a nameand certain standard properties that you can change as required.

You see the changes in the HTML layer. An object tag was integrated as placeholder in the HTML forthe Web item and the data provider. Change the name and select a data provider. In the HTML view,you can see that your settings have been written to the object tag.

Your layout is also copied to the HTML in the usual manner for HTML editors.

'HVFULELQJ�'DWD�%LQGLQJ�DQG�6HOHFWLQJ�D�4XHU\�9LHZ

The data provider [Seite 261] provides the data for your Web item. You can assign a data provider tomultiple items.

The data provider is a dynamic object that delivers current data for one or more Webitems at runtime. You define the start view of the data provider by selecting a query orview.

The data provider concept makes it possible to exchange the data source for a Web item easily. Bymeans of navigation, that is changing the drilldown, the Web item always displays the current drilldowndata. If a particular data provider is assigned to more than one Web item, the changes affect all theWeb items involved.

6WRULQJ�DQG�3XEOLVKLQJ�:HE�7HPSODWHV

Execute the Web template in the browser. When it is executed, the Web template becomes a Webapplication, that is, the template is saved on the Web Application Server and a URL is generated forthis Web application.

The object tags are replaced with the information as defined by the Web item and data providersettings at runtime (triggered by the URL call). The template on the Web Application Server isaccessed. This means that you must save your template before you execute it.



'HWHUPLQLQJ�:HE�7HPSODWH�3URSHUWLHV

8VH

You can specify, in each Web template, the properties for your Web application.

3URFHGXUH

Select the template from the dropdown box in the header of the 3URSHUWLHV�window.

7DEVWULS��*HQHUDO

• Under 'HVFULSWLRQ��you can give the template a description of your choice�

• Under 6W\OHVKHHW, the stylesheet that is to display the Web report is shown. Choose 6HOHFW6W\OHVKHHW�to change the stylesheet you use in your Web report.

− The possible selection is given on the left-hand side of the 6HOHFW�6W\OHVKHHW dialog box.Highlight a stylesheet to see it in the preview window on the right-hand side.

− To select a stylesheet for your Web report, highlight the required stylesheet and choose 2.�

7DEVWULS��:HE�,WHPV

• Under *HQHUDO, you can give the Web report the following properties:

− 6WDWXV�IUHH�QDYLJDWLRQ

By selecting 6WDWXV�)UHH�1DYLJDWLRQ��the status on the server is removed after everynavigation step in the Web report. This is only recommended for Web reports are rarelynavigated in.

− 8VH�3HUVRQDOL]HG�7HPSODWH��LI�$YDLODEOH

− 'R�1RW�'LVSOD\�6\VWHP�0HVVDJHV

− 'R�1RW�'LVSOD\�:DUQLQJ�0HVVDJHV

− $OZD\V�'LVSOD\�9DULDEOH�6FUHHQ

If $OZD\V�'LVSOD\�9DULDEOH�6FUHHQ�is not selected, the variable screen is only displayed whenthe mandatory variables are not filled. By selecting the $OZD\V�'LVSOD\�9DULDEOH�6FUHHQ, thevariable screen is displayed at all times.

− 5HVHW�9DULDEOH�9DOXHV�WR�'HIDXOW�9DOXHV

− 'LVSOD\�6DPH�9DULDEOHV�2QO\�2QFH

This ensures that the same variables for different queries are displayed only once.

− 'LVSOD\�'LDORJV�LQ�1HZ�:LQGRZ

• In the (QWULHV�LQ�WKH�&RQWH[W�0HQX column, all possible context menu entries are listed. You candecide whether each context menu entry is

− not displayed (1R�'LVSOD\�

− always displayed in the basic context menu ($OZD\V�'LVSOD\�

− or displayed in the enhanced menu ((QKDQFHG�0HQX)

.

See also Modifying the Context Menu [Seite 249]. The letters ;�(for $OZD\V�'LVSOD\) and ((for (QKDQFHG�0HQX) describe the values for the corresponding parameters for modifyingthe context menu.



6WRULQJ�6HWWLQJV�LQ�WKH�/LEUDU\

• As well as determining the settings for Web items, you can also save the properties of a templatein a library. Choose 6DYH�LQ�/LEUDU\�in the lower area of the :HE�,WHP tabstrip. For details on theprocedure for saving your properties and for creating new libraries, see Working with the Libraryfor Web Items [Seite 78].

• The saved template properties are treated in the same way as the Web items you saved in thelibrary, meaning that you can find your saved template properties in the :HE�,WHPV�window on the/LEUDU\�tabstrip. Once you have saved your template properties, you have created a model forfurther templates.

$SSO\LQJ�6HWWLQJV�WR�&XUUHQW�7HPSODWHV

• To copy the properties to other templates, proceed as follows:

a. In the :HE�,WHPV�window, on the /LEUDU\�tabstrip, choose with the right mouse button thetemplate property that you want to copy.

b. Choose 7UDQVIHU�3URSHUW\�IRU�&XUUHQW�7HPSODWH�

The properties for the template are transferred. You can see this in the changed settings forthe template in the 3URSHUWLHV�window.

• To reassign the standard settings to the current template, choose :HE�7HPSODWH�→ 5HVHW3URSHUWLHV

In the 3URSHUWLHV�window, the standard settings are now reset.



'HVLJQLQJ�WKH�/D\RXW�RI�:HE�7HPSODWHV

8VH

You can change the layout of your Web template - the HTML page with BW-specific contents - as youare familiar from HTML editors.

$UUDQJLQJ�:HE�,WHPV�RQ�WKH�3DJH

• You can change the size of the placeholders. You can see what effect resizing a Web item in aWeb application has by looking at the values, which are shown in the HTML view by theparameters +HLJKW�and :LGWK�for the corresponding item.

• You can align the Web items horizontally.

− Choose to left-justify the Web item.

− Choose to center the Web item.

− Choose to right-justify the Web item.

• To regroup the Web items, drag a Web item to the required position with Drag&Drop.

• To place several Web items one next to the other you have to set the width of the Web template toits optimal value.

You have arranged a Web item on your template and want to arrange a second one nextto it. If the template is wide enough for the second Web item, it is placed to the right of thefirst one. If it is not wide enough, the second Web item is placed below the first one sincethe browser makes a line feed as for standard HTML.

To align the individual Web items in your Web template in the best possible way, use anHTML table.

$UUDQJLQJ�:HE�,WHPV�XVLQJ�DQ�+70/�7DEOH

To arrange Web items next to and below one another you can use an HTML table. You can apply thisgrid as you need to.

1. Choose or /D\RXW → 7DEOH → ,QVHUW�7DEOH.

• In the ,QVHUW�7DEOH dialog box enter the 1XPEHU�RI�5RZV and 1XPEHU�RI�&ROXPQV.

• In the 7DEOH�7DJ�$WWULEXWH and &HOO�7DJ�$WWULEXWH fields you can make settings that are written tothe corresponding tags in HTML. The table is displayed in the layout view as defined by thesetags.

• You can give the table a header under &DSWLRQ.

• You can show and hide the frame during the layout process by choosing /D\RXW → 'LVSOD\)UDPH.

• To show the HTML tags in the layout view choose /D\RXW → 'LVSOD\�+70/�7DJV.

• You can change the table with /D\RXW → 7DEOH →

− ,QVHUW�5RZV

− ,QVHUW�&ROXPQV

− ,QVHUW�&HOOV



− 'HOHWH�5RZV

− 'HOHWH�&ROXPQV

− 'HOHWH�&HOOV

− 0HUJH�&HOOV

− 'LYLGH�&HOOV

You can change the size of the complete table but not of individual cells.

2. Drag different Web items to the individual table cells, depending on whether you want to arrangeyour Web item horizontally or vertically.

(QKDQFLQJ�:HE�7HPSODWHV�ZLWK�7H[WV

As well as inserting and arranging Web items, you can also enhance the Web template with texts andformat them.

1. Place the cursor on a position in the Web template and enter a text of your choice.

2. You can format it by selecting the text passage and selecting one of the following options:

− Change Font

− Change Font Size

− Bold Character ( )

− Italic Character ( )

− Underlined Character( )

− Character Settings ( )

− Numbering ( )

− Bullets ( )

− Reduce indentation ( )

− Enlarge Indentation ( )

− Left-justified ( )

− Centered ( )

− Right-justified ( )



:RUNLQJ�ZLWK�WKH�/LEUDU\�IRU�:HE�,WHPV

8VH

If you integrate a Web item in your template from the templates under 6WDQGDUG and you have definedyour settings, you might want to use this Web item again in this form in other templates without havingto define all the settings over and over again. The BEx Web Application Designer enables you to useyour own version of a Web item as the template for other items. You store this Web item as a templateand insert it in a library that you can organize yourself. You can then access your Web items in the:HE�,WHP window using the /LEUDU\ tabstrip.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You have integrated a Web item in your template and defined your settings on the :HE�,WHP tabstrip inthe 3URSHUWLHV window.

6WRULQJ�:HE�,WHPV�LQ�WKH�/LEUDU\

You save the properties, which you created on the :HE�,WHP tabstrip, in the library. TheseWeb items have template characters again and can be altered. Corresponding to this Webitem character, data binding is not stored.

1. Choose 6DYH�LQ�/LEUDU\ in the lower part of the :HE�,WHP tabstrip to store your Web item as atemplate.

2. Select a library in the $GG�:HE�,WHP�WR�/LEUDU\ dialog box.

• To create a new library choose .

a. In the &UHDWH�1HZ�/LEUDU\ dialog box define whether you want to store your library in yourfavorites or in a role.

b. Select the folder where you want to store your library.

c. Define a meaningful 'HVFULSWLRQ that will appear later on in your library.

d. Give field 7HFKQLFDO�QDPH a unique name.

e. Choose 6DYH�

• To select an existing library choose .

a. In the %([�2SHQ�dialog box, select the place where you stored the library – +LVWRU\��5ROHV�:RUNERRNV.

b. Select a library and choose 2..

3. Define a meaningful 'HVFULSWLRQ that will appear later on in your library as text for your personaltemplate item.

4. Give field 7HFKQLFDO�QDPH a unique name.

5. Choose�6DYH�

Your Web item is now saved in the library.

8VLQJ�:HE�,WHPV�IURP�WKH�/LEUDU\

You can find the libraries you created containing your personal Web items on tabstrip /LEUDU\ in the:HE�,WHPV�window. Your libraries and the Web items assigned to the libraries are displayed here in atree-like structure.

• To place your Web items in Web templates, pull them with Drag&Drop to your Web template in thesame way as you do with standard items.



• To change the settings for your saved Web item, select the relevant Web item and with the rightmouse key choose &KDQJH�:HE�,WHP. In the &KDQJH�:HE�,WHP�dialog box, all of the settings forchanging the item are offered.

• To delete a Web item from the library, select the Web item and with the right mouse key choose'HOHWH�:HE�LWHP.

0DQDJLQJ�/LEUDULHV

If you do not yet have any libraries, proceed as follows: Click on &RQWH[W�PHQX and select one of theoptions.

• Choose 2SHQ�/LEUDU\�to add a library.

• Choose &UHDWH�QHZ�OLEUDU\ to create a new library (on the database).

To manage your existing libraries, select the appropriate library with the right mouse key and chooseone of the options:

• Choose 2SHQ�OLEUDU\ to add a library to your collection of libraries in the :HE�,WHP window.

• Choose &ORVH�OLEUDU\ to remove a library from your collection of libraries in the :HE�,WHP window.

• Choose &UHDWH�QHZ�OLEUDU\ to create a new library (on the database).

• Choose 'HOHWH�OLEUDU\ to delete a library (from the database).

• Choose &KDQJH�'HVFULSWLRQ� to change the description of the library.

• Choose 3XEOLVK�OLEUDU\�LQ�UROH to hang your library in a role.



6HWWLQJ�8S�WKH�%([�:HE�$SSOLFDWLRQ�'HVLJQHU

8VH

The Web Application Designer has a certain appearance when you start it for the first time. See BExWeb Application Designer [Seite 67]. As an MDI application, however, you can adjust your workingenvironment to your requirements. The object on which you are working, namely the Web template, ishandled differently from the tools and help windows with which you are working.

6KRZLQJ�DQG�+LGLQJ�6FUHHQ�$UHDV

You can hide the :HE�,WHPV and 3URSHUWLHV windows by clicking on the x in the title bar.

To show the window again choose 9LHZ → :HE�,WHPV�or�9LHZ�→�6HWWLQJV�

You close the template by closing a WHPSODWH window.

To show and hide the tool bar or status bar, choose 9LHZ → 7RROEDU�or�9LHZ��→�6WDWXV�EDU�

0RYLQJ�6FUHHQ�$UHDV

You can move the toolbar and the :HE�,WHPV and 6HWWLQJV windows anywhere. Depending on whereyou move the element to, it is anchored or it appears freely as a toolbox.

7HPSODWH�:LQGRZ

An individual template window can be

• Opening

• Closed

You can close a template window but not hide it.

• Minimized

• Maximized

You can open and manage different windows in parallel with Web templates. You can also arrange thewindows differently.

• To arrange the different windows to overlap choose :LQGRZ → �&DVFDGLQJ�

• To arrange the different windows next to each other choose :LQGRZ → �+RUL]RQWDO�

• To arrange the different windows below each other choose :LQGRZ → �9HUWLFDO�



:HE�,WHPV

'HILQLWLRQ

Web items are objects that obtain data from data providers [Seite 261] and make the data available asHTML. Web items have attributes such as KHDGHU, ZLGWK, KHLJKW, and FUHDWH�QDYLJDWLRQ�OLQNV. You useparameters or specific commands to change these attributes.

If the data, the navigational status, or the attributes change, the HTML for the Web item isregenerated. A Web item must always be assigned to a data provider.

6WUXFWXUH

The following Web items are used in Web applications:

• Tables [Seite 85]

• Charts [Seite 88]

• Dropdown boxes [Seite 180]

• Radio button groups [Seite 182]

• Checkboxes [Seite 184]

• Generic navigation blocks [Seite 186]

• Hierarchical context menus [Seite 188]

• Filters [Seite 189]

• Labels [Seite 191]

• Text elements [Seite 193]

• List of exceptions [Seite 195]

• List of conditions [Seite 196]

• Alert monitor [Seite 197]

• Role menus [Seite 199]

• Tickers [Seite 201]

• Maps [Seite 202]

• Single documents [Seite 220]

• List of documents [Seite 221]

,QWHJUDWLRQ

In the BEx Web Application Designer or the BEx Web Application wizard, on the 6WDQGDUG�tabstrip,you can use the Web items listed above as master Web items [Extern] You choose a master Web itemfrom the list, assign a data provider to the Web item and edit the attributes. You have now createdyour own Web item that your can add to your Web template or save in the library to be used again.



*HQHULF�$WWULEXWHV

8VH

Generic attributes are attributes that are valid for all Web items in Web applications.

)XQFWLRQV

The following generic attributes are available:

$WWULEXWHV 'HVFULSWLRQ

/RJLFDO�QDPH�RI�D�:HE�LWHP��,7(0�or 1$0(� As well as the Web item key (ITEMID) that isassigned when the Web item is created in theWeb Application Designer, you also have toassign a logical name when using the Webitem in Web application. This enables you touse the same Web item several times in a Webapplication. If commands are sent to this Webitem, you always have to specify the name ofthe Web item as the parameter ITEM.

You cannot change this attributewith a command URL.

:HE�LWHP�NH\��,7(0B,'��RSWLRQ�� You create a Web item for a Web applicationbased on a Web item setting that you havemade in the Web Application Designer.


&ODVV�QDPH�IRU�WKH�:HE�LWHP�FODVV�,7(0B&/$66��RSWLRQ��

Name of the ABAP object class that outputgeneration applies. This corresponds to theuse of non-reusable Web items (standard Webitems) in the Web Application Designer. Webitems are created with the default values for theattribute.

The class name for the table is, for example,CL_RSR_WWW_ITEM_GRID

/RJLFDO�QDPH�RI�WKH�'DWD�3URYLGHU�IRU�WKH:HE�LWHP��'$7$B3529,'(5�

You have to assign every Web item to one datasource. You can obtain data and Metadatafrom this that you need in order to create theoutput and commands.

+HLJKW��+(,*+7� You can only specify the height in pixels.

This attribute is not used in tables.

The parameters ITEMID and WBID (ITEM_WBID) used in BW 2.x are still supported. Werecommend, however, that you no longer use these.

In the BEx Web Application Designer, in the 3URSHUWLHV area, you can set the following attribute on the:HE�,WHP tabstrip under *HQHUDO:




7LWOH��&$37,21� You can enter a title. If you do not enter a title,then a meaningful default value is used.

*HQHUDWH�WLWOH��*(1(5$7(B&$37,21�

"X" = Yes, " " = No

By activating this attribute an additional row iscreated in the table, which contains the Webitem, in which the text you have entered isdisplayed under 7LWOH.

For the title, the styleSAPBEXTableCaption is used.

:LGWK�LQ�SL[HOV��:,'7+� You can specify the width only in pixels. Youcan copy the suggested width or determine anew width using &KDQJH�DWWULEXWH��

Please note that the width of tablesin the Web browser isautomatically increased if the widthyou have chosen is too small.

&ORVHG��&/26('�

"X" = Yes, " " = No

You can close the Web item (CLOSED=X): TheWeb item is not displayed. Only the title stillappears (when available) and the open/closesymbol for this Web item. By clicking on theopen/close symbol, you can make the Webitem visible or invisible.

To be able to see the title, youhave to activate the attributes*HQHUDWH�7LWOH�and 2EMHFWV�ZLWKQDYLJDWLRQ�OLQNV�

+LGH�REMHFW��+,''(1�

"X" = Yes, " " = No

You can hide the Web item (HIDDEN=X):Although the Web item is embedded in theWeb template, it is not visible. The Web itemand the title with the open/close symbol are notshown.

2EMHFWV�ZLWK�QDYLJDWLRQ�OLQNV�*(1(5$7(B/,1.6�

"X" = Yes, " " = No

This attribute creates the open/close symbol,with which you can open or close the Webitem. Behind this symbol is a link that calls upthe Web application with the correspondingparameters.

If you do not want the user of theWeb application to be able tonavigate within it or if you want theuser to be able to print the display,then deactivate this function.



%RUGHU

�%25'(5B67</(�

’BORDER’ = With frame

‚NO_BORDER’ = Without frame

‚FORM’ = Form

Here, you can choose the following displaytypes for the Web item:

• With frames

Set as default value for WDEOH��JHQHULFQDYLJDWLRQ�EORFN��$OHUW�0RQLWRU��ILOWHU�WH[W�HOHPHQWV��PHQX��OLVW�RI�FRQGLWLRQV�and�OLVW�RI�H[FHSWLRQV�

The frame is only displayed ifGENERATE_CAPTION=X.

• Without frame

Set as default value for PDSV��FKDUWV�and LQGLYLGXDO�GRFXPHQWV�

• For form

The content of the Web item isnormally displayed with a bluebackground. Set as default value forGRFXPHQW�OLVW��KLHUDUFKLFDO�FRQWH[WPHQX��ODEHO��GURSGRZQ�ER[��UDGLREXWWRQ�JURXS��and FKHFNER[HV�

The standard value settingsrepresent the recommendedpresentation type for the Web item.

:HE�LWHP�FRQWUROV�GLIIHUHQW�GDWD�SURYLGHUV�7$5*(7B'$7$B3529,'(5B,��RSWLRQDO�

If a Web item is to control several dataproviders, for example, a navigation block, itcan be expressed by this parameter. If it is notspecified, the Web item always controls its owndata provider. The values specified under thisparameter are the logical names of the dataproviders, for example, references using wildcards. You do not necessarily have to specifythe data provider belonging to the Web item. Ifit is missing, the Web item does not control itsown data provider.

The Web item output generation is alwaysbased on the item’s own data provider anddoes not include the others. The commandsare forwarded to the target data provider.



7DEOHV

'HILQLWLRQ

Web items that obtain data from a query view to create a table for a Web application. There arenavigation links that go along with the table.

8VH

The Web item 7DEOH�displays the value of a query view in the Web application in the form of atable. The same list geometry that is used in the BEx Analyzer is supported. Characteristics andstructures are displayed in the rows and in the columns.

6WUXFWXUH

As well as its generic attributes [Seite 82], the Web item 7DEOH has the following attributes:


$OWHUQDWLQJ�VW\OHV�IRU�WDEOH�URZV�$/7B67</(6�

"X" = Yes, " " = No

In the rows, the formats 6$3%(;VWG'DWD and6$3%(;VWG'DWD2GG�are used alternately todisplay numerical values. These formats areadjusted in the CSS file that is assigned to thetemplate.

Totals cells are removed from thisdisplay.

2QO\�KLHUDUFK\�QDYLJDWLRQ

�21/<B+,(5$5&+<B1$9,*$7,21�

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

2QO\�DOORZ�KLHUDUFK\�QDYLJDWLRQ

The context menu is hidden in this mode, andyou can only expand and collapse from the list.

1XPEHU�RI�GDWD�URZV�GLVSOD\HG�DW�RQH�WLPH�%/2&.B6,=(�

Specifying this parameter allows you todetermined the number of data rows that aredisplayed after which an area for scrolling isinserted.

If the value is set to 0, thecomplete table is displayed,regardless of the number of datarows.

The parameter is set at 100 bydefault.

1XPEHU�RI�GDWD�FROXPQV�GLVSOD\HG�DW�RQHWLPH��%/2&.B6,=(B&2/8016�

Specifying this parameter allows you todetermined the number of data columns thatare displayed after which an area for scrollingis inserted.

If the value is set to 0, thecomplete table is displayed,regardless of the number of datacolumns.

The parameter is set to 0 bydefault.



7DEOH�VFUROOLQJ�DUHD�DW�WKH�WRS

�6+2:B3$*,1*B$5($B723�

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

'LVSOD\�WKH�VFUROOLQJ�DUHD�DW�WKH�VWDUW�RI�WKHWDEOH

The parameter is set to ‘ ’ by default.

7DEOH�VFUROOLQJ�DUHD�DW�WKH�ERWWRP

�6+2:B3$*,1*B$5($B%27720�

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

'LVSOD\�WKH�VFUROOLQJ�DUHD�DW�WKH�HQG�RI�WKHWDEOH

The parameter is set to ‘X’ by default.

'LVSOD\�FROXPQ�KHDGHUV�6+2:B&2/801B+($'(5�

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

'LVSOD\�WKH�ODEHOV�DERYH�WKH�GDWD


'LVSOD\�FROXPQ�KHDGHUV6+2:B52:B+($'(5�

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

'LVSOD\�WKH�ODEHOV�WR�WKH�OHIW�RI�WKH�GDWD


'LVSOD\�GDWD�FHOOV��6+2:B'$7$B&(//6�

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

The data cells are shown by default. That is,the parameter is set to ‘X’ by default.

'LVSOD\�GDWD�IURP�YDOXH�URZ

�'$7$B52:B)520�D

'DWD�URZ�DIWHU�ZKLFK�GDWD�LV�GLVSOD\HG

The parameter is set to 1 by default.

'LVSOD\�GDWD�WR�YDOXH�URZ�� WR�WKH�HQG�

�'$7$B52:B72�

'DWD�URZ�WR�ZKLFK�GDWD�LV�GLVSOD\HG

The parameter is set to 0 by default. If thevalue is 0, the system tries to display all of therows. If there are too many, a scrolling area isinserted. If the value is not 0, data is displayedup to the specified row and there is no scrollingarea.

'LVSO\�GDWD�IURP�YDOXH�FROXPQ�'$7$B&2/801B)520�

'DWD�FROXPQ�DIWHU�ZKLFK�WKH�GDWD�LVGLVSOD\HG

The parameter is set to 1 by default.

'LVSOD\�GDWD�WR�YDOXH�FROXPQ�� WR�WKH�HQG�

�'$7$B&2/801B72�

'DWD�FROXPQ�WR�ZKLFK�GDWD�LV�GLVSOD\HG

The parameter is set to 0 by default. If thevalue is 0, the system tries to display all of thecolumns. If there are too many, a scrolling areais inserted. If the value is not 0, data isdisplayed up to the specified column and thereis no scrolling area.

Attribute that cannot be set in the Web Application Designer:

02',)<B&/$66 $%$3�FODVV�WKDW�FKDQJHV�WKH�WDEOH�FRQWHQWV

By using the Web design API for tables, youcan adjust the contents of the table cellsindividually.

See also:

Web Design API for Tables [Seite 327]

'LVSOD\�WKH�WDEOH�ZLWK�D�PD[LPXP�RI��YLVLEOH�GDWD�FROXPQV�DQG��YLVLEOH�GDWDURZV��6WDUW�DW�URZ��DQG�VKRZ�D�VFUROOLQJ�DUHD�DERYH�DQG�EHORZ�WKH�YDOXHV

<object>

<param name=’OWNER’ value=’SAP_BW’>



<param name=’CMD’ value=’GET_ITEM’><param name='ITEM' value='Table'><param name='ITEM_CLASS' value='CL_RSR_WWW_ITEM_GRID'><param name='DATA_PROVIDER' value='View1 ><param name='DATA_ROW_FROM' value='30'><param name='SHOW_PAGING_AREA_TOP' value='X'><param name='SHOW_PAGING_AREA_BOTTOM' value='X'><param name='BLOCK_SIZE' value='10'><param name='BLOCK_SIZE_COLUMNS' value='5'>

ITEM :Table

</object>

'LVSOD\�RQO\�WKH��GDWD�URZV�ZLWKRXW�KHDGHUV

<object>

<param name=’OWNER’ value=’SAP_BW’><param name=’CMD’ value=’GET_ITEM’><param name='ITEM' value='Table'><param name='ITEM_ID' value='MYTABLE'><param name='DATA_PROVIDER' value='View1 ><param name='DATA_ROW_FROM' value='3'><param name='DATA_ROW_TO' value='3'><param name='SHOW_COLUMN_HEADER' value=' '>

ITEM :Table

</object>



&KDUWV

'HILQLWLRQ

A Web item that obtains data from a query view to create a graphic for a Web application.

8VH

Using the &KDUW Web item, you can display data graphically in your Web application.

6WUXFWXUH

As well as its generic attributes [Seite 82], the &KDUW Web item has the following attributes:


(GLW�*UDSKLF 6HH�(GLWLQJ�&KDUWV�>6HLWH��@

6XSSUHVV�7RWDOV

�68335(66B6806�

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

The totals rows/columns of the source dataprovider are not displayed in the chart. Thismeans that you do not have to change the dataprovider to suppress totals which may affectcharts adversely.

6ZDS�'LVSOD\�$[HV

�6:,7&+0$75,;�

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

With this attribute you can swap the chart axesin the display, without changing thenavigational state of the query view itself.

You get the same effect if youswap the two free characteristicswith one another in the initial queryview.

+LGH�([SDQGHG�+LHUDUFK\�1RGHV

�68335(66B23(1+,(5$5&+,(12'(6�

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

You can remove open nodes when you creategraphics in active presentation hierarchies.This ensures that the total of the valuesdisplayed is the overall result.

Note the following for the +HDGLQJ�attribute under *HQHUDO�(generic attribute):

+HDGLQJ You can enter a header for the chart. Thisheader is�QRW�a part of the chart.

Under (GLW�JUDSKLF there is also theoption of specifying a header,though this is then a part of thechart.

The header is only displayed if theattribute *HQHUDWH�KHDGHU isactivated at the same time.



(GLWLQJ�&KDUWV

8VH

Charts display rows of numbers visually and make it easier for users to interpret business data.

�� !��"$#��%��&��'

��( *)+��,

- �.��'0/��,

Moscow

London

Berlin

Washington

Paris

/��'

/��'2143�5�6��

748:9;$<>=�;@?�;:A�B:;DC�;E?�;:9F�G�HD;:A$I�JKF�L4MNL.8�APO�Q:;$<

R ST UV

Mio USD

W*��

January2000

February2000

March2000

April2000

May2000

June2000

�X��0YX��*,

Z��&��[ �)+�,�\^]`_

��a��K3b �)c�d,0\feg_

�X��0h*�� /��'i��()c�

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You can edit a chart in the Web Application Designer or in the Web Application Wizard.

(GLWLQJ�LQ�WKH�:HE�$SSOLFDWLRQ�'HVLJQHU

You created a new Web item of the type &KDUW or selected an existing Web item of the type &KDUW. Inthe 3URSHUWLHV�window on the :HE�,WHPV tabstrip in the 6SHFLDO category, you called up (GLW�*UDSKLFusing the pushbutton with the three dots (see also Creating Web Applications with the BEx WebApplication Designer [Seite 69]).

(GLWLQJ�LQ�WKH�:HE�$SSOLFDWLRQ�:L]DUG

You created a new Web item of the type &KDUW�and then in the step (GLWLQJ�$WWULEXWHV in the 6SHFLDOcategory, you called up (GLW�*UDSKLF using the pushbutton with the three dots.

3URFHVV

1. Before you begin publishing a chart you should define which chart type [Seite 101] you want todisplay. You can find out how the data provider should be built based on the class of the charttype.

2. Select an existing query or formulate a new query with which the suitable view on the data can becreated. This is the suitable data provider.

3. Start the publishing process and create a new Web item of type &KDUW.

4. It is normally advisable to configure the properties of the Chart [Seite 88] Web item as follows:

− Expanded hierarchy nodes should be hidden.

− Totals should be suppressed.

− If you want to swap the columns and rows of the data provider in the chart, you should assignthe chart the property $[HV�IRU�GLVSOD\. The columns and rows are then swapped



automatically when the chart is generated. You need not change the view on which the chartis based.

5. When you edit the chart, the Web Application Designer or Web Application Wizard first shows thedefault setting, that is, a bar chart.

− First configure the preview window so that the number of data series and data pointsdisplayed corresponds to your data provider (see Configuring the Preview Window [Seite 91]).

− Assign the chart the required chart type and format the chart as you like.

− You can select all the functions of a chart in the context menu with the right mouse key.Different functions are available in the context menu depending on the element you marked inthe chart.

6. Check your formatting by publishing the chart immediately after making a change. In this way youcan see if your chart is correctly formatted in the Web version.



&RQILJXULQJ�3UHYLHZ�:LQGRZV

8VH

When you edit a chart you can see the current chart formatting in a preview window. The previewwindow shows five data series with six data points each, irrespective of how the data provider is setup.

You should change the preview window settings so that the number of data series and data pointscorrespond to the data provider. You can then change the formatting of individual data series. Forchart types of class 1, the uppermost data series in the legend corresponds to the first table row, thenext data series corresponds to the second table row, etc.

The preview does not correspond to the results after publishing. The data series and datapoints are only sample data used to show you what the effects of formatting are. You onlysee the actual data after it has been published.

3URFHGXUH

1. In the window in which you are editing the chart, enter the number of data series contained in thedata provider in field 1XPEHU�RI�GDWD�VHULHV.

2. In field 1XPEHU�RI�GDWD�SRLQWV, enter the number of data points in a data series.

3. Choose $SSO\.

The chart in the preview window is changed according to your entries.

See also: Data Series and Data Points [Seite 135]



8QGRLQJ�&KDQJHV

8VH

When you edit a chart, all the changes you make to the chart are recorded. If you are not satisfied withthe results of the changes, you can undo the changes step by step.

You can reset the chart to the standard setting (bar diagram). All the changes you made to the chartare lost.

3URFHGXUH

8QGRLQJ�&KDQJHV

1. Click with the right mouse key on any area of the chart.

2. To undo the last command, choose 8QGR in the context menu.

The name of the menu options shows you which command is being undone. For example,if you last changed the chart type, the menu option is 8QGR�&KDUW�7\SH. If there is nocommand that can be undone, the menu option is 8QGR�1RW�DYDLODEOH.

5HVHWWLQJ�WKH�&KDUW�WR�WKH�6WDQGDUG�6HWWLQJ

In this step all the changes you made to the chart are lost.

Select the 5HVHW function in the window in which you are editing the chart.



)RUPDWWLQJ�WKH�&KDUW�%DFNJURXQG

8VH

You can change the background of the entire chart. You can choose another filling and change theborder as you like.

3URFHGXUH

1. Click with the right mouse key on the outermost area of the chart.

2. In the context menu choose )RUPDW�&KDUW.

The )RUPDW�&KDUW�$UHD dialog box appears.

3. Select the formatting for the filling and border. See Changing the Filling and Borders of Surfaces[Seite 95].

4. Choose 2..

6HH�DOVR�

Formatting Chart Plot Areas [Seite 94]



)RUPDWWLQJ�&KDUW�3ORW�$UHDV

8VH

You can format the plot area of the chart as you like. You can change the filling and borders of thesurface between the X and Y axes. You can also format the border surrounding the entire plot area,including the axes and labels.

3URFHGXUH

1. Click with the right mouse key on the plot area, for example on a free area within the X and Yaxes.

2. In the context menu choose )RUPDW�3ORW�$UHD.

3. The )RUPDW�3ORW dialog box appears.

4. Make the changes described below and choose OK.

&KDQJLQJ�WKH�)LOOLQJ�DQG�%RUGHUV�RI�WKH�$UHD�EHWZHHQ�WKH�;�DQG�<�$[HV

In a pie or ring diagram, this area is a rectangle enclosing the circle.

1. Choose tabstrip 3DWWHUQ.

2. Select the formatting for the filling and border. See. Changing the Filling and Borders of Surfaces[Seite 95].

&KDQJLQJ�WKH�%RUGHU�RI�WKH�(QWLUH�3ORW�$UHD

1. Choose tabstrip /LQH.

2. If you want to copy the default formatting, choose $XWRPDWLF.

3. If you want to set up your own formatting, choose &XVWRP� Select the required type and color forthe lines.

6HH�DOVR�

• Changing Quadrants [Seite 157]

• Formatting the Chart Background [Seite 93]



&KDQJLQJ�WKH�)LOOLQJ�DQG�%RUGHU�RI�6XUIDFHV

8VH

You can change the filling and border of the surface of elements having the form of a surface. If youselect the corresponding element and call the dialog box for formatting the element, tabstrip 3DWWHUQwill offer you several formatting options.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The element to be formatted is itself a surface (for example the plot area or the columns in a two-dimensional column chart) or it consists of surfaces (for example the columns in a three-dimensionalcolumn chart).

3URFHGXUH

1. Click with the right mouse key on the element you want to format.

2. In the context menu, select the function for formatting the element, such as )RUPDW�3ORW�$UHD forthe plot area.

A dialog box appears.



&KDQJLQJ�WKH�)LOOLQJ

You can change the filling with the fields in the )LOO area.

$XWRPDWLF

If you want to copy the default formatting, choose $XWRPDWLF.

&RORU

1. To change the color of the filling, select &RORU.

2. Select the required color or 1RQH if the surface should not be colored.

3DWWHUQ

1. If you want to give the surface a pattern, select 3DWWHUQ.

2. Select one of the patterns and the colors for the foreground and background of the pattern.

7H[WXUH

1. If the background of the surface is to be textured, select 7H[WXUH.

2. Choose the texture you want to use.

*UDGLHQW

1. If you want to fill the surface with a gradient, choose *UDGLHQW.

2. Select the direction for the gradient, for example starting at the lower left corner and going updiagonally.

3. Also select the colors between which the gradient should be created.

,PDJH

1. If you want to store an image in bmp or jpeg format as background, select ,PDJH.

2. Choose a color for the background of the image.

3. Under ,PDJH�6W\OH, define how the image should be inserted. For example you can define that theimage should keep its original size or be scaled proportionally to the size of the surface.



4. With %URZVH�,PDJH now select the image file.

7UDQVSDUHQW

1. To display the entire surface transparently, select 7UDQVSDUHQW.

You can also see any surfaces lying underneath. This option is normally marked for a normaldistribution so that the normal distribution does not hide the data series.

2. With 3DWWHUQ you can define the pattern to be used to display the surface.

&KDQJLQJ�%RUGHUV

You can change the borders of a surface with the fields in the %RUGHU�area.

• If you want to copy the default formatting, choose $XWRPDWLF.

• If you want to set up your own formatting, choose &XVWRP� Under 6W\OH select the required type ofline or 1RQH if you do not want a border. Also select the color and width of the border.



&KDQJLQJ�WKH�6L]H�RI�&KDUW�(OHPHQWV

8VH

You can change the size of the entire chart by specifying the width and height in pixels or by pullingthe chart to the desired size with the mouse.

You can also change the size of the plot area within the chart and the size of the legend.

3URFHGXUH

'HILQLQJ�WKH�:LGWK�DQG�+HLJKW�RI�WKH�(QWLUH�&KDUW

1. Enter the desired values in fields :LGWK and +HLJKW of the window in which you are editing thechart. The entries should be in pixels.

2. Choose $SSO\.

The size of the entire chart is changed according to your specifications.

&KDQJLQJ�WKH�6L]H�RI�WKH�(QWLUH�&KDUW�ZLWK�WKH�0RXVH

1. Point to the border of the preview window with the mouse.

The cursor becomes a double arrow.

2. Click on the border and pull the preview window to the required size.

3. The size of the entire chart is changed when you let go of the mouse key.

&KDQJLQJ�WKH�6L]H�RI�WKH�3ORW�$UHD�RU�WKH�/HJHQG�ZLWK�WKH�0RXVH

1. Click on the element whose size you want to change (plot area or legend).

The element is enclosed in a move handle.

2. Point to one of the move handles with the mouse.


If the cursor does not become a double arrow, you might not have selected the rightelement, for example the chart area instead of the plot area. In this case click again on theelement whose size you want to change.

3. Click on the move handle and keep the mouse key pressed.

The cursor becomes a cross.

4. Pull the element to the desired size.

5. The size of the element is changed when you let go of the mouse key.

Avoid stretching the plot area over the whole area of the chart. The outermost border ofthe plot area disappears from the visible area in this case and cannot be clicked on again.You cannot change the size of the plot area. If you made the plot area too large byaccident, you can undo it with the menu option 8QGR in the context menu. You can resetthe plot area to its original size with 5HVHW, but you will lose all the changes you made tothe chart.



&KDQJLQJ�WKH�3RVLWLRQ�RI�&KDUW�(OHPHQWV

8VH

You can change the position of the following elements directly in the chart:

• Plot area

• Data label

• Axis title

• Axis unit

• Value range title

• Normal distribution title

You can change the position of the chart title if you permitted this when you added the title. SeeAdding and Removing Chart Titles [Seite 163]. You can change the position of the legend directly inthe chart if you permitted this when you added the legend. See Adding and Removing Legends [Seite171].

3URFHGXUH

&KDQJLQJ�WKH�3RVLWLRQ�RI�D�'DWD�/DEHO

1. Click on the data label whose position is to be changed.

2. Click again on the data label, keeping the mouse key pressed.

3. Pull the data label to the required position.

4. Let go of the mouse key.

&KDQJLQJ�WKH�3RVLWLRQ�RI�2WKHU�(OHPHQWV

1. Click on the element whose position is to be changed. Keep the mouse key pressed.

2. Pull the element to the new position.

3. Let go of the mouse key.

You can also change the position of the legends by clicking on the outermost border of thelegend with the right mouse key and choosing )RUPDW�/HJHQG in the context menu. Youcan then select the desired position on the /HJHQG tabstrip.



5HPRYLQJ�&KDUW�(OHPHQWV

8VH

You can remove the following elements directly in the chart:

• Chart title

• Axis title

• Axis unit

• Axis including its title and corresponding unit

• Complete value range

• Gridlines

• Complete legend

• Data label for a data series

• Normal distribution

3URFHGXUH

1. Click on the element you want to remove.

2. Press <Del>.

You can also remove legends, value ranges and normal distributions by clicking on theelement with the right mouse key and choosing 'HOHWH in the context menu.



&KDUW�7\SHV

'HILQLWLRQ

The chart type defines how your data will be edited graphically.

The chart types for stock, milestone and multicolorbars are not supported at the moment.

The chart types can be divided into four classes when they are edited. With chart types of the sameclass, the rows and columns of the underlying table (that is of the data provider) are editedimmediately.

The class to which each chart type belongs is given below. Before you begin publishing a chart, youshould define which chart type you want to display. You can find out how the data provider should bebuilt based on the class of the chart type. You can then select an existing query or formulate a newquery with which the suitable view on the data can be created. This is the suitable data provider.

&ROXPQ�&KDUWV

Comparisons between individual elements are shown in a column. Categories are arrangedhorizontally and values are arranged vertically.

To show changes within a certain time interval, you can use either column charts or XY scatter charts.

The relationship between indivdidual elements and the entire chart is shown in stacked columns.

Column charts are chart types of class 1 [Seite 104].

%DU�&KDUWV

Comparisons between individual elements are shown in a bar chart. Categories are arranged verticallyand values are arranged horizontally. The emphasis is on the comparison of values and not ondisplaying a change during a period of time.

The relationship between indivdidual elements and the entire chart is shown in stacked bars.

Bar charts are chart types of class 1 [Seite 104].

/LQH�&KDUWV

Data trends are shown in a line chart. The data is entered at regular intervals. Categories such asmonths are normally entered on the X axis and values such as income in dollars on the Y axis.

Line charts are chart types of class 1 [Seite 104].

3URILOH�&KDUWV

In a profile chart the lines are arranged vertically and not horizontally as in a line chart. Otherwise theprofile chart corresponds to the line chart.

Profile charts are chart types of class 1 [Seite 104].

3LH�&KDUWV

In a pie chart, the proportional part of elements of a data series are displayed in a whole. This charttype has only a single data series and is used primarily to highlight a particularly important element.

You can use the subtypes to define if the pie segments should be displayed next to each other orseparately.

Pie charts are chart types of class 1 [Seite 104].

;<�6FDWWHU�&KDUWV

In an XY scatter chart, either the relationship between numeric values is displayed in several dataseries or two groups of numbers are entered as a row of XY coordinates. This chart type displaysirregular intervals (clusters) and is normally used for scientific data.



Both axes of an XY scatter chart are value axes. In other chart types, the X axis is used to showcategories.

XY scatter charts are chart types of class 2 [Seite 112].

$UHD�&KDUWV

The area between the axes and the data series are filled in an area chart. Otherwise the area chartcorresponds to the line chart.

An area chart also represents the sum of the entered values and can thus illustrate the relationship ofparts to the entire amount.

Area charts are chart types of class 1 [Seite 104].

'RXJKQXWV

As in a pie chart, the relationship between parts of a whole are displayed in a doughnut. In contrast tothe pie chart, the doughnut can represent more than one data series, where each ring corresponds toa data series.

You can use the subtypes to define if the rings should be displayed next to each other or separately.

Doughnuts are chart types of class 1 [Seite 104].

5DGDU�&KDUWV

In a radar chart, each category has its own value axis emanating from the middle. The values of a dataseries are linked with lines.

Radar charts can be used to compare data series: the data series with the highest values occupies themost space.

Radar charts are chart types of class 1 [Seite 104].

3RUWIROLRV

A portfolio displays the position of an object (enterprise, product, etc.) in a four-field matrix. Theposition of the object is defined with two dimensions.

Portfolios are used mainly in enterprise and product comparisons. For example, a portfolio can besorted like the products of an enterprise by their dimensions economics and strategic significance.

Portfolios are chart types of class 3 [Seite 114].

6XUIDFH�&KDUWV

Data sets are entered in the form of a surface in a surface chart. A surface chart differs from a linechart in that the points of a data series are displayed one after the other for each category.

As in a topographical map, the colors and patterns represent areas with the same value range.

Surface charts are chart types of class 1 [Seite 104].

&\OLQGHUV��&RQHV�DQG�3\UDPLGV

Cones, cylinders and pyramids only differ from bar and line charts in their form. Each of these charttypes has subtypes that display the values horizontally or vertically.

Cones, cylinders and pyramids are chart types of class 1 [Seite 104].

6WHS�&KDUWV

In a step chart, values are entered in the form of steps and not points on a curve. Each valuecorresponds to a horizontal line. The vertical lines link the individual values. For example, the step-by-step development of fix costs can be represented with a step chart.

The X axis is defined as the value axis in step charts. In other chart types, the X axis is used to showcategories.

Step charts are chart types of class 2 [Seite 112].



+LVWRJUDPV

The frequency of a characteristic is displayed in a histogram, for example the distribution of theincome within an enterprise. The frequency is divided into classes, where each class corresponds to acolumn in the histogram.

Categories and value ranges are entered on the X axis and the corresponding values on the Y axis ina histogram. The normal distribution is also shown in the histogram depending on the subtype.

Histograms are chart types of class 2 [Seite 112].

7DFKRPHWHUV

In a tachometer, one or more key figures are displayed in the form of a pointer. The tachometer isdivided into several value ranges and the user immediately sees the value range in which the pointeris currently positioned.

Tachometers are chart types of class 1 [Seite 104].

4XDGUDQWV

In a quadrant, two objects are positioned in a four-field matrix. One object is displayed as a cross, thesecond object is displayed as a point and positioned relative to the cross.

Quadrants are chart types of class 3 [Seite 114].



(GLWLQJ�&KDUW�7\SHV�RI�&ODVV��

&KDUW�7\SHV

Class 1 includes the following chart types:

• Bar and column charts

• Area charts

• Line charts

• Cylinders, cones and pyramids

• Pie charts and doughnuts

• Radar charts

• Surface charts

• Profile charts

• Tachometers

6WUXFWXUH�RI�WKH�'DWD�3URYLGHU�IRU�D�3LH�&KDUW

In a pie chart, the underlying table has only one row. The values in the row result from the piesegments of the chart.

If the table contains more than one row, the additional rows are ignored when the table isconverted into a chart.

6WUXFWXUH�RI�WKH�'DWD�3URYLGHU�IRU�D�7DFKRPHWHU

In a tachometer, the underlying table has only one data column. Each value in the data column isdisplayed in the chart as a pointer. The tachometer will be readable if the data column does notcontain too many values.

If the table contains more than one data column, the additional columns are ignored whenthe table is converted into a chart.

6WUXFWXUH�RI�WKH�'DWD�3URYLGHU�IRU�WKH�2WKHU�&KDUW�7\SHV

You build the underlying table of the other chart types of class 1 as follows:

• The data columns correspond to the categories.

• The rows contain the values for each category. Each row is converted into a data series in thechart.

([DPSOH�IRU�%DU�DQG�&ROXPQ�&KDUWV

The following graphic shows a data provider that is used as the basis for the chart types describedbelow.



9DOXHV

�'DWDVHULHV�

&DWHJRU\

6DOHV�2UJDQL]DWLRQ 1R��2UGHU�,WHPV

Frankfurt 118

Berlin 87

Birmingham 158

Paris 191

New York 181

San Francisco 55

Toronto 191

%DU�&KDUW

Frankfurt

Berlin

Birmingham

Paris

New York

San Francisco

Toronto

No. Order Items

0 50 100

150

200

&ROXPQ�&KDUW

Frank

furt

Berlin

Birming

ham

Paris

New Y

ork

San F

ranc

isco

Toron

to

No. Order Items



�'�&ROXPQ�&KDUW

Frank

furt

Berlin

Birming

ham

Paris

New Y

ork

San F

ranc

isco

Toron

to

No. Order Items

([DPSOH�IRU�$UHD�&KDUW

The following graphic shows a data provider that is used as the basis for an area chart.

9DOXHV�'DWD

VHULHV�

&DWHJRU\

2UJDQL]DWLRQ�8QLW 1R��(PSOR\HHV

%RDUG�' 510

%RDUG�8. 274

%RDUG�86 423

%RDUG�&$1 13

Below you see an area chart that is based on the data provider.



No. Employees

Board D Board UK Board US Board CAN

([DPSOH�RI�D�3LH�&KDUW

The following graphic shows a data provider that is used as the basis for a pie chart.

9DOXHV

�'DWDVHULHV�

&DWHJRU\

2UJDQL]DWLRQ�8QLW

3HUFHQWDJH�'LVWULEXWLRQ

RI�(PSOR\HHV

%RDUG�' 41.8 %

%RDUG�8. 22.5 %

%RDUG�86 34.7 %

%RDUG�&$1 1.1 %

Below you see a pie chart that is based on the data provider.

1.1 %

�� ! �"#��$��

Board D

Board UK

Board US

Board CAN

41.8 %

22.5 %

34.7 %



([DPSOH�RI�D�/LQH�DQG�3URILOH�&KDUW

The following graphic shows a data provider that is used as the basis for a line and profile chart.

9DOXHV

�'DWDVHULHV�

&DWHJRU\

&DO<HDU�0RQWK 1R��2UGHU�,WHPV

01.2001 69

02.2001 65

03.2001 81

04.2001 67

05.2001 83

06.2001 80

07.2001 80

08.2001 22

09.2001 102

10.2001 114

11.2001 120

12.2001 98

/LQH�&KDUW

20

30

40

50

60

80

70

No. Order Items

01.2

001

02.2

001

03.2

001

04.2

001

05.2

001

06.2

001

07.2

001

08.2

001

09.2

001

10.2

001

11.2

001

12.2

001

90

100

110

120



3URILOH�&KDUW

01.2001

02.2001

03.2001

04.2001

05.2001

07.2001

06.2001

No. Order Items

20 40 60 80 100

120

08.2001

09.2001

10.2001

11.2001

12.2001

([DPSOH�RI�D�5DGDU�&KDUW

The following graphic shows a data provider that is used as the basis for a radar chart.

�� "!��$#&%��'��#(�)� *$"��+�,.-�� -$�$#(/�

JAN 2001 $ 353,505.57 $ 2,043,054.25

FEB 2001 $ 353,505.57 $ 681,884.52

MAR 2001 $ 1,445,213.95 $ 595,241.00

APR 2001 $ 74,513.43 $ 595,241.00

MAY 2001 $ 590,042.39 $ 577,912.29

JUN 2001 $272,927.09 $ 713,942.62

JUL 2001 $ 368,234.97 $ 1,262,396.12

AUG 2001 $ 242,601.86 $ 238,269.69

SEP 2001 $ 1,292,721.35 $ 1,262,396.12

OCT 2001 $ 454,661.88 $ 1,054,451.67

NOV 2001 $ 230,904.99 $ 1,232,937.32

DEC 2001 $ 76,246.30 $ 1,143,477.88

&DWHJRU\

9DOXHV

�'DWD

VHULHV�

Below you see a radar chart that is based on the data provider.



Frankfurt Munich

JAN 2001

FEB 2001

MAR 2001

APR 2001

MAY 2001

JUN 2001

JUL 2001

AUG 2001

SEP 2001

OCT 2001

NOV 2001

DEC 2001

([DPSOH�IRU�6XUIDFHV

The following graphic shows a data provider that is used as the basis for a surface.

&DWHJRU\

9DOXHV

�'DWD

VHULHV�

�� "!#��$

% �&�'(��)+*

% ��',�-.��/ � &�0

%213 �4 � 3 ��5 1 ��6��

�� 7��.��#�/ � &�0

01.2001 210 ST 520 ST 640 ST 510 ST

02.2001 210 ST 1020 ST 640 ST

03.2001 610 ST 220 ST 1240 ST 1010 ST

04.2001 610 ST 620 ST 1040 ST 1010 ST

05.2001 1120 ST 620 ST 830 ST 1010 ST

06.2001 1230 ST 520 ST 1130 ST 510 ST

07.2001 1230 ST 520 ST 730 ST 510 ST

09.2001 1520 ST 20 ST 1130 ST 510 ST

10.2001 1520 ST 20 ST 830 ST 510 ST

11.2001 1520 ST 20 ST 1730 ST 510 ST

12.2001 1020 ST 20 ST 1350 ST 510 ST

Below you see a surface chart that is based on the data provider.



01.2

001

02.2

001

03.2

001

04.2

001

05.2

001

06.2

001

07.2

001

09.2

001

10.2

001

11.2

001

12.2

001

Becker AG

200 ST

400 ST

600 ST

800 ST

1000 ST

1200 ST

1400 ST

1600 ST

1800 ST

Booktree Inc.

Bush Distribution

Calorado Inc.

([DPSOH�RI�D�7DFKRPHWHU

The following graphic shows a data provider with one data column that only contains one value. Thisvalue results in the pointer.

3RLQWHU

6DOHV�2UJDQL]DWLRQ )XOILOOPHQW�5DWH��

New York 95%

Below you see a tachometer that is based on the data provider.

Fulfillment Rate %




&KDUW�7\SHV

Class 2 includes the XY scatter, step and histogram chart types.

6WUXFWXUH�RI�WKH�'DWD�3URYLGHU

You build the underlying table of a chart type of class 2 as follows:

• The first data column contains the values to be entered on the X axis.

• The remaining data columns are assigned the Y values. These data columns are converted intodata series. The number of data series in the chart is thus computed from the total number of datacolumns minus 1.

The X value of a data point is always defined by the first data column. The Y value of a data point isdefined in one of the remaining data columns, depending on the data series to which the data pointbelongs.

([DPSOH�IRU�;<�6FDWWHU�&KDUW

The following graphic shows a data provider that is used as the basis for an XY scatter chart.

;�YDOXHV

4�� & �2�� !#��-.��-�6�#�� !#� ��-� �� 3 � �� 3

� 4�%��/ � �9.75 % $ 62,264,964.20 $ 68,995,325.63

)7.23 % $ 1,174,812.94 $ 1,266,360.63

%6.82 % $ 47,301.42 $ 50,762.50

�8.49 % $ 5,342,923.87 $ 5,838,424.38

48.14 % $ 6,462,629.13 $ 7,035,273.13

�8.53 % $ 2,645,798.36 $ 2,892,398.13

�8.22 % $ 4,597,710.86 $ 5,009,276.25

*9.84 % $ 15,111,527.82 $ 16,760,058.13

�8.65 % $ 2,842,611.88 $ 3,111,659.38

/12.22 % $ 23,243,258.36 $ 26,478,784.38

�10.39 % $ 494,921.35 $ 552.328,75

<�YDOXHV

Below you see an XY scatter chart that is based on the data provider.



��

�� !� �!"# $

Pot. sales Sales




&KDUW�7\SHV

The portfolio and quadrant chart types have class 3.

6WUXFWXUH�RI�WKH�'DWD�3URYLGHU�IRU�D�3RUWIROLR

You build the underlying table for a portfolio as follows:


• The second data column contains the values to be entered on the Y axis.

• The third data column is relevant for the bubble size.

• You can add further pairs of data columns to the table. The first data column of a pair alwayscontains the Y values and the second data column the bubble size.

The X value of a data point is always defined from the first data column. The Y value of a data point isdefined from the second, fourth, etc. data column, depending on the data column to which the datapoint belongs. The X and Y values together give you the center of the bubble.

6WUXFWXUH�RI�WKH�'DWD�3URYLGHU�IRU�D�4XDGUDQW

A quadrant simply relates two data points to each other. The first data point is displayed as a cross.The second data point is displayed as a point and arranged with respect to the cross. Since only twodata points are required, the underlying table should only have two rows.


• The second data column contains the values to be entered on the Y axis.

If the table contains more than two rows, the additional rows are ignored when the table isconverted into a chart.

3RUWIROLR�([DPSOH

The following graphic shows a data provider that is used as the basis for a portfolio.



;�YDOXHV

�� ! ��"�$# �"�%�&��' �()�* �('� + �* %('� +

, ��-.� � �./0�1�9.75 % $ 62.264.964,20 $ 68.995.325,63

27.23 % $ 1,174,812.94 $ 1,266,360.63

-6.82 % $ 47,301.42 $ 50,762.50

�8.49 % $ 5,342,923.87 $ 5,838,424.38

�8.14 % $ 6,462,629.13 $ 7,035,273.13

38.53 % $ 2,645,798.36 $ 2,892,398.13

48.22 % $ 4,597,710.86 $ 5,009,276.25

59.84 % $ 15,111,527.82 $ 16,760,058.13

68.65 % $ 2,842,611.88 $ 3,111,659.38

/12.22 % $ 23,243,258.36 $ 26,478,784.38

710.39 % $ 494,921.35 $ 552,328.75

<�YDOXHV %XEEOH�VL]H

Below you see a portfolio that is based on the data provider.

8�9%:�9<;>=&? ;A@0B":DCFEHG

IKJLNMOLPKQRS QRMTUV W



&KDQJLQJ�WKH�&KDUW�7\SH

8VH

A chart is normally displayed as a bar chart. You can change the chart type [Seite 101] for the entirechart.

You can also combine multiple chart types in the same chart by changing the chart type of a singledata series. For example you can display the planned turnover of several subsidiaries and show theaverage current turnover as a line.

3URFHGXUH

&KDQJLQJ�WKH�&KDUW�7\SH�RI�DQ�(QWLUH�&KDUW

1. Click on the chart with the right mouse key.

2. In the context menu choose &KDUW�7\SH.

This brings you to the &KDUW�2SWLRQV�dialog box.

The field $VVLJQ�WR�DOO�GDWD�URZV is selected and inactive. This shows you that the charttype is changed for the entire chart and not only for a single data series.

3. First select the type and then the required subtype.

4. Choose 2..

&KDQJLQJ�WKH�&KDUW�7\SH�RI�D�6LQJOH�'DWD�6HULHV

1. Click with the right mouse key on the data series whose chart type you want to change.

2. In the context menu choose &KDUW�7\SH.


3. First select the chart type and then the required subtype.

If you mark the field $VVLJQ�WR�DOO�GDWD�URZV, the chart type is changed for the entire chart,even if you only marked a single data series.

4. Choose 2..



$[HV�DQG�*ULGOLQHV

'HILQLWLRQ

Most of the chart types have two axes: a value axis and a category axis. With most chart types, thevalues of a data series are plotted along the value axis and the categories along the category axis.Normally the value axis corresponds to the Y axis and the category axis to the X axis.

Three-dimensional chart types such as cone and pyramid charts also have a third (Z) axis.

Gridlines are vertical and horizontal lines that divide up the plotting area. They improve the readabilityof the individual chart values.

8VH

The properties that you can define for axes are listed below. The properties that you can definedepend on the chart type you selected.

• Showing and Hiding Axes [Seite 118]

• Changing the Position of the Tick Marks [Seite 119]

• Changing the Scale [Seite 120]

• Changing the Point of Intersection of Axes [Seite 121]

• Reversing the Order of Categories and Values [Seite 123]

• Formatting Axes and Axis Labels [Seite 124]

You can only use the following functions for value axes:

• Changing the Start and End Points of a Value Axis [Seite 125]

• Changing the Value Axis Intervals [Seite 126]

• Adding a Value Range [Seite 128]

• Formatting a Value Range [Seite 129]

• Formatting the Value Range Title [Seite 130]

• Changing the Title and Values of a Value Range [Seite 131]

You can change the minor tick mark and tick mark label intervals [Seite 127] for category axes.

You can choose from the following functions for gridlines:

• Showing and Hiding Gridlines [Seite 133]

• Editing Gridlines [Seite 134]



6KRZLQJ�DQG�+LGLQJ�$[HV

8VH

You can decide whether to display axes in a chart and which axes should be displayed.

Pie charts and doughnuts do not have axes.

3URFHGXUH


2. In the context menu, choose &KDUW�2SWLRQV.

This brings you to the dialog box with the same name.

3. Choose tabstrip $[HV.

4. Select the axes you want to show. Deselect the axes you want to hide.

3ULPDU\�D[LV�describes the normal axis in the coordinate system and 6HFRQGDU\�D[LVdescribes the opposite axis.

5. Choose 2..



&KDQJLQJ�WKH�3RVLWLRQ�RI�WKH�7LFN�0DUNV

8VH

You can show or hide tick marks for the axes. You can also define if the tick marks should bedisplayed outside, inside or on both sides of the axes. You can define these settings separately for themajor and minor tick marks. Minor tick marks are a subdivision of the major tick marks.

You can make all the settings separately for each axis.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The axis to be changed is displayed. See Showing and Hiding Axes [Seite 118].

3URFHGXUH

1. Click with the right mouse key on the axis you want to change.

2. In the context menu choose )RUPDW�$[LV.



4. Define the 0DMRU�WLFN�PDUN�W\SH and 0LQRU�WLFN�PDUN�W\SH.

• 1RQH: Do not show any tick marks

• 2XWVLGH: Show tick marks outside the axis

• ,QVLGH: Show tick marks inside the axis

• &URVV: Show tick marks both outside and inside the axis

5. Choose 2..



&KDQJLQJ�WKH�6FDOH

8VH

You can choose one of the following scales when you use value axes:

• Linear

• Logarithmic

You can only change the scale for value axes, but not for category axes. It does notmatter if the X axis or the Y axis is the value axis.

The time scale type is not relevant in Web Publishing.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The axis to be changed is a value axis.

3URFHGXUH

1. Click with the right mouse key on the value axis you want to change.



3. Choose tabstrip 6FDOH.

4. In the 7\SH field choose the required type of scale.

5. Choose 2..



&KDQJLQJ�WKH�3RLQW�RI�,QWHUVHFWLRQ�RI�$[HV

8VH

You can change the point where the axes cross in a chart. You can also define if the point ofintersection should always lie between categories or on a category.

3URFHGXUH

&KDQJLQJ�WKH�3RLQW�RI�,QWHUVHFWLRQ�IRU�WKH�&DWHJRU\�$[LV

1. Click with the right mouse key on the category axis (normally the X axis).




4. Enter the desired setting. Your setting moves the position of the value axis (normally the Y axis) inthe chart:

• If you want the point of intersection to lie on a certain category, select &XVWRP in the 9DOXH�D[LVFURVVHV�DW list and enter the number of the category.

• If you want to move the value axis to the right border of the chart, select 0D[LPXP in the 9DOXHD[LV�FURVVHV�DW list.

• If you want to move the value axis to the right border of the chart, select 0D[LPXP in the 9DOXHD[LV�FURVVHV�DW list.

• To compute the point of intersection automatically, select $XWRPDWLF in the 9DOXH�D[LV�FURVVHV�DWlist.

5. Choose 2..

3RVLWLRQLQJ�D�3RLQW�RI�,QWHUVHFWLRQ�RQ�D�&DWHJRU\�RU�EHWZHHQ�&DWHJRULHV

The point of intersection for value axes and category axes lies between the categories by default.However, you can also define that the point of intersection should lie exactly on a category.





4. Choose the setting you want to use.

• If you want the point of intersection of the value axis and the category axis to lie between thecategories, select the 9DOXH�D[LV�FURVVHV�EHWZHHQ�FDWHJRULHV field. With this setting, the major tickmarks of the category axis are displayed between the categories.

• If you want the point of intersection to lie exactly on a category, deselect this field. With thissetting, the major tick marks of the category axis are displayed directly below the categories.

5. Choose 2..

&KDQJLQJ�WKH�3RLQW�RI�,QWHUVHFWLRQ�IRU�WKH�9DOXH�$[LV

1. Click with the right mouse key on the value axis (normally the Y axis).




4. Enter the desired setting. Your setting moves the position of the category axis (normally the Xaxis) in the chart:



• If you want the point of intersection with the category axis to lie at a certain value, select &XVWRPin the &DWHJRU\�D[LV�FURVVHV�DW list and enter the desired value.

• If you want to move the category axis to the upper border of the chart, select 0D[LPXP in the&DWHJRU\�D[LV�FURVVHV�DW list.

• To move the category axis back to the lower border of the chart, select 0LQLPXP in the &DWHJRU\D[LV�FURVVHV�DW list.

• To calculate the point of intersection automatically, select &DWHJRU\�D[LV�FURVVHV�DW.

5. Choose 2..



5HYHUVLQJ�WKH�2UGHU�RI�&DWHJRULHV�DQG�9DOXHV

8VH

You can reverse the order of the categories and the values in most of the chart types. This is notpossible for radar charts.

3URFHGXUH

1. Click with the right mouse key on the axis you want to change.




4. Select the appropriate field for the axis.

• To reverse the order of the categories on the category axis, select field &DWHJRULHV�LQ�UHYHUVHRUGHU.

• To reverse the order of the values on the value axis, select field 9DOXHV�LQ�UHYHUVH�RUGHU.

5. Choose 2..



)RUPDWWLQJ�$[HV�DQG�$[LV�/DEHOV

8VH

You can format the line of each axis individually.

You can also change the formatting of the axis labeling for each axis. You can also change the fontproperties and alignment of the axis labeling. You can define the format of the numbers that aredisplayed in the axis label. For example, you can select a percentile display or display the values withtheir currency. You can also display numbers with decimal places.

3URFHGXUH

1. Click with the right mouse key on the axis whose line or axis label you want to change.




&KDQJLQJ�/LQHV


2. Select the required formatting for the type of line, the color and the axis width.

&KDQJLQJ�)RQW�3URSHUWLHV

1. Choose tabstrip )RQW.

2. Select the required font properties for the axis label: font name, style (bold, italic, etc.), the size inpoints and the color.

&KDQJLQJ�WKH�1XPEHU�)RUPDW

1. Choose tabstrip 1XPEHU.

2. In field &DWHJRU\ choose the required category, e.g. 'DWH for date formats.

3. In field 1XPEHU�IRUPDWV choose the required format within the category.

4. If you are not yet satisfied with the format, you can change it directly in field 1XPEHU�IRUPDW.

&KDQJLQJ�WKH�$OLJQPHQW

1. Choose tabstrip $OLJQPHQW.

2. Select the required arrangement of the axis label, e.g. from left to right, from top to bottom orrotated by 90 degrees.



&KDQJLQJ�WKH�6WDUW�DQG�(QG�3RLQWV�RI�D�9DOXH�$[LV

8VH

You can determine the start and end points of a value axis automatically or define them manually.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The axis to be formatted is a value axis and not a category axis.

3URFHGXUH






'HILQLQJ�WKH�6WDUW�DQG�(QG�3RLQWV�$XWRPDWLFDOO\

1. To define the start point automatically, select field 0LQLPXP in column $XWR.

2. To define the end point automatically, select field 0D[LPXP in column $XWR.

&KDQJLQJ�WKH�6WDUW�DQG�(QG�3RLQWV�0DQXDOO\

1. Deselect field 0LQLPXP or 0D[LPXP in column $XWR.

2. Enter the required value in field 0LQLPXP or 0D[LPXP.



&KDQJLQJ�WKH�9DOXH�$[LV�,QWHUYDO

8VH

You can change the interval for the value axes, that is define the interval for the tick marks. You canchange these values separately for the major and minor tick marks.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The axis to be formatted is a value axis with a linear or logarithmic scale. See Changing the Scale[Seite 120].

3URFHGXUH





4. Make the changes described below and choose 2..

&KDQJLQJ�WKH�,QWHUYDO�0DQXDOO\

1. Deselect field 0DMRU�XQLW for the major tick marks or 0LQRU�XQLW for the minor tick marks.

2. Enter the interval you want in fields 0DMRU�XQLW or 0LQRU�XQLW.

You can only see the change if the major tick marks or minor tick marks are displayed.See Changing the Position of the Tick Marks [Seite 119].

'HILQLQJ�WKH�,QWHUYDO�$XWRPDWLFDOO\

Select field 0DMRU�XQLW for the major tick marks or 0LQRU�XQLW for the minor tick marks.



&KDQJLQJ�0LQRU�7LFN�0DUN�DQG�0LQRU�7LFN�0DUN�/DEHO,QWHUYDOV

8VH

Every category on the category axis is labeled and is separated from the other categories with tickmarks (major tick marks).

You can define the intervals in which the category axes should be labeled. Normally every category islabeled, but you can for example label only every second or third category.

You can also define that more than one category should be displayed between the tick marks so thatthe category axis has fewer tick marks. Normally exactly one category is displayed between two tickmarks (major tick marks) on the category axis.

3URFHGXUH





4. To change the distance between the labels, enter the appropriate value in field 1XPEHU�RIFDWHJRULHV�EHWZHHQ�WLFN�PDUN�ODEHOV. Enter 1 to label each category, enter 2 to label every secondcategory, and so on.

5. To change the distance between the tick marks, enter how many categories there should bebetween two tick marks in field 1XPEHU�RI�FDWHJRULHV�EHWZHHQ�WLFN�PDUNV.

6. Choose 2..



$GGLQJ�D�9DOXH�5DQJH

8VH

You can define a value range that should be highlighted in the chart. You can define a minimum,optimum and maximum value within the value range. These values are displayed in the chart with aline and can be assigned a title.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The axis to which the value range belongs is a value axis and is displayed in the chart. See Showingand Hiding Axes [Seite 118].

3URFHGXUH


2. In the context menu choose $GG�9DOXH�5DQJH.

You go to the )RUPDW�9DOXH�5DQJH�dialog box.

3. Repeat the following steps for all the values (minimum, optimum, maximum) you want to mark inthe chart:

4. Enter a title for the relevant value.

5. Define where the value should lie:

• If you want the position of the value to be defined automatically, select $XWRPDWLF.

• If you want to predefine a value, select the 9DOXH field and enter the minimum, optimum ormaximum value.

• If you do not want to mark a value in the chart, select the ,QYLVLEOH field for the correspondingvalue.

6. Choose 2..



)RUPDWWLQJ�9DOXH�5DQJHV

8VH

Every value range can have a minimum, optimum and maximum value. You can format the lines thatrepresent these values. You can also define a filling for the entire value range.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You already added a value range. See Adding a Value Range [Seite 128].

3URFHGXUH

Click with the right mouse key on the upper or lower border of the value range you want to format.

1. In the context menu choose )RUPDW�9DOXH�5DQJH.



&KDQJLQJ�WKH�)LOOLQJ�DQG�%RUGHU


2. Select the formatting for the filling and for the upper and lower borders of the value range. SeeChanging the Filling and Borders of Surfaces [Seite 95].

The upper border normally corresponds to the maximum value of the value range and thelower border corresponds to the minimum value.

&KDQJLQJ�/LQHV


2. Select the required formatting for the type of line and the color of the line within a value range.

This setting only refers to the line within a value range. This is normally the line for theoptimum value. The upper and lower lines of the value range can be formatted with the3DWWHUQ tabstrip.



)RUPDWWLQJ�WKH�9DOXH�5DQJH�7LWOH

8VH

Every value range can have a minimum, optimum and maximum value. You can format the titles forthese values individually.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You already added a value range and defined titles for the values. See Adding Value Ranges [Seite128].

3URFHGXUH

1. Click with the right mouse key on the title of the value you want to format.

2. In the context menu choose )RUPDW�9DOXH�5DQJH�7LWOH.


3. Make the changes described below and choose 2..

You can change the titles of all the values of the current value range with tabstrip 9DOXH5DQJH. However, all formatting selected in the other tabstrips only refer to the title youselected before calling the dialog box.



2. Choose the required formatting for the filling and for the border of the box surrounding the title.See Changing the Filling and Border of Surfaces [Seite 95].



2. Select the required font properties for the title: font name, style (bold, italic, etc.), the size in pointsand the color.



2. Select the required arrangement of the title, e.g. from left to right, from top to bottom or rotated by90 degrees.



&KDQJLQJ�WKH�7LWOH�DQG�9DOXHV�RI�D�9DOXH�5DQJH

8VH

You can change a value range after defining it. The minimum, optimum and maximum values can bechanged as well as the relevant titles for these values.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You already added a value range. See Adding a Value Range [Seite 128].

3URFHGXUH

&KDQJLQJ�WKH�9DOXHV�RI�WKH�9DOXH�5DQJH�IURP�D�'LDORJ�%R[

1. Click with the right mouse key on the upper or lower border of the value range you want tochange.



3. Choose tabstrip 9DOXH�5DQJH.

4. Enter the new value.

5. Choose 2..

&KDQJLQJ�9DOXHV�RI�WKH�9DOXH�5DQJH�'LUHFWO\�LQ�WKH�&KDUW

If you entered the values yourself when you added the value range, you can change the valuesdirectly in the chart. If you defined the values automatically, you can only change them from the)RUPDW�9DOXH�5DQJH�dialog box.

To change the values directly in the chart:

1. Click on the upper or lower border of the value range.

The value range is selected.

2. Point to the line representing the value to be changed.


3. Click on the line and keep the mouse key pressed.

4. Pull the line to the required value and let go of the mouse key.

&KDQJLQJ�7LWOHV�RI�9DOXHV

1. Click on one of the titles in the value range with the right mouse key.

2. In the context menu choose )RUPDW�9DOXH�5DQJH�7LWOH.

3. This brings you to the dialog box with the same name.

4. Choose tabstrip 9DOXH�5DQJH.

5. Enter the new title.

You can change the titles of all the values of the current value range with tabstrip 9DOXH5DQJH. However, all formatting selected in the other tabstrips only refer to the title youselected before calling the dialog box.

6. Choose 2..



6KRZLQJ�DQG�+LGLQJ�*ULG�/LQHV

8VH

You can make it easier to read values by displaying major and minor gridlines for both the X and Yaxes. You can also define the axes (main axis, secondary axis) for which the grid lines should bedisplayed.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The chart is neither a pie chart nor a doughnut.

3URFHGXUH




3. Choose tabstrip *ULGOLQHV.

4. Select the 0DMRU�JULGOLQHV and 0LQRU�JULGOLQHV you want to display.

5. Deselect the gridlines you want to hide.

6. Choose 2..



(GLWLQJ�*ULGOLQHV

8VH

You can format the type of line, color and width of the gridlines individually. You can define theseproperties separately for each type of gridline, for example you can format the major gridlines of the Xaxis differently from those of the Y axis.

For the gridlines you can also change the scaling of all the properties that you can change for theaxes. Which properties these are depends on whether you are editing gridlines of the category axis orof the value axis.

3URFHGXUH

1. Click with the right mouse key on the gridlines you want to format, for example the major gridlinesof the X axis.

2. In the context menu choose )RUPDW�*ULGOLQHV.



&KDQJLQJ�/LQHV


2. Select the required formatting for the type of line, the color and the gridline width.

&KDQJLQJ�2WKHU�3URSHUWLHV


2. Make the required changes.

Gridlines always has the same scaling properties as the corresponding axis. All thechanges you make in tabstrip 6FDOH therefore directly affect the corresponding axis. Forexample, if you change the interval of the minor gridlines for the value axis, the interval ofthe value axis is also changed appropriately.



'DWD�6HULHV�DQG�'DWD�3RLQWV

'HILQLWLRQ

A data series consists of related data points. Each data series is uniquely identified by its own color orpattern. In a pie chart, only one data series is displayed. In other chart types you can display morethan one data series.

A data point is a single element of a data series. For example, a data point is displayed by a slice of apie, a point or a bar.

8VH

You have a number of formatting options for data series and data points. Note that the previewwindow only shows sample data. You only see the actual data once it has been published.

You should change the preview window settings so that the number of data series and data pointscorrespond to the data provider. You can then change the formatting of individual data series. Forchart types of class 1, the uppermost data series in the legend corresponds to the first table row, thenext data series corresponds to the second table row, etc.

You can edit data series as follows:

• Plotting a Data Series to a Secondary Axis [Seite 137]

• Formatting Data Series [Seite 138]

• Smoothing Lines [Seite 140]

• Adding, Changing and Removing Trendlines [Seite 141]

• Formatting Trendline Equations [Seite 143]

• Adding and Removing Error Bars [Seite 144]

• Editing Error Bars [Seite 146]

The following functions are only available for pie charts and ring charts:

• Rotating Pie and Ring Charts [Seite 152]

• Deactivating the Color Change for a Pie or Ring Chart [Seite 153]

• Changing the Ring Width [Seite 154]

The following functions are only available for histograms:

• Adding and Removing Normal Distributions [Seite 147]

• Editing a Normal Distribution [Seite 148]

• Formatting the Title of a Normal Distribution [Seite 149]

The following functions are only available for tachometers:

• Formatting the Tachometer Needle Label [Seite 150]

• Changing the Value Range of a Tachometer [Seite 151]

The following functions refer to 3D charts:

• Changing the Depth of 3D Charts [Seite 155]

• Formatting Walls and Floors [Seite 156]

In a portfolio or quadrant chart you can change the position of the quadrants [Seite 157]. If required,you can add drop lines [Seite 158] to a surface, profile or line chart.

You can edit the data points of a data series as follows:

• Formatting Data Points [Seite 159]

• Changing the Distance between Groups of Data Points [Seite 160]



• Changing the Overlapping of Data Points [Seite 161]



3ORWWLQJ�D�'DWD�6HULHV�WR�D�6HFRQGDU\�$[LV

8VH

If the value ranges of data series vary considerably or if mixed data types are used, you can plot oneor more data series to a secondary axis (Y axis). For example, you can plot the number of houses soldon the left Y axis (main axis) and the average price on the right Y axis (secondary axis).

3URFHGXUH

1. Click with the right mouse key on the data series for which you want to plot a secondary axis.

2. In the context menu choose )RUPDW�'DWD�6HULHV.


3. Choose tabstrip $[HV.

4. Select option 6HFRQGDU\�D[LV.

5. Choose 2..



)RUPDWWLQJ�'DWD�6HULHV

8VH

You can format each data series in a chart individually. Data series are displayed as lines, as surfacesor, in the case of a tachometer, as tachometer needles, depending on the chart type. The optionsavailable depend on how the data series is displayed.

3URFHGXUH

1. Click with the right mouse key on the data series you want to format.


You can also select the data series to be formatted in context menu )RUPDW�'DWD�6HULHVand in the submenu.

This brings you to the dialog box with the same name. Depending on the chart type, tabstrip3DWWHUQ, /LQH or 3RLQWHU is displayed.


&KDQJLQJ�6XUIDFHV

1. If the data series is to be displayed as a surface (e.g. for bar or pie charts),choose tabstrip 3DWWHUQ.

2. Select the formatting for the filling and for the border of the surfaces. See Changing the Filling andBorders of Surfaces [Seite 95].

&KDQJLQJ�/LQHV

1. If you want to display the data series as a line (e.g. for line charts or radar charts), choose tabstrip/LQH.

2. Select the required formatting for the type of line, the color and the line width.

3. With 0DUNHU you can also define the symbol with which the individual data points should bedisplayed and how the symbol should be formatted.


• If you do not want to mark the data points, choose 1RQH.

• If you want to set up your own formatting, choose &XVWRP� In the 6W\OH list, choose the symbol tobe used to display the data points. If required, change the colors of the symbol and define the sizeof the symbol in field 6L]H.

&KDQJLQJ�WKH�7DFKRPHWHU�1HHGOH

1. For a tachometer, choose tabstrip 3RLQWHU.

2. Under /LQH select the required formatting for the tachometer needle. You can define the type ofline, color and breadth of the tachometer needle. You can also give the tachometer needle anarrowhead and define its size.

3. With 0DUNHU you can also define the symbol to be displayed on the tachometer needle and howthe symbol should be formatted.


• If you do not want to display a symbol, choose 1RQH.

• If you want to set up your own formatting, choose &XVWRP� In the 6W\OH list, choose the symbol tobe displayed on the tachometer needle. If required, change the colors of the symbol and definethe size of the symbol in field 6L]H.

4. If you want to label the tachometer needle, select the /DEHO field under 3RLQWHU�/DEHO and enter thetext.



6PRRWKLQJ�/LQHV

8VH

For data series that have the form of a line (for example in line or profile charts), an interpolated curveis drawn between related data points. You can smooth the curve if necessary. This does not changethe underlying data.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The chart to be formatted is a line chart, radar chart, profile chart or point chart.

3URFHGXUH

1. Click with the right mouse key on the data series you want to format.




4. Select 6PRRWK.

5. Choose 2..



$GGLQJ��&KDQJLQJ�DQG�5HPRYLQJ�7UHQGOLQHV

8VH

You can visualize the trend of a data series using a trendline for a number of chart types. You can alsoextend the trendline past the data series in the chart in order to forecast future values and derive pastvalues. There are the following types of trendlines:

• Linear: A linear trendline is an optimized straight line that is suitable for linear datasets. A datasetis linear if the pattern of data points resembles a line. A linear trendline normally displays aconstant increase or decrease in values.

• Logarithmic: A logarithmic trendline is an optimized curve that is ideal if the rate of changes to thedata first increases or decreases sharply and then stays nearly the same. A logarithmic trendlinecan use negative and/or positive values.

• Potential: A potential trendline is a curve. It should be used for datasets that comparemeasurements that increase with a certain rate (for example, the acceleration of a racing car in 1second intervals). You cannot add a potential trendline if your data contains null or negativevalues.

• Exponential: An exponential trendline is a curve that is suitable for data values that increase ordecrease with an increasing tendency. You cannot add an exponential trendline if your datacontains null or negative values.

• Floating average: The floating average smoothes out data fluctuations and therefore can show atrend or pattern more clearly. The floating average consists of a series of averages that arecomputed from elements of the data series. A floating average uses a certain number of datapoints, computes there mean value and then uses this mean value as a point in the curve.

You can change all the properties of a trendline that you can define when you add the trendline. Youcan delete a trendline that you do not need.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The chart is a two-dimensional bar, surface, line, portfolio, profile, point or column diagram or ahistogram.

3URFHGXUH

$GGLQJ�7UHQGOLQHV

1. Click with the right mouse key on the data series for which you want to compute the trend.

2. In the context menu choose $GG�7UHQGOLQH.

The )RUPDW�7UHQGOLQH�dialog box appears.

3. On the 7UHQGOLQH tabstrip, choose the type of trend you require.

4. The type of trendline and the name of the data series is displayed as legend text in the legend. Ifyou want to use a different legend text, deselect field 7UHQGOLQH�QDPH�$XWRPDWLF and enter therequired text.

5. Not for floating average: The trendline can also display past and future developments. Enter howfar in the future (field )RUZDUG) and past (field %DFNZDUG) the trendline should be displayed.

6. Not for floating average: If you want to display the equation on which the trendline is based in thechart, select field 'LVSOD\�HTXDWLRQ�RQ�FKDUW.

7. Only for floating average: Enter the number of data points to be used to compute the averagevalue in field 3HULRGV. The average values are then used as points of the trendline.

8. If you want to change the line type and color of the line, choose the required options on tabstrip/LQH.

9. Choose 2..



&KDQJLQJ�7UHQGOLQHV

1. Click with the right mouse key on the trendline you want to change.

2. In the context menu choose )RUPDW�7UHQGOLQH.

3. Change the properties and choose 2..

5HPRYLQJ�7UHQGOLQHV

1. Click on the trendline you want to remove.

2. Press <Del>.

You can also remove trendlines by clicking on the trendline with the right mouse key andchoosing 'HOHWH in the context menu.



)RUPDWWLQJ�7UHQGOLQH�(TXDWLRQV

8VH

When you add a trendline, you can decide if the equation on which the trendline is based should bedisplayed in the chart. If you display the equation, you can change the formatting of the equation.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You added a trendline and defined that the equation should be displayed in the chart.

3URFHGXUH

1. Click with the right mouse key on the equation you want to format.

2. In the context menu choose )RUPDW�7UHQGOLQH�/DEHO.





2. Choose the required formatting for the filling and for the border of the box surrounding theequation. See Changing the Filling and Border of Surfaces [Seite 95].



2. Select the required font properties for the equation: font name, style (bold, italic, etc.), the size inpoints and the color.



2. In field &DWHJRU\ choose the required category, e.g. 1XPEHU for number formats.





2. Select the required arrangement of the axis label, e.g. from left to right, from top to bottom orrotated by 90 degrees.



$GGLQJ�DQG�5HPRYLQJ�(UURU�%DUV

8VH

Error bars graphically show possible errors or unclear data points. This is particularly relevant forcharts that show the results of scientific investigations. The selected chart type determines whether ornot you can add error bars and defines the axis that the error bar refers to.

You can delete error bars that you do not need.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You can add error bars for either the Y axis or the X axis for bar charts, surface charts, line charts,profile charts and vertical bar charts as well as for histograms and tachometers. This depends onwhich of the two axes is the value axis.

You can add error bars for both the X axis and the Y axis for portfolio, point, quadrant and step charts.

3URFHGXUH

$GGLQJ�(UURU�%DUV

1. Click with the right mouse key on the data series for which you want to add error bars.



3. Choose tabstrip ;�(UURU�%DUV or <�(UURU�%DUV, depending on the chart type and the axis for whichyou want to add the error bars.

4. Under 'LVSOD\ choose whether and in which direction the error bars for the X axis or Y axis shouldbe displayed:

• Plus and minus error bars

• Only plus error bars

• Only minus error bars

• No error bars

5. Under (UURU�DPRXQW choose the method to be used to locate the error.

• If you want to use a constant error amount, select )L[HG�YDOXH and enter the value.

• If you want to use a percentile value for the individual data points, select 3HUFHQWDJH and enter thevalue.

• If you want to use a certain number of standard deviations from the mean of the values displayedgraphically, select 6WDQGDUG�GHYLDWLRQ and enter the number.

• If you want to use the standard error, select 6WDQGDUG�HUURU.

• If you want to define the error yourself, select &XVWRP. Enter the deviation up and down in thefields � and ± .

6. Choose 2..

5HPRYLQJ�(UURU�%DUV

1. Click with the right mouse key on the error bars of the data series you want to delete.

2. Press <Del>.



(GLWLQJ�(UURU�%DUV

8VH

You can format the error bars of a data series individually. You can also change all the properties youdefined when you added error bars.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You already added error bars to a data series.

3URFHGXUH

1. Click with the right mouse key on the error bars of the data series that you want to format orchange.

2. In the context menu choose )RUPDW�(UURU�%DUV.



)RUPDWWLQJ�(UURU�%DUV


2. Under /LQH choose the required formatting for the type and color of the line.

3. Under 0DUNHU define whether the error bars should be displayed delimited with lines or withoutlines.

&KDQJLQJ�(UURU�%DUV

1. Choose tabstrip ;�(UURU�%DUV or <�(UURU�%DUV, depending on the chart type and the axis for whichyou want to change the error bars.

2. Change the properties as required. You have the same options as for adding error bars, seeAdding and Removing Error Bars [Seite 144].



$GGLQJ�DQG�5HPRYLQJ�1RUPDO�'LVWULEXWLRQV

8VH

If you assign chart type Histogram, you can select a subtype that automatically displays the normaldistribution for each data series. You can also add normal distributions afterwards.

You can delete a normal distribution that you do not need.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The chart is a histogram.

3URFHGXUH

$GGLQJ�D�1RUPDO�'LVWULEXWLRQ

1. Click with the right mouse key on the data series for which you want to display the normaldistribution.

2. In the context menu choose $GG�1RUPDO�'LVWULEXWLRQ.

The normal distribution is displayed in the chart. You can also change the properties of the normaldistribution if needed. See Editing the Normal Distribution [Seite 148].

5HPRYLQJ�WKH�1RUPDO�'LVWULEXWLRQ

1. Click on the normal distribution you want to remove.

2. Press <Del>.

You can also remove a normal distribution by clicking on it with the right mouse key andchoosing 'HOHWH in the context menu.



(GLWLQJ�D�1RUPDO�'LVWULEXWLRQ

8VH

You can edit every normal distribution that is displayed for a data series in a histogram. You candefine the mean value and standard deviation. You can also define a title for the normal distributionand format the curve.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The chart is a histogram. Either you selected a subtype that automatically also displays normaldistributions or you added normal distributions afterwards.

3URFHGXUH

1. Click with the right mouse key on the normal distribution you want to edit.

2. In the context menu choose )RUPDW�1RUPDO�'LVWULEXWLRQ.



&KDQJLQJ�WKH�0HDQ�9DOXH

1. Choose tabstrip 1RUPDO�'LVWULEXWLRQ.

2. Enter the new mean value.

&KDQJLQJ�WKH�6WDQGDUG�'HYLDWLRQ


2. Enter the new standard deviation.

'LVSOD\LQJ�7LWOHV�LQ�&KDUWV


2. Select field 'LVSOD\�QDPH�RQ�FKDUW if you also want to display the title displayed in field 'LVWULEXWLRQQDPH in the chart.

&KDQJLQJ�7LWOHV


2. Deselect field $XWRPDWLF.

3. Change the title in field 'LVWULEXWLRQ�QDPH.

)RUPDWWLQJ�&XUYHV


2. Select the formatting for the filling and border of the curve. See Changing the Filling and Bordersof Surfaces [Seite 95].



)RUPDWWLQJ�WKH�7LWOH�RI�D�1RUPDO�'LVWULEXWLRQ

8VH

If the title of a normal distribution is displayed in the chart, you can format the font properties and titlealignment individually.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You assigned chart type histogram and selected a subtype that also displays the normal distribution.You also defined that the title of the normal distribution should be displayed in the chart.

3URFHGXUH

1. Click with the right mouse key on the title of the normal distribution you want to format.

2. In the context menu choose )RUPDW�1RUPDO�'LVWULEXWLRQ�/DEHO.





2. Select the required font properties for the title: font name, style (bold, italic, etc.), the size in pointsand the color.



2. Select the required arrangement of the title, e.g. from left to right, from top to bottom or rotated by90 degrees.



)RUPDWWLQJ�WKH�7DFKRPHWHU�1HHGOH�/DEHO

8VH

If you defined that a tachometer should have a tachometer needle label, you can format the labelindividually.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You assigned the tachometer needle a label with the Format Data Series [Seite 138] function.

3URFHGXUH

1. Click with the right mouse key on the label you want to format.

2. In the context menu choose )RUPDW�3RLQWHU�/DEHOV.





2. Select the required font properties for the text: font name, style (bold, italic, etc.), the size in pointsand the color.



2. Select the required arrangement of the text, e.g. from left to right, from top to bottom or rotated by90 degrees.



&KDQJLQJ�WKH�9DOXH�5DQJH�RI�D�7DFKRPHWHU

8VH

A tachometer is normally divided into several value ranges that are displayed in different colors. Youcan change the start and end of a value range as well as its color.

3URFHGXUH

1. Click with the right mouse key on the value range you want to change.



3. Enter the start and end for the value range in fields )URP and 7R.

4. Select a color for the value range.

5. Choose 2..



5RWDWLQJ�3LH�DQG�5LQJ�&KDUWV

8VH

You can change the angle of the first segment of a pie or ring chart, thus rotating the entire pie or ringcharts.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The chart is a pie or ring chart.

3URFHGXUH

1. Click with the right mouse key on the pie or on one of the rings of the ring chart.



3. Choose tabstrip 2SWLRQV.

4. In field $QJOH�RI�ILUVW�VOLFH, enter the number of degrees by which you want to rotate the pie or ringsclockwise.

5. Choose 2..



'HDFWLYDWLQJ�WKH�&RORU�&KDQJH�IRU�D�3LH�RU�5LQJ

8VH

In pie charts and ring charts, each data point is normally displayed in a different color. However, youcan define that all data points of a data series should have the same color. In this case, all thesegments of a ring chart are displayed in the same color. All the segments of a slice of the ring charthave the same color in a pie chart.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The chart is a pie chart or ring chart.

3URFHGXUH

1. Click with the right mouse key on the pie chart or on a slice of the ring chart.




4. Deselect field 9DU\�FRORUV�E\�SRLQW.

5. Choose 2..

You can also change the color of the pie chart or doughnut slices. See Formatting Data Series [Seite138].



&KDQJLQJ�WKH�5LQJ�:LGWK

8VH

In a ring chart, the data series are arranged in rings around an inner circle. The inner circle does notrepresent a data series. You can define how large the inner circle should be and thus how wide eachring should be. The larger the inner circle, the narrower the rings will be displayed.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The chart is a ring chart.

3URFHGXUH

1. Click on one of the rings with the right mouse key.




4. In the 'RXJKQXW�KROH�VL]H field, enter the percentage the inner circle should occupy in relationshipto the entire chart. You can enter a value between 10 and 90 percent.

5. Choose 2..



&KDQJLQJ�WKH�'HSWK�RI��'�&KDUWV

8VH

You can change the diagram depth of 3D charts with the following options:

• You can change the depth of the data points, for example the depth of the cone or cylinder.

• You can change the distance from the data points to the back wall.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The chart is a 3D column, 3D bar, cone, pyramid or cylinder chart.

3URFHGXUH

1. Click on the row of data with the right mouse key.




4. To change the depth of the data points, enter the required value in field &KDUW�GHSWK. The largerthe value, the greater the depth.

5. To change the gap between the back wall and the data points, enter a value between 0 and 500 infield *DS�GHSWK. The larger the value, the greater the gap.



)RUPDWWLQJ�:DOOV�DQG�)ORRUV

8VH

In a 3D chart, two walls are displayed as the background for the data series and the data series areplaced on a floor. You can choose any filling and border as well as walls and floor you like.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The chart is a 3D chart, for example a pyramid, cylinder or cone diagram.

3URFHGXUH

1. Click with the right mouse key on one of the walls or on the floor, depending on which surface youwant to format.

If you cannot select the floor, you should temporarily hide the axis in front of it. SeeShowing and Hiding Axes [Seite 118]. It is then easier to select the floor. Once you haveformatted the floor, you can show the axis again.

2. In the context menu choose )RUPDW�:DOOV or )RUPDW�)ORRU.



4. Choose 2..



&KDQJLQJ�4XDGUDQWV

8VH

In a chart of type portfolio or quadrant, the plot area represents four areas (quadrants): normally a redand a green quadrant as well as two yellow quadrants. Normally red symbolizes a negative quadrant,green a positive quadrant and yellow a neutral quadrant. The data points are arranged in thesequadrants. As a result, one can immediately see how the turnover of a subsidiary should be evaluated.

You can change the color of the quadrants and define where the transition between the quadrantsshould be. You can also deactivate display of the quadrants.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The chart is a portfolio or a quadrant.

3URFHGXUH

1. Click with the right mouse key on the plot area, for example on a free area within the X and Yaxes.

2. In the context menu choose )RUPDW�3ORW�$UHD.

The )RUPDW�3ORW dialog box appears.

3. Click on the legend with the right mouse key.

4. Select tabstrip 4XDGUDQWV.

5. To change the transition between the quadrants, enter the new values in fields ;�$[LV and <�$[LV.

6. To change the colors, select under &RORUV the colors for the 7RS�/HIW, 7RS�5LJKW, %RWWRP�/HIW and%RWWRP�5LJKW quadrants.

7. If you do not want to display any quadrants, deselect the 9LVLEOH field.

8. Choose 2..



6KRZLQJ�DQG�+LGLQJ�'URS�/LQHV

8VH

In surface and line charts you can display drop lines that go from the data point to the X axis. Thisshows you the position of the individual data points, especially in surface charts.

If you do not want to display drop lines, you can hide them.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The chart is an area, profile or line chart.

3URFHGXUH

1. Click on the data series with the right mouse key.




4. If you want to display drop lines, select field 'URS�OLQHV� If you do not want to display drop lines,deselect this field.

5. Choose 2..



)RUPDWWLQJ�'DWD�3RLQWV

8VH

You can format each data point in a chart individually. The options available depend on the chart type.

3URFHGXUH

1. Click on the data series to which the data point to be formatted belongs.

The entire data series is selected.

2. Click on the data point to be formatted.

Only the data point is selected.

3. Click on the data point with the right mouse key.

4. In the context menu choose )RUPDW�'DWD�3RLQW.

This brings you to the dialog box with the same name. Depending on the chart type, tabstrip3DWWHUQ, or /LQH is displayed.


&KDQJLQJ�6XUIDFHV

1. If you want to display the data point in the form of a surface (e.g. for bar or pie charts), choosetabstrip 3DWWHUQ.

2. Select the formatting for the filling and for the border of the surfaces. See Changing the Filling andBorders of Surfaces [Seite 95].

&KDQJLQJ�/LQHV

1. If the data point lies on a line (e.g. for line charts or radar charts), select tabstrip /LQH.

2. Select the required formatting for the part of the line that belongs to the selected data point. Youcan define the type of line, color and width of the line.

The formatting of the rest of the line is not changed by this setting.

3. With 0DUNHU you can also define the symbol to be used to display the data point and how thesymbol should be formatted.


• If you do not want to mark the data point, choose 1RQH.

• If you want to set up your own formatting, choose &XVWRP� In the 6W\OH list, choose the symbol tobe used to display the data point. If required, change the colors of the symbol and define the sizeof the symbol in field 6L]H.



&KDQJLQJ�WKH�'LVWDQFH�EHWZHHQ�*URXSV�RI�'DWD�3RLQWV

8VH

The data points are arranged in groups for chart types representing data series for example ascolumns, bars or cylinders. You can change the distance between the groups if required.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The chart is a column, bar, cone, profile, pyramid or cylinder chart.

3URFHGXUH

1. Click on the data series with the right mouse key.




4. Enter a distance between 0 and 500 in field 'LVWDQFH. The larger the value, the larger the distancebetween the groups.

5. Choose 2..



&KDQJLQJ�WKH�2YHUODSSLQJ�RI�'DWD�3RLQWV

8VH

You can change how data points overlap for chart types that display data series as columns or bars.Normally data points of a group are arranged next to each other without overlapping.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The chart is a column or bar chart.

3URFHGXUH

1. Click on the row of data with the right mouse key.




4. Enter a value between -100 and 100 in field 2YHUODS. The larger the value, the greater theoverlapping. The smaller the value, the larger the gap between the data points.

5. Choose 2..



7LWOHV��'DWD�/DEHOV�DQG�/HJHQGV

'HILQLWLRQ

A title for the entire chart as well as for each individual axis in the chart can be displayed in a chart.

A data label gives supplementary information for example about a data series or a data point.

The legend explains the colors, patterns and symbols used in a chart.

8VH

You can add chart titles, axis titles and data labels and change their formatting. You can also removeall the elements you added:

• Adding and Removing Chart Titles [Seite 163]

• Adding and Removing Axis Titles and Units [Seite 164]

• Formatting Chart Titles, Axis Titles and Units [Seite 165]

• Adding Data Labels [Seite 166]

• Formatting Data Labels [Seite 168]

• Removing Data Labels [Seite 169]

• Changing Texts of Titles, Units and Data Labels [Seite 170]

You can add and format legends. You can also remove legends if required:

• Adding and Removing Legends [Seite 171]

• Formatting Legend Texts and Symbols [Seite 172]

• Formatting the Legend Background [Seite 173]

You can change the position of the chart title and legend directly in the chart if you permitted this whenyou added the corresponding element. You can change the position of axis titles, units and data labelsdirectly in the chart. See Changing the Position of Chart Elements [Seite 99].



$GGLQJ�DQG�5HPRYLQJ�&KDUW�7LWOHV

8VH

You can give the entire chart a title in order to give a brief explanation of the contents of the chart.

You can delete the chart title if it is not required.

3URFHGXUH

$GGLQJ�D�&KDUW�7LWOH




3. Choose tabstrip 7LWOH.

4. Enter the chart title in field &KDUW�WLWOH.

5. If you want to be able to change the chart title directly in the chart, select field (GLWDEOH.

6. If you want to be able to change the position of the chart title, select field 0RYHDEOH.

7. Choose 2..

You can change the formatting of the chart title that has been added, see Formatting the Chart Title,Axis Title and Units [Seite 165].

'HOHWLQJ�WKH�&KDUW�7LWOH

1. Click on the chart title.

2. Press <Del>.



$GGLQJ�DQG�5HPRYLQJ�$[LV�7LWOHV�DQG�8QLWV

8VH

You can give the X and Y axes a title. You can also enter the units to be displayed on the axes, forexample mill. US $.

If you do not need an axis title or unit, you can delete these elements.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The axis to be given an axis title or whose unit you want to enter is displayed, see Showing and HidingAxes [Seite 118].

3URFHGXUH

$GGLQJ�DQ�$[LV�7LWOH�RU�8QLW




3. Choose tabstrip 7LWOH.

4. If you want to add a title or unit to the main axes, enter them in the corresponding fields under&DWHJRU\��;��D[LV and 9DOXH��<��D[LV.

5. If you also want to assign a title or unit for the secondary axes, enter these values in thecorresponding fields under 6HFRQGDU\�FDWHJRU\��;��D[LV and 6HFRQGDU\�YDOXH��<��D[LV.

6. Choose 2..

You can change the formatting as required once you have added the axis title and units, seeFormatting Chart Titles, Axis Titles and Units [Seite 165].

5HPRYLQJ�WKH�$[LV�7LWOH�RU�8QLW

1. Click on the axis title or unit to be deleted.

2. Press <Del>.



)RUPDWWLQJ�&KDUW�7LWOHV��$[LV�7LWOHV�DQG�8QLWV

8VH

You can format the chart title and each axis title individually. If you added the axis units, you can alsochange their formatting.

You can change the filling and border of the box surrounding a title or unit. You can also change thefont properties and alignment.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You already added a chart title, axis title or axis unit, see Adding and Removing Chart Titles [Seite163] and Adding and Removing Axis Titles and Units [Seite 164].

3URFHGXUH

1. Click with the right mouse key on the element you want to format.

2. In the context menu choose )RUPDW�&KDUW�7LWOH, )RUPDW�$[LV�/DEHO or )RUPDW�$[LV�7LWOH�8QLW.

The dialog box )RUPDW�&KDUW�7LWOH or )RUPDW�$[LV�/DEHO�appears.




2. Select the required formatting for the filling and for the border of the box surrounding the text. SeeChanging the Filling and Border of Surfaces [Seite 95].



2. Select the required font properties for the text: font name, style (bold, italic, etc.), the size in pointsand the color.



2. Select the required arrangement of the text, e.g. from left to right, from top to bottom or rotated by90 degrees.



$GGLQJ�'DWD�/DEHOV

8VH

If required, you can also display data labels in a chart and thus for example display the absolute valuefor all data points. You can add data labels for all data series, for a single data series or for a singledata point.

3URFHGXUH

$GGLQJ�'DWD�/DEHOV�WR�DOO�'DWD�6HULHV




3. Choose tabstrip 'DWD�/DEHOV.

4. Choose the required option as described below.

5. Choose 2..

$GGLQJ�'DWD�/DEHOV�WR�2QH�'DWD�6HULHV

1. Click with the right mouse key on the data series for which you want to add a data label.





5. Choose 2..

$GGLQJ�'DWD�/DEHOV�WR�D�'DWD�3RLQW

1. Click on the data series to which the data point belongs.

The entire data series is selected.

2. Click on the data point to which you want to add a data label.

Only the data point is selected.

3. Click on the data point with the right mouse key.

4. In the context menu choose )RUPDW�'DWD�3RLQW.




7. Choose 2..

2SWLRQV�IRU�'DWD�/DEHOV

The options you can use in tabstrip 'DWD�/DEHOV� depend on the chart type you selected. You have thefollowing options:

1RQH: Do not display any data label

6KRZ�YDOXH: Display absolute value

6KRZ�SHUFHQW: Show the percentual value (only for pie charts and ring charts

6KRZ�ODEHO: Display the text

6KRZ�ODEHO�DQG�YDOXH: Display the text and the absolute value



6KRZ�ODEHO�DQG�SHUFHQW: Display the text and the percentual value (only for pie and ring charts)

6KRZ�EXEEOH�VL]H: Display the size of the bubble (only for portfolio charts)

6KRZ�ODEHO�DQG�EXEEOH�VL]H: Display the text and the size of the bubbles (only for portfolio charts)



)RUPDWWLQJ�'DWD�/DEHOV

8VH

You can format the data labels of a data series individually.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You already added data labels, see Adding Data Labels [Seite 166].

3URFHGXUH

1. Click with the right mouse key on one of the data labels belonging to the data series.

2. In the context menu choose )RUPDW�'DWD�/DEHOV.





2. Choose the required formatting for the filling and for the border of the box surrounding the datalabels. See Changing the Filling and Border of Surfaces [Seite 95].



2. Select the required font properties for the data labels: font name, style (bold, italic, etc.), the size inpoints and the color.



2. In the lists +RUL]RQWDO and 9HUWLFDO, select how the text should be arranged within the boxsurrounding the text.

3. In the list 3RVLWLRQ, select where the data label should be displayed with regard to the data point.

• 2XWVLGH�HQG: At the outmost end of the data point, e.g. directly above a column

• ,QVLGH�HQG: At the innermost end of the data point, e.g. directly below the upper edge of a column

• &HQWHU: Centered within a data point

• ,QVLGH�EDVH: At the base of a data point, e.g. directly at the beginning of a column

4. Under 2ULHQWDWLRQ select the required arrangement of the title, e.g. from left to right, from top tobottom or rotated by 90 degrees.








5HPRYLQJ�'DWD�/DEHOV

8VH

You can delete data labels that you do not need. You can delete data labels of all the data series or ofa single data series.

3URFHGXUH

5HPRYLQJ�'DWD�/DEHOV�IRU�$OO�'DWD�6HULHV





4. Choose the option 1RQH.

5. Choose 2..

5HPRYLQJ�WKH�'DWD�/DEHO�RI�D�6LQJOH�'DWD�6HULHV

1. Click with the right mouse key on the data series whose data label you want to delete.




4. Choose the option 1RQH.

5. Choose 2..

You can also delete the data label for a single data series by clicking on the data label andpressing <Del>.



&KDQJLQJ�7H[WV�RI�7LWOHV��8QLWV�DQG�'DWD�/DEHOV

8VH

You can change the text of the following elements directly in the chart:

• Axis title

• Axis unit

• Title of value ranges

• Data titles

You can change the chart title directly in the chart if you permitted this when you added the title. SeeAdding and Removing Chart Titles [Seite 163]. You cannot change the title of a normal distributiondirectly in the chart. You can only change it in the properties of the normal distribution. See Editing theNormal Distribution [Seite 148].

3URFHGXUH

1. Click on the text to be changed.

2. Click on the selected area.

The cursor is displayed as a vertical line.

You might have to click more than once on the selected area for data labels.

3. Change the text.

4. Click on any area of the chart to leave text editing mode and close your changes.

You can also change the chart title, axis titles and axis units by clicking on the elementwith the right mouse key and choosing &KDUW�2SWLRQV in the context menu�



$GGLQJ�DQG�5HPRYLQJ�/HJHQGV

8VH

You can add a legend and define the position in the chart where it should be displayed. In a portfoliochart you can also decide if the legend should show two reference bubbles. These are used forcomparison purposes to be able to better estimate the size of the bubbles displayed in the chart.

You can delete a legend that you do not need.

3URFHGXUH

$GGLQJ�/HJHQGV




3. Select tabstrip /HJHQG.

4. Select the position where the legend should be displayed.

5. If the position of the legend may be changed directly in the chart, select field 0RYHDEOH.

6. If the legend should only be displayed as a symbol, select field 6KRZ�RQ�GHPDQG.

In this case you can click on the legend symbol in the chart to display the legend. If you clickon the legend again, it is displayed again as a symbol.

You can use the options 0RYHDEOH and 6KRZ�RQ�GHPDQG when you edit the chart. But inthe Web these options cannot be used, i.e. these options are ignored when you publishthe graphic.

7. To display reference bubbles in a portfolio, select field 9LVLEOH in the 5HIHUHQFH�%XEEOHV area. Alsodefine the diameter of the larger reference bubble.

8. Choose 2..

5HPRYLQJ�/HJHQGV

1. Click on the legend.

2. Press <Del>.

You can also remove legends by clicking on the outermost border of the legend with theright mouse key and choosing 'HOHWH in the context menu.



)RUPDWWLQJ�/HJHQG�7H[WV�DQG�6\PEROV

8VH

You can change the font properties of all the legend texts or of a single legend text. The fontproperties include the font type, style (bold, italic, etc.), size in points and color.

You can also format the border and the filling of the legend symbols as you like. Changing the symbolaffects the corresponding data series.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You already added a legend. See Adding and Removing Legends [Seite 171].

3URFHGXUH

)RUPDWWLQJ�$OO�/HJHQG�7H[WV

1. Click on the outermost border of the legends with the right mouse key.

2. In the context menu choose )RUPDW�/HJHQG.


3. Select tabstrip )RQW and enter your font properties.

4. Choose 2..

)RUPDWWLQJ�,QGLYLGXDO�/HJHQG�7H[WV

1. Click with the right mouse key on the legend text you want to format.

2. In the context menu choose )RUPDW�/HJHQG�,QGH[.


3. Choose the required font properties.

4. Choose 2..

)RUPDWWLQJ�/HJHQG�6\PEROV

1. Click with the right mouse key on the legend symbol you want to format.

2. In the context menu choose )RUPDW�/HJHQG�.H\.


3. Select the formatting for the filling and for the border of the legend symbol. See Changing theFilling and Borders of Surfaces [Seite 95].

The formatting of the corresponding data series also changed.

4. Choose 2..



)RUPDWWLQJ�WKH�/HJHQG�%DFNJURXQG

8VH

You can format the background of the entire legend. You can choose another filling and change theborder surrounding the legend.

3URFHGXUH

1. Click on the outermost border of the legends with the right mouse key.

2. In the context menu choose )RUPDW�/HJHQG.




5. Choose 2..



'DWD�7DEOHV

'HILQLWLRQ

A data table contains the values on which the data points in the chart are based.

8VH

If you also want to show the table values in the chart, you can display the data table (see Showing andHiding Data Tables [Seite 175]). This option only makes sense for chart types that have a categoryaxis.

You can format the data table as you like (see Formatting Data Tables [Seite 176]).



6KRZLQJ�DQG�+LGLQJ�'DWD�7DEOHV

8VH

You can define whether or not you want to integrate the underlying data table in the chart for somechart types.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You can only display a data table for bar charts, surface charts, line charts, vertical bar charts andtachometers.

3URFHGXUH

6KRZLQJ�WKH�'DWD�7DEOH




3. Choose tabstrip 'DWD�7DEOH.

4. Select the field 6KRZ�GDWD�WDEOH.

5. If you also want to display the legend keys in the data table, also select the field 6KRZ�OHJHQGNH\V.

6. Choose 2..

The data table is displayed below the graphic.

+LGLQJ�/HJHQG�.H\V�LQ�WKH�'DWD�7DEOH





4. Deselect the field 6KRZ�OHJHQG�NH\V.

5. Choose 2..

+LGLQJ�WKH�'DWD�7DEOH





4. Deselect the field 6KRZ�GDWD�WDEOH.

5. Choose 2..



)RUPDWWLQJ�'DWD�7DEOHV

8VH

You can format the lines of the data table and change the font properties of the table texts. You canalso change the number format for the displayed numbers.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The data table is displayed in the chart, see Showing and Hiding Data Tables [Seite 175].

3URFHGXUH

1. Click on the data table with the right mouse key.

2. In the context menu choose )RUPDW�'DWD�7DEOH.



&KDQJLQJ�/LQHV


2. If you want to copy the default formatting, choose $XWRPDWLF.

3. If you want to set up your own formatting, choose &XVWRP� Select the required type and color forthe lines.



2. Select the required font properties for the table texts: font name, style (bold, italic, etc.), the size inpoints and the color.








&KDQJLQJ�WKH�3DJH�/D\RXWBefore you printout the draft phase of a chart, you can change the page layout. You can adjust thepaper format, page borders and chart scaling for the printout.

Changes to the page layout only affect the draft phase of the printout and not how the chart ispublished in the Web.

3URFHGXUH


2. In the context menu choose 3ULQW�3UHYLHZ.

3. Click again with the right mouse key on any area of the chart.

4. In the context menu choose 3DJH�6HWXS.

The 6HWXS�SDJH dialog box appears.


&KDQJLQJ�WKH�3DSHU�)RUPDW��2ULHQWDWLRQ�DQG�$UUDQJHPHQW

1. Choose tabstrip 3DJH.

2. Under 3DSHU�VL]H, choose the required paper format.

3. Under 2ULHQWDWLRQ define if the chart should be printed 9HUWLFDO or +RUL]RQWDO.

4. You can change the position of the chart with &HQWHU. Normally the chart is output centeredhorizontal and vertical.

− To make the chart left-justified, deselect +RUL]RQWDOO\.

− To position the chart at the upper edge of the page, deselect 9HUWLFDOO\.

&KDQJLQJ�WKH�3ULQW�4XDOLW\


2. With 3ULQW�TXDOLW\ you can define the quality in which the chart should be printed. The larger thenumber of dpi (dots per inch), the higher the quality and longer the printing.

&KDQJLQJ�WKH�3ULQW�1XPEHULQJ

You can decide if you want to output page numbers and define the number with which numberingshould begin.


2. You can change the page numbering with the )LUVW�SDJH�QXPEHU field.

− If you do not want to number the pages, delete the field.

− If you want to begin page numbering with a certain number, enter this number.

− If you want to start page numbering with 1 and to continue numbering automatically, enter$XWR.

&KDQJLQJ�WKH�3DJH�%RUGHUV

1. Choose tabstrip 3DJH�%RUGHUV.

2. Under %RUGHU choose the left, right, top and bottom page borders.

3. Under 0DUJLQV define the distance between the Header and Footer and the top and bottom pageborders. If you do not want to use a header or footer, enter 0 in the corresponding field.

&KDQJLQJ�WKH�6FDOLQJ




2. To make the pages for the printout larger or smaller, select field 6FDOH and enter the desiredscaling in percent of the original size. The page is enlarged for a value greater than 100 and isreduced in size for a value under 100.

3. The chart is printed on one or more pages depending on its size. If required, you can also definethe number of pages on which the chart should be printed. Select field )LW�WR and enter the desirednumber of pages. The chart is scaled accordingly and distributed on the given number of pages. Ifyou entered a number greater than 1, you can also decide if the chart should be dividedhorizontally or vertically.



3ULQWLQJ�&KDUWV

8VH

You can print a chart from the normal preview window during the draft phase. If you want to checkwhat the chart looks like before printing it, you can first display the print preview. In contrast to thenormal preview, the page borders are also displayed in the print preview.

3URFHGXUH

&DOOLQJ�WKH�3ULQW�3UHYLHZ


2. In the context menu choose 3ULQW�3UHYLHZ.

The preview in the &KDUW window is replaced with the print preview. The current page bordersare displayed with thin lines. If required, you can change the page layout [Seite 177] and printthe chart.

You can change the page borders directly from the print preview. Place the mouse on oneof the border lines and pull the line to the new position. The page border is adjusted whenyou let go of the mouse key.

&ORVLQJ�WKH�3ULQW�3UHYLHZ

1. Click with the right mouse key on any area of the print preview.

2. In the context menu choose &ORVH�3ULQW�3UHYLHZ.

3ULQWLQJ�&KDUWV

You can print the chart from either the normal preview window or from the print preview.


2. In the context menu choose 3ULQW.

3. To change the page layout click on 3DJH�6HWXS. You can also change the paper format, pageborders and chart scaling for the printout, see: Changing the Page Layout [Seite 177].

4. To start the printing, click on 2..



'URSGRZQ�%R[HV

'HILQLWLRQ

The Web item 'URSGRZQ�%R[ allows you to filter characteristic values from a Web application in adropdown box.

8VH

When you select a value, the assigned query view is filtered according to this value. If a differentmethod is used to select a filter value for the characteristic in the dropdown box, the current filter valueappears in the dropdown box.

6WUXFWXUH

As well as its generic attributes [Seite 82] , the GURSGRZQ� ER[� Web item also has the followingattributes:


,QGH[�LQ�WKH�ILOWHU�FRPPDQG��,1'(;� Must have a clear value for all dropdown boxesand radio button groups [Seite 182] within theform day.

This attribute must be changedonly if the ONLY_VALUESattribute is active.

&KDUDFWHULVWLFV��6WUXFWXUH��,2%-10� 1DPH�RI�WKH�FKDUDFWHULVWLF��VWUXFWXUH�WKDW\RX�ZDQW�WR�ILOWHU�E\

Specify the technical name of the characteristic(0COUNTRY, for example) or the structure (25characters) here.

The technical name of thecharacteristic is stored in the querydefinition. In the BEx toolbar,choose &KDQJH 4XHU\�9LHZ�→&KDQJH�4XHU\��/RFDO�9LHZ� or�*OREDO�9LHZ��→� . The technicalnames of the InfoObjects aredisplayed.

Note that the characteristic youhave chosen must be included inthe query that the Web applicationis based on.

0D[LPXP�QXPEHU�RI�YDOXHV�LQ�WKHGURSGRZQ�ER[��0$;9$/8(6�

(optional)

Contains the maximum number of values thatare displayed in the dropdown box.

If this attribute has the value �, allthe available values are written inthe dropdown box.



%RRNHG�YDOXHV�RQO\��%22.('B9$/8(6� If you activate this attribute, only those valuesare displayed in the dropdown box that havealso been booked in the InfoProvider for thefilter conditions that are currently valid. Thiscan take a long time under certain conditions.

If you deactivate this attribute, all of thedimension table values are displayed. This canbe quicker, but can also display values that donot appear in the InfoProvider under thecurrent filter conditions and when filtering cangive the result 1R�FRUUHVSRQGLQJ�GDWD�IRXQG.

/DEHO��6+2:B/$%(/�

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

8VH�%:�GHVFULSWLRQ�DV�ODEHO

If this attribute is activated, the long text of thecharacteristic is written as a label in front of thedropdown box. In addition, you can use thecontext menu related to the description of thecharacteristic in this label.

'LVSOD\�YDOXHV�RQO\��21/<B9$/8(6�

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

(optional)

&UHDWH�GURSGRZQ�ER[�RQO\

If you activate this attribute, only the HTMLform Web item for the value list is created.You have to create the form, in which thedropdown box is contained, by hand in thiscase.

This attribute is suitable forcreating forms [Seite 258] thatcontain several dropdown boxes.

'R�QRW�GLVSOD\�HQWU\�$OO�YDOXHV

�12B5(029(B),/7(5�

'X' = “All values” not offered,

' ' = Display entry “All values”

If this field is not blank, the entry $OO�YDOXHV isnot set as a selection option in the dropdownbox.



5DGLR�%XWWRQ�*URXSV

'HILQLWLRQ

The UDGLR�EXWWRQ�JURXS Web Item allows you to filter characteristic values in a group of radiobuttons.

8VH

When you select a value, the assigned query view is filtered according to this value. If you select afilter value in another way for the characteristic of the radio button group, the current filter value isselected.

6WUXFWXUH

As well as its generic attributes [Seite 82], the UDGLR�EXWWRQ�JURXS Web item has the followingattributes:


,QGH[�LQ�WKH�ILOWHU�FRPPDQG��,1'(;�

(optional)

Must have a clear value for all dropdown boxesand radio button groups [Seite 180] within theform day.

This attribute must be changedonly if the ONLY_VALUESattribute is active.

&KDUDFWHULVWLFV��,2%-10� 1DPH�RI�WKH�FKDUDFWHULVWLF��VWUXFWXUH�WKDW\RX�ZDQW�WR�ILOWHU�E\

Specify the technical name of the characteristic(for example, 0COUNTRY) or the structure (25characters) here.

The technical name of thecharacteristic is stored in the querydefinition. In the BEx toolbar,choose &KDQJH 4XHU\�9LHZ�→&KDQJH�4XHU\��/RFDO�9LHZ� or�*OREDO�9LHZ��→� . The technicalnames of the InfoObjects aredisplayed.

Note that the characteristic youhave chosen must be included inthe query that the Web applicationis based on.

1XPEHU�RI�HQWULHV�QH[W�WR�RQHDQRWKHU�EHORZ�RQH�DQRWKHU�+25,=217$/B180%(5�

Contains the number of entries listed next toone another or below one another, dependingon the attribute settings forHORIZONTAL_ALIGNMENT.



0D[LPXP�QXPEHU�RI�GLVSOD\HG�YDOXHV�0$;9$/8(6�

(optional)

Contains the maximum number of values thatare displayed in the radio button group.

If you set the value to �, all theavailable values in the radio buttongroup are displayed.

%RRNHG�YDOXHV�RQO\��%22.('B9$/8(6� If you activate this attribute, only those valuesare displayed in the radio button group thathave also been booked in the InfoProvider forthe filter conditions that are currently valid.This can take a long time under certainconditions.

If you deactivate this attribute, all of thedimension table values are displayed. This canbe quicker, but can also display values that donot appear in the InfoProvider under thecurrent filter conditions and when filtering cangive the result 1R�FRUUHVSRQGLQJ�GDWD�IRXQG.

(QWULHV�OLVWHG�EHORZ�RQH�DQRWKHU�+25,=217$/B$/,*10(17�

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

If this attribute is activated, the differentcharacteristic values are grouped vertically. Ifthis attribute is deactivated, the characteristicvalues are grouped horizontally.

'LVSOD\�YDOXHV�RQO\��21/<B9$/8(6�

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

&UHDWH�UDGLR�EXWWRQ�JURXS�RQO\

If you activate this attribute, only the HTMLform Web item for the radio button group iscreated. Here, you have to create the form, inwhich the radio button group is contained, byhand.

This attribute is suitable forcreating forms [Seite 258] thatcontain several radio buttongroups.

/DEHO��6+2:B/$%(/�

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

8VH�%:�GHVFULSWLRQ�DV�ODEHO

If this attribute is activated, the long text of thecharacteristic is written as a label in front of theradio button group. In addition, you can use thecontext menu related to the description of thecharacteristic in this label.

'R�QRW�GLVSOD\�HQWU\�$OO�YDOXHV

�12B5(029(B),/7(5�

'X' = “All values” not offered,

' ' = Display entry “All values”

If this field is not blank, the entry $OO�YDOXHV isnot set as a selection option in the radio buttongroup.



&KHFNER[HV

'HILQLWLRQ

&KHFNER[HV� is a Web item that places characteristic values for filtering in a group of checkboxes.

8VH

The Checkboxes Web item can be used to easily filter a connected query view according to a certaincharacteristic.

You can set or remove filter values in the Web application by activating one or more control boxes.

6WUXFWXUH

As well as its generic attributes [Seite 82], the &KHFNER[es Web item has the following attributes:

$WWULEXWH 9DOXHV 'HVFULSWLRQ

Characteristic/structure Dropdown box Select the technical name ofthe characteristic.

Characteristics and structuresare read from Data Providers.The characteristic values areprovided in a dropdown box inthe Web application as filtervalues.

Read mode • Master data table (M)

• Dimension table (D)

• Posted values (Q)

Default "Dimension table"

Specifies which values in themaster data table are copiedto the Checkboxes Web itemas filter values:

• M: All values from themaster data table.

Values that do notappear in the DataProvider under thecurrent filter conditionsand that produce theresult 1R�VXLWDEOH�GDWDIRXQG upon filteringmight also bedisplayed However,this process might notbe the fastest undercertain conditions.

• D: Values that arebasically posted, wherebythe current drilldownstatus is not fully takeninto consideration.

• Q: Only values that arealso posted in the DataProvider under thecurrently valid filterconditions are displayed.This can take a long timeunder certain conditions.

Maximum number Default "0" Maximum displayed filter



values. If "0", all values aredisplayed.

Maximum length Maximum number ofcharacters in the label.

Label If this attribute is activated, thelong text of the characteristicis written as a label in front ofthe control box.

Number of entries nextto/under one another(HORIZONTAL_NUMBER)

Contains the number of entrieslisted next to one another orbelow one another, dependingon the attribute settings forHORIZONTAL_ALIGNMENT.

Number of entries below oneanother(HORIZONTAL_ALIGNMENT)

• true

• false

Default "true"

If this attribute is activated, thedifferent characteristic valuesare grouped vertically. If thisattribute is deactivated, thecharacteristic values aregrouped horizontally.



*HQHULF�1DYLJDWLRQ�%ORFN

'HILQLWLRQ

A Web item that obtains data from a query view to create a generic navigation block for a Webapplication. This block contains keys that you can use to transfer characteristics, for example, intorows or columns.

8VH

The Web item *HQHULF�1DYLJDWLRQ�%ORFN�displays the navigational state of a query view in the Webapplication in the form of a table. All characteristics and structures in the query view are listed in thetable and their filter values are displayed. You can also change the navigational state. You cantransfer characteristics and structures to an axis (rows or columns) or from axes. You can filteraccording to single values and remove the filter again.

6WUXFWXUH

As well as its generic attributes [Seite 82], the Web item *HQHULF�QDYLJDWLRQ�EORFN has the followingattributes:


)UDPH�QDPH�IRU�LQSXW�KHOS�7$5*(7B+(/3B)5$0(�

(optional)

You can display input help in a different framefrom the data. If you do not activate thisattribute, then input help is displayed in thesame window.

This parameter is not offered in theWeb Application Designer and canonly be used for parameterizationin the Web template.

0D[LPXP�ILOWHU�YDOXH�OHQJWK�),/7(5B9$/8(B/(1*7+�

Default value: 80

You specify the number of characters,according to which filter value is indicated, by<Number>.

If you set the value to 0, then thecomplete filter value is displayed.

(QWULHV�QH[W�WR�RQH�DQRWKHU�+25,=217$/B180%(5�

Describes the maximum number ofcharacteristics that can be displayed next toone another. If the navigation block containsmore than the specified number ofcharacteristics, then it is automaticallydisplayed in more than one row, where thenumber of characteristics per row is optimizedregarding the equal distribution of rows and therequired number of characteristics.

This attribute is only included whenHORITONTAL_ALIGNMENT(Define entries next to oneanother) is activated.



'HILQH�HQWULHV�QH[W�WR�RQH�DQRWKHU�+25,=217$/B$/,*10(17�

"X" = Yes, " " = No

As well as arranging the characteristics belowone another, you can also display them next toone another. In many cases, this makes betteruse of the display area and there is a strongervisual link between, for example, the table andthe navigation block.

/LVW�RI�QDYLJDWLRQ�EORFN�HQWULHV�,7(0B1$9B%/2&.B,2%-10B1�

(optional)

Listing the names of characteristics andstructures enables you to determine whichentries appear in the navigation block, and inwhich order.

If you do not specify thisparameter, all characteristics andstructures in the navigation blockare displayed.

8VH�ERRNHG�YDOXHV�IRU�LQSXW�KHOS�%22.('B9$/8(6�

�%22.('B9$/8(6B1�

If this parameter is not specified or is not set to‘X’, only values are displayed in the input helpthat are also booked in the InfoProvider withinthe scope of the currently valid filter conditions.This can take a long time under certainconditions.

If the parameter is set to ' ', all dimension tablevalues are displayed. This can be quicker, butcan also display values that do not appear inthe InfoProvider under the current filterconditions and when filtering can give the result1R�FRUUHVSRQGLQJ�GDWD�IRXQG.

Attribute that cannot be set in the Web Application Designer:

02',)<B&/$66 $%$3�FODVV�WKDW�FKDQJHV�WKH�FRQWHQW�RI�WKHQDYLJDWLRQ�EORFN

By using the Web design API for tables, youcan adjust the cell content individually in thenavigation block.

See also:

Web Design API for Tables [Seite 327]



+LHUDUFKLFDO�&RQWH[W�0HQX

'HILQLWLRQ

Web item that creates a context menu from the hierarchy of a characteristic or structure. Thehierarchy nodes appear as context menu entries and can be set as a filter.

8VH

You can filter a query view by hierarchy nodes using the hierarchical context menu.

6WUXFWXUH

As well as its generic attributes [Seite 82], the Web item +LHUDUFKLFDO�FRQWH[W�PHQX has the followingattributes:


Characteristic/structure Dropdown box Select the technical name ofthe characteristic/structure.

The hierarchy and structurenodes are read from the DataProvider and can be used asfilter values in the contextmenu.

Hierarchy name Dropdown box Technical name of thehierarchy which should beused for filtering nodes. If thefield is initial, the currentpresentation hierarchy is used.

Version Dropdown box Version of the hierarchy whichshould be used for filteringnodes. If the field is initial, thecurrent version of thepresentation hierarchy is used.

Key date Key date for which thehierarchy is evaluated.

The hierarchy is used as itexisted on the given date. Ifthis field is initial, the key dateof the query is used.



)LOWHUV

'HILQLWLRQ

A filter is a Web item that displays the filter values resulting from navigation for a query view in theWeb application.

8VH

The Web item )LOWHU displays the filter values that have been generated by navigating in a queryview in a Web application. You also use filters to select individual values.

6WUXFWXUH

As well as its generic attributes [Seite 82], the Web item )LOWHU has the following attributes:


0D[LPXP�ILOWHU�YDOXH�OHQJWK�),/7(5B9$/8(B/(1*7+�

Default value: 0

You specify the number of characters,according to which filter value is indicated, by<Number>.

If you keep the value as 0 (default),the complete filter value isdisplayed.

'LVSOD\�YDOXHV�ZLWKRXW�ODEHOLQJ�21/<B9$/8(6�

"X" = Yes, " " = No

When you activate this attribute, the filtervalues are displayed without any labeling, andthe formatting is separated using semi-colons.

Attributes that are not offered in Web Application Designer:

/LVW�FKDUDFWHULVWLFV�DQG�VWUXFWXUHV�,7(0B),/7(5B,2%-10B1�

(optional)

Listing the names of characteristics andstructures enables you to determine whichentries appear in the filter and in which order.Only those entries for which a filter value existsare displayed. The remaining entries areskipped over.

If you do not specify thisparameter, all the characteristicsand structures that are filtered aredisplayed.

'LVSOD\�ILOWHU�YDOXH

35(6(17$7,21��RSWLRQDO�

35(6(17$7,21B1��RSWLRQDO�

’KEY’ = key

’TEXT’ = text

’KEY_TEXT’ = key and text

’TEXT_KEY’ = text and key

The filter value is displayed in accordance withthe setting. If no display is specified for anindex, the index 0 display (no index) is used.

If this parameter is not specified,the display, which is valid for thecharacteristic, is used.

If you combine ONLY_VALUES=X and ITEM_FILTER_IOBJNM=MyInfoObject, it is possible to identifya single filter value in the Web template. This is also useful in headers, for example.



'LVSOD\LQJ�ILOWHU�YDOXHV�IRU�WKH�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�&DOHQGDU�\HDU�ZLWKRXW�IRUPDWWLQJ

<object>

<param name=’OWNER’ value=’SAP_BW’><param name=’CMD’ value=’GET_ITEM’><param name=’ITEM’ value=’Filter’><param name='ITEM_ID' value='FILTER'><param name='DATA_PROVIDER' value='View1 ><param name=’ONLY_VALUES’ value=’X’><param name=’ITEM_FILTER_IOBJNM’ value=’0CALYEAR’>ITEM :Filter

</object>

,QSXW�ILHOG�IRU�ILOWHULQJ�DFFRUGLQJ�WR�&DOHQGDU�\HDU�ZLWK�SUHDVVLJQHG�G\QDPLF�ILOWHUV�RQO\�ZRUNV�ZLWK�VLQJOH�YDOXH�ILOWHUV�

<form action="<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View 1’FILTER_IOBJNM=’0CALYEAR’>" method="post">

Calendar year: <input name="FILTER_VALUE_EXT" size=4 maxlength=4 value="

<object>

<param name=’OWNER’ value=’SAP_BW’><param name=’CMD’ value=’GET_ITEM’><param name=’ITEM’ value=’Filter’><param name='ITEM_ID' value='FILTER'><param name='DATA_PROVIDER' value='View1 ><param name=’ONLY_VALUES’ value=’X’><param name=’ITEM_FILTER_IOBJNM’ value=’0CALYEAR’><param name='PRESENTATION' value='KEY'>ITEM :Filter

</object>

<input type=submit value="Submit"><input type=reset value="Reset">

</form>



/DEHO

'HILQLWLRQ

The Web item /DEHO allows you to display the descriptions of characteristics, attributes, orstructural components. You can also create a link to the context menu of these characteristics,attributes, or structural components.

8VH

This Web item, together with the Web items dropdown box [Seite 180] and radio button group [Seite182], can be used for configuring a comfortable cockpit. You can create, for example, navigationblocks in which you set different labels for characteristics and structural components in a table.

6WUXFWXUH

As well as its generic attributes [Seite 82], the Web item /DEHO has the following attributes:

$WWULEXWH 'HVFULSWLRQ

$WWULEXWH�QDPH��$775,10� Technical name of the attribute whose headingis to be displayed as a label.

,QIR2EMHFW��,2%-10� 1DPH�RI�WKH�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�VWUXFWXUH

Specify the technical name of the characteristic(for example, 0COUNTRY) or the structure (25characters) here.

The technical name of thecharacteristic is stored in the querydefinition. In the BEx toolbar,choose &KDQJH 4XHU\�9LHZ�→&KDQJH�4XHU\��/RFDO�9LHZ� or�*OREDO�9LHZ��→� . The technicalnames of the characteristics aredisplayed.

6WXFWXUDO�FRPSRQHQW�6758&785(B0(0%(5�

Structural component whose text or contextmenu is displayed.

&RQWH[W�PHQX��&217(;7B0(18�

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

If this attribute is activated, a link to the contextmenu of the characteristic or the structuralcomponent is displayed in the description ofthe characteristic.

2QO\�YDOXHV��21/<B9$/8(6�

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

8QIRUPDWWHG�GLVSOD\

If this attribute is activated, only the link to thecontext menu is displayed. The label isdisplayed without formatting. You candetermine in the Web template how you wouldlike to put the link underneath.

If you would like to add a label for a structural component in your Web application, thenyou have to enter the technical name of the structure under ,QIR2EMHFW and enter the filtervalue of the structure under 6WUXFWXUDO�&RPSRQHQW (STRUCTURE_MEMBER). Youdetermine the correct values as follows:

a. Execute a Web application that contains the structural component.



b. Filter according to the structural component in question: Choose .HHS�DV�ILOWHU�YDOXH in thecontext menu of the structural component.

F�� Copy the parameter value FILTER_IOBJNM from the URL into the clipboard.

G�� Choose the attribute in the Web Application Designer and enter the value that was saved inthe clipboard.

e. Copy the parameter value FILTER_VALUE from the URL into the clipboard.

f. Choose the attribute 6WUXFWXUDO�FRPSRQHQW from the Web item /DEHO in the Web ApplicationDesigner and enter the value that was saved in the clipboard.

g. Save your entries.



7H[W�(OHPHQWV

'HILQLWLRQ

Web item that the text items display for a query view in a Web application.

8VH

The Web item 7H[W�HOHPHQWV displays the query information that the query view and the Webapplication are based on. It is also possible to choose text elements individually.

6WUXFWXUH

The text elements are similar to the text elements in the BEx Analyzer and are made up of thefollowing parts:

• common text elements:

− technical name of the query (REPTNAME)

− description of the query (REPTXTLG)

− InfoProvider (INFOCUBE)

− key date for the query (SRDATE)

− accuracy of the data (date and time) (ROLLUPTIME)

− the person who wrote the query (AUTHOR)

− the last time the query was changed (date and time) (MODTIME)

− the last person to make changes to the query (MODUSER)

− current user (SYUSER)

− the last time the query was refreshed (date and time) (SYUZEIT)

• variables

• static filter values

As well as its generic attributes [Seite 82], the Web item 7H[W�HOHPHQWV has the following attributes:


'LVSOD\�YDOXHV�ZLWKRXW�ODEHOLQJ�21/<B9$/8(6�

"X" = Yes, " " = No

If you activate this attribute, the values for thetext elements are displayed without anylabeling, and the formatting is separated bysemi-colons.

'LVSOD\�FRPPRQ�WH[W�HOHPHQWV�6+2:B&20021B(/(0(176�

"X" = Yes, " " = No

If you activate this attribute, the common textelements are displayed.

'LVSOD\�VWDWLF�ILOWHU�YDOXHV�6+2:B),/7(56�

"X" = Yes, " " = No

If you activate this attribute, the filter valuesthat you determined in the filter area of thequery definition are displayed.

'LVSOD\�YDULDEOH�YDOXHV�6+2:B9$5,$%/(6�

"X" = Yes, " " = No

If you activate this attribute, the variable valuesfor the query (on which the Web application isbased) are displayed.



/LVW�WH[W�HOHPHQWV��(/(0(17B1$0(B1� By listing the text element names incombination with their typeELEMENT_TYPE_N, you are able todetermine which entries appear as text itemsand the order in which they appear. Withgeneral text elements the name corresponds toone of the values listed above (under *HQHUDO7H[W�,WHPV). With variables the namecorresponds to the variable name, and withfilters the name corresponds to the name of thecharacteristic.

If you do not specify thisparameter, all the filteredcharacteristics and filteredstructures are displayed.

/LVW�WKH�W\SHV�RI�WH[W�HOHPHQWV�(/(0(17B7<3(B1�

See above: /LVW�WH[W�HOHPHQWV

COMMON = Common text element

FILTER = Static filter value

VARIABLE = Variable value

VARIABLE_KEY = Key for variable value

The combination of ONLY_VALUES=X, ITEM_TYPE =COMMON, and ITEM_NAME=REPTXTLG,makes it possible to access a text element directly in the Web template, here for example, the queryname. The name is used in a title, for example.

'LVSOD\�RI�YDOLGLW\�RI�GDWD��ILOWHU�YDOXH�IRU�FRVW�FHQWHU�DQG�YDOXHV�IRU��YDULDEOHV

<object>

<param name=’OWNER’ value=’SAP_BW’><param name=’CMD’ value=’GET_ITEM’><param name=’ITEM’ value=’Text’><param name=’ITEM_CLASS’ value=’CL_RSR_WWW_TEXT_ELEMENTS’><param name=’ELEMENT_TYPE_1’ value=’COMMON’><param name=’ELEMENT_NAME_1’ value=’ROLLUPTIME’><param name=’ELEMENT_TYPE_2’ value=’FILTER’><param name=’ELEMENT_NAME_2’ value=’0COSTCENTER’><param name=’ELEMENT_TYPE_3’ value=’VARIABLE’><param name=’ELEMENT_NAME_3’ value=’myFirstVariable’><param name=’ELEMENT_TYPE_4’ value=’VARIABLE’><param name=’ELEMENT_NAME_4’ value=’mySecondVariable’><param name=’DATA_PROVIDER’ value=’MyDataProvider’>

ITEM :Text

</object>



/LVW�RI�([FHSWLRQV

'HILQLWLRQ

A Web item that lists the available exceptions for a stored query view, along with their status(active/not active) in the Web application.

8VH

The /LVW�RI�([FHSWLRQV�Web item displays the status of the exceptions for a stored query view in theWeb application, in the form of a table. For each exception, the status of the exception (active/notactive) is also displayed. You can activate or deactivate the exceptions by clicking on the symbol.

6WUXFWXUH

The Web item /LVW�RI�([FHSWLRQV has only generic attributes.

6HH�Generic Attributes [Seite 82]



/LVW�RI�&RQGLWLRQV

'HILQLWLRQ

A Web item that displays all the available conditions including their corresponding statuses (active/notactive/not applicable/not used) for a stored query view in the Web application.

8VH

The /LVW�RI�&RQGLWLRQV�Web item displays the status of conditions for a stored query view in theWeb application, in the form of a table. All the conditions that can be applied to the current navigationstatus for the query view are listed. With every condition that is displayed, the status of the condition isalso displayed (active/not active/not applicable/not used). You use the symbol toactivate/deactivate the conditions.

6HH�DOVR�

Using Conditions [Seite 434] in the BEx Analyzer

6WUXFWXUH

The Web item /LVW�RI�&RQGLWLRQV has only generic attributes.

6HH�Generic Attributes [Seite 82]



$OHUW�0RQLWRU

'HILQLWLRQ

A Web item that the query views display as a list or a hierarchy in a Web application. These queryviews were found during background processing by the Reporting Agent [Extern].

8VH

With the help of the $OHUW�0RQLWRU�Web item, you can go to the query views generated in theexception reporting [Seite 420] and Reporting Agent processes and see at a glance any noticeable,deviating key figures from defined threshold values. You can also set filters.

Since there is only one data source for the Web item Alert Monitor, there is no need to setup the Web item $OHUW�0RQLWRU as a separate data provider. The Web item $OHUW�0RQLWRUgenerates a suitable data provider for itself automatically and transfers the filter operationsto this data provider automatically.

6WUXFWXUH

As well as its generic attributes [Seite 82], the $OHUW�0RQLWRU has the following attributes:


4XHU\��),/7(5B48(5<� You can use this attribute to filter according toentries that come under a specific query. If youdo not specify a query, no filter applies.

,QIR3URYLGHU��),/7(5B,1)2&8%(� You can use this attribute to filter according toentries that come under a specific InfoProvider.If you do not specify an InfoProvider, a filter isnot applied.

,QIR$UHD��),/7(5B,1)2$5($� You can use this attribute to filter according toentries that come under a specific InfoArea. Ifyou do not specify an InfoArea, no filterapplies.

5HG�HQWULHV��),/7(5B5('�

"X" = Yes, " " = No

If you activate this attribute, you see the rowswith at least one red entry.

<HOORZ�HQWULHV��),/7(5B<(//2:�

"X" = Yes, " " = No

If you activate this attribute, you see the rowswith at least one yellow entry.

*UHHQ�HQWULHV��),/7(5B*5((1�

"X" = Yes, " " = No

If you activate this attribute, you see the rowswith at least one green entry.

'LVSOD\�KLJKHVW�DOHUW�OHYHO�',63/$<B0$;B/(9(/�

"X" = Yes, " " = No

Instead of displaying red, yellow, and greenentries with their frequency per query view, youcan display just the entry with the highest alertlevel. This may make the display easier tostudy.



1XPEHU�RI�URZV�GLVSOD\HG�DW�RQH�WLPH�%/2&.B6,=(�

Default value: 10

With the help of this attribute, you candetermine the number of entries you want todisplay at the same time.

We recommend that you restrictthe number of entries, especiallywhen the number of alerts is high.

If you set the value to 0, all entriesare displayed.

If there are more rows with alerts,an index is added for you to scrolldown.

'LVSOD\�DV�KLHUDUFK\��+,(5$5&+<�

"X" = Yes, " " = No

If you activate this attribute, the alerts aredisplayed in a hierarchy, starting with the levelof InfoArea, InfoProvider, and query, and goingup to the individual query views. If youdeactivate this attribute, the alerts aredisplayed as a flat list. This means only thequery views are displayed (no InfoAreas,InfoProviders, or queries).

7DUJHW�WHPSODWH

�7$5*(7B7(03/$7(B,'�

�RSWLRQDO�

Web template, on whose base the detail viewis displayed

'HWDLO�IUDPH��7$5*(7B)5$0(� 1DPH�RI�WKH�IUDPH�IRU�WKH�GHWDLO�YLHZ

If you do not specify a detail frame, the detailview is displayed using pure HTML in the samewindow and opens a separate window usingactivated Java Script.

The parameters JUMP_WBID and JUMP_PAGEID used in BW 2.x are still supported. Werecommend, however, that you no longer use these.



5ROH�0HQX

'HILQLWLRQ

The Web item 5ROO�0HQX�displays user favorites and/or roles in a tree.

8VH

The role menu can be restricted to user favorites and -roles or to a particular role. No menu entries areshown if the user has not been assigned to this particular role. The menu entries can be filteredaccording to various types. A menu entry is a URL in a BEx Web application for example. You can usethe attribute TARGET to define in which window the URL is executed.

6WUXFWXUH

As well as its generic attributes [Seite 82], the Web item 5ROH�0HQX�has the following attributes:


5ROH�QDPH

�52/(�

5HVWULFWLRQ�WR�IDYRULWHV�DQG�RU�UROHV�RU�WR�DSDUWLFXODU�UROH�

When ROLE is empty, the user favorites androles are displayed. The favorites can bedisplayed with ROLE=SAP_BW_FAVORITES_(with two _ between SAP_BW andFAVORITES_). Enter the technical name of therole when you want to restrict the display to aparticular role.

1XPEHU�RI�OHYHOV�

�/(9(/�

‘0’ = all levels

1XPEHU�RI�OHYHOV�WKDW�DUH�LQLWLDOO\�UHDG�

The role menu is loaded initially with thespecified levels. Further levels are readdynamically by expanding folders. All levels areread for LEVEL=0.

)LOWHUV

�),/7(5�

)LOWHU�PHQX�HQWULHV�DFFRUGLQJ�WR�W\SH

You can filter according to the following typesor type combinations.

• 'U' = URLs

• 'P ' = Web templates

• ‘Y’ = Queries

• 'R ' = Crystal Reports

All entries for these types are displayed when afilter is not specified.

For example, the filter ‘UP’ showsall URLs and Web templates withreference to ROLE.

1DPH�RI�WKH�WDUJHW�IUDPH

�7$5*(7�

1DPH�RI�WKH�IUDPH�IRU�H[HFXWLQJ�PHQXHQWULHV�

The URL is executed in the specified framebehind a menu entry.



'LVSOD\�ZLWK�,)UDPH

�,)5$0(�

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

'LVSOD\�DV�,)UDPH

You can display the 5ROH�0HQX�:HE�LWHP�in anIFrame or in a Frameset. On the one hand, thecombination from other Web items with the5ROH�0HQX�Web item is possible for an IFrame.On the other hand, Netscape 4.7 and PDAs donot support IFrames. Only the 5ROH�0HQX�Webitem is displayed for the Frameset. The otherWeb items are ignored.

The advantage of IFrames is that they allowyou to structure the HTML page for the rolemenu freely, for example, with text, logos, otherWeb items. The role menu in the frame set iscreated generically and cannot be changedexternally.

If a role menu is called up withIFrame on Netscape 4.7 or on aPDA, the IFrame is ignored and aframe set is sent automatically tothe Web browser.

8VHU�DQG�ORJR�GLVSOD\

�',63/$<B86(5�

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

8VHU�DQG�ORJR�GLVSOD\

Above the role menu, the user name isdisplayed along with a logo.

/RJR�LFRQ�SDWK

�,&21B/2*2�

/RJR�LFRQ�SDWK

The path of the icon in the MIME repositorythat is displayed as a logo. You can only usethis attribute in the context of DISPLAY_USER.For example: ‘Bex/Icons/s_logo.gif’



7LFNHUV

'HILQLWLRQ

The Web item 7LFNHU enables you to display the content of a table as a ticker.

8VH

You need a Web browser with activated Java Script to use the ticker.

6WUXFWXUH

As well as its generic attributes [Seite 82], the 7LFNHU Web item has the following attributes:


'(/$< 'HOD\�XQWLO�WKH�WLFNHU�VWDUWV�UXQ�LQPLOOLVHFRQGV�

6(3$5$725 6HSDUDWRU�EHWZHHQ�WZR�WLFNHU�URZV

The separator is added when the data for anew data row is displayed.

21/<B9$/8(6

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

&UHDWH�LQYLVLEOH�IRUP

You can create an invisible form so that youcan further process the ticker text.

63((' 6SHHG�LQ�PLOOLVHFRQGV�Time until the ticker text moves again inmilliseconds.

7,&.(5B6,=( :LGWK�RI�WKH�WLFNHW�WH[W�LQ�FKDUDFWHUV

86(B&$37,21

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

3ODFH�WLWOH�DW�VWDUW�RI�WLFNHU�WH[W



0DSV

3XUSRVH

Many characteristics in the Business Information Warehouse, for example, customer, sales region,and country, contain important geographical characteristics. The geographical information can beevaluated in a map together with the business-orientated, relevant key figures.

Use maps to visualize business-oriented connections and distributions. You can clearly displayspecific key figures as color shading, pie charts, or bar charts for a country, a region, or a city.

You have the option to change the view of a map in which you either zoom in to display a detailedview or zoom out for an overall view. In this way, it becomes easier to view, for example, the salesanalysis of a specific product that refers to a specific region or a country You can recognize thepotential or dangers of a market all at a glance.

,QWHJUDWLRQ

Maps help you with reporting geo-relevant data. By using the PDS Web item, you determine ageographical display in the BEx Web Application Designer for your business-oriented data for the Webapplication.

Geo-relevant InfoObjects are stored and maintained in the 0HWDGDWD�5HSRVLWRU\. The master data forgeo-InfoObjects is equipped with geo-attributes. Assigning the range of geographic to business-oriented data (mapping/geocoding) using an external tool: ArcView from ESRI (EnvironmentalSystems Research Institute).

)XQFWLRQV

With maps you prepare and evaluate data of a geographical nature (characteristics such as customer,sales region, and country, for example). The geo-relevant data is displayed graphically on a map.Using enhanced navigation options (“geographical drilldown”), regional information can be evaluatedmore easily at different levels of detail. A map shows the spatial proximity of places and regions,allowing geographical connections to be more clearly represented.

3URFHVV

The following graphic illustrates the geographic evaluation of data run by the system:



��

��

� ��!#"%$�"'&)(�*,+-(/.�*01.�*32-4�5)$76)8

9 (/+):�"�$;:=<�$7:�"�$;59 (/+):�"�$;:=<�$�:�"%$75

>@?7A@B>@?7A@B

C'DFE�GIH�JLK@MFNOQPFNSR�M@T;U)PSR%PC'DFE�GIH�JLK@MFNC'DFE�GIH�JLK@MFNOQPFNSR%MLT;U)PSR%POQPFNSR%MLT)U;PSR%P

�V$7+;W X)YI5;*�Z$;+;W'X)YI5)*

[ */"%�=\Q+-(/+[ *�"]�=\+-(,+ ^ +7_`\+-(/+^ +;_a\Q+-(/+

?7A@B?7A@B

bdc �Ze=eQ*/.�6)5I&)&).�*bdc �fe=e�*�.76)5I&)&).Q*

g�*/.ihV&;5;*g�*/.ihZ&;5)*

OQMSR�P�U)PSR�Pj;M@kIG@N@l R�GIT�mOQMSR%P�U)PSR�Pj)MLkLG@NLl R�GIT�m

[ 5-.n .7��"%$7:

[po'9o $rqs. b 4uts5)6I(

[ 5-.n .�.�*/��"]$�+I(,5)&

1. In the InfoObject maintenance, flag the geo-relevant characteristics (country, for example) that youwant to use as geo-characteristics.

2. You load the corresponding shapefiles [Extern] into the BW system. You maintain the assignmentof shape file and master data (mapping between geo-characteristic and shape file). SeeMaintaining the SAPBWKEY for Static Geo-Characteristics [Extern]

If you want to use the maps to report on geo-characteristics that show information in pointform (customer, plant, sales office, for example) you have to geocode these characteristics.See Geocoding [Extern].

3. In the BEx Web Application Designer you include a map in your Web application and connectthese with a data source and a previously-defined query. By using these attributes, you determinethe map display and the business-oriented data.

Finally, you publish the application on the Web. You navigate in the map to report further onthe geo-relevant data.



0DS�$WWULEXWHV

'HILQLWLRQ

The Map Web Item consists of the objects 0DS and 0DS�OD\HU��They are used to display businessdata geographically. The attributes for these objects define how the data is displayed.

6WUXFWXUH

The Web item Map consists of two objects:

• 0DS defines the basic display of a map.

• 0DS�/D\HU defines the different layers in a map.

The layers of a map contain different geographic and business information. The individuallayers are overlaid in the Web application and thus constitute the overall view of the map. Youcan show or hide individual layers and change the information contained in a map.

Attributes control how a map and its layers are displayed in the Web application.

$WWULEXWHV�IRU�WKH�0DS�2EMHFW


Register Web Item: General

Name Logical name of the map

Heading Title of the map

Generate title • true

• false

Default "true"

A title is automaticallygenerated for the map as in"SAPBEXTableCaption" whenthe checkbox is activated.

Width in pixels Input in pixels

Default "300"

Width of the map and legendin pixels

Height of the map Input in pixels

Default "300"

Height of the map in pixelstaking the geographic relationsinto consideration

Collapsed • true

• false

Default "false"

If the checkbox is activated,the map is collapsed when theWeb application is opened.

Hide object • true

• false

Default "false"

If the checkbox is activated,neither the map nor the title isdisplayed in the application.

Objects with navigation links • true

• false

Default "true"

If the checkbox is activated, animage map that permitsnavigation within the map isgenerated for the map. Thecorresponding attributes of allthe levels belonging to themap are also set to "true".

Register Web Item: Special

Map layers This attribute defines whichlayers and the number oflayers from which your map



should be built.

Compute may heightautomatically

• true

• false

Default "true"

If the checkbox is activated,the "Height of the map"attribute is ignored and theheight is computedautomatically.

Geo-functions • Do not display

• Top

• Bottom

• Left

• Right

Default "Do not display"

Position of the geographicfunction bar in relation to themap.

Legend position • Left of the map

• Right of the map

Default "Right of the map"

Position of the legend inrelation to the map.

Legend size Input in pixels

Default "150"

Size of the legend in pixels

Visible map area • Data with geography

• Data without geography

• Complete geography

Default "Data with geography"

Specifies which areas of amap are displayed dependingon the stored data in theapplication.

Map background transparent • true

• false

Default "true"

If the checkbox is activated,the "Background color of themap" attribute is ignored andthe background appears astransparent in the application .

Background color Color value Background color of the map.

The color values are selectedin a color selection dialog.

Fill color (no data) Color value Fill color of a region if it is notstored with data.


Map border color Color value Color of the map border.


Map border width Input in pixels

Default "1"

Width of the map border inpixels.

Border • Border

• No frame

• Style for form-like items

Default "No frame"

Defines if the map is displayedin the Web application with orwithout a frame.



$WWULEXWHV�IRU�WKH�0DS�/D\HU�2EMHFW

You must define how the data should be displayed in each layer of a map by selecting a MapRenderer [Seite 218].

Some of the basic attributes for the map layer are the same for all display types and others arespecific to the selected map renderer.

%DVLF�$WWULEXWHV


Register General

Name Logical name of the map layer.

Data Provider > Name Logical name of the datasource. Exactly one datasource must be assigned toeach layer.

Data Provider > Query/View Assignment of the query view.

Register Web Item: General

Heading Title of the map layer.

Generate title • true

• false

Default "true"

A title is automaticallygenerated for the map layer asin "SAPBEXTableCaption"when the checkbox isactivated.

Width in pixels Input in pixels

Default "300"

Width of the map layer andlegend in pixels

Collapsed • true

• false

Default "false"

If the checkbox is activated,the map level is collapsedwhen the Web application isopened.

Hide object • true

• false

Default "false"

If the checkbox is activated,neither the map level nor thetitle is displayed in theapplication.

Objects with navigation links • true

• false

Default "true"

If the checkbox is activated, animage map that permitsnavigation within the map isgenerated for the map level.The corresponding attributesof all the levels belonging tothe map are also set to "true".

Register Web Item: Special

Tooltip for map layer • true

• false

Default "true"

If the checkbox is activated, atooltip is displayed in the Webapplication for the layer.

Renderer of a map • Color shading

• Bar Chart

• Pie chart

• Pie chart (divided)

Defines how the data shouldbe displayed in the map layer.



• Point density

• Symbol

• Symbol (size-dependent)

• Symbol (color-dependent)

• Line

• Line (size-dependent)

• Line (color-dependent)

Default "color shading"

Label of the map layer • No label

• Text as label

• Key as label

Default "No label"

You can add a description toeach layer.

Command for interaction • No command

• Filter on click

Default "No command"

Creates a sample for theimage map and defines theactions to be executed whenyou click on the image map.

See Example of Interaction inMaps [Seite 380]

Border • Border

• No frame

• Style for form-like items

Default "No frame"

Defines if the map is displayedin the Web application with orwithout a frame.

6SHFLILF�$WWULEXWHV�IRU�6\PEROV

You can display values using symbols with the 6\PERO renderer.


Size Input in pixels

Default "6"

Defines the size of thesymbols that represent thedata.

Symbol type • Circle

• Rectangle

• Triangle

• Cross

Default "Circle"

Defines the symbol with whichthe data is displayed in alayer.

Color Color value Symbol color


6SHFLILF�$WWULEXWHV�IRU�6\PEROV��6L]H�GHSHQGHQW�

You can display values using size-dependent symbols with the 6\PERO��VL]H�GHSHQGHQW� renderer.The renderer takes the location and data values for this location into consideration. The size of thesymbols depends on the data.


Symbol (starting size) Input in pixels Defines the size of the symbol



Default "4" that represents the smallestdata value in the attached datasource.

Symbol (end size) Input in pixels

Default "8"

Defines the size of the symbolthat represents the largestdata value in the attached datasource.

Value for a symbol Default "100" Manually assigns a specificbasic value to the smallestsymbol.

Number of classes Default "5" Number of size levels (variable“n”)


• Rectangle

• Triangle

• Cross

Default "Circle"




Symbol size (n) Input in pixels Sets the symbol size for acertain class (n).

Specifying this attribute isoptional. It overwrites thelinear interim vales calculatedfor the classes.

When setting the attributesymbol size (n), you also needto determine a value for thecorresponding attribute classboundary (n).

6HH�Array Attributes [Seite216]

Class boundary (n) Value between 1 and numberof classes n- 1

Sets the class limit for acertain class (n).

Entering this attribute isoptional. It overwrites thelinear interim vales calculatedfor the classes.

When setting the attributeclass boundary (n), you alsoneed to determine a value forthe corresponding attributesymbol size (n).


6SHFLILF�$WWULEXWHV�IRU�6\PEROV��&RORU�GHSHQGHQW�

You can display values using color-dependent symbols with the 6\PERO��FRORU�GHSHQGHQW� renderer.The renderer takes the location and data values for this location into consideration. The color of thesymbols depends on the data.




Number of classes Number of color levels(variable “n”)

Initial color Color value Defines the color of thesymbol that represents thesmallest data value in theattached data source.


Final color Color value Defines the color of thesymbol that represents thelargest data value in theattached data source.


Color interpolation method • RGB

• HSB

Default "RGB"

Defines the method with whichthe color values that liebetween the initial and finalcolors are interpolated. Thesecolor values represent thedata that lies between thesmallest and largest values ofthe data source.


Default "6"


Color value (n) Color value Sets the symbol color for acertain class (n).


When setting the attributesymbol size (n), you also needto determine a value for thecorresponding attribute classboundary (n).





When setting the attributeclass boundary (n), you alsoneed to determine a value forthe corresponding attribute



color value (n).


6SHFLILF�$WWULEXWHV�IRU�&RORU�6KDGLQJ

The FRORU�VKDGLQJ renderer displays color classes that correspond to special value classes.








• HSB

Default "RGB"


Color (if no data) Color value Defines a color value for fillingall the regions of a map thatdo not have data in theattached data source.


Color value (n) Color value Sets the shading color for acertain class (n).


When setting the attributecolor value (n), you also needto determine a value for thecorresponding attribute classboundary (n).


Class boundary (n) Value between 1 and numberof classes - 1





When setting the attributeclass boundary (n), you alsoneed to determine a value forthe corresponding attributecolor value (n).


6SHFLILF�$WWULEXWHV�IRU�%DU�&KDUWV

You can display values in the form of bars with the EDU�FKDUW renderer.


Bar height Input in pixels

Default "30"

Defines the maximum heightof a bar in the diagram. Thisheight corresponds to thelargest value of the attacheddata source.

Bar width Input in pixels

Default "10"

Defines the width of the bar inthe diagram.

Bar Color (n) Color value Sets the color of a particularbar (n).


6SHFLILF�$WWULEXWHV�IRU�3LH�&KDUWV�DQG�3LH�&KDUWV��6SOLW�

You can display values in the form of pies with the SLH�FKDUW renderer.

In a VSOLW�SLH�FKDUW the split occurs automatically if there is a "change of group" (that is from sales forthe 1st quarter of 2001 to the sales for the 2nd quarter of 2001).


Diameter of circle (minimum) Input in pixels

Default "10"

Defines the smallest diameterof a circle in the diagram. Thisdiameter is the sum of all theminimum values displayed inthe Web application.

If you set "circle diameter(minimum) = circle diameter(maximum)“, all the circles inthe Web application aredisplayed with the samediameter.

Diameter of circle (maximum) Input in pixels

Default "30"

Defines the largest diameter ofa circle in the diagram. Thisdiameter is the sum of all themaximum values displayed inthe Web application.

If you set "circle diameter(minimum) = circle diameter



(maximum)“, all the circles inthe Web application aredisplayed with the samediameter.

Segment color (n) Color value Sets the color of a particularsegment (n).


6SHFLILF�$WWULEXWHV�IRU�3RLQW�'HQVLW\

You can display values using point density with the SRLQW�GHQVLW\ renderer.



Default "6"

Defines the size of the points(symbols).


• Rectangle

• Triangle

• Cross

Default "Circle"




Value for a symbol Default "100" Manually assigns a specificbasic value to the area withthe lowest point density.

Maximum density in % Input in percent

Default "70"

Defines how dense the pointsshould be displayed in aregion for the largest value ofthe attached data source.

The attributes "Value for asymbol" and "Maximumdensity in %" are self-exclusive and may not beused at the same time.

6SHFLILF�$WWULEXWHV�IRU�/LQHV

The /LQH renderer displays values with a line going from a starting to an end point.



Default "6"

Defines the width of the line.

Line type • Continuous

• Dotted

• Dashed

Default "Continuous"

Defines how the lines aredisplayed.

Color Color value Line color.

The color values are selected



in a color selection dialog.

Layer (starting points) Defines the layer on which thestarting points of the lines lie.

All the starting points must lieon one layer.

Layer (end points) Defines the layer on which theend points of the lines lie.

All the end points must lie onone layer.

6SHFLILF�$WWULEXWHV�IRU�/LQHV��6L]H�GHSHQGHQW�

The OLQH��VL]H�GHSHQGHQW� renderer displays values with a line from the starting to the end point. Thedata values define the width of a line.


Symbol (starting size) Input in pixels

Default "4"

Defines the size of the symbolthat represents the smallestdata value in the attached datasource.

Symbol (end size) Input in pixels

Default "8"

Defines the size of the symbolthat represents the largestdata value in the attached datasource.

Value for a symbol Default "100" Manually assigns a specificbasic value to the smallestline.

Number of classes Default "5" Number of size levels (variable“n”)

Color Color value Line color.


Line width (n) Input in pixels Sets the line width for a certainclass (n).


When setting the attribute linewidth (n), you also need todetermine a value for thecorresponding attribute classboundary (n).







When setting the attributeclass boundary (n), you alsoneed to determine a value forthe corresponding attributeline width (n).


6SHFLILF�$WWULEXWHV�IRU�/LQHV��&RORU�GHSHQGHQW�

The OLQH��FRORU�GHSHQGHQW� renderer displays values with a line from the starting to the end point. Thedata values define the color of a line.








• HSB

Default "RGB"



Default "6"


Color value (n) Color value Sets the line color for a certainclass (n).


When setting the attributecolor value (n), you also needto determine a value for thecorresponding attribute classboundary (n).

6HH�Array Attributes [Seite



216]




When setting the attributeclass boundary (n), you alsoneed to determine a value forthe corresponding attributeline width (n).


$FWLYLWLHV

To change the attributes for a map or for individual map layers, select the corresponding map or maplevel in the 3URSHUWLHV window and edit the attributes in the *HQHUDO and :HE�LWHP tabstrips.

,QWHJUDWLRQ

Before you can visualize your key business data using maps, you must attach them with geographicdata. This mapping process is described under Maintaining the SAPBWKEY for Static Geo-Characteristics [Extern] and Geo-Coding [Extern] for dynamic geo-characteristics. You can maintainthis mapping with the "ArcView GIS" software of ESRI.

You can find out how to map the data, what special features you must look out for and how to maintainyour data in Mapping Georelevant Characteristics [Extern].



$UUD\�$WWULEXWHV

8VH

Some map attributes are the so-called array attributes. You can recognize these attributes by thesuffix “(n)“ (see to Map Attributes [Seite 204]).

This section describes the function of array attributes.

The following are array attributes:

• Symbol size (n)

• Class boundary (n)

• Color value (n)

• Line width (n)

• Bar color (n)

• Segment color (n)

The variable n is the number of classes. You can set this variable with the attribute classnumber

([DPSOH

Use the above attributes to change the default settings in the system. The default settings provide alinear calculation of the interim values for each class.

For example: symbol size (n)

If the attribute symbol size (n) is not set, the size of the symbols displayed in a map, starting withstarting value A and ending with end value B, are distributed linearly across the number of classes. Ifyou have for example 4 classes, a starting size of 8 and an end size of 20 points, you would get thefollowing values for the individual class sizes:

• Class 1 -8 points




You can adjust this automatic assignment by manually setting the values for the attribute symbol size(n), for example, in the following way:





The attributes symbol size (n), color value (n) and line width (n) are always bound to theattribute class boundary (n). That is, when you set one of these attributes, you also needto set a value for the corresponding class boundary.

For further information about the use of these objects, go to the SAP Service Marketplace on the BWpages under 'RFXPHQWDWLRQ → 'RFXPHQWDWLRQ�(QKDQFHPHQWV�→�:HE�$3,�5HIHUHQFH�in the section:HE�,WHPV → 0DSV�



0DS�5HQGHUHU

'HILQLWLRQ

With a map renderer, you determine how BW data is displayed on a map layer.

6WUXFWXUH

There are 11 different map renderers in the BEx Web Application Designer. These renderers aredivided into three different classes:

&ODVV��Renderers that relate to polygonal areas (static geo-characteristics). They display thefollowing:

• Color shading (COLORSHADING or CS)

• Bar charts (BAR)

• Pie charts (PIE)

• Pie charts (divided) (SPLITPIE)

• Pixel density (DOTDENSITY or D_DENSITY)

For these renderers, the static geo-characteristic must appear in the related GDWD�SURYLGHU inthe rows and the values to be displayed in the renderer must be in the columns. You can usehierarchies in both cases. You cannot have any other characteristic other than the geo-characteristic, or any key figure in the rows. You can use several characteristics or key figuresin the columns.

&ODVV�� Renderers that relate to locations (dynamic geo-characteristics). They display the following:

• Symbol (SYMBOL)

• Symbol (size-dependent) (SIZEGRADUATEDSYMBOL or SG_SYMBOL)

• Symbol (color-dependent) (COLORGRADUATEDSYMBOL or CG_SYMBOL)

• Bar charts (BAR)

• Pie charts (PIE)

• Pie charts (divided) (SPLITPIE)

For these renderers the dynamic geo-characteristic must appear in the GDWD�SURYLGHUbelonging to it in the rows. You must have also selected the /RQJLWXGH and /DWLWXGH�displayattributes to be displayed. You cannot have any other characteristics or key figures in therows. Only the first column is considered by the symbol renderers. The renderers EDU�FKDUW,SLH�FKDUW and SLH�FKDUW��GLYLGHG� consider all columns.

&ODVV�� Renderers that display relationships between locations (dynamic geo-characteristics):

• Line (LINE)

• Line (size-dependent) (SIZEGRADUATEDLINE or SG_LINE)

• Line (color-dependent) (COLORGRADUATEDLINE or CG_LINE)

It is important to have at least three map layers for these renderers. You define 6WDUW�3RLQW�inone map layer and the (QG�3RLQW in another map layer. The prerequisites described in class 2are also valid for both of these map layers. The third map layer contains the relationshipbetween the dynamic geo-characteristics 6WDUW�3RLQW�and (QG�3RLQW, that is, bothcharacteristics must be in the rows. The same prerequisites are valid for the columns asdescribed in class 2.

For those map renderers that have a long technical name, you can specify a shorter,alternative name (for example, COLORGRADUATEDLINE or CG_LINE). Both variationsare supported.



,QWHJUDWLRQ

So that you can present the BW business data on individual map layers graphically, you have toassign a PDS�UHQGHUHU to each map layer in the %([�:HE�$SSOLFDWLRQ�'HVLJQHU�and determine theproperties for this renderer.

([DPSOH�RI�D�5HQGHUHU�LQ�&ODVV��

0DS�OD\HU�TXHU\�YLHZ�WKDW�GHVFULEHV�WKH�UHODWLRQVKLS

6DOHV�2IILFH 6DOHV�5HSUHVHQWDWLYH 6DOHV

A 1 100 $

A 2 150 $

A 3 120 $

B 11 90 $

B 12 80 $

0DS�OD\HU�TXHU\�YLHZ�WKDW�GHVFULEHV�WKH�VWDUW�SRLQW

6DOHV�2IILFH /RQJLWXGH /DWLWXGH ��(PSOR\HHV

A 2.3 3.4 120

A 2.3 3.4 15

A 2.3 3.4 120

B -3.5 -2.0 87

B -3.5 -2.0 80

0DS�OD\HU�TXHU\�YLHZ�WKDW�GHVFULEHV�WKH�HQG�SRLQW

6DOHV

5HSUHVHQWDWLYH

/RQJLWXGH /DWLWXGH ��&XVWRPHUV

1 2.8 4.7 12

2 2.6 5.7 11

3 2.4 6.7 13

11 -3.8 -1.2 23

12 -3.4 -1.8 21



6LQJOH�'RFXPHQWV

'HILQLWLRQ

Web item allowing you to display single documents that you created in the Administrator Workbenchor in master data maintenance for master data in the Web application.

8VH

You can create the documents in different formats and versions (see Documents [Extern]). Forexample you can add several documents such as driving instructions and a picture of the local officefor each value of a characteristic, such as %XVLQHVV�SDUWQHU. You can use the document type attributeto decide which document you want to display in the Web application.

6WUXFWXUH

As well as its generic attributes [Seite 82], the Web item 6LQJOH�GRFXPHQW has the followingattributes:


&KDUDFWHULVWLFV��,2%-10� Name of the characteristic which the Web item6LQJOH�GRFXPHQW should reference.

Give the technical name of the characteristichere (25-place character sequence).

'RFXPHQW�W\SH��:::B'2&B7<3(� If you created several documents for acharacteristic in the Administrator Workbenchor in the master data maintenance screen, thedifferent document types that reference thecharacteristic are displayed here for selection.

If you do not make an entry here,the system assumes that there is adocument for the selectedcharacteristic.

If this is not the case you get amessage

− that no document was found or

− that the document is not unique (thereis more than one)

,QSODFH��,6B,13/$&(�

"X" = Yes, " " = No

You can define if the single document isdisplayed

• In the Web application (“X”)

• in a separate window (" ")

with this attribute.

Inplace ("X") is suitable especiallyfor screens and short texts.



/LVW�RI�'RFXPHQWV

'HILQLWLRQ

Web item that displays a list of documents in the Web application. You can also create newdocuments [Seite 378] yourself in the Web application.

8VH

The Web item /LVW�RI�'RFXPHQWV enables you to call or create context-sensitive information about thetransaction data used in the Web application. If you navigate in the Web application and, for example,restrict a characteristic to a certain characteristic value, the list of documents is automatically adjusted.This means that only the documents that are relevant for the restricted navigation status appear.

The documents for the characteristics that were set as the 'RFXPHQW�3URSHUWLHV in theAdministrator Workbench appear automatically in the list.

6WUXFWXUH

The Web item /LVW�RI�'RFXPHQWV has the following structure:

• &RQWH[W

The context is the counterpart to the navigation block and shows the characteristics that are'RFXPHQW�3URSHUWLHV and are contained in the basic data provider (query or query view), andtheir values.

If you have already inserted a navigation block into your Web template, you do not needthe context information in the list of documents if you want to see only those documentsthat refer to the numbers of the table.

The context is adjusted dynamically depending on the navigation in the Web application. Thismeans that the list of documents displays only those documents that refer to the requesteddata in the table. If the context can be changed, you can also focus on the documents and, forexample, display all the documents that refer to the InfoProvider.

You can set the following in the Web Application Designer using attributes:

− Whether or not you want to display the context

− Whether or not you can change the context in the Web report

• )XUWKHU�)XQFWLRQV

You can also:

− Create a new document [Seite 378]

− Set whether or not the characteristics of the documents are to be displayed

− Choose all the selections. In the context, all the characteristics for which you can restrict thelist of documents or a new document are displayed.

• /LVW�RI�'RFXPHQWV

The links to the documents are listed here in alphabetical order.

As well as its generic attributes [Seite 82], the Web item /LVW�RI�GRFXPHQWV has the following attributes:




'RFXPHQW�SURSHUWLHV

�6+2:B3523(57,(6�

�;�� <HV�� 1R

This attribute indicates if the documentproperty is to be displayed. The documentproperties tell you about how the documentsare assigned, for example base planning object4711, month of May. The context to which thedocument was restricted determines theassignment.

If a document property is identicalfor all selected documents, thisproperty is not displayed under thedocument link.

You define the initial display with the 'RFXPHQW3URSHUWLHV attribute. Using )XUWKHU�)XQFWLRQV�you can toggle the display of the properties inthe Web application.

&RQWH[W�LQIRUPDWLRQ

�6+2:B&217(;7�

�;�� <HV�� 1R

With this attribute you can define if the contextof the Web item /LVW�RI�GRFXPHQWV�is to bedisplayed.

&RQWH[W�FKDQJHDEOH�&217(;7B,6B&+$1*($%/(�

"X" = Yes, " " = No

With this attribute you can define if the contextof the Web item /LVW�RI�GRFXPHQWV�can bechanged.

1XPEHU�RI�URZV�LQ�WKH�OLVW With this attribute you can define the number ofrows (document links and properties) that aredisplayed at one time. If there are not enoughrows, an index for scrolling appears in thebottom row.

0D[LPXP�QXPEHU�GURSGRZQ�ER[

�0$;9$/8(6�

With this attribute you can define the maximumnumber of characteristic values to be displayedin the dropdown box of the context.

'RFXPHQW�FKDQJHDEOH With this attribute you can define whetherdocuments can be created, changed ordeleted.

)UDPH

�7$5*(7B)5$0(�

Here you can specify an HTML frame in whichthe individual documents that you call from thelist of documents is displayed.

The HTML frame must beintegrated in the Web template.

If you use the Web template withina frame set, you can also integratethe /LVW�RI�'RFXPHQWV Web item inanother frame of this set.

If you do not define an HTML frame, theindividual documents are displayed in separatewindows.

:HE�7HPSODWHV

'HILQLWLRQ

A Web template determines the structure of a Web application. You use the Web Application Designer toinsert placeholders into a HTML document for Web items [Seite 81]�(in the form of object tags [Seite225]), data providers [Seite 261] (in the form of object tags) and BW URLs. The HTML document with theBW-specific placeholders is called a :HE�WHPSODWH� Web templates are checked into the Web ApplicationDesigner. The HTML page that is displayed in the Internet browser is called a :HE�DSSOLFDWLRQ.Depending on which Web items you have inserted into the Web template, a Web application contains oneor more tables, an alert monitor, charts, maps, and so on.

6WUXFWXUH

The Web template is the keystone of a Web application. It contains placeholders for Web items andcommand URLs [Seite 229]. Data providers, Web�items, and command URLs are generated for Webapplications.

In the Web template, you determine from which data provider and it what way (Web items) the BWdata is displayed. You also determine which additional options there are (BW URLs).

When a request is sent from a Web application to the SAP Web Application Server, a WHPSODWH objectis generated. The structure of the requested HTML page is derived from this object. The followingobjects are generated on the basis of this WHPSODWH:

• Data Provider

• Web Item

,QWHJUDWLRQ

As of BW 3.0, Web templates are stored on the SAP Web Application Server.

The option to store Web templates (for BW 2.0B or BW 2.1C, for example) on the ITS isstill possible. We recommend, however, that you use the SAP Web Application Server.

([DPSOH

The following is an example of a simple Web template with a navigation block [Seite 186] and a table[Seite 85]:

<html>

<head>

<link rel="stylesheet" href="Bex/StyleSheets/BWReports.css">

<title>New Page 1</title>

</head>

<body>



<object>

<param name=’OWNER’ value=’SAP_BW’><param name='CMD' value='SET_PROPERTIES'><param name='VARIABLE_SCREEN' value='X'><param name='USE_PERSONALIZATION' value='X'>

</object>

<object>

<param name=’OWNER’ value=’SAP_BW’><param name=’CMD’ value=’SET_DATA_PROVIDER’><param name='DATA_PROVIDER' value='View1 ><param name='DATA_PROVIDER_ID' value='VIEW1'>DATA_PROVIDER :View1

</object>



<object WIDTH=”350”>

<param name=’OWNER’ value=’SAP_BW’><param name=’CMD’ value=’GET_ITEM’><param name=’ITEM’ value=’Nav Block’><param name='ITEM_ID' value='NAVBLOCK'><param name='DATA_PROVIDER' value='View1 >ITEM :Nav Block

</object>

<br>



<object WIDTH=”600”>

<param name=’OWNER’ value=’SAP_BW’><param name=’CMD’ value=’GET_ITEM’><param name='ITEM' value='Table'><param name='ITEM_ID' value='TABLE'><param name='DATA_PROVIDER' value='View1 >ITEM :Table

</object>

</body>



2EMHFW�7DJV

'HILQLWLRQ

By using REMHFW�WDJV, you can determine properties of Web templates, create data provider and Webitems in a Web template, and supply them with parameters. The parameters that you set for Webitems are used to control the settings you have made in the Web Application Designer (width andheight, for example). It is possible, right at the start of the Web application, to send a genericcommand (filter, change attribute) or a command sequence [Seite 257] to the data provider. Theparameters needed to send the command are attached to the object tag (see example).

6WUXFWXUH

An object tag starts with “<object...>” and ends with “</object>”. The SAP_BW object tags areidentified by the parameter “owner”, and the value “SAP_BW”. Only this type of object is replaced inthe Web template. All other types of object are transferred unchanged into the Web application.

It is possible to set parameters at the start of an object tag

�REMHFW�:,'7+ ¶��¶�+(,*+7 ¶��¶�RZQHU ¶6$3B%:¶��!��REMHFW!

or within the object tag, as a parameter tag.

�REMHFW!

�SDUDP�QDPH ¶RZQHU¶�YDOXH ¶6$3B%:¶!��

��REMHFW!

Object tags are also displayed in non-HTML code mode in many HTML editors. Some HTML editorsalso give you the option of changing the size, and maintaining the parameters of the object tag. It isusually possible to use the drag and drop function to move the object tags around a page.

The following object tags play an important role in BEx Web Applications:

Object Tag for Properties of Web Templates [Seite 226]

Object Tag for Data Provider [Seite 227]

Object Tag for Web Items [Seite 228]



2EMHFW�7DJ�IRU�WKH�3URSHUWLHV�RI�:HE�7HPSODWHV

'HILQLWLRQ

Object Tag for defining the properties of Web templates.

8VH

The properties of a Web template can be defined in an object tag. The properties include all theparameters that can be passed by URL when a Web template is called. This includes all the propertiesof the context menu.

Parameter ’CMD’ must be set to ’SET_PROPERTIES’ to indicate that these are theproperties of the Web template.

([DPSOHV

'LVSOD\�WHPSODWH�ZLWK�YDULDEOH�LQSXW

<object>

<param name=’OWNER’ value=’SAP_BW’><param name='CMD' value='SET_PROPERTIES'><param name='VARIABLE_SCREEN' value='X'>

</object>

&RQWH[W�PHQX�VKRXOG�QRW�FRQWDLQ�DQ�HQKDQFHG�PHQX

<object>

<param name=’OWNER’ value=’SAP_BW’><param name='CMD' value='SET_PROPERTIES'><param name='MENU_ENHANCED' value=' '>

</object>



2EMHFW�7DJ�IRU�'DWD�3URYLGHU

'HILQLWLRQ

Object tag for creating Data Providers.

8VH

The parameters that you need for creating a GDWD�SURYLGHU are available in the Web ApplicationDesigner. You add other parameters, for example, to set up the value help (F4), or to send acommand to the data provider before you call a page.

The ‘CMD’ parameter has to be filled with the ‘SET_DATA_PROVIDER’ to indicate thatyou are creating a data provider

([DPSOHV

&UHDWH�4XHU\�9LHZ

<object>

<param name=’OWNER’ value=’SAP_BW’><param name=’CMD’ value=’SET_DATA_PROVIDER’><param name='DATA_PROVIDER' value='View1 ><param name='DATA_PROVIDER_ID' value='VIEWABC'>DATA_PROVIDER :View1

</object>

4XHU\�YLHZ�ILOWHUHG�E\�FRXQWU\��86$�

<object>

<param name=’OWNER’ value=’SAP_BW’><param name=’CMD’ value=’SET_DATA_PROVIDER’><param name='DATA_PROVIDER' value='View1 ><param name='DATA_PROVIDER_ID' value='VIEWABC'><param name=’FILTER_IOBJNM’ value=’0COUNTRY’><param name=’FILTER_VALUE’ value=’US’>DATA_PROVIDER :View1

</object>



2EMHFW�7DJ�IRU�:HE�,WHPV

'HILQLWLRQ

Object tag for creating a Web item.

8VH

The parameters that you need for creating a Web item are available in the Web Application Designer.You add further parameters, for example, to adjust the size at a later point, or to set a title.

The parameter ‘CMD’ has to be filled with ‘GET_ITEM’ to indicate that you are creating aWeb item.

([DPSOH

&UHDWLQJ�D�:HE�,WHP

<object>

<param name=’OWNER’ value=’SAP_BW’><param name=’CMD’ value=’GET_ITEM’><param name='ITEM' value='NavBlock'><param name='ITEM_ID' value='NAVBLOCK'><param name='DATA_PROVIDER' value='View1 >

ITEM :Nav Block

</object>

&UHDWLQJ�D�:HE�LWHP�ZLWK�KHLJKW��SL[HOV��ZLGWK��SL[HOV��DQG�WKH�WLWOH�³%XVLQHVV�*UDSKLF´

<object WIDTH=’400’ HEIGHT=’500’>

<param name=’OWNER’ value=’SAP_BW’><param name=’CMD’ value=’GET_ITEM’><param name='ITEM' value='Chart1'><param name='ITEM_ID' value='PIECHART'><param name='DATA_PROVIDER' value='View1 ><param name=’GENERATE_CAPTION’ value=’X’><param name='CAPTION' value='Business Grafik'>ITEM :Chart 1

</object>



&RPPDQG�85/V

'HILQLWLRQ

You can set command URLs in a Web template [Seite 223], as well as an object tag [Seite 225].These are then used as bookmarks for URLs or the starting place for a URL.

6WUXFWXUH

Command URLs have the following structure:

<SAP_BW_URL 3DUDPHWHU� ¶9DOXH�¶�3DUDPHWHU� ¶9DOXH�¶��>

When you generate the HTML page with one of the following URLs, command URLs are replaced by asimilar URL:

http://myAppServer:myPort/SAP/BW/BEx?pageno=1&request_No=8&3DUDPHWHU� 9DOXH�3DUDPHWHU� 9DOXH��

This URL requests a new page from the ITS. The parameters are removed. If you navigate in the Webapplication, then a new page is requested. The status of the previous page is changed due to thetransfer of the parameters (for example, filters are set).

6HH�DOVR�

Command Sequences [Seite 257]



&DOOLQJ�XS�D�:HE�7HPSODWH

8VH

The URL for calling a Web template is generated by the Web Application Designer. You can extendthe URL by various parameters when you call up a Web template. These parameters can:

• influence the data contents or display of the results (see Calling up Parameterized Web Templates[Seite 235])

• activate or deactivate different functions on the server.

)XQFWLRQV

Choose from the following options to call up the template:

6WDQGDUG�FDOO�XS�DQG�SURSHUWLHV�RI�:HE�WHPSODWHV

The properties of the Web template can be determined both in an object tag (see ObjectTag for the Properties of Web Templates [Seite 226]) and also with the call up of thecommand &DOO�XS�:HE�WHPSODWH.

&0' /'2&

3DUDPHWHU 'HVFULSWLRQ

7(03/$7(B,' 1DPH�RI�WKH�:HE�WHPSODWH

Name under which you stored the Webtemplate in the Web Application Designer.

67$7(/(66��RSWLRQDO�

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

(QG�WKH�FRQQHFWLRQ�WR�WKH�VHUYHU�DV�VRRQ�DVSRVVLEOH

For Web templates that are used almostexclusively for display without furthernavigation, it is more useful to set the attributeSTATELESS. The session on the applicationserver is terminated when the Web template iscreated. This saves resources on theapplication server.

If this attribute is not specified, it isassumed that the page is stillneeded for navigating.

86(B3(5621$/,=$7,21��RSWLRQDO�

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

8VH�SHUVRQDOL]HG�:HE�WHPSODWH

If the parameter is set to ‘X’, the personalizedWeb template for the current user is used. Ifpersonalization does not exist for the Webtemplate or the parameter is not set, the Webtemplate is executed without personalization.

67</(B6+((7��RSWLRQDO� 3DWK�IRU�D�VW\OHVKHHW�WKDW�\RX�ZDQW�WR�XVH�WRGLVSOD\�WKH�:HE�WHPSODWH�

This overwrites any stylesheet that you mayhave already assigned.



75$&(��RSWLRQDO�

’X’ = switch on, ‘ ’ = do not switch on

6ZLWFK�RQ�2/$3�WUDFH

To analyze problems with SAP, you usuallyneed a trace. You can activate the trace withthe help of note 112458 or by using the TRACEparameter.

-$9$6&5,37��RSWLRQDO�


8VH�RI�-DYD6FULSW

Using this parameter, you ensure that Webapplications are created using JavaScript(extensive interaction options) or suppress theuse of JavaScript (restricted interaction).

If this parameter is not transferred,JavaScript is activatedautomatically in Web browsers ofversion >=4.0.

61,33(7B23(5$7,216��RSWLRQDO�


5HORDG�FKDQJHG�FRPSRQHQWV�RI�WKH�SDJH

You use this parameter to control whether onlychanged objects are loaded in navigation. Thisfunction has higher Web browser requirements.For this reason, this function is only supportedby MS Internet Explorer version >=.

If this parameter is not transferred,loading is activated automaticallyfor the suitable Web browsers.

(1$%/(B23(1B:,1'2:��RSWLRQDO�


2SHQ�QHZ�ZLQGRZ

Using this parameter, you can control whethera new browser window is opened, for example,for the properties dialog box or for filtering. Ifthis parameter is not specified, new windowsare opened (if supported by the Web browser).

9$5,$%/(B6&5((1��RSWLRQDO�

‘X’ = display variable screen, ‘ ’ = do notdisplay, if possible

'LVSOD\�YDULDEOH�VFUHHQ

If you call up a Web template that has queryviews containing variables that are ready forinput, you can use these parameters to displaythe variable screen. Is you do not set thisparameter, or set it to ‘ ’, the variable screen ishidden, whenever possible. However, it will stillbe shown if, for example, the required variablesthat are ready for input have not yet been filled.

0(/7B9$5,$%/(6��RSWLRQDO�

‘X’ = merge, ‘ ’ = display each queryindividually

0HUJH�YDULDEOHV

If you call up a Web template containingseveral query views that have variables thatare ready for input and you go to the variablescreen display, you can determine, throughthese parameters, whether variables, which areused in all query views and in the same context(same InfoProvider, same compounding), areto be provided for input only once.



9$5,$%/(6B&/($5��RSWLRQDO�

‘X’ = reset variable, ‘ ’ = do not reset

5HVHW�GHIDXOW�YDULDEOHV

If you call up a Web template that contains oneor several query views that have variables thatare ready for input, you can specify thisparameter to reset the default variablesthrough the query view. The variables thencontain the defaults from the variable definition.

68335(66B:$51,1*6��RSWLRQDO�

‘X’ = do not display warnings, ‘ ’ = displaywarnings

6XSSUHVV�ZDUQLQJV

With this parameter, warnings are notdisplayed. Terminations are still displayed.

68335(66B6<67(0B0(66$*(6�RSWLRQDO�

'X' = Do not display system messages

' ' = Display system messages

6XSSUHVV�V\VWHP�PHVVDJHV

With this parameter, system messages are notdisplayed.

'$7$B02'(��RSWLRQDO�

‘NEW’ = use current data

‘STORED’ = Use precalculated data

‘HYBRID’ = use precalculated data, requestcurrent data if this is missing.

‘STATIC’ = use precalculated HTML pages

‘STATIC_HYBRID’ = use precalculated HTMLpages, if there are none, search byprecalculated data and when there is none,request current data

'DWD�PRGH

This parameter is optional. If you do not specifyone of the options for this parameter, a requestis always sent to the OLAP processor andcurrent data is read.

For the modi ‘STORED’ and ‘HYBRID’, datahas to be precalculated using the ReportingAgent [Extern].

See Defining the Web Templates Setting[Extern]

The parameters PAGEID and WBID that are used in BW 2.x are supported for the Webtemplates created under BW 2.x. We recommend, however, that you no longer use these.

&DOOLQJ�XS�WKH�:HE�WHPSODWH�ZLWKRXW�QDYLJDWLQJ

http://yourAppServer:yourPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&TEMPLATE_ID=yourTemplate67$7(/(66 ;

&DOOLQJ�XS�WKH�:HE�WHPSODWH�ZLWK�WUDFH�VZLWFKHG�RQ

http://yourAppServer:yourPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&TEMPLATE_ID=yourTemplate75$&( ;

&DOOLQJ�XS�WKH�:HE�WHPSODWH�ZLWK�UHVHW�YDULDEOHV�DQG�DFWLYH�YDULDEOH�VFUHHQ

http://yourAppServer:yourPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&TEMPLATE_ID=yourTemplate&VARIABLE_SCREEN=X&VARIABLES_CLEAR=X

&DOOLQJ�XS�WKH�:HE�WHPSODWH�ZLWK�D�GLIIHUHQW�GDWD�SURYLGHU

This call-up replaces all data providers [Seite 261] of the type 'query view' with the data providerspecified. This means you can make a query or a query view available for use without having to doanything else on the Web, and you can use a predefined Web template for displaying the query.

As well as the parameters used in the default call up, this call up also has the following:

Call up for displaying a query:


,1)2&8%( 7HFKQLFDO�QDPH�RI�WKH�,QIR3URYLGHU



48(5< 7HFKQLFDO�QDPH�RI�WKH�TXHU\

9$5,$17��RSWLRQDO� 9DULDQW��LI�\RX�DUH�QRW�UHTXLUHG�WR�HQWHU�DYDULDEOH

Call up for displaying another query view:


'$7$B3529,'(5B,' 7HFKQLFDO�QDPH�RI�WKH�VDYHG�TXHU\�YLHZ



'LVSOD\LQJ�D�TXHU\�E\�XVLQJ�D�:HE�WHPSODWH�RI�\RXU�FKRLFH

http://yourAppServer:yourPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&TEMPLATE_ID=yourTemplateLQIRFXEH P\&XEHTXHU\ P\4XHU\

6HWWLQJ�\RXU�RZQ�:HE�WHPSODWH�REMHFWV

As well as being able to define a new initialization for all data providers of a template, you can alsoconvert each data provider specifically and each Web item, using parameterization. By doing this, youallow even your more complicated Web templates to be reused.

The index in the parameter is indicated in the following by ’_I’.

The parameters for overwriting the data provider initialization are:


6(7B'$7$B3529,'(5B, /RJLFDO�QDPH�RI�WKH�GDWD�SURYLGHU

Name of the data provider for which you wantto set a new initialization

,1)2&8%(B,��2SWLRQ�� 7HFKQLFDO�QDPH�RI�WKH�,QIR3URYLGHU

48(5<B,��2SWLRQ�� 7HFKQLFDO�QDPH�RI�WKH�TXHU\

'$7$B3529,'(5B,'B,��2SWLRQ�� 7HFKQLFDO�QDPH�RI�WKH�VDYHG�TXHU\�YLHZ


The parameters for overwriting the Web item initialization are:


6(7B,7(0B, /RJLFDO�QDPH�RI�WKH�:HE�LWHP

Name of the Web item for which you want toset a new initialization

,7(0B,'B,��2SWLRQ�� :HE�LWHP�NH\

You create a Web item for a Web templatebased on a Web item setting that you havemade in the Web Application Designer.



,7(0B&/$66B,��2SWLRQ�� &ODVV�QDPH�RI�WKH�:HE�LWHP�FODVV

Name of the ABAP object class that outputgeneration transfers. This corresponds to theuse of non-reusable Web items (standard Webitems) in the Web Application Designer. Webitems are created with the default values for theattribute.

The class name for the table is, for example,CL_RSR_WWW_ITEM_GRID

6ZDSSLQJ��GDWD�SURYLGHUV�DQG�D�:HE�LWHP�ZKHQ�FDOOLQJ�XS�D�:HE�WHPSODWH

http://yourAppServer:yourPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&TEMPLATE_ID=yourTemplate6(7B'$7$B3529,'(5B� P\'DWD3URYLGHU�LQIRFXEHB� P\&XEHTXHU\B� P\4XHU\6(7B'$7$B3529,'(5B� P\'DWD3URYLGHU�GDWDBSURYLGHUBLGB� P\6SHFLDO9LHZ6(7B,7(0B� P\,WHP,7(0B,'B� P\3LH&KDUW

8VLQJ�D�VWDQGDUG�:HE�WHPSODWH�IRU�D�GDWD�SURYLGHU

If you call up the previous variant without specifying a TEMPLATE_ID, a standard Web template isused automatically. To make a Web template the standard Web template, go to %:�&XVWRPL]LQJ

,PSOHPHQWDWLRQ�*XLGH�→�%XVLQHVV�,QIRUPDWLRQ�:DUHKRXVH�→�6HWWLQJV�5HOHYDQW�IRU�5HSRUWLQJ�→:HE�%DVHG�6HWWLQJV�→�'HWHUPLQH�D�6WDQGDUG�:HE�7HPSODWH.

If there is no setting made here, the system uses a Web template generated by SAP.

&DOOLQJ�XS�D�TXHU\�ZLWKRXW�PDNLQJ�DQ\�SUHSDUDWLRQV�LQ�WKH�:HE

http://yourAppServer:yourPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOCLQIRFXEH P\&XEHTXHU\ P\4XHU\



&DOOLQJ�3DUDPHWHUL]HG�:HE�7HPSODWHV

8VH

The URL for calling a Web template is generated by the Web Application Designer. It is possible tocopy the URL, and use it again as many times as you like.

A typical URL looks like this:

http://myAppServer:myPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&template_id=yourTemplate

The first part of the URL ((http://myAppServer:myPort/SAP/BW/BEx?) calls the BEx service in the SAPWeb Application Server in the BW system. The next step is to call the Web template. The command‘LDOC’ with the parameters 'TEMPLATE_ID' calls the Web template.

The command LDOC requests a new HTML page. The Web template is used to construct this HTMLpage. The Web application corresponding to the Web template is displayed in the Web Browser.

You parameterize the Web template by adding further parameters to the URL. These parameters arepassed on to all data providers and Web items. Parameterizing the URL allows you to filter all thequery views according to a particular country or cost center.

([DPSOHV

)LOWHULQJ�DOO�TXHU\�YLHZV�DFFRUGLQJ�WR�*HUPDQ\

http://myAppServer:myPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&template_id=yourTemplate&),/7(5B,2%-10 �&28175<),/7(5B9$/8( '(

)LOWHULQJ�DOO�TXHU\�YLHZV�DFFRUGLQJ�WR�*HUPDQ\��

http://myAppServer:myPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&template_id=yourTemplate&),/7(5B,2%-10B� �&28175<),/7(5B9$/8(B� '(),/7(5B,2%-10B� �&$/<($5),/7(5B9$/8(B� ��

'LVSOD\LQJ�DOO�:HE�LWHPV�ZLWK�WLWOH

http://myAppServer:myPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&template_id=yourTemplate&*(1(5$7(B&$37,21 ;



6ZLWFKLQJ�:HE�7HPSODWHV

8VH

You have the option to calling up Web reports [Seite 230] or to switch between different Web reports.When you switch Web reports, all the Web items and data providers in the Web template in which youstarted are retained. The Web items and data providers that appear in the new Web template, and forwhich there is no object with the same name, are generated from scratch. The system identifies theobjects by their logical names.

The main difference between calling a Web template and switching to a different Web template is thatobjects from the initial Web template are transferred without being modified into the new Web report.This means, for example, that the query view of the navigation status stays the same.

This function is particularly useful for switching from overview pages (often containing only diagrams)to detailed pages (with tables and navigation blocks).

)XQFWLRQV

&0' &+$1*(B7(03/$7(


7(03/$7(B,' 1DPH�RI�WKH�:HE�WHPSODWH

Name under which you stored the Webtemplate in the Web Application Designer.


<SAP_BW_URL CMD='CHANGE_TEMPLATE' TEMPLATE_ID=’DETAILS'>



3HUVRQDOL]LQJ�WKH�:HE�7HPSODWH

8VH

With this command you can personalize a Web template for the user who is logged on. The next timethis user calls the Web template with parameter USE_PERSONALIZATION=X, the same navigationstatus as was valid during personalization is displayed. This mechanism is useful especially for portalpages.

&0' 3(5621$/,=(

([DPSOH

<SAP_BW_URL CMD=’PERSONALIZE’>



5HPRYLQJ�3HUVRQDOL]DWLRQ

8VH

You use this command to remove the current user’s Web template personalization.

&0' 5(6(7B3(56

([DPSOH

<SAP_BW_URL CMD='RESET_PERS'>



&UHDWLQJ�%RRNPDUNV

8VH

Command that allows you to mark a Web application as a bookmark. The result of this instruction is todisplay a Web application with a bookmark-enabled URL. You can call this URL at any time, whichresults in a Web application that displays the same navigation status (including whether the hierarchyis expanded) as the Web application from which the instruction was called.

&0' %22.0$5.


%22.0$5.B'$7$

�RSWLRQDO�

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

6WRUH�KLVWRULFDO�GDWD�DERXW�WKH�ERRNPDUN

The Web application with the historical data isdisplayed when you call the bookmark.Bookmarks are normally used without data.

([DPSOH

<SAP_BW_URL CMD='BOOKMARK'>



&KDQJLQJ�,FRQ�'LUHFWRU\

8VH

You use this command if you are working on a special Web application, and you want to use iconsother than the icons that are generally used as the symbols for expanding and collapsing hierarchies,for example. The command assigns a different icon directory to the Web template.

The names of the icons remain unaffected. In the new directory the icons have to appearwith their original names, but you are able to alter them in other ways.

)XQFWLRQV

&0' 6(7B85/6


,&21B35(),; 5HODWLYH�SDWK�WR�DQ�GLUHFWRU\�LQ�WKH�0,0(UHSRVLWRU\�RU�RQ�WKH�,76

([DPSOH

'LVSOD\LQJ�D�:HE�UHSRUW�XVLQJ�LFRQV�IURP�D�GLIIHUHQW�GLUHFWRU\

http://yourAppServer:yourPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&template_id=yourTemplateFPGB� FPG��'6(7B85/6��,&21B35(),;��'P\3DWK

A command sequence is used in this example.

See also:




5HOHDVLQJ�D�:HE�7HPSODWH

8VH

You can use this command to remove the current Web template with all its objects from the memory ofthe application server. The Web template cannot be accessed once this is done. You can only use thecommand Calling up a Web Template [Seite 230] to do this.

You can call up other Web templates by using commands in a command sequence.

)XQFWLRQV

&0' 3$*(B)5((

<SAP_BW_URL CMD=’PAGE_FREE’>



&DOOLQJ�XS�WKH�9DULDEOHV�6FUHHQ

8VH

This command allows you to call up the variables screen again for the current page. You can thenchange the variable values that have been used until now in the variables screen.

You can also transfer new values over, as described in Default Variables for Web Applications [Seite243]. Along with the values already set, these serve as the default variables screen.

If the variables screen appears when you call up a Web application, you have to adjust the Webtemplate call (see Calling up a Web Template [Seite 230]→ Standard Call).

)XQFWLRQV

&0' 352&(66B9$5,$%/(6

68%&0' 9$5,$%/(B6&5((1

<SAP_BW_URL CMD=’PROCESS_VARIABLES’ SUBCMD=’VARIABLE_SCREEN’>



'HIDXOW�9DULDEOHV�IRU�:HE�$SSOLFDWLRQV

8VH

Variables [Seite 42] play a central role in BW for queries. For example, the entire query or onlyindividual parts of the query can be filtered before reading data according to values. There arevariables with automatic substitution, substitution from authorizations, or variables that are ready forinput.

The variables for Web applications can be processed in the background (without a variable screen) orin the foreground (with a variable screen). In both cases it is desirable to predefine variables throughparameterization. Therefore, all types of variables that are ready for input are supported

In contrast to filtering, the external value for predefining has to be specified for the variables. The date,for example, is transferred as it has been entered.

)XQFWLRQV

Predefining variables is attained by parameterizing the URL. The variable values are separated fromeach other by different indexes.

The index in the parameter is indicated in the following by ’B,’.

&KDUDFWHULVWLF�9DOXH�9DULDEOHV

Parameter variables are predefined as in the following:


9$5B1$0(B, 7HFKQLFDO�QDPH�RI�WKH�YDULDEOHV

9$5B9$/8(B(;7B, $WWULEXWH�YDOXH�LQ�H[WHUQDO�GLVSOD\

Key for characteristic value in external display

Interval variables are predefined as in the following:



9$5B9$/8(B/2:B(;7B, ³)URP´�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�YDOXH�LQ�H[WHUQDOGLVSOD\


9$5B9$/8(B+,*+B(;7B, ³7R´�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�YDOXH�LQ�H[WHUQDO�GLVSOD\


Selection option variables are predefined as in the following:



9$5B23(5$725B, 2SHUDWRU

’EQ’ = Individual value

’BT’ = Interval

’LT’ = Less than

’LE’ = Less than or equal to

’GT’ = Greater than

’GE’ = Greater than or equal to



9$5B9$/8(B/2:B(;7B, ³)URP´�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�YDOXH�LQ�H[WHUQDOGLVSOD\


9$5B9$/8(B+,*+B(;7B, ³7R´�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�YDOXH�LQ�H[WHUQDO�GLVSOD\


This value must only be specifiedwith VAR_OPERATOR=’BT’.

9$5B6,*1B, 5RZ�HIIHFW

’I’ found values are added,

’E’ found values are removed.

+LHUDUFK\�1RGH�9DULDEOHV



9$5B9$/8(B(;7B, 1RGH�NH\�LQ�H[WHUQDO�GLVSOD\

Key for hierarchy node

9$5B12'(B,2%-10B, 1DPH�RI�WKH�QRGH�FKDUDFWHULVWLF

With characteristic nodes and text nodes, youhave to specify the characteristic name(0HIER_NODE).

+LHUDUFK\��)RUPXOD��DQG�7H[W�9DULDEOHV



9$5B9$/8(B(;7B, +LHUDUFK\�QDPH��IRUPXOD�YDOXH��WH[W

([DPSOHV

3UHGHILQLQJ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�YDULDEOH

http://yourAppServer:yourPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&template_id=yourTemplate&YDUBQDPHB� P\3DUDPHWHU9DULDEOHYDUBYDOXHBH[WB� ��

3UHGHILQLQJ�WKH�SDUDPHWHU�YDULDEOH��DQG�VHOHFW�RSWLRQV�YDULDEOH��WR��

http://yourAppServer:yourPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&template_id=yourTemplate&YDUBQDPHB� P\3DUDPHWHU9DULDEOHYDUBYDOXHBH[WB� ��YDUBQDPHB� P\6HO2SW9DUYDUBRSHUDWRUB� (4YDUBVLJQB� ,YDUBYDOXHBORZBH[WB� �YDUBQDPHB� P\6HO2SW9DUYDUBRSHUDWRUB� %7YDUBVLJQB� ,YDUBYDOXHBORZBH[WB� �YDUBYDOXHBKLJKBH[WB� ��

3UHGHILQLQJ�KLHUDUFK\�QRGHV�YDULDEOH��'(��+,(5�12'(�

http://yourAppServer:yourPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&template_id=yourTemplate&YDUBQDPHB� P\+U\1RGH9DULDEOHYDUBYDOXHBH[WB� '(YDUBQRGHBLREMQPB� �+,(5B12'(



&KDQJLQJ�WKH�9DOXHV�RI�9DULDEOHV

8VH

Using this command, you can change the values of variables on the current page.

Enter the variable values as described in Default Variables for Web Applications [Seite 243]. Variablesthat you do not specify maintain their previous value.

)XQFWLRQV

&0' 352&(66B9$5,$%/(6

68%&0' 9$5B68%0,7

([DPSOH

<SAP_BW_URL CMD=’PROCESS_VARIABLES’ SUBCMD=’VAR_SUBMIT’VAR_NAME_1=’myParameterVariable’ VAR_VALUE_EXT_1=’4711’>



$GMXVWLQJ�DQG�(QKDQFLQJ�WKH�&RQWH[W�0HQX

8VH

You can adjust the context menu that is created automatically for table cells to your company-specificneeds and scenarios.

You can copy functions of the enhanced context menu to the context menu that is not enhanced oryou can hide functions.

You can also integrate your own context-specific entries in the context menu.

)XQFWLRQV

The following options are available:

Adjusting the Context Menu [Seite 249]

Enhancing the Context Menu [Seite 254]



0RGLI\LQJ�WKH�&RQWH[W�0HQX

8VH

Along with properties such as 9$5,$%/(B6&5((1, you can also modify the context menu for a Webtemplate. You can turn every entry in the menu on or off or place it in the (QKDQFHG�0HQX�

)XQFWLRQV

All entries in the context menu are listed in the following list of properties:

Menu entries that are not specified retain their default value. The default values areunderlined in the list

3URSHUWLHV 'HVFULSWLRQ

(1+$1&('B0(18

‘ ‘ = Start with basic menu

‘X’ = Start with enhanced menu

6WDUW�ZLWK�(QKDQFHG�0HQX

You decide here whether the page opens withthe basic menu (standard setting) or theenhanced menu.

0(18B%$&.

‘ ‘= Not displayed

‘X’= Displayed in the “basic menu”

‘E’= Displayed in the “enhanced menu”

³%DFN´

Undo one navigation step on a data provider

0(18B%$&.B72B67$57




³%DFN�WR�6WDUW´

Undo all navigation steps on a data provider

0(18B%22.0$5.




³%RRNPDUN´

Create bookmarks.

0(18B%22.0$5.B:,7+B'$7$




³%RRNPDUN´

Create bookmark with the current data. Whenyou call up the bookmark later, the “historical”data is displayed.

0(18B&$/&8/$7(B5(68/7




³&DOFXODWH�5HVXOW�DV´

Calculations for value cells.

0(18B&$/&8/$7(B9$/8(




³&DOFXODWH�6LQJOH�9DOXHV�DV´




0(18B&+$5$&7(5,67,&B3523(57,(6




³3URSHUWLHV´

Properties for characteristic cells.

0(18B&808/$7(B9$/8(




³&DOFXODWH�&XPXODWLYH´


0(18B&855(1&<B&219(56,21




³&XUUHQF\�7UDQVODWLRQ´

Calls up the currency translation dialog box.

0(18B'2&80(17B&5($7(




³&UHDWH�1HZ�'RFXPHQW´

0(18B',63/$<B'2&80(176




³'LVSOD\�'RFXPHQWV´

0(18B',63/$<B'2&80(17B3523




³'LVSOD\�3URSHUWLHV´�RU�³'R�1RW�'LVSOD\3URSHUWLHV´

In the context of the Web item /LVW�RI'RFXPHQWV�

0(18B',63/$<B'2&80(17B6(/(&




³$OO�6HOHFWLRQV´�RU�³,QIR3URYLGHU6HOHFWLRQV´

In the context of the Web item /LVW�RI'RFXPHQWV�

0(18B'5,//B'2:1




³,QVHUW�'ULOOGRZQ�$FFRUGLQJ�WR´

0(18B'5,//B83




³'ULOOGRZQ´

“Drilldown” with the exception ofnavigation in maps.



0(18B'5,//B83B*,6




³'ULOOGRZQ´

“Drilldown” in the context ofnavigation in maps.

0(18B(1+$1&('


‘E’= Displayed

³%DVLF�0HQX´�RU�³(QKDQFHG�0HQX´

Display option for entries in the enhancedcontext menu.

0(18B(;&+$1*(B2%-(&76




³6ZDS��ZLWK��´

Swap characteristics or structures.

0(18B(;3257B72B&69




³([SRUW�DV�&69�)LOH´

0(18B(;3257B72B;/6




³([SRUW�DV�06�([FHO��)LOH´

0(18B),/7(5




³.HHS�)LOWHU�9DOXH´

0(18B),/7(5B'5,//B'2:1




³)LOWHU�DQG�'ULOOGRZQ�$FFRUGLQJ�WR´

0(18B),/7(5B21B$;,6




³.HHS�)LOWHU�9DOXH�RQ�$[LV´

0(18B)25:$5'




³)RUZDUG´

Repeat a navigation step on a data provider.

0(18B+,(5$5&+<B'5,//




³([SDQG�+LHUDUFK\´



0(18B+,(5$5&+<B12'(B'5,//




'ULOOGRZQ�RSHUDWLRQV�RQ�KLHUDUFKLHV

0(18B+,(5$5&+<B67$7(




³�'H�DFWLYDWH�+LHUDUFK\´

0(18B48(5<B3523(57,(6




³4XHU\�3URSHUWLHV´

0(18B5(029(B'5,//B'2:1




³5HPRYH�'ULOOGRZQ´

0(18B5(029(B),/7(5




³5HPRYH�)LOWHUV´

0(18B55,




8VLQJ�WKH�UHSRUW�UHSRUW�LQWHUIDFH��JR�WR�WKH³*RWR´�PHQX

0(18B6(/(&7B),/7(5




³6HOHFW�)LOWHU�9DOXH´

0(18B6257




³6RUW´

Sort by characteristic cells and data cells.

0(18B6:,7&+B$;,6




³6ZDS�$[HV´

0(18B9$/8(B3523(57,(6




³3URSHUWLHV´

Properties for value cells.



([DPSOHV

)RU�WKLV�H[DPSOH��6ZDS�$[HV�DSSHDUV�LQ�WKH�EDVLF�FRQWH[W�PHQX�DQG�WKH�FXUUHQF\�WUDQVODWLRQ�LVFRPSOHWHO\�KLGGHQ�

<object>

<param name=’OWNER’ value=’SAP_BW’><param name=’CMD’ value=’SET_PROPERTIES’><param name=’MENU_SWITCH_AXIS’ value=’X’><param name=’MENU_CURRENCY_CONVERSION’ value=’ ’>

</object>



(QKDQFLQJ�WKH�&RQWH[W�0HQX

8VH

As well as being able to make entries in the context menu visible, entries in the enhanced menu visibleor entries in the enhanced menu invisible, you can also hang scenario-specific entries in the menu.You have two options:

• You define the new entries using the :HE�7HPSODWH�3URSHUWLHV object tag.

• You add the new entries to the menu using the JavaScript function.

The former option is described in this section.

In both cases, you have to write a JavaScript function that transfers the processing when you selectthe menu entry.

For more detailed information, see Adding a Menu Entry using JavaScript [Seite 321].

)XQFWLRQV

New entries are defined using different series of parameters in the Web template properties as follows:


&0(18B/$%(/B, /DEHOLQJ�WH[W�LQ�WKH�PHQX

&0(18B)81&7,21B, -DYD6FULSW�IXQFWLRQ�IRU�SURFHVVLQJ�WKHFRPPDQG

This function is implemented in JavaScript andis used to execute commands after selection ofthe menu entry.

&0(18B3$5$0(7(5B, )UHH�SDUDPHWHU

This parameter is passed to the JavaScriptfunction ’CMENU_FUNCTION’ and can beevaluated there as required. The parametermakes it possible to use a function for morethan one menu entry.

&0(18B&(//B7<3(B,

’ ’ = No restriction

’CHARACTERISTIC’ = Characteristic

’CHARACTERISTIC_VALUE’ = Characteristicvalue

’STRUCTURE’ = Structure

’STRUCTURE_VALUE’ = Structure componentvalue

’DATA’ = Data cell

’EXCEPTIONS’ = Item exceptions

’CONDITIONS’ = Item conditions

’DOCUMENT_LIST’ = Item document list

&RQWH[W�RI�WKH�HQWU\

If you want the menu entry to appear only incertain contexts and not in all context menus,you can define this with ’cell_type’ and ’filter’.



&0(18B),/7(5B, &RQWH[W�RI�WKH�HQWU\

According to the value of ‘cmenu_cell_type’,different values are useful here:

'CHARACTERISTIC','CHARACTERISTIC_VALUE', 'STRUCTURE','STRUCTURE_VALUE': Iobjnm

'EXCEPTIONS': Exception ID

'CONDITIONS': Condition ID

'DOCUMENT_LIST': Document ID

See ([DPSOHV.

&0(18B9,6,%,/,7<B,




9LVLELOLW\�RI�WKH�HQWU\

You specify whether the entry is to appear inthe EDVLF�PHQX or also in the HQKDQFHG�PHQX.

&0(18B326,7,21B,

'TOP' = Before the "normal" entries

'BOTTOM' = After the "normal" entries

3RVLWLRQ�RI�WKH�HQWU\

The entries are inserted in the order in whichthey were called. You can choose if the entryshould appear before the "normal" entries orafter them in the menu. They may not occurbetween the "normal" entries.

([DPSOHV

�

<object>

// Menu entry at the beginning and only on customer cells

<param name=’OWNER’ value=’SAP_BW’><param name='CMD' value='SET_PROPERTIES'><param name='CMENU_LABEL_1' value='Customer details'><param name='CMENU_FUNCTION_1' value='myMenuProcessor'><param name='CMENU_PARAMETER_1' value='1'><param name='CMENU_CELL_TYPE_1' value='CHARACTERISTIC_VALUE'><param name='CMENU_FILTER_1' value='0CUSTOMER'><param name='CMENU_VISIBILITY_1' value='X'><param name='CMENU_POSITION_1' value='TOP'>

// Menu entry at the end for IT homepage

<param name='CMENU_LABEL_2' value='Customer details'><param name='CMENU_FUNCTION_2' value='myMenuProcessor'><param name='CMENU_PARAMETER_2' value='2'><param name='CMENU_VISIBILITY_2' value='X'><param name='CMENU_POSITION_2' value='BOTTOM'>

// Menu entry at the beginning and only on material groups

<param name='CMENU_LABEL_3' value='Materials'><param name='CMENU_FUNCTION_3' value='myMenuProcessor'><param name='CMENU_PARAMETER_3' value='3'><param name='CMENU_CELL_TYPE_3' value='CHARACTERISTIC_VALUE'><param name='CMENU_FILTER_3' value='0MATGROUP'><param name='CMENU_VISIBILITY_3' value='X'><param name='CMENU_POSITION_3' value='TOP'>

</object>



You can find an example implementation for the JavaScript function “myMenuProcessor” underJavaScript [Seite 312].



&RPPDQG�6HTXHQFHV

8VH

There are some problems that require you to be able to change several objects differently with onecommand [Seite 229]. For example, with previous methods, you could not filter one data provider[Seite 261] for the fiscal year 1999 and another data provider for 2000 with the same request(command).

A command sequence allows you to add new commands onto an original command. Data is onlyrequested from the OLAP processor and the HTML page is only sent back to the Web Browser whenall the commands have been processed.

The commands in the sequence are added to the original command as the parameter CMD_N. Notethat you have to replace the characters ‘=’ and ‘&’ with their hexadecimal display in the commandsequence for commands in the sequence that are transported using a URL.

• replace ‘=’ with ‘%3D’

• replace ‘&’ with ‘%26’

Each command in the sequence can have a maximum of 250 characters. If it contains morecharacters, these extra characters are cut off.

If the command sequence takes up too much space to fit into a URL, add the attribute‘NO_OUTPUT’ to a command instead. As a result, the command is executed and anempty page is sent back. However, no data is read. This is therefore useful when youaccess a main frame from a control frame, for example. Using JavaScript, you can thencarry out a sequence of single commands in the main frame and only leave out theattribute ‘NO_OUTPUT’ in the last command.

([DPSOHV

6WDUW�:HE�DSSOLFDWLRQ�DQG�ILOWHU�'DWD�3URYLGHU��DFFRUGLQJ�WR�'(�ILOWHUV�DQG�'DWD�3URYLGHU��DFFRUGLQJ�WR�86�ILOWHUV

http://myAppServer:myPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&template_id=yourTemplate&&0'B� '$7$B3529,'(5��''3��),/7(5B,2%-10��'�&28175<��),/7(5B9$/8(��''(&&0'B� '$7$B3529,'(5��''3��),/7(5B,2%-10��'�&28175<��),/7(5B9$/8(��'86

)LOWHU�FRPPDQG�85/�WR�'DWD�3URYLGHU��DFFRUGLQJ�WR�FDOHQGDU�\HDU��FKDQJH�WLWOH�RI�JUDSKLF�&KDUW��*5$3+,&�WR�µ��¶��DQG�FKDQJH�WLWOH�RI�WDEOH�7$%/(�WR�µ'HWDLOV��¶

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER='DP1' FILTER_IOBJNM='0CALYEAR' FILTER_VALUE='2000'&0'B� ,7(0 *5$3+,&&$37,21 ��&0'B� ,7(0 7$%/(&$37,21 'HWDLOV��>



8VLQJ�)RUPV

8VH

With HTML forms you can integrate input fields easily into an HTML page. You can also use thisHTML technology to create BEx Web applications.

)XQFWLRQV

:HE�7HPSODWH�3DUDPHWHUL]DWLRQ

By using forms, you can set customized parameters when calling up Web applications. To do this youneed an HTML document with a form, from which the URL for the Web application is called up with therelevant parameters.

After calling up the following HTML document, the user is offered a form in which he orshe can choose a calendar year and a country from dropdown boxes. After executing thesubmit command, the Web application appears with preset filters in the query views.

<html><body><table><form method="POST"http://myAppServer:myPort/SAP/BW/BEx?CMD=LDOC&template_id=yourTemplate&FILTER_IOBJNM_1=0CALYEAR&FILTER_IOBJNM_2=0COUNTRY ">

<tr> <td>calendar year</td> <td><select size="1" name="FILTER_VALUE_1">

<Option value="1997">1997</Option><Option value="1998">1998</Option><Option value="1999">1999</Option><Option value="2000">2000</Option></select></td></tr><tr>

<td>Land</td> <td><select name="FILTER_VALUE_2">

<Option value="BR">Brazil</Option> <Option value="DE">Germany</Option> <Option value="FR">France</Option> <Option value="GB">Great Britain</Option> <Option value="JP">Japan</Option> <Option value="RU">Russia</Option> <Option value="ES">Spain</Option> <Option value="US">USA</Option>

</table><input type="submit" value="Submit" name="Submit"></form></body>

</html>

%XWWRQV�DQG�)RUPV�LQ�:HE�7HPSODWHV

You use the anchors (<a href=” ... ”></a>) and HTML forms to integrate commands into a Webtemplate. This command can effect one or several Web items or Data Providers.



At the point where URLs usually appear in HTML, you can use placeholders, that are described undercommand URLs [Seite 229] . These are automatically replaced during processing, so that only validURLs appear in the HTML pages that you have created.

'ULOOGRZQ�TXHU\�YLHZ��E\�FRXQWU\�DQG�ILOWHU�WKH�FDOHQGDU�\HDU�WR��

<a href= <SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View 1’ CMD=’Expand’IOBJNM=’0COUNTRY’ FILTER_IOBJNM=’0CALYEAR’ FILTER_VALUE=’2000’>”>Year2000 + Drilldown by country</a>

)RUP��LQ�ZKLFK�WKH�XVHU�FDQ�FKRRVH�D�FDOHQGDU�\HDU�DQG�D�FRXQWU\�IURP�GURSGRZQER[HV�

<form method="POST" action="<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’*’ MULTI=’X’FILTER_IOBJNM_1=’0CALYEAR’ FILTER_IOBJNM_2=’0COUNTRY’>">

<table>

<tr> <td>calendar year</td> <td><select size="1" name="FILTER_VALUE_1">

<Option value="1997">1997</Option><Option value="1998">1998</Option><Option value="1999">1999</Option><Option value="2000">2000</Option></select></td></tr><tr>

<td>Land</td> <td><select name="FILTER_VALUE_2">

<Option value="BR">Brazil</Option><Option value="DE">Germany</Option><Option value="FR">France</Option><Option value="GB">Great Britain</Option><Option value="JP">Japan</Option><Option value="RU">Russia</Option><Option value="ES">Spain</Option> <Option value="US">USA</Option></select></td></tr>

</table><input type="submit" value="Submit" name="Submit"></form>

%XWWRQV�WKDW�ILOWHU�YLHZ��DFFRUGLQJ�WR�FDOHQGDU�\HDUV

<form method="POST" action="<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View 1’FILTER_IOBJNM=’0CALYEAR’>"><input type="submit" value="1998" name="FILTER_VALUE"><input type="submit" value="1999" name="FILTER_VALUE"><input type="submit" value="2000" name="FILTER_VALUE"></form>



/DQJXDJH�'HSHQGHQW�7H[WV

'HILQLWLRQ

By using this BW-specific tag, you can install language-dependent texts in a Web application.

8VH

You create text elements for an ABAP report. These can then be translated.

With the help of the SAP_BW_TEXT tag that you insert into a Web template, you can access the textsas follows:

<SAP_BW_TEXT PROGRAM=’MYREPORT’ KEY=’001’>

You can also use language-dependent headings for Web items. You can specify the headings asparameters either in the object tag of the Web item

<param name=’CAPTION’ value=’SAP_BW_TEXT?PROGRAM=MYREPORT&KEY=001’>

or fill the heading in the Web Application Designer as follows:

SAP_BW_TEXT?PROGRAM=MYREPORT&KEY=001



'DWD�3URYLGHU

'HILQLWLRQ

'DWD�3URYLGHUV are objects that deliver data. When you navigate through the data, or parameterizethe call-up, it may change the status of the data provider. A data provider can supply any number ofWeb items [Seite 81] with data.

6WUXFWXUH

*HQHULF�$WWULEXWHV

Generic attributes are attributes that are valid for every data provider. You need these attributes assoon as you begin to create a data provider.


'$7$B3529,'(5�(�or�QDPH�) /RJLFDO�QDPH�RI�WKH�GDWD�SURYLGHU

This name is used to attach Web items to aparticular data provider and to send commandsto the data provider. The name must be uniquewithin the Web template [Seite 223]

:%,'�( or�'$7$B3529,'(5B:%,' )�RSWLRQDO�

.H\�DVVLJQHG�WR�WKH�([FHO�ZRUNERRN��XQGHUZKLFK�\RX�VWRUHG�WKH�GDWD�SURYLGHU�LQ�WKH%XVLQHVV�([SORUHU�

You have to have saved the workbook in BW(favorites, roles).

If you do not specify this parameter, theworkbook ID (WBID) of the Web template isused instead.

You cannot change these attributes with a command URL [Seite 229].

&RPPDQGV

It is possible to apply commands, such as filters, to data providers. In most cases, you must specifyparameters for these commands. With some commands, it is possible to specify a whole list ofparameter values. The parameter name is given an index “_1”, “_2”. In this rest of this document, thisindex is referred to as “parameter name_N”

There is at least one example given for every command. This is displayed in the same syntax asdescribed under Command URLs [Seite 229].

All commands have the following parameters in common:


&0' 1DPH�RI�WKH�FRPPDQG

Most commands are triggered by thisparameter. As well as this type of command,there are also generic commands withparameters that you are able to assign to othercommands. Generic commands are alwaysapplied after the named command.



'$7$B3529,'(5

'$7$B3529,'(5B1

1DPH�RI�WKH�GDWD�SURYLGHU

You are able to apply a command to severaldata providers. You either specify a particulardata provider, or display a list of possible dataproviders, or restrict the number of dataproviders by using wildcards (MULTI=‘X’). Thecommand is applied to all these data providers,as long as they support this action.

You must specify the dataprovider(s).

08/7, 8VLQJ�WKH�'$7$B3529,'(5�DV�D�UHIHUHQFH

If MULTI is set to ‘X’, the command is appliedto all the data providers that have‘DATA_PROVIDER’ in their name. ‘*’ means alldata providers, for example.

This parameter is optional.

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

$SSO\LQJ�WKH�FRPPDQG�WR�WKH�GDWD�SURYLGHU�µ'3��¶

�6$3B%:B85/�'$7$B3529,'(5 ¶'3��¶�&0' ¶��¶��!

$SSO\LQJ�WKH�FRPPDQG�WR�WKH�GDWD�SURYLGHUV�µ'3��¶�DQG�µ'3��¶

�6$3B%:B85/�'$7$B3529,'(5B� ¶'3��¶�'$7$B3529,'(5B� ¶'3��¶&0' ¶��¶��!

$SSO\LQJ�WKH�FRPPDQG�WR�DOO�WKH�GDWD�SURYLGHUV�WKDW�FRQWDLQ�µ86$¶�LQ�WKHLU�QDPH

�6$3B%:B85/�'$7$B3529,'(5 ¶ 86$ ¶�08/7, ¶;¶�&0' ¶��¶��!



6DYHG�4XHU\�9LHZV

'HILQLWLRQ

Saved query views are saved navigational states in a BW query. When you call up the Web template,a query view (not a database view) is created on the server with the saved navigational state.

6WUXFWXUH

Saved query views have the following attributes:


'$7$B3529,'(5B,'


.H\�IRU�D�TXHU\�YLHZ

The DATA_PROVIDER_ID that you specify,determines the initial status of the query view.

9$5,$17��RSWLRQDO�


1DPH�RI�WKH�YDULDQW�XVHG�WR�ILOO�WKH�YDULDEOHV

When you save a query view, the currentvariable values are saved with it. You canoverwrite the values by specifying a variant(optional). You create variants from thevariable screen.

67</(B6+((7��RSWLRQDO� 3DWK�WR�D�VW\OHVKHHW�WKDW�\RX�ZDQW�WR�XVH�WRGLVSOD\�)��+HOS�

If you do not specify anything here, the Webtemplate stylesheet is used instead.

+20(B)5$0(��RSWLRQDO� 1DPH�RI�WKH�PDLQ�IUDPH

If you use HTML frame technology to displaythe data, and you want to display the F4 Helpin a separate frame to the Web template, forquery views, you have to specify in theHOME_FRAME attribute, the name of theframe where the Web template is displayed.You also have to specify the attributeTARGET_HELP_FRAME for the navigationblock Web item.

%/2&.B6,=(��RSWLRQDO� 1XPEHU�RI�URZV�SHU�EORFN�LQ�WKH�LQSXW�KHOS

By entering this parameter, you can determinethat number of rows displayed before an indexto leaf through other blocks is started. If thevalue is set to 0, the complete table isdisplayed, regardless of the number of rows.

The parameters VIEWID and WBID (DATA_PROVIDER_WBID) used in BW 2.x are stillsupported. We recommend, however, that you no longer use these.

You can apply the following commands to a query view:

• Back, forwards and back to start [Seite 268]

• Filter [Seite 269]

• Remove Filter [Seite 272]



• Call value help [Seite 273]

• Drilldown [Seite 274]

• Remove drilldown [Seite 275]

• Switch characteristics/structures [Seite 276]

• Swap Axes [Seite 277]

• Set navigation status [Seite 278]

• Sort [Seite 280]

• List calculation [Seite 301]

• Operations for Display Hierarchies [Seite 303]

• Set the Status of an Exception [Seite 292]

• Set the Status of a Condition [Seite 296]



3URSHUWLHV�RI�4XHU\�9LHZV

'HILQLWLRQ

Instruction for a query view.

8VH

The query view has the most varied properties. You can change the properties by specifying theattribute and its value. You therefore do not have to specify parameter ’CMD’.

The query view properties are evaluated at the end of command processing.

6WUXFWXUH

3URSHUW\ 'HVFULSWLRQ

68335(66B=(526

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Hide rows/columns only containing null values(for all value cells for this combination ofcharacteristics).

=(52B35(6(17$7,21

'0' = display

'1' = display without currency/unit

'2' = do not display

'3' = display zero text

Zero value display

=(52B7(;7 Text for zero value display '3'

6+2:B6&$/,1*B)$&7256

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Display scaling factors and exclude currency /unit

6,*1B35(6(17$7,21

'1' = sign before number

'2' = sign after number

'3' = concatenated display

Sign display

)8//B&21&$7B.(<6

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Display of characteristic and attribute keys fullyconcatenated.

6+2:B'2&80(176

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Show document links for each characteristicvariant.

6+2:B%25B2%-(&76

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Show Drag&Relate links (BOR links) for eachcharacteristic variant of a BOR InfoObject.

8+5<B$&7,9(B52:6

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Display rows as hierarchy

8+5<B&$37,21B52:6 Labeling for rows for hierarchical display

8+5<B/(9(/B52:6 Number of objects (characteristics, hierarchies,structures) on the rows that are initially visibleas hierarchy when display is switched on.

8+5<B$&7,9(B&2/8016

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

Display columns as hierarchy

8+5<B&$37,21B&2/8016 Labeling for columns for hierarchical display



8+5<B/(9(/B&2/8016 Number of objects (characteristics, hierarchies,structures) on the columns that are initiallyvisible as hierarchy when display is switchedon.

,QWHJUDWLRQ

<RX�FDQ�DGG�WKH�TXHU\�YLHZ�SURSHUWLHV�WR�DQ\�RWKHU�FRPPDQG��



&DOOLQJ�'LDORJ�4XHU\�3URSHUWLHV

'HILQLWLRQ


8VH

You can call the 4XHU\�3URSHUWLHV dialog with this instruction.

6WUXFWXUH

&0' 3URFHVVBKHOSBZLQGRZ

+(/3B6(59,&( 48(5<B3523(57,(6



%DFN��)RUZDUGV��DQG�%DFN�WR�6WDUW

'HILQLWLRQ

%DFN��IRUZDUGV��DQG�EDFN�WR�VWDUW is a command for a query view in the Web template.

8VH

By using this command, you can do the following for a query view:

• undo the last action

• undo all actions

• or, in the event that you undo one or more actions, execute them again.

In contrast to using the set function %DFN and )RUZDUGV available in the Web browser,these commands only affect the specified data provider and not the entire page.

6WUXFWXUH

&0' 'HVFULSWLRQ

%$&. Undoes the last action executed for this queryview

5(6(7 Goes back to the navigation status that wasvisible when the Web application was called

)25:$5' Executes a previously undone action again

7KH�ODVW�DFWLRQ�IRU�TXHU\�YLHZ��LV�QRZ�XQGRQH

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ CMD=’BACK’>

$OO�TXHU\�YLHZV�DUH�QRZ�UHVHW�WR�WKH�VWDWXV�WKDW�ZDV�VHW�ZKHQ�WKH\�ZHUH�FDOOHG

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’*’ MULTI=’X’ CMD=’RESET’>



)LOWHULQJ

'HILQLWLRQ

)LOWHU�is a command for a query view in the Web template.

8VH

You set filter values for characteristics and structures within a query view. It is possible to set severalfilters for the same characteristic / structure, or the same filter for several different characteristics /structures. )LOWHU is a generic command, which means you do not have to set the ‘CMD’ parameter.

<RX�DUH�DEOH�WR�DGG�WKH�ILOWHU�SDUDPHWHUV�WR�DQ\�RWKHU�FRPPDQG��

The actual filtering process is carried out at the end of the operation.

6WUXFWXUH


),/7(5B,2%-10

),/7(5B,2%-10B1��RSWLRQDO�

1DPH�RI�WKH�FKDUFDWHULVWLF��VWUXFWXUH�WKDW\RX�ZDQW�WR�ILOWHU�E\

Specify the technical name of the characteristic(0COUNTRY, for example) or the structure (25characters) here.

),/7(5B&2//$36��RSWLRQDO�

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

5HPRYLQJ�ILOWHU�FKDUDFWHULVWLFV�IURP�WKHGULOOGRZQ

The characteristics that are specified underFILTER_IOBJNM, are removed from the axesafter the filter has been applied. If you do notspecify the parameters, the system assumesyou want to use the value ‘X’ = Yes.

9$5B6,*1B1��RSWLRQDO� 5RZ�HIIHFW

'I' found values are added,

'E' found values are removed.

If the parameter is not specified,then 'I' is accepted.

If the ),/7(5B,2%-10B1�entry�is missing from an index�Q� the value from),/7(5B,2%-10 is used, if available.

For filtering individual values, the following parameters are also specified:




),/7(5B9$/8(

),/7(5B9$/8(B1

),/7(5B9$/8(B(;7

),/7(5B9$/8(B(;7B1

)LOWHU�9DOXH

Value that is filtered next.

If the variant with the ending ’EXT’is chosen, the entire value inbrackets has to be specified in theexternal dislay, for example,12.24.2000.

If the ending ’EXT’ is not used, theentire value in brackets has to bespecified in the internal display, forexample, 20001224 for12.24.2000.

),/7(5B9$/8(B7<3(��RSWLRQDO�

),/7(5B9$/8(B7<3(B1��RSWLRQDO�

7\SH�RI�YDOXH�VSHFLILHG�XQGHU),/7(5B9$/8(

‘VALUE’ : Key for a characteristic value

‘VARIABLE_EXIT’ : Name of an exit variableThe filter is set using the values returned by thevariable exit. Parameter, interval, and selectionoption variables are permitted for customer andSAP exit variables as well as for default values.

23(5$725��RSWLRQDO�

23(5$725B1��RSWLRQDO�

2SHUDWRU

'EQ' = Individual value

'LT' = Less than

'LE' = Less than or equal to

'GT' = Greater than

'GE' = Greater than or equal to

If no operator is specified, then'EQ' is accepted.

For filtering intervals, the following parameters are also accepted:


),/7(5B9$/8(B/2:

),/7(5B9$/8(B/2:B1

),/7(5B9$/8(B/2:B(;7

),/7(5B9$/8(B/2:B(;7B1

)LOWHU�YDOXH�±�ORZHU�OLPLW��QR�EUDFNHWV�

),/7(5B9$/8(B+,*+

),/7(5B9$/8(B+,*+B1

),/7(5B9$/8(B+,*+B(;7

),/7(5B9$/8(B+,*+B(;7B1

)LOWHU�YDOXH�±�XSSHU�OLPLW��QR�EUDFNHWV�

For filtering hierarchy nodes, the following parameters are also accepted:




),/7(5B9$/8(

),/7(5B9$/8(B1

+LHUDUFK\�1RGH�1DPH

),/7(5B12'(B,2%-10��RSWLRQDO�

),/7(5B12'(B,2%-10B1��RSWLRQDO�

1DPH�RI�WKH�1RGH�&KDUDFWHULVWLF

You have to specify the name of the nodecharacteristic if you want to filter according tohierarchy nodes. With characteristic nodes andtext nodes, you have to specify thecharacteristic name (0HIER_NODE).

([DPSOHV

)LOWHU�TXHU\�YLHZ��DFFRUGLQJ�WR�WKH�FRXQWU\�*HUPDQ\

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ FILTER_IOBJNM=’0COUNTRY’FILTER_VALUE=’DE’>

)LOWHU�TXHU\�YLHZ��DFFRUGLQJ�WR�WKH�ILUVW�WKUHH�PRQWKV

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ FILTER_IOBJNM=’0CALMONTH’FILTER_VALUE_LOW_EXT=’1’ FILTER_VALUE_HIGH_EXT='3'>

)LOWHU�DOO�TXHU\�YLHZV�DFFRUGLQJ�WR�FRVWV��DQG�WKH�FRXQWULHV�*HUPDQ\�DQG�WKH�86$

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’*’ MULTI=’X’FILTER_IOBJNM_1=’DRB9ZVVMBCHVX4F04Z1JGKYVC’FILTER_VALUE_1=’DTG057U7OQ8K2ALKCMR2AWM14’ FILTER_IOBJNM_2=’0COUNTRY’FILTER_VALUE_2=’DE’ FILTER_IOBJNM_3=’0COUNTRY’ FILTER_VALUE_3=’US’>

)LOWHU�DOO�TXHU\�YLHZV�DFFRUGLQJ�WR�WKH�FXUUHQW�PRQWK

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’*’ MULTI=’X’ FILTER_IOBJNM=’0CALMONTH’FILTER_VALUE=’0CMONTH’ FILTER_VALUE_TYPE=’VARIABLE_EXIT’>



5HPRYLQJ�)LOWHUV

'HILQLWLRQ

5HPRYH�ILOWHU�is a command for a query view in the Web template.

8VH

You use this command to remove the filter from a characteristic or a structure for one or more queryviews.

6WUXFWXUH

&0' 5HPRYHB)LOWHU


,2%-10

,2%-10B1

1DPH�RI�WKH�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�VWUXFWXUH

Specify here the technical name of thecharacteristic (0COUNTRY, for example) orstructure (25 characters) from which you wantto delete the filter. It is also possible to specifya list of characteristics/structures.

$//

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

5HPRYH�DOO�ILOWHUV

Alternatively to listing characteristics andstructures, you can remove all filters.

([DPSOHV

5HPRYH�WKH�ILOWHU�E\�FRXQWU\�IURP�TXHU\�YLHZ�

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ CMD=’Remove_Filter’ IOBJNM=’0COUNTRY’ >

5HPRYH�WKH�ILOWHU�E\�FRXQWU\�IURP�DOO�TXHU\�YLHZV�DQG�ILOWHU�DFFRUGLQJ�WR�FDOHQGDU�\HDU��

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’*’ MULTI=’X’ CMD=’Remove_Filter’IOBJNM=’0COUNTRY’ FILTER_IOBJNM=’0CALYEAR’ FILTER_VALUE=’2000’>

5HPRYH�DOO�ILOWHUV�E\�FRXQWU\�IURP�TXHU\�YLHZV�DQG�ILOWHU�DFFRUGLQJ�WR�FDOHQGDU�\HDU��

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER='*' MULTI='X' CMD='Remove_Filter' ALL='X'FILTER_IOBJNM='0CALYEAR' FILTER_VALUE='2000'>



&DOOLQJ�9DOXH�+HOS

'HILQLWLRQ

&DOOLQJ�YDOXH�KHOS�is a command for a query view in the Web template.

8VH

By using this command you can call the filter value help for a characteristic or a structure for a queryview.

6WUXFWXUH


+(/3B6(59,&( '3B9,(:B),/7(5


,2%-10 1DPH�RI�WKH�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�VWUXFWXUH

Specify the technical name of the characteristichere (for example, 0COUNTRY) or thestructure (25-place character sequence) forwhich you want to call value help.

%22.('B9$/8(6 8VLQJ�SRVWHG�YDOXHV�IRU�YDOXH�KHOS

If this parameter is not specified or is not set to‘X’, only values are displayed in the input helpthat are also booked in the InfoProvider withinthe scope of the currently valid filter conditions.This can take a long time under certainconditions.

If the parameter is set to ' ', all dimension tablevalues are displayed. This can be quicker, butcan also display values that do not appear inthe InfoProvider under the current filterconditions and when filtering can give the result1R�FRUUHVSRQGLQJ�GDWD�IRXQG.



'ULOOGRZQ

'HILQLWLRQ

'ULOOGRZQ�is a command for a query view in the Web template.

8VH

Use this command to change the position of a characteristic or a structure for one or more queryviews.

6WUXFWXUH

&0' ([SDQG



Specify the technical name of the characteristichere (for example, 0COUNTRY) or thestructure (25-place character sequence thatyou want to bring into the drilldown.

$;,6��RSWLRQDO�

‘X’ = columns

‘Y’ = rows

’ ’ = Free characteristics (=remove drilldown)

$[LV�RQ�ZKLFK�WKH�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�VWUXFWXUH�LVWR�EH�EDVHG

If PARENT_IOBJNM is not specified, thecharacteristic/structure is brought onto the axisbehind the other characteristics/structures. Ifyou do not specify the parameter ‘AXIS’, thevalue ‘Y’ is used for characteristics, and ‘X’ forstructures.

3$5(17B,2%-10��RSWLRQDO� 1DPH�RI�D�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�VWUXFWXUH�RQ�WKHD[LV

When you specify this parameter, you can draga characteristic/structure behind a different oneon an axis.

([DPSOHV

'ULOOGRZQ�TXHU\�YLHZ��E\�FRXQWU\

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View 1’ CMD=’Expand’ IOBJNM=’0COUNTRY’ >

'ULOOGRZQ�TXHU\�YLHZ��E\�FRXQWU\�DQG�ILOWHU�WKH�FDOHQGDU�\HDU�WR��

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ CMD=’Expand’ IOBJNM=’0COUNTRY’FILTER_IOBJNM=’0CALYEAR’ FILTER_VALUE=’2000’>

'UDJ�SHULRGV��DQG��IURP�TXHU\�YLHZ��WR�WKH�FROXPQV

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ CMD=’Expand’ IOBJNM=’0FISCPER’ AXIS=’X’FILTER_IOBJNM=’0FISCPER’ FILTER_VALUE_1=’2000001’ FILTER_VALUE_2=’2000002’FILTER_VALUE_3=’2000003’>



5HPRYH�'ULOOGRZQ

'HILQLWLRQ

5HPRYH�GULOOGRZQ�is a command for a query view in the Web template.

8VH

Use this command to remove a characteristic or a structure from the drilldown for one or more queryviews. This command is the same as the command Drilldown [Seite 274] if the parameter AXIS=’ ‘ isset.

6WUXFWXUH

&0' &ROODSVH



Specify the technical name of the characteristichere (for example, 0COUNTRY) or thestructure (25-place character sequence) thatyou want to remove from the drilldown.

([DPSOH

5HPRYH�GULOOGRZQ�E\�FRXQWU\�IURP�TXHU\�YLHZ�

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ CMD=’Collapse’ IOBJNM=’0COUNTRY’ >



6ZLWFKLQJ�&KDUDFWHULVWLFV�6WUXFWXUHV

'HILQLWLRQ

6ZLWFK�&KDUDFWHULVWLF�6WUXFWXUHV�is a command for a query view in the Web template.

8VH

Use this command to remove a characteristic or a structure from a characteristic or a structure, for oneor more query views.

6WUXFWXUH

&0' ([FKDQJH


,2%-10B� 1DPH�RI�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�VWUXFWXUH

Specify the technical name of the 1st

characteristic (0COUNTRY, for example) or the1st structure (25 characters) here.

,2%-10B� 1DPH�RI�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�VWUXFWXUH

Specify the technical name of the 2nd

characteristic (0COUNTRY, for example) or the2nd structure (25 characters) here.

([DPSOH

5HSODFH�GULOOGRZQ�E\�FRXQWU\�ZLWK�GULOOGRZQ�E\�FDOHQGDU�\HDU�LQ�TXHU\�YLHZ��

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View 1’ CMD=’Exchange’ IOBJNM_1=’0COUNTRY’IOBJNM_2=’0CALYEAR’>

or

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View 1’ CMD=’Exchange’ IOBJNM_1=’0CALYEAR’IOBJNM_2=’0COUNTRY’>



6ZDSSLQJ�$[HV

'HILQLWLRQ

6ZDS�$[HV is a command for a query view in the Web template.

8VH

This command swaps the roles of the axes (the list is reversed). All the characteristics and structuresin the rows are moved into the columns, and all the characteristics and structures in the columns aremoved into the rows.

6WUXFWXUH

&0' 6ZLWFKB$[HV

6ZDS�D[HV�IRU�WKH�TXHU\�YLHZ�

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View 1’ CMD=’SWITCH_AXIS’>



6HWWLQJ�WKH�1DYLJDWLRQDO�6WDWH

'HILQLWLRQ

6HWWLQJ�WKH�QDYLJDWLRQDO�VWDWH�is a command for a query view in the Web template.

8VH

By calling this command, you can restructure or redistribute characteristics and structures on the axes.

6WUXFWXUH

&0' 6(7B1$9B67$7(


$//

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

5HGLVWULEXWH�DOO�FKDUDFWHULVWLFV�DQGVWUXFWXUHV

If this parameter is set to ‘X’, then allcharacteristics and structures are taken fromthe axes and redistributed according to theother parameters.

If the parameter is not set or is set to ‘ ‘, thenthe listed characteristics are assignedaccording to the parameters on the axes.

,2%-10

,2%-10B1

1DPH�RI�WKH�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�VWUXFWXUH

Specify the technical name of the characteristichere (for example, 0COUNTRY) or thestructure (25-place character sequence) thatyou would like to place on an axis.

$;,6

$;,6B1

‘X’ = columns

‘Y’ = rows

' ' = free characteristics

$[LV�RQ�ZKLFK�WKH�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�VWUXFWXUH�LVWR�EH�EDVHG

The characteristic or structure is based on theaxis. The position on the axis is specified bythe parameter ‘Position’.

326,7,21

326,7,21B1

3RVLWLRQ�RQ�DQ�D[LV

By specifying the position, the characteristic orstructure is set for this position on the axis.

If the position is not specified or isset to ‘0’, then the characteristic orstructure is set at the end of thedrilldown sequence.

0RYLQJ�WKH�NH\�ILJXUH�VWUXFWXUH�WR�WKH�URZV�DQG�UHPRYLQJ�WKH�FDOHQGDU�\HDU�DQGSODQQHG�DFWXDO�VWUXFWXUH�IURP�WKH�FROXPQV

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ CMD=’SET_NAV_STATE’ ALL=’X’IOBJNM_1=’DTG057U7OQ8K2ALKCMR2AWM14’ AXIS_1=’Y’IOBJNM_2=’0CALYEAR’ POSITION_2=’1’ AXIS_2=’X’IOBJNM_3=’EFG057U7OQ8K2JKKCMR2AWM67’ POSITION_3=’2’ AXIS_3=’X’>

(QVXULQJ�WKDW�WKH�FRVW�FHQWHUV��DQG�QRW�WKH�PDWHULDOV��DUH�LQ�WKH�GULOOGRZQ�IRU�DOOTXHU\�YLHZV



<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’*’ MULTI=’X’ CMD=’SET_NAV_STATE’IOBJNM_1=’0COSTCENTER’ AXIS_1=’Y’ IOBJNM_2=’0MATERIAL’ AXIS_2=’ ’>



6RUW

'HILQLWLRQ

6RUW�is a command for a query view in the Web template.

8VH

Depending on the parameterization, you use this command to sort characteristics or according tovalues.

6WUXFWXUH

&0' 6RUW


6257B7<3(

’K’ = Key

’T’ = Text

’H’ = Hierarchy

’S’ = Selection

’V’ = Value

7\SH�RI�VRUW

Characteristics can be sorted according to key,name, hierarchy (if there is an active displayhierarchy for the characteristic) or selection (if,in the query definition, there is more than onerestricted single value or a query view isrestricted dynamically). You can also sortaccording to values.

6257B',5(&7,21

’A’ = Ascending

’D’ = Descending

5HTXLUHG�VRUW�GLUHFWLRQ

The sort direction for sort_type=His always ’A’.

,2%-10

Only for sorting characteristics.

&KDUDFWHULVWLF�WKDW�\RX�ZDQW�WR�VRUW

This parameter is omitted whenyou are sorting according tovalues.

6758&785(B0(0%(5B�

Only for sorting according to value.

&RPSRQHQW�RI�WKH�ILUVW�VWUXFWXUH

If you sort according to value, you have tospecify the value cell exactly. To do this, youhave to specify the components of the structure(25-character string) for all the occurringstructures (maximum 2).

6758&785(B0(0%(5B�

Only for sorting according to value.

&RPSRQHQW�RI�WKH�VHFRQG�VWUXFWXUH

If two structures are defined in the query, youhave to also determine the structuralcomponents of the second structure.

6RUWLQJ�&XVWRPHUV�LQ�4XHU\�9LHZ��$FFRUGLQJ�WR�7H[W��LQ�$VFHQGLQJ�2UGHU

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ CMD=’SORT’ IOBJNM=’0CUSTOMER’SORT_TYPE=’T’ SORT_DIRECTION=’A’>

6RUWLQJ�/LVW�$FFRUGLQJ�WR�$FWXDO�6DOHV��LQ�'HVFHQGLQJ�2UGHU

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ CMD=’SORT’ SORT_TYPE=’V’SORT_DIRECTION=’D’ STRUCTURE_MEMBER_1=’DTG057U7OQ8K2ALKCMR2AWM14’STRUCTURE_MEMBER_2=’EFG057U7OQ8K2JKKCMR2AWM67’>



6HWWLQJ�3URSHUWLHV�RI�'LVSOD\�$WWULEXWHV

'HILQLWLRQ


8VH

You can change the properties of display attributes with this command.

6WUXFWXUH

&0' 6(7B$775,%87(


,2%-10 1DPH�RI�FKDUDFWHULVWLF

Specify the technical name of the characteristic(0COUNTRY, for example) to which theattribute belongs here.

$775,10 1DPH�RI�WKH�DWWULEXWH

Define the technical name of the displayattribute here.

$&7,9(

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

'LVSOD\�DWWULEXWH

326,7,21 3RVLWLRQ�RI�WKH�DWWULEXWH�ZLWKLQ�WKH�DWWULEXWH

35(6(17$7,21

'KEY' = key

'TEXT' = shortest text

'TEXT_MD' = middle-length text

'TEXT_LG' = long text

'KEY_TEXT' = key and text

'TEXT_KEY' = text and key

/D\RXW



5HVXOWV�5RZ�3RVLWLRQ

'HILQLWLRQ


8VH

You can define the position of the results row with this command. Hierarchy nodes are also based onthis setting if there are other objects with competing settings on the hierarchy axis.

6WUXFWXUH

5HVXOW�SRVLWLRQ

&0' 6(7B5(68/7B326,7,21


$;,6

‘X’ = columns

‘Y’ = rows

$[LV�RQ�ZKLFK�WKH�UHVXOW�SRVLWLRQ�VKRXOG�EHVHW

5(68/7B326,7,21

'TOP' = Top/left

'BOTTOM' = Bottom/right

5HVXOW�SRVLWLRQ

+LHUDUFK\�1RGH�3RVLWLRQ

&0' 6(7B5(68/7B326,7,21



Enter the technical name of the characteristicon which the hierarchy node position should bedefined here.

5(68/7B326,7,21

'TOP' = Top (left)

'BOTTOM' = Bottom (right)

1RGH�SRVLWLRQ

The information in brackets represent whathappens if the characteristic is on the columns.



6XSSUHVVLRQ�RI�5HVXOW�5RZV

'HILQLWLRQ


8VH

You can suppress results row with this command.

6WUXFWXUH

&0' SET_SUPPRESSION



Define the technical name of the characteristic(e.g. 0COUNTRY) here.

5(68/7B68335(66,21

’NEVER’ = No suppression

’CONDITIONAL’ = Conditional suppression

’ALWAYS’ = Always suppress

6XSSUHVVLRQ�PHWKRG



'HILQH�'LVSOD\

'HILQLWLRQ


8VH

You can change the display of characteristics, hierarchy node types and attributes with this command.

6WUXFWXUH

&0' 6(7B35(6(17$7,21




12'(B,2%-10��2SWLRQ�� 1DPH�RI�WKH�QRGH�FKDUDFWHULVWLF


$775,10��2SWLRQ�� 1DPH�RI�WKH�DWWULEXWH

Define the technical name of the displayattribute here.

35(6(17$7,21

’NONE’ = No display (only for characteristics)

’KEY’ = key

’TEXT’ = shortest text

’TEXT_MD’ = middle-length text

’TEXT_LG’ = long text

’KEY_TEXT’ = key and text

’TEXT_KEY’ = text and key

/D\RXW



&DOOLQJ�'LDORJ�&KDUDFWHULVWLF�3URSHUWLHV

'HILQLWLRQ


8VH

You can call the &KDUDFWHULVWLF�3URSHUWLHV dialog with this command.

6WUXFWXUH


+(/3B6(59,&( &+$5B3523(57,(6






&XUUHQF\�7UDQVODWLRQ

'HILQLWLRQ


8VH

You can define a new currency translation for the query view with this command.

6WUXFWXUH

&0' &855(1&<B&219(56,21


&85B&219B0(7+2' &XUUHQF\�WUDQVODWLRQ�W\SH

&85B&219B7<3(

‘0’ = database currency

'1' = as in the query definition

'2' = into target currency

'3' = into target currency via definition currency

7UDQVODWLRQ�W\SH

7$5*(7B&855(1&< 7DUJHW�FXUUHQF\

Only need be specified for CUR_CONV_TYPE2 and 3



&DOOLQJ�D�'LDORJ�IRU�&XUUHQF\�7UDQVODWLRQ

'HILQLWLRQ


8VH

You can call the dialog for currency translation with this command.

6WUXFWXUH


+(/3B6(59,&( &855(1&<B&219(56,21



'HILQLQJ�DQG�&KDQJLQJ�([FHSWLRQV

'HILQLWLRQ


8VH

You can change existing (local) exceptions and define new (local) ones with this command.

Exceptions that were defined in the Query Designer cannot be changed.

6WUXFWXUH

&0' SET_EXCEPTION


(;&(37,21B,'

(optional)

,'�RI�WKH�FRQGLWLRQ�WR�EH�FKDQJHG

If there is no exception with this ID, a new oneis created. A new exception is also created ifthis parameter is not filled.

$&7,9(

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

([FHSWLRQ�DFWLYH

'(6&5,37,21 'HVFULSWLRQ

This text is displayed in the list of exceptions.

,2%-10B, &RQWH[W�LQ�ZKLFK�D�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�PXVW�EH

The exception is only evaluated if the data cellfor the given characteristic is in the contextdescribed by parameters OPERATOR andVALUE.

23(5$725B, &RQWH[W�LQ�ZKLFK�D�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�PXVW�EH

Valid operators are:

'AL' = No restrictions

'AG' = Aggregated (no filtering)

'EQ' = A certain value

'NA' = Restricted to a value

'HL' = Hierarchy level

9$/8(B, &RQWH[W�LQ�ZKLFK�D�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�PXVW�EH

Key of the characteristic value if operator 'EQ'and hierarchy level if operator 'HL'.

$/(57B/(9(/B- $OHUW�/HYHO

The alert level can have the values 1, 2 and 3for good numbers, 4, 5 and 6 for criticalnumbers and 7, 8, and 9 for bad numbers.



23(5$725B- 2SHUDWRU�IRU�WKH�GDWD�YDOXHV

’EQ’ = Equal to

’NE’ = Not equal to

’BT’ = Interval

’LE’ : Less than or equal to


’GE’ : Greater than or equal to


9$/8(B/2:B- 'DWD�FHOO�YDOXH

9$/8(B+,*+B- 'DWD�FHOO�YDOXH�WR

This parameter is only needed for intervaloperators.



&DOOLQJ�D�'LDORJ�IRU�'HILQLQJ�([FHSWLRQV

'HILQLWLRQ


8VH

You can call the dialog for defining exceptions with this command.

6WUXFWXUH


+(/3B6(59,&( (;&(37,21B'(),1,7,21


(;&(37,21B,' 1DPH�RI�H[FHSWLRQ

Enter the technical name of the exception hereif you want to change an existing exception. Ifno value is defined for this parameter, a newexception will be created.



6HWWLQJ�WKH�6WDWXV�RI�DQ�([FHSWLRQ

'HILQLWLRQ

6HW�WKH�VWDWXV�RI�DQ�H[FHSWLRQ�is a command for a query view in the Web template.

8VH

You call this command when you want to change the status of an exception in a query view.

6WUXFWXUH

&0' 6HWB([FHSWLRQB6WDWH


(;&(37,21B,' 7HFKQLFDO�QDPH�RI�WKH�H[FHSWLRQ

Give the technical name of the exception here(25-place character sequence).

$&7,9(��2SWLRQ��

‘X’ = activate, ‘ ’ = deactivate

5HTXLUHG�H[FHSWLRQ�VWDWXV

72**/(B67$7(��2SWLRQ��

‘X’ = switch, ‘ ’ = do not switch

&KDQJH�WKH�H[FHSWLRQ�VWDWXV

If this attribute is set to ‘X’, the exception isactivated, if it is not active already, anddeactivated, if it is active.

([DPSOHV

6HW�WKH�H[FHSWLRQ�³3UREOHPV�LQ�6DOHV´�LQ�4XHU\�9LHZ��WR�DFWLYH

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ CMD=’Set_Exception_State’

EXCEPTION_ID=’DTG057U7OQ8K2ALKCMR2AWM14’ ACTIVE=’X’>

&KDQJH�WKH�H[FHSWLRQ�³3UREOHPV�LQ�6DOHV´�LQ�4XHU\�9LHZ�

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ CMD=’Set_Exception_State’

EXCEPTION_ID=’DTG057U7OQ8K2ALKCMR2AWM14’ TOGGLE_STATE=’X’>



&UHDWLQJ�DQG�&KDQJLQJ�&RQGLWLRQV

'HILQLWLRQ


8VH

’You can change existing (local) conditions and define new (local) ones with this command.

Conditions that were defined in the Query Designer cannot be changed.

6WUXFWXUH

&0' 6(7B&21',7,21


&21',7,21B,'

(optional)

,'�RI�WKH�FRQGLWLRQ�WR�EH�FKDQJHG

If there is no condition with this ID, a newcondition is created. A new exception is alsocreated if this parameter is not filled.

$&7,9(

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

&RQGLWLRQ�DFWLYH


This text is displayed in the list of conditions.

,2%-10B, /LVW�RI�FKDUDFWHULVWLFV

List of the characteristics for which thecondition should be applied in combination. Ifno characteristic is specified, the condition isapplied to all characteristics.

6758&785(B0(0%(5B�B, &RPSRQHQW�RI�WKH�ILUVW�VWUXFWXUH

A condition always refers to exactly one valuecell. To do this, you have to specify thecomponents of the structure (25-characterstring) for all the occurring structures(maximum 2).

6758&785(B0(0%(5B�B, &RPSRQHQW�RI�WKH�VHFRQG�VWUXFWXUH��LI�LWH[LVWV�



23(5$725B, $Q�RSHUDWRU

’EQ’ = Equal to

’NE’ = Not equal to

’BT’ = Interval

’LE’ : Less than or equal to


’GE’ : Greater than or equal to


’TC’ = Top n

’TP’ = Top percent

’TS’ = Top sum

’BC’ = Bottom n

’BP’ = Bottom percent

’BS’ = Bottom sum

9$/8(B/2:B, 1XPHULFDO�YDOXH�IRU�RSHUDWRU

9$/8(B+,*+B, 1XPHULFDO�YDOXH�IRU�RSHUDWRU

Only the interval operator needs this value.



&DOOLQJ�D�'LDORJ�IRU�'HILQLQJ�&RQGLWLRQV

'HILQLWLRQ


8VH

You can call the dialog for defining conditions with this command.

6WUXFWXUH


+(/3B6(59,&( &21',7,21B'(),1,7,21


&21',7,21B,' 1DPH�RI�WKH�FRQGLWLRQ

Enter the technical name of the condition hereif you want to change an existing condition. Ifno value is defined for this parameter, a newcondition will be created.



6HWWLQJ�WKH�6WDWXV�RI�D�&RQGLWLRQ

'HILQLWLRQ

6HW�WKH�VWDWXV�RI�DQ�FRQGLWLRQ�is a command for a query view in the Web template.

8VH

You call this command when you want to change the status of a condition in a query view.

6WUXFWXUH

&0' 6HWB&RQGLWLRQB6WDWH


&21',7,21B,' 7HFKQLFDO�QDPH�RI�WKH�FRQGLWLRQ

Give the technical name of the condition here(25-place character sequence).

$&7,9(��2SWLRQ��


5HTXLUHG�VWDWXV�IRU�WKH�FRQGLWLRQ

72**/(B67$7(��2SWLRQ��


&KDQJH�WKH�VWDWXV�RI�WKH�FRQGLWLRQ

If this attribute is set to ‘X’, the condition isactivated, if it is not active already, anddeactivated, if it is active.

([DPSOHV

6HW�WKH�FRQGLWLRQ�³7RS��&XVWRPHUV´�LQ�TXHU\�YLHZ��WR�DFWLYH

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ CMD=’Set_Condition_State’

CONDITION_ID=’DTG057U7OQ8K2ALKCMR2AWM14’ ACTIVE=’X’>

&KDQJH�WKH�³7RS��&XVWRPHUV´�FRQGLWLRQ�LQ�TXHU\�YLHZ�

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ CMD=’Set_Condition_State’

CONDITION_ID=’DTG057U7OQ8K2ALKCMR2AWM14’ TOGGLE_STATE=’X’>



'LVSOD\LQJ�'RFXPHQWV

'HILQLWLRQ


8VH

You can call the document display for the selected context with this command.

6WUXFWXUH

You can access four different contexts:

&0' '2&80(176


1$9,*$7,21$/B67$7(��2SWLRQ��

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

'RFXPHQWV�IRU�WKH�FXUUHQW�QDYLJDWLRQ�VWDWXV

'$7$B52:��2SWLRQ�� 'RFXPHQWV�IRU�D�GDWD�FHOO��<�FRRUGLQDWH

Coordinates in the data block

'$7$B&2/801��2SWLRQ�� 'RFXPHQWV�IRU�D�GDWD�FHOO��;�FRRUGLQDWH

Coordinates in the data block

,2%-10��2SWLRQ�� 'RFXPHQWV�IRU�D�FKDUDFWHULVWLF

,2%-10��2SWLRQ�� 'RFXPHQWV�IRU�D�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�YDOXH�FKDUDFWHULVWLF

9$/8(��2SWLRQ�� 'RFXPHQWV�IRU�D�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�YDOXH��NH\

Characteristic value in internal representation(without conversion exit)



6DYLQJ�WKH�4XHU\�9LHZ

'HILQLWLRQ

Command for a query view.

8VH

You use this command to save a query view as a reusable object.

6WUXFWXUH

&0' 6$9(B9,(:


7(&+B1$0( 7HFKQLFDO�QDPH�RI�WKH�YLHZ


29(5:5,7(

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

2YHUZULWH�H[LVWLQJ�YLHZ



3URSHUWLHV�RI�9DOXH�&HOOV

'HILQLWLRQ


8VH

You can change the properties of value cells with this command.

6WUXFWXUH

&0' 6(7B9$/8(B3523(57,(6


6758&785(B0(0%(5B� &RPSRQHQW�RI�WKH�ILUVW�VWUXFWXUH

The properties are defined for a value cell. Todo this, you have to specify the components ofthe structure (25-character string) for all theoccurring structures (maximum 2).

6758&785(B0(0%(5B� &RPSRQHQW�RI�WKH�VHFRQG�VWUXFWXUH��LI�LWH[LVWV�

6&$/,1*B)$&725 6FDOLQJ�IDFWRUV

0=No scaling, 1=Factor 10, 2=Factor 100, ...

'(&,0$/B3/$&(6 1XPEHU�RI�GLVSOD\HG�GHFLPDO�SODFHV

(03+$6,6

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

'LVSOD\�ZLWK�KLJKOLJKWLQJ



&DOOLQJ�D�'LDORJ�IRU�&HOO�3URSHUWLHV

'HILQLWLRQ


8VH

You can call the dialog for cell properties with this command.

6WUXFWXUH


+(/3B6(59,&( 6758&B0(0%(5B3523(57,(6



Enter the value of the first structurecomponent here. The combination of structurecomponents defines the coordinates for a cell.


Enter the value of the second structurecomponent here. The combination of structurecomponents defines the coordinates for a cell.



/LVW�&DOFXODWLRQ

'HILQLWLRQ

/LVW�FDOFXODWLRQ�is a command for a query view in the Web template.

8VH

With this command you can change the settings for calculating lists for a value cell.

6WUXFWXUH

&0' 6(7B/,67B&$/&8/$7,21



The value cell must be determined exactly forcalculating lists. To do this, you have to specifythe components of the structure (25-characterstring) for all the occurring structures(maximum 2).


$33/<B72B5(68/76��RSWLRQDO�

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

8VH�FDOFXODWLRQ�JXLGHOLQHV�DOVR�IRU�HYHQWFHOOV

&808/$7,21��RSWLRQDO�

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

&XPXODWHG�RXWSXW

9$/8(B&$/&8/$7,21��RSWLRQDO� &DOFXODWLRQV

' ' = No list calculation

'R' = Norming for query result

'G’ = Norming for overall result

'C' = Norming for result

'S' = Ranking list

'O' = Ranking list (olympic)



5(68/7B&$/&8/$7,21��RSWLRQDO� &DOFXODWLRQV�IRU�UHVXOW�FHOOV

’00’ = No list calculation

’01’ = Summation

’02’ = Maximum

’03’ = Minimum

’04’ = Count of all values

’04’ = Count of all values

’06’ = Average using all values

’06’ = Average using all values <> 0

’08’ = Standard deviation

’09’ = Variance

’10’ = Hide results

’11’ = First value

’12’ = Last value

([DPSOH

'LVSOD\�PD[LPXP�SODQ�VDOHV

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ CMD=’SET_LIST_CALCULATION’STRUCTURE_MEMBER_1=’DTG057U7OQ8K2ALKCMR2AWM14’STRUCTURE_MEMBER_2=’EFG057U7OQ8K2JKKCMR2AWM67’ VALUE_CALCULATION=’02’>

6HH�DOVR�

OLAP Functions for Active Cells [Seite 401]



2SHUDWLRQV�IRU�'LVSOD\�+LHUDUFKLHV

'HILQLWLRQ

2SHUDWLRQV�RQ�'LVSOD\�+LHUDUFKLHV�contains commands for a query view in a Web template.

8VH

There are four operations that you apply to display hierarchies:

1. With the 6(7B+,(5$5&+<B67$7( command, you activate or deactivate a display hierarchy thathas been assigned to a characteristic (for example, in the query definition or in a query view).

&0' 6(7B+,(5$5&+<B67$7(



Characteristic with a display hierarchyassigned to it already.

$&7,9(��2SWLRQ��


5HTXLUHG�VWDWXV�RI�WKH�GLVSOD\�KLHUDUFK\�

72**/(B67$7(��2SWLRQ��


6ZLWFK�WKH�VWDWXV�RI�D�KLHUDUFK\

If this attribute is set to ‘X’, the displayhierarchy is activated, if it is not active already,and deactivated, if it is currently active.

$FWLYDWLQJ�D�+LHUDUFK\�IRU�WKH�&RVW�&HQWHU�&KDUDFWHULVWLF�IRU�4XHU\�9LHZ�

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ CMD=’Set_Hierarchy_State’IOBJNM=’0COSTCENTER’ ACTIVE=’X’>

2. You use the 6(7B+,(5$5&+< command to assign a display hierarchy to a characteristic.

&0' 6(7B+,(5$5&+<



Characteristic that you want to assign a displayhierarchy to.

+,(5$5&+<B1$0( 7HFKQLFDO�QDPH�RI�WKH�KLHUDUFK\

+,(5$5&+<B9(56,21 +LHUDUFK\�YHUVLRQ

If the hierarchy has a particular version, youmust specify the version. Otherwise you canleave out this parameter.

+,(5$5&+<B'$7( .H\�GDWH�IRU�WKH�KLHUDUFK\

You specify the key date for time-dependenthierarchies here. The date must be formattedas YearMonthDay (for example, 20002412).

If the parameter is not transferred,the key date in the query is copied.



$&7,9(


5HTXLUHG�VWDWXV�RI�WKH�GLVSOD\�KLHUDUFK\�

$VVLJQLQJ�µ0\+LHUDUFK\¶�WR�WKH�&RVW�&HQWHU�&KDUDFWHULVWLF�IRU�4XHU\�9LHZ�

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ CMD=’Set_Hierarchy’IOBJNM=’0COSTCENTER’ Hierarchie_Name=’MyHierarchy’ ACTIVE=’X’>

3. You use the '5,//B72B/(9(/ command to expand the display hierarchy up to a specifiedhierarchy level.

&0' '5,//B72B/(9(/



Characteristic, to which an active displayhierarchy is assigned.

/(9(/ +LHUDUFK\�OHYHO

Level to which you want to expand thehierarchy. Level 1 is the root level.

If a hierarchy node is filtered at thesame time, make sure that thelevel is higher than the level of thefiltered node.

'ULOOGRZQ�&RVW�&HQWHU�&KDUDFWHULVWLF�IRU�4XHU\�9LHZ��XS�WR�/HYHO��

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ CMD=’Drill_To_Level’Iobjnm=’0COSTCENTER’ Level=’3’>

4. You use the 6(7B'5,//B67$7( command you can expand and collapse a node from a displayhierarchy.

Note that the node must be visible in the list in the current navigation status.

The command is a useful way of influencing the extent to which the hierarchy is expandedwhen you are calling a Web application, activating a hierarchy, or determining and activating ahierarchy. Command sequences are used to execute both commands at the same time.

&0' 6(7B'5,//B67$7(



Characteristic, to which an active displayhierarchy is assigned.

326,7,21 'DWD�SRVLWLRQ�LQ�WKH�GULOOGRZQ

Since several objects can be drilled down onan axis, the node specifications are no longerunique. Therefore, the axis position is usedinstead. For example, the fifth data line.



'5,//B67$7( /HYHO�WR�ZKLFK�\RX�ZDQW�WKH�KLHUDUFK\�WR�EHH[SDQGHG

’E’ = hierarchy nodes expanded

’C’ = collapse

'U' = by activating “Display as Hierarchy” on theaxis: drilldown according to the next object onthe axis

6SHFLI\LQJ�WKH�+LHUDUFK\�IRU�WKH�&RVW�&HQWHU�&KDUDFWHULVWLF�IRU�4XHU\�9LHZ��DQG6LPXOWDQHRXVO\�([SDQGLQJ�WKH�)LIWK�1RGH�RQ�WKH�$[LV

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER='View1' CMD='Set_Hierarchy'IOBJNM='0COSTCENTER' Hierarchie_Name='MyHierarchy' ACTIVE='X'CMD_1='CMD=set_Drill_State&Data_Provider=View1&iobjnm=0COSTCENTER&POSITION=5&Drill_State=E'>

A command sequence is used in this example.

See also:




*RWR�XVLQJ�5HSRUW�5HSRUW�,QWHUIDFH�

'HILQLWLRQ

Command for a query view.

8VH

You can use this command to execute a report to report jump. You can jump from one Web templateto another Web template, to another query, or to a transaction in a R/3 system and much more.

6WUXFWXUH

&0' 55,


55,B5(&(,9(5 55,�5HFLSLHQW�,'

'$7$B52:

�RSWLRQDO�

'DWD�URZ

Context from which jump is made

'$7$B&2/801

�RSWLRQDO�

'DWD�FROXPQ


,2%-10

�RSWLRQDO�

D�FKDUDFWHULVWLF


([DPSOH

-XPS�WR�;<=

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ CMD=’RRI’ RRI_RECEIVER=’XYZ’>

6HH�DOVR�

Overview: Report-Report-Interface [Extern]

Defining Sender/Receiver Assignment to the R/RI in BW [Seite 62]



([SRUWLQJ�'DWD

'HILQLWLRQ


8VH

You can export the data of a query view to a CSV or MS Excel 2000 file with this instruction.

6WUXFWXUH

&0' (;3257


)250$7 )RUPDW

’CSV’ = CSV file

’XLS’ = MS Excel 2000 file

([DPSOH

([SRUWLQJ�GDWD�WR�06�([FHO��

<SAP_BW_URL DATA_PROVIDER=’View1’ CMD=’EXPORT’ FORMAT=’XLS’>



%:�6W\OHVKHHWV

'HILQLWLRQ

Cascading stylesheets that are stored in the MIME repository under the name %:5HSRUWV�FVV.

8VH

Cascading stylesheets add to the basic functions of HTML by enabling you to determine differentformats. You use CSS classes in HTML (which is created by the BEx Web items). The styles areidentified in the generated HTML using class attributes according to the HTML standard.

You can change the styles and thereby influence how the BW contents are displayed.

Note that a stylesheet always has to be included in a Web template.

6WUXFWXUH

The following classes are identified when HTML is generated:

&66�FODVVHV 8VH

&RQWDLQHU�IRU�:HE�LWHPV

SAPBEXBorderFlexBoxTtl Title area for Web items with borders

SAPBEXBorderlessFlexBoxTtl Title area for Web items without borders and those with formcharacters

SAPBEXBorderFlexBox Web items with borders

SAPBEXBorderlessFlexBox Web items without borders and those with form characters

SAPBEXFlexBoxContBlue Blue background section

SAPBEXFlexBoxContWhite White background section

7DEOH

SAPBEXstdData Numerical value in the data cells

SAPBEXstdDataOdd Even, alternate rows

SAPBEXaggData Aggregated numerical values in data totals cells

SAPBEXstdDataEmph Emphasized numerical values in data cells

SAPBEXstdDataEmphOdd Even, alternate rows with emphasized numerical values

SAPBEXaggDataEmph Aggregated emphasized numerical values in data totals cells

SAPBEXstdItem Structure component, characteristic value, attribute

SAPBEXaggItem Aggregated structure component, characteristic value sumtotal, attribute sum total

SAPBEXchaText Caption for characteristics and attributes

SAPBEXformats Formatting cell (scaling factors)

SAPBEXexcGood1 Exception with priority good 1



SAPBEXexcCritical4 Exception with priority critical 4





SAPBEXexcBad7 Exception with priority bad 7



SAPBEXundefined Numerical value cannot be defined, or is invalid, such asdivision by zero

SAPBEXTableGrid Color of grid lines

SAPBEXCellspacing Grid lines on/off

1DYLJDWLRQ�%ORFN��)LOWHU

NavigatorChaTxt Description of characteristics

SAPBEXNavItem Characteristic values in navigation block and filter

$OHUW�0RQLWRU

SAPBEXAlertItem Alert monitor value

SAPBEXPageDspl Index for displaying values on several pages

7H[W�(OHPHQWV

SAPBEXTElemName Text element name

SAPBEXTElemVal Text element value

([FHSWLRQV

SAPBEXExcName Description of exception

SAPBEXExcStatus Status of exception (active/inactive)

&RQGLWLRQ

SAPBEXConName Description of condition

SAPBEXConStatus Status of exception (active/inactive)

/HJHQG

SAPBEXMapLgdHeading1 Heading

SAPBEXMapLgdHeading2 Heading area

SAPBEXMapLgdLine Values for color legend

SAPBEXMapLgdBorder Formatting of color legend

SAPBEXMapLgdMinmax Minimum or maximum

SAPBEXMapLgdLegend Values for symbol legend

&RQWH[W�0HQX

SAPBEXCtxtMenuItem Entries in the context menu

SAPBEXCtxtMenuHeader Entry selected from the context menu

'LDORJV

SAPBEXDialogBorder Border

SAPBEXDialogBg Background

SAPBEXDialogTtl Title

SAPBEXDialogAreaTtl Area title

SAPBEXDialogOffset Horizontal and vertical spacing in dialogs



SAPBEXDialogPadding Spacing for indicators above controls

7UHH

SAPBEXTreeLevel0 Tree nodes 0




+LHUDUFKLHV

SAPBEXHLevel0 Hierarchy level 0




0HVVDJHV

SAPBEXMessage Messages

SAPBEXSystemMessage System messages

SAPBEXTicker Ticker

/LQNV��7H[W��%XWWRQV

SAPBEXLnk Standard links

SAPBEXMarked Highlighted link

SAPBEXTxtStd Standard text

SAPBEXTxtStdBold Bold standard text

SAPBEXBtnStd Standard button (background)

SAPBEXBtnStdIe4 Standard button (Internet Explorer 4)

SAPBEXBtnStdBorder Standard button (border)

SAPBEXBtnEmph Emphasized button (background)

SAPBEXBtnEmphIe4 Emphasized button (Internet Explorer 4)

SAPBEXBtnEmphBorder Emphasized button (border)

&RQWUROV��,QGLFDWRUV

SAPBEXDdl Dropdown box

SAPBEXDdlLbl Indicator for dropdown box

SAPBEXChb Checkbox

SAPBEXChbLbl Indicator for checkbox

SAPBEXRb Radio button

SAPBEXRbLbl Indicator for radio button

SAPBEXTxtFld Input field

SAPBEXTxtLbl Indicator for input field

SAPBEXTxtFldDsblCnt Inactive input field

SAPBEXTxtFldDsblBrd Border for inactive input field

SAPBEXTxtLblDsbl Indicator for inactive input field

SAPBEXWhlOffset Horizontal and vertical spacing



SAPBEXPadding Spacing for indicators above controls

6WDQGDUG�7HPSODWH

SAPBExTitle Title

SAPBEXNavLine Navigation bar

SAPBEXNavLineBorder Navigation bar border



8VH�RI�-DYD6FULSW�)XQFWLRQV

8VH

You can execute commands or command sequences with JavaScript as well as by using<SAP_BW_URL> tags.

Another JavaScript application is the enhancement of the context menu to include customer-specificentries.

All subsequent examples refer to JavaScript excerpts.

)XQFWLRQV

You can choose from the following functions:

Sending Instructions [Seite 313]

Enhancing the Context Menu with JavaScript [Seite 320]

Logon Language [Seite 326]



6HQGLQJ�,QVWUXFWLRQV

8VH

You must create an URL before you can send it. The following options are available:

• Use of the <SAP_BW_URL> tag

• Use of BW JavaScript function SAP_BW_URL_GET(). This returns the same as the<SAP_BW_URL>tag, but can be called from outside its own frame.

)XQFWLRQV

-DYD6FULSW�)XQFWLRQ 6$3B%:B85/B*(7

5HWXUQ�YDOXH 6WDUW�RI�DQ�85/�IRU�FDOOLQJ�DQ�LQVWUXFWLRQWKDW�VKRXOG�EH�H[HFXWHG�LQ�WKH�VDPH�SDJHFRQWH[W�

3UHSDUH�%RRNPDUN�85/

var = "<SAP_BW_URL CMD=’BOOKMARK’>";

gives you the same as

var = "<SAP_BW_URL>" + "&CMD=BOOKMARK";

or

var = SAP_BW_URL_GET() + "&CMD=BOOKMARK";

There are a number of JavaScript functions for sending instructions. Functions that simplify themanagement of windows and that permit you to call for example property dialogs in separate windowsare provided. These functions take into consideration whether or not the Web browser should useJavaScript. No new windows are created for example for a pocket IE device.

You can choose from the following JavaScript functions:

Execute URL in the Same Window [Seite 314]

Execute URL in a New Window [Seite 315]

URL from a New Window in the Opening Window [Seite 316]

Close Window [Seite 317]

Execute Form in a New Window [Seite 318]

Execute Form in the Opening Window [Seite 319]



([HFXWH�85/�LQ�WKH�6DPH�:LQGRZ

8VH

JavaScript function for sending commands.

)XQFWLRQV

-DYD6FULSW�)XQFWLRQ 6$3%:2SHQ85/


XUO 85/�WR�EH�VWDUWHG�

([DPSOH

6HQG�%RRNPDUN�85/

SAPBWOpenURL(SAP_BW_URL_GET() + "&CMD=BOOKMARK");

or in HTML:

<a href="JavaScript:SAPBWOpenURL(SAP_BW_URL_GET() + ’&CMD=BOOKMARK’);">Createbookmark</a>

2SHQ�6$3�3RUWDOV�+RPHSDJH

SAPBWOpenURL("http://www.sapportals.com");



([HFXWLQJ�DQ�85/�LQ�D�1HZ�:LQGRZ

8VH


)XQFWLRQV

The URL is executed in a new window (if the output device permits this). This is advantageous forexample for selecting filter values and for the properties dialogs.

-DYD6FULSW�)XQFWLRQ 6$3%:2SHQ:LQGRZ


XUO 85/�WR�EH�VWDUWHG�

1DPH :LQGRZ�QDPH

:LGWK :LGWK�RI�WKH�ZLQGRZ

+HLJKW +HLJKW�RI�WKH�ZLQGRZ

([DPSOH

&DOO�6HOHFW�ILOWHU�YDOXH�GLDORJ�IRU�FKDUDFWHULVWLF��&RVWFHQWHU�RI�'DWD�3URYLGHU�$%&

SAPBWOpenWindow(SAP_BW_URL_GET() +"&CMD=PROCESS_HELP_WINDOW&HELP_SERVICE=DP_VIEW_FILTER&DATA_PROVIDER=ABC&IOBJNM=0COSTCENTER","FILTER",800,600);

or in HTML:

<a href="JavaScript:SAPBWOpenWindow(SAP_BW_URL_GET() +’&CMD=PROCESS_HELP_WINDOW&HELP_SERVICE=DP_VIEW_FILTER&DATA_PROVIDER=ABC&IOBJNM=0COSTCENTER’,’FILTER’,800,600);">Define filter value for cost center</a>

'LVSOD\�VHOI�PDGH�IRUP�LQ�D�QHZ�ZLQGRZ

SAPBWOpenWindow("http://.../CustomerForm.htm","CONFIG",300,200);

2SHQ�6$3�3RUWDOV�KRPHSDJH�LQ�D�QHZ�ZLQGRZ

SAPBWOpenWindow("http://www.sapportals.com","SAPPORTALS",800,600);



85/�IURP�D�1HZ�:LQGRZ�LQ�WKH�2SHQLQJ�:LQGRZ

8VH


)XQFWLRQV

You can send an URL on the opening window from a new window with this function. The properties ofthe output device are taken into consideration.

-DYD6FULSW�)XQFWLRQ 6$3%:6HW2SHQHU8UO


XUO 85/�WR�EH�VWDUWHG�LQ�WKH�RSHQHU�ZLQGRZ�

FORVH

true = close, false = leave open

7KHQ�FORVH�ZLQGRZ

([DPSOH

6WDUW�D�QHZ�:HE�DSSOLFDWLRQ�LQ�WKH�PDLQ�ZLQGRZ

SAPBWSetOpenerUrl(SAP_BW_URL_GET() + "&CMD=LDOC&TEMPLATE_ID=NewTemplate");

or in HTML:

<a href="JavaScript:SAPBWSetOpenerUrl(SAP_BW_URL_GET() +"&CMD=LDOC&TEMPLATE_ID=NewTemplate");">New Web report</a>



&ORVLQJ�:LQGRZV

8VH


)XQFWLRQV

With this function you can close a window without having to execute a command.

The properties of the output device are taken into consideration. If the output device doesnot accept JavaScript, the function pages back by one page.

-DYD6FULSW�)XQFWLRQ 6$3%:&ORVH:LQGRZ

([DPSOH

&ORVH�ZLQGRZ

SAPBWCloseWindow();

or in HTML:

<a href="JavaScript:SAPBWCloseWindow();">Close window</a>



([HFXWLQJ�D�)RUP�LQ�D�1HZ�:LQGRZ

8VH


)XQFWLRQV

The form is executed in a new window (if the output device permits this). You can use this function tocreate your own forms for control in a Web template.

-DYD6FULSW�)XQFWLRQ 6$3%::)RUP


QDPH :LQGRZ�QDPH

IRUPQDPH 1DPH�RI�IRUP

ZLGWK :LGWK�RI�WKH�ZLQGRZ

KHLJKW +HLJKW�RI�WKH�ZLQGRZ

([DPSOH

([HFXWH�D�)RUP�LQ�D�1HZ�:LQGRZ

SAPBWWForm("WindowName","FormName",800,600);

or in HTML:

<a href="JavaScript:SAPBWWForm("WindowName","FormName",800,600);">Evaluate form in a newwindow</a>



([HFXWLQJ�D�)RUP�LQ�WKH�2SHQLQJ�:LQGRZ

8VH


)XQFWLRQV

You can execute a form on the opening window from a new window with this function.

The properties of the output device are taken into consideration.

-DYD6FULSW�)XQFWLRQ 6$3%:2SHQHU6XEPLW)RUP


IRUPQDPH 1DPH�RI�IRUP

FORVH

true = close, false = leave open

7KHQ�FORVH�ZLQGRZ

([DPSOH

([HFXWH�IRUP�LQ�WKH�RSHQLQJ�ZLQGRZ�DQG�FORVH�ZLQGRZ

SAPBWOpenerSubmitForm("FormName",true);

or in HTML:

<a href="JavaScript:SAPBWOpenerSubmitForm(’FormName’,true);">Execute form and closewindow</a>



(QKDQFLQJ�WKH�&RQWH[W�0HQX�ZLWK�-DYD6FULSW

8VH

As well as being able to make entries in the context menu visible, entries in the enhanced menu visibleor entries in the enhanced menu invisible, you can also hang scenario-specific entries in the menu.There are several options:

• You define the new entries for the Web template properties with the object tag. For moreinformation see Object Tag for the Properties of Web Templates [Seite 226]

• You hang the new entries in the context menu with a JavaScript function. You can find moredetailed information under:

Adding a Menu Entry with JavaScript [Seite 321]

Command Processing [Seite 323]

In both cases you must write a JavaScript function that processes the menu entryselection.



$GGLQJ�D�0HQX�(QWU\�XVLQJ�-DYD6FULSW

8VH

You can add new entries to the context menu either using the Web template property or with aJavaScript call.

)XQFWLRQV

-DYD6FULSW�)XQFWLRQ 6$3%:$GG7R0HQX


ODEHO /DEHOLQJ�WH[W�LQ�WKH�PHQX

IXQF -DYD6FULSW�IXQFWLRQ�IRU�SURFHVVLQJ�WKHFRPPDQG

You implement this function in JavaScript anduse it to execute commands after you haveselected the menu entry.

SDUDPHWHU )UHH�SDUDPHWHU

This parameter is passed to the JavaScriptfunction ‘func’ and you can evaluate it there asrequired. The parameter allows you to use afunction ‘func’ for more than one menu entry.

FHOOBW\SH

‘ ’ = No restriction

‘CHARACTERISTIC’ = Characteristic

‘CHARACTERISTIC_VALUE’ = Characteristicvalue

‘STRUCTURE’ = Structure

‘STRUCTURE_VALUE’ = Structure componentvalue

‘DATA’ = Data cell

‘EXCEPTIONS’ = Item exceptions

‘CONDITIONS’ = Item conditions

‘DOCUMENT_LIST’ = Item document list

&RQWH[W�RI�WKH�HQWU\

If you want the menu entry to appear only incertain contexts and not in all context menus,you can define this with ‘cell_type’ and ‘filter’.

ILOWHU &RQWH[W�RI�WKH�HQWU\

Different values makes sense here, dependingon the value of ‘cell_type’:

‘CHARACTERISTIC’,‘CHARACTERISTIC_VALUE’, ‘STRUCTURE’,‘STRUCTURE_VALUE’: Iobjnm

‘EXCEPTIONS’: Exception ID

‘CONDITIONS’: Condition ID

‘DOCUMENT_LIST’: Document ID

See ([DPSOHV.



YLVLELOLW\

‘ ’= Not displayed



9LVLELOLW\�RI�WKH�HQWU\

Here you define if the entry is to appear in theVLPSOH�PHQX or in the HQKDQFHG�PHQX.

SRVLWLRQ

‘TOP’ = Before the “normal” entries

‘BOTTOM’ = After the “normal” entries

3RVLWLRQ�RI�WKH�HQWU\

The entries are inserted in the order in whichthey were called. You can choose if the entry isto appear before the “normal” entries or afterthem in the menu. You cannot position theentries in between the “normal” entries.

'DWDBSURYLGHU 1DPH�RI�WKH�GDWD�SURYLGHU

Name of the data provider (if the entry is to bemade only for a specific data provider).

,WHP 1DPH�RI�WKH�:HE�LWHP

Name of the Web item (if the entry is to bemade only for a specific Web item).

([DPSOH

See the examples under Command Processing [Seite 323]



&RPPDQG�3URFHVVLQJ

8VH

When you enhance the context menu with customer-specific entries (with Web template properties orJavaScript function ’SAPBWAddToMenu’), you must define a JavaScript function that is executedwhen a customer-specific entry is selected. This function is responsible for processing the command.

)XQFWLRQV

The function must support the following interface:

-DYD6FULSW�)XQFWLRQ -DYD6FULSW�IXQFWLRQ�IRU�SURFHVVLQJ�WKHFRPPDQG


SDUDPHWHU )UHH�SDUDPHWHU

The parameter makes it possible to processmore than one menu entry with one function.See ([DPSOHV.

FHOOBW\SH

’ ’ = No special

‘CHARACTERISTIC’ = Characteristic

‘CHARACTERISTIC_VALUE’ = Characteristicvalue

‘STRUCTURE’ = Structure

‘STRUCTURE_VALUE’ = Structure componentvalue

‘DATA’ = Data cell

'EXCEPTIONS' = Web Item /LVW�RI�([FHSWLRQV

'CONDITIONS' = Web Item /LVW�RI�&RQGLWLRQV

'DOCUMENT_LIST’ = Web Item List ofDocuments

&RQWH[W�RI�FHOO

)LOWHUV &RQWH[W�RI�FHOO

Different values makes sense here, dependingon the value of ‘cell_type’:

‘CHARACTERISTIC’,‘CHARACTERISTIC_VALUE’, ‘STRUCTURE’,‘STRUCTURE_VALUE’: Iobjnm

‘EXCEPTIONS’: Exception ID

‘CONDITIONS’: Condition ID

‘DOCUMENT_LIST’: Document ID

See ([DPSOHV.

SDUDPHWHU� ([DFW�GHILQLWLRQ�RI�WKH�FRQWH[W�RI�WKH�FHOO

cell_type = 'CHARACTERISTIC_VALUE': Keyof characteristic value

cell_type = 'STRUCTURE_VALUE':STRUCTURE_MEMBER_ID_1

SDUDPHWHU� ([DFW�GHILQLWLRQ�RI�WKH�FRQWH[W�RI�WKH�FHOO

cell_type = ’CHARACTERISTIC_VALUE’: Nodetype for a hierarchy node

cell_type = ’STRUCTURE_VALUE’:STRUCTURE_MEMBER_ID_2

LWHP 1DPH�RI�WKH�:HE�LWHP�RQ�ZKLFK�WKH�PHQX�LVFDOOHG

GDWDSURYLGHU 1DPH�RI�WKH�'DWD�3URYLGHU�RQ�ZKLFK�WKHPHQX�LV�FDOOHG

[ &HOO�LV�RQ�GDWD�FROXPQ�[

This parameter is needed especially for thereport/report interface.

< &HOO�LV�RQ�GDWD�URZ�\

This parameter is needed especially for thereport/report interface.

You can use all the JavaScript functions that were listed for processing.

([DPSOH

<SCRIPT language="JavaScript"><!--

// menu entry at start and only for customer cells, only for data provider DP1

SAPBWAddToMenu("Customerdetails","myMenuProcessor","1","CHARACTERISTIC_VALUE","0CUSTOMER","X","TOP","DP1","");

// Menu entry at the end to the IT Home Page

// Menu entry at the end to the IT Home Page

// Menu entry at the beginning and only on material groups

SAPBWAddToMenu("Materials","myMenuProcessor","3","CHARACTERISTIC_VALUE","0MATERIAL","X","TOP","","","");

// Command Processing

function myMenuProcessor(parameter,cell_type,filter,parameter1,parameter2,item,dataprovider,x,y){ switch (parameter){ case "1":

// Report-report-interface jump to customer details Web application in a new window

SAPBWOpenWindow(SAP_BW_URL_Get() + "&CMD=RRI&DATA_ROW=" + y +"&DATA_COLUMN=" + y + "&IOBJNM=0CUSTOMER&RRI_RECEIVER=ABC","CustDetails",600,400); break; case "2":

// Call IT help page

SAPBWOpenWindow("http://…/it/olap/help.htm","Help",600,400); break; case "3":

// Filter material group and expand by material

SAPBWOpenUrl(SAP_BW_URL_Get() + "&CMD=EXPAND&" + "DATA_PROVIDER=" + escape(dataprovider) + "&IOBJNM=0MATERIAL&IOBJNM_PARENT=0MATGROUP&FILTER_IOBJNM=0MATGROUP" + "&FILTER_VALUE=" + escape(parameter1) + "&FILTER_NODE_IOBJNM=" +escape(parameter2));



break; }}---></SCRIPT>



/RJRQ�/DQJXDJH

8VH

With this function you can define the logon language and thereby take the different input formats of thevarious languages into consideration in JavaScript.

)XQFWLRQV

-DYD6FULSW�)XQFWLRQ 6$3B%:B*HWB/DQJXDJH

5HWXUQ�YDOXH /RJRQ�/DQJXDJH

e.g. EN for English and DE for German.



:HE�'HVLJQ�$3,�IRU�7DEOHV

3XUSRVH

The Web Design Application Programming Interface (Web Design API) is aimed at Web designers andABAP programmers that want to create Web applications for highly individual scenarios, such as BIcockpits, based on BEx Web application design and want to change the display of tables or navigationblocks to meet their own requirements.

The Web Design API enables you to modify individual cell data (characteristic values, columnheaders, value cells, and so on) with relation to content, display and navigation options.

3URFHVV

1. Using the Class Builder (transaction SE24) or the Object Navigator (transaction SE80), create aclass with a class name in the customer name space.

2. Give the class the same properties as class CL_RSR_WWW_MODIFY_TABLE.

3. Implement only the methods that fill cell contents that you want to change. For further informationabout the different methods, see Table Interfaces [Seite 328].

4. Create the your Web template from the table provided by SAP.

5. Extend the object tag of the table and/or the navigation block in the Web template with theparameter <param name=’MODIFY_CLASS’ value=’YourClassName’>.

6. Check in the modified Web template.

5HVXOW

The next time you call up the Web template, your class for adjusting the table contents is called up.

We recommend that you test this in transaction RSRT2. Select the HTML checkbox andenter the contents of the start URL from CMD=LDOC as the URL.

You can now test the HTML generation in the Debugger. Simply set suitable breakpointsand restart the transaction.



7DEOH�,QWHUIDFH

'HILQLWLRQ

This enables you to display tables or navigation blocks in BEx Web applications as you choose.

8VH

The range of options reaches from simply changing the display to enhancing the navigation optionsand display specifically for data.

You use ABAP-OO to execute the technical implementation.

• You create an ABAP-OO class.

• This class must succeed from the class CL_RSR_WWW_MODIFY_TABLE.

• The class name of the appropriate class is specified in the object tag of the Web item 7DEOH or theWeb item *HQHULF�1DYLJDWLRQ�%ORFN in the Web template in the following form:

<object>…<param name="MODIFY_CLASS" value="YourClassName">…</object>

6WUXFWXUH

In the following, different methods are executed with which you can modify cell contents. All methodsreceive the contents which are suggested as standard in BEx Web Applications as “CHANGING”parameters. These can be redefined in the implementation of the table interface methods. If individualcell types remain unchanged, leave the implementation empty.

The table interface has the following functions:

• Attributes [Seite 329]

• Events [Seite 339]

• Methods for Manipulating Cell Contents [Seite 340]

• Service Methods [Seite 354]



$WWULEXWHV

'HILQLWLRQ

Functional components of the table interface.

6WUXFWXUH

The following instance attributes of the class are filled automatically. They get their values from theWeb application framework.

The attributes are read-only.

$WWULEXWH 'HVFULSWLRQ

1B,7(0B1$0( /RJLFDO�QDPH�RI�WKH�WDEOH

This attribute is needed for command URLs.You can use this attribute, for example, tochange attributes in the table.

1B*(1(5$7(B/,1.6 *HQHUDWH�QDYLJDWLRQ�OLQNV

If the value = “X”, URLs can be generated.

If the value is blank, the item is for display only.It is not possible to interact with the item.

1B$/7B67</(6 'LVSOD\�]HEUD�OLVW

If the value = “X”, the formatting is the same inevery other row.

1B67$7(/(66 &DOOLQJ�WKH�:HE�DSSOLFDWLRQ�ZLWKRXWLQWHUDFWLRQ

If the value = “X”, the Web application is calledand the session is dismantled on theapplication server. SAP BW 2.0 supports nofurther interaction.

1B5B&5($7,21B3$5$0(7(56 &UHDWLRQ�SDUDPHWHUV�IRU�WKH�WDEOH

Using the reference for an instance of the classCL_RSR_PARAMETER, the system is able toread the value-name pairs that have been usedin the generation of the table. Methods such asGET are used to read the values.

The parameters of the start URL and thename-value pairs specified in the object tag ofthe item in the Web template belong to thesename-value pairs.

This means that the start URL or object tag (inthe Web template) can transfer parameters tothe class. This increases the number of times aclass can be reused and the different areaswhere the class can be used, for example, byusing customer-specific parameters thatconfigure the class individually.



1B-$9$6&5,37 8VLQJ�-DYD�6FULSW

If the value = “X”, Java Script functions aresupported. Otherwise, you must not use JavaScript functions, since you cannot be sure thatthe requesting Web browser supports JavaScript.

1B'$7$B3529,'(5B1$0( /RJLFDO�QDPH�RI�WKH�GDWD�SURYLGHU

Needed in the generation of navigation URLs.

1B12B'$7$ 1R�UHOHYDQW�GDWD�IRXQG

1B12B$87+25,=$7,21 1R�DXWKRUL]DWLRQ�IRU�GLVSOD\LQJ�GDWD

1B5B'$7$B6(7 'DWD�LQ�WKH�GDWD�SURYLGHU

This attribute is needed only forspecial applications.

As a rule, the information that istransferred by the methodinterfaces is enough to determinethe cell contents.

For more information see Datasets [Seite 331].



'DWDVHWV

'HILQLWLRQ

The dataset contains the data for the query view.

8VH

Special applications require information that cannot be obtained using the method interfaces. Forsome applications you need more information than is contained in the cell contents. For example, youneed the list of available characteristics or the contents of the dynamic filter before you are able tojump from one report into another.

An understanding of the enhancement described below is not necessary for the use of thetable interface.

You have made sure that the data from the dataset (N_R_DATA_SET) is always up to date. TheN_SX_VERSION_20A_1 attribute, type RSRDS_SX_DATA_SET_20A_1, is filled automatically. Thedata consists of both the metadata (a catalog of characteristics (AXIS_INFO)�and so on) and thedisplayed values (AXIS_DATA and CELL_DATA).

6WUXFWXUH

The instance attribute N_R_DATA_SET → N_SX_VERSION_20A_1 has the following components:

&RPSRQHQW 'HVFULSWLRQ

AXIS_INFO [Seite 332] Metadata description of the characteristics,attributes, and structures on the axes.

AXIS_DATA [Seite 334] Characteristic values, attribute values, andstructural components according to thesequence they appear in on the axes.

CELL_DATA [Seite 336] Value cells: The cells are arranged by row first,and then by column.

TXT_SYMBOLS [Seite 338] Text elements for the query



$;,6B,1)2

'HILQLWLRQ

This component describes the properties of the structures, characteristics, and attributes, and howthey are distributed between the axes.

6WUXFWXUH

The AXIS_INFO is a table of axes (rows, columns, and filters) with the appropriate axes components.

$;,6B,1)2 'HVFULSWLRQ

AXIS $[LV�,'

0 : Columns

1 : Rows

255 : Filters

NCHARS 9DOXH�FHOOV

The cells are arranged by row first, and then bycolumn.

NCOORDS 1XPEHU�RI�REMHFWV�RQ�WKH�D[LV (number ofrows / columns / filter values)

CHARS &KDUDFWHULVWLFV�ZLWK�WKHLU�DWWULEXWHV�DQGVWUXFWXUHV�RQ�WKH�D[LV�

The complex table CHARS has the following structure:

&+$56 'HVFULSWLRQ

CHANM Name of the characteristic or of the structure

HIENM +LHUDUFK\�QDPH, if the hierarchy is active

VERSION +LHUDUFK\�YHUVLRQ

DATETO .H\�GDWH�IRU�WKH�KLHUDUFK\

CAPTION 1DPH�RI�WKH�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�RU�RI�WKHVWUXFWXUH

CHAPRSNT &KDUDFWHULVWLF�GLVSOD\

0 : key and text

1 : Text

2 : Key

3 : Text and key

4 : Long text

5 : Medium text

6 : No display

ATTRINM $WWULEXWHV�IRU�WKLV�FKDUDFWHULVWLF

ATTRINM is a table of the attributes for the characteristic. It has the following structure:

$775,10 'HVFULSWLRQ

ATTRINM 1DPH�RI�WKH�DWWULEXWH

CAPTION 1DPH�RI�WKH�DWWULEXWH



CHAPRSNT $WWULEXWH�GLVSOD\

0 : key and text

1 : Text

2 : Key

3 : Text and key

4 : Long text

5 : Medium text



$;,6B'$7$

'HILQLWLRQ

The component AXIS_DATA describes the contents of the axis.

6WUXFWXUH

AXIS_DATA is a table with the following structure:

$;,6B'$7$ 'HVFULSWLRQ

AXIS $[LV�,'

0 : Columns

1 : Rows

255 : Filters

SET $[LV�FRQWHQWV

The complex table SET has the following structure:

6(7 'HVFULSWLRQ

TUPLE_ORDINAL 1XPEHU�RI�WKH�HQWU\�EHJLQQLQJ�ZLWK��RQ�WKHD[LV

CHANM 1DPH�RI�WKH�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�RU�RI�WKHVWUXFWXUH

CAPTION 7H[W�IRU�WKH�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�YDOXH

CHAVL ,QWHUQDO�NH\�YDOXH�IRU�WKH�FKDUDFWHULVWLFYDOXH

This is needed, for example, for the filteroperations.

CHAVL_EXT ([WHUQDO�NH\�YDOXH�IRU�WKH�FKDUDFWHULVWLFYDOXH

This corresponds with CHAVL after theapplication of the conversion exit.

NIOBJNM With hierarchy nodes, this is the QDPH�RI�WKHQRGH�FKDUDFWHULVWLF (0HIERNODE for textnodes).

TLEVEL +LHUDUFK\�OHYHO�RI�WKH�HQWU\

DRILLSTATE ([WHQW�WR�ZKLFK�WKH�HQWU\�LV�H[SDQGHG��IRUDQ�DFWLYH�KLHUDUFK\��

L : Hierarchy leaf

- : Expanded node

+ : Collapsed node



OPT Only with filters:

EQ : Single value

LT : Less than

LE : Less than or equal to

GT : Greater than

GE : Greater than or equal to

BL : From-value with intervals (two rows)

BH : To-value with intervals

SIGN I : Include

E : Exclude

ATTRIBUTES $WWULEXWH�YDOXHV

ATTRIBUTES is a table with the following structure:

$775,%87(6 'HVFULSWLRQ

ATTRINM 1DPH�RI�WKH�DWWULEXWH

CAPTION 7H[W�IRU�DQ�DWWULEXWH�YDOXH

ATTRIVL .H\�IRU�WKH�DWWULEXWH�YDOXH

This describes the contents of an axis.



&(//B'$7$

'HILQLWLRQ

The CELL_DATA component describes the value cells.

The number cells of the query view are given as the assigned table of rows for BAPI typeBAPI6111CD. If you display the query view data as a table, the assignment of cells corresponds tothat of the data block, in which the assignment is run first using the rows and then using the columns.

The index of a specific value is therefore calculated as follows:

Index = Column position + (row position – 1)* number of columns

6WUXFWXUH

The data structure is as follows:


CELL_ORDINAL 1XPEHULQJ�RI�WKH�YDOXHV�EHJLQV�ZLWK��

CELL_ORDINAL is always smallerby 1 than the index of the rows

VALUE 9DOXH

FORMATTED_VALUE Formatted value

Unit and currency are used already in this field

VALUE_TYPE 9DOXH�W\SH

The value type accepts the following values:

‘ ’ normal, valid value

‘0’ division by 0

‘1’ value cannot be determined

‘3’ value constructed from different currencies

‘5’ zero value

‘9’ surplus

‘D’ date

‘T’ time

‘A’ no authorization for this value

CURRENCY &XUUHQF\�LGHQWLILHU

UNIT 8QLW�LGHQWLILHU



MWKZ $PRXQW�YDOXH�NH\�ILJXUH

The amount/value key figure accepts thefollowing values:

’W’ value

‘M’ amount

‘P’ price

‘Q’ ratio

‘%’ percentage value

‘C’ counter

‘F’ real number

‘D’ date

‘T’ time

NUM_SCALE Scaling factors

0 for 1, 1 for 10, 2 for 100, 3 for 1000, ...

NUM_PREC 3UHFLVLRQ�RI�WKH�QXPEHU�LQ�GHFLPDO�SODFHV

CELL_STATUS Not used

BACK_COLOR Not used



7;7B6<0%2/6

'HILQLWLRQ

The component TXT_SYMBOLS describes the text elements of the query. The text elements areavailable as a table made up of RRX_TXT_SYMBOLS rows.

6WUXFWXUH

The text elements have the following structure (only the most important components):


SYM_TYPE 7\SH�RI�WH[W�HOHPHQW

‘V’ for variable

‘F’ for filter value

‘C’ for general text element

SYM_NAME 1DPH�RI�WKH�REMHFW

With variables this is the variable name, withfilters it is the filter characteristic, and withgeneral text elements it is the name of theelement.

A list of the names of the general text elementsis stored under�Text Elements [Seite 193].

SYM_FS Follow-on record number

A text element can be distributed over severalrows, for example, in intervals. This field givesyou the row number of a component within atext element. If SYM_FS=0, the text element isa new text element.

SYM_BEGIN_GROUP 1HZ�JURXS�ZLWKLQ�D�WH[W�HOHPHQW

Groups are usually separated bysemicolons (;)

SYM_CAPTION 1DPH�RI�WKH�WH[W�HOHPHQW

SYM_VALUE 9DOXH�RI�WKH�FRPSRQHQW�RI�WKH�WH[W�HOHPHQW



(YHQWV

'HILQLWLRQ


8VH

Events allow you to initialize tables.

6WUXFWXUH

,QLWLDOL]DWLRQ

Initializing a table: You call this method is before processing. Using the reference from the dataset,you can analyze metadata for the navigational state as well as the data itself. All attributes of the classthat were listed beforehand are filled at this point.

0HWKRG 6WDUW

1HZ�5RZV

You call the following method before starting a new row. You can execute a suitable initialization forthe rows.

0HWKRG 1HZB5RZ

,PSRUWLQJ�3DUDPHWHU 'HVFULSWLRQ

,B< 1HZ�URZ�QXPEHUV

+HDGHU�&RPSOHWHG

The following method is called after you have processed the table header. You can execute a suitableinitialization for the rows.

0HWKRG +HDGHUB)LQLVKHG


,B< 1HZ�URZ�QXPEHUV

&RPSOHWLRQ

This method gives you the option of carrying out further operations after you have finished the table.For example, setting Java Script functions using the method “Set_Javascript_Function” (see ServiceMethods [Seite 354]) or cleaning up the table.

0HWKRG )LQLVKHG



0DQLSXODWLQJ�&HOO�&RQWHQWV

'HILQLWLRQ


8VH

You can use a set of methods to manipulate cell contents.

2QO\�LPSOHPHQW�WKH�PHWKRGV�IRU�WKH�FHOO�W\SHV�WKDW�\RX�ZDQW�WR�PDQLSXODWH�

Standard contents will be used for all other cell types.

Standard contents may change between releases/support packages. If you want tochange the contents of a cell, we recommend that you overwrite the contents of, forexample, C_CELL_CONTENT completely and do not process the field with REPLACE ora similar operation.

)XQFWLRQV

You can use the following methods to manipulate cell contents:

• &DSWLRQB&HOO: Headers [Seite 342]

• 6FDOLQJB)DFWRUB&HOO: Scaling Factors [Seite 343]

• &KDUDFWHULVWLFB&HOO: Characteristic Values [Seite 344]

• $WWULEXWHB&HOO: Attribute Values [Seite 346]

• 6WUXFWXUHB&HOO: Structural Components [Seite 347]

• 'DWDB&HOO: Data Cells [Seite 348]

• (UURUB&HOO: Error Cells [Seite 349]

• 1$9B%/2&.B/$%(/:�Label Area of Navigation Block [Seite 350]

• 1$9B%/2&.B9$/8(:�Filter of Navigation Block [Seite 352]

All methods have iPSRUWLQJ�SDUDPHWHUV�that describe the context of the cell.

All methods have the same FKDQJLQJ�SDUDPHWHUV. These parameters provide the default values andcan be changed in the method. As these parameters are method-independent, they are listed onlyonce here.

&KDQJLQJ�3DUDPHWHU 'HVFULSWLRQ

&B&(//B,' &HOO�,'

If you leave this parameter empty, the cell hasno ID. The ID is used to process the cellcontents with JavaScript.

&B&(//B&217(17 &HOO�&RQWHQWV

The cell contents themselves can be verysimple (for example, a number) or verycomplex (for example, for hierarchy nodes:icons with expanded/collapsed URL and text).



&B&(//B67</( 6W\OH�RI�&HOO

The style defines the color, font, font size,spacing, etc. of the cell. The styles are definedin the Cascading Style Sheet. The CascadingStyle Sheet is assigned to the Web template.

&B&(//B7'B(;7(1' ([WHQVLRQ�RI�7'�WDJ

Here you can set the properties such as thewidth, height, alignment or color of the cell.This parameter is not normally set becausemany of the properties are already definedwhen the style is defined.



+HDGHUV

'HILQLWLRQ

You use the &DSWLRQB&HOO method to adjust the contents of header cells.

6WUXFWXUH

0HWKRG &DSWLRQB&HOO


,B; ;�FRRUGLQDWH�RI�WKH�FHOO�LQ�WKH�WDEOH

,B< <�FRRUGLQDWH�RI�WKH�FHOO�LQ�WKH�WDEOH

,B,6B(037< &HOO�LV�HPSW\

’X’ = empty

,B,2%-10B52: &KDUDFWHULVWLF�LQ�WKH�URZV

In the rows axis, the characteristic, whoseheader you want to display in the cell.

,B$775,10B52: $WWULEXWH�IRU�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�LQ�WKH�URZV

In the rows axis, the attribute for thecharacteristic, whose header you want todisplay in the cell.

,B7(;7B52: 7H[W�IRU�FKDUDFWHULVWLF��DWWULEXWH

,B,2%-10B&2/801 &KDUDFWHULVWLF�LQ�WKH�FROXPQV

In the columns axis, the characteristic, whoseheader you want to display in the cell.

,B$775,10B&2/801 $WWULEXWH�IRU�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�LQ�WKH�FROXPQV

In the columns axis, the attribute for thecharacteristic, whose header you want todisplay in the cell.

,B7(;7B&2/801 7H[W�IRU�FKDUDFWHULVWLF��DWWULEXWH

,B52:63$1 1XPEHU�RI�FHOOV�WKDW�\RX�ZDQW�WR�PHUJHDORQJ�WKH�URZV�D[LV

,B&2/63$1 1XPEHU�RI�FHOOV�WKDW�\RX�ZDQW�WR�PHUJHDORQJ�WKH�FROXPQV�D[LV

,B,6B5(3(7,7,21 5HSHWLWLRQ

’X’ = cell contents is a repetition



6FDOLQJ�)DFWRUV

'HILQLWLRQ

You use the 6FDOLQJB)DFWRUB&HOO method to adjust the contents of cells that display the scalingfactors.

6WUXFWXUH

0HWKRG 6FDOLQJB)DFWRUB&HOO




,B7(;7 6FDOLQJ�WH[W

,B,6B680 6XP�WRWDO�FHOO

‘X’ = sum total cell

,B180B6&$/( 6FDOLQJ�IDFWRU

,B&855(1&< &XUUHQF\

,B81,7 8QLW



&KDUDFWHULVWLF�9DOXHV

'HILQLWLRQ

You use the &KDUDFWHULVWLFB&HOO method to adjust the contents of cells containing values forcharacteristics.

6WUXFWXUH

0HWKRG &KDUDFWHULVWLFB&HOO




,B,2%-10 1DPH�RI�FKDUDFWHULVWLF

,B$;,6 $[LV�RQ�ZKLFK�WKH�FKDUDFWHULVWLFV�DUHDUUDQJHG�LQ�WKH�GULOOGRZQ

’X’ = columns, ’Y’ = rows

,B&+$9/B(;7 &KDUDFWHULVWLF�YDOXH�LQ�H[WHUQDO�GLVSOD\

Key value of the characteristic value accordingto its application in the conversion exit.

,B&+$9/ &KDUDFWHULVWLF�YDOXH�LQ�LQWHUQDO�GLVSOD\

Key value of the characteristic value. This isneeded for the filter operations.

,B12'(B,2%-10 1DPH�RI�WKH�QRGH�FKDUDFWHULVWLF


,B7(;7 7H[W�IRU�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�YDOXH

,B+5<B$&7,9( 6WDWXV�RI�WKH�GLVSOD\�KLHUDUFK\

‘X’ = active

,B'5,//67$7( ([WHQW�WR�ZKLFK�WKH�QRGH�LV�H[SDQGHG

'E' = expanded, 'C' = collapsed

,B',63/$<B/(9(/ 'LVSOD\�KLHUDUFK\�OHYHO�RI�WKH�QRGH��OHDI

,B86(B7(;7 &HOO�FRQWHQWV

'X' = text, ' ' = key




'X' = cell contents is a repetition

,B),567B&(// )LUVW�GDWD�FHOO�RI�WKH�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�YDOXH

,B/$67B&(// /DVW�GDWD�FHOO�RI�WKH�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�YDOXH

,B&(//63$1 1XPEHU�RI�FHOOV�WKDW�\RX�ZDQW�WR�PHUJHDORQJ�WKH�GULOOGRZQ�D[LV



,B&(//63$1B257 1XPEHU�RI�FHOOV�WKDW�\RX�ZDQW�WR�PHUJHYHUWLFDOO\�DORQJ�WKH�GULOOGRZQ�D[LV



$WWULEXWH�9DOXHV

'HILQLWLRQ

You use the $WWULEXWHB&HOO�method to adjust the contents of the cells containing attribute values.

6WUXFWXUH

0HWKRG $WWULEXWHB&HOO




,B,6B(037< &HOO�LV�HPSW\

’X’ = empty

,B,2%-10 1DPH�RI�FKDUDFWHULVWLF

,B$775,10 1DPH�RI�DWWULEXWH



,B&+$9/B(;7 $WWULEXWH�YDOXH�LQ�H[WHUQDO�GLVSOD\

Key value of the attribute value according to itsapplication in the conversion exit.

,B&+$9/ $WWULEXWH�YDOXH�LQ�LQWHUQDO�GLVSOD\

Key value of the attribute value.

,B7(;7 7H[W�IRU�DWWULEXWH�YDOXH

,B86(B7(;7 &HOO�FRQWHQWV

’X’ = text, ’ ’ = key








6WUXFWXUDO�&RPSRQHQWV

'HILQLWLRQ

You use the 6WUXFWXUHB&HOO�method to adjust the contents of structural components.

6WUXFWXUH

0HWKRG 6WUXFWXUHB&HOO




,B,2%-10 1DPH�RI�WKH�VWUXFWXUH



,B6758&785B0(0%(5 1DPH�RI�WKH�VWUXFWXUDO�FRPSRQHQW

Key value of the structural component.

,B6758&785B0(0%(5B� 1DPH�RI�WKH�VWUXFWXUDO�FRPSRQHQW�RI�WKHRWKHU�VWUXFWXUH

Key value of the structural component of asecond structure (if a second structure isavailable). This is needed, for example, for sortoperations.

,B7(;7 1DPH�RI�WKH�VWUXFWXUDO�FRPSRQHQW






,B&(//63$1B257 1XPEHU�RI�FHOOV�WKDW�\RX�ZDQW�WR�PHUJHYHUWLFDOO\�DORQJ�WKH�GULOOGRZQ�D[LV



'DWD�&HOOV

'HILQLWLRQ

You use the 'DWDB&HOO method to adjust the contents of data cells.

6WUXFWXUH

0HWKRG 'DWDB&HOO




,B9$/8( 9DOXHV�RI�WKH�FHOO�ZLWKRXW�VFDOLQJ

,B',63/$<B9$/8( 9DOXHV�RI�WKH�FHOO�DIWHU�VFDOLQJ

,B180(5,&$/B6&$/( 6FDOLQJ�IDFWRUV

,B180(5,&$/B35(&,6,21 1XPEHU�RI�SODFHV�DIWHU�WKH�GHFLPDO�SRLQW

,B&855(1&< &XUUHQF\

Three-character currency ID, for example,USD, ATS, or DEM.

,B81,7 8QLW

Unit according to the application of the three-character conversion exit.

,B�$/(57/(9(/ $OHUW�OHYHO

1, 2, 3 = green; 4, 5, 6 = yellow; 7, 8, 9 = red



You can make many changes, for example, choose to display the alerts as icons, or change the waycurrencies and units are displayed (units as text, for example).



(UURU�&HOOV

'HILQLWLRQ

You use the (UURUB&HOO method to adjust the contents of error cells.

6WUXFWXUH

0HWKRG (UURUB&HOO




,B7(;7 (UURU�WH[W

,B7<3( (UURU�W\SH��6��(��$��,��:�



/DEHOLQJ�$UHD�RI�WKH�1DYLJDWLRQ�%ORFN

'HILQLWLRQ

You can adjust the contents of the labeling cells of the navigation block with method1$9B%/2&.B/$%(/.

6WUXFWXUH

The area for labeling can be divided in up to 4 columns.

0HWKRG 1$9B%/2&.B/$%(/


,B,2%-10 7HFKQLFDO�QDPH�RI�WKH�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�RUVWUXFWXUH

,B,6B6758&785( 2EMHFW�LV�D�VWUXFWXUH

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

,B$;,6 $[LV�RQ�ZKLFK�WKH�FKDUDFWHULVWLFV��VWUXFWXUHDUH�DUUDQJHG�LQ�WKH�GULOOGRZQ

'X' = columns, 'Y' = rows

,B&$37,21 /DEHO�WH[W


'X' = Active


&B&(//�B,' ,'�RI�FHOO��

If you leave this parameter empty, the cell hasno ID. The ID can be used to process the cellcontents with JavaScript.

&B&(//�B,' ,'�RI�FHOO��

&B&(//�B,' ,'�RI�FHOO��

&B&(//�B,' ,'�RI�FHOO��

&B&(//�B&217(17 &HOO�FRQWHQWV��

The cell contents themselves can be verysimple (for example only a number) or verycomplex (for example for hierarchy nodes:icons with expanded/collapsed URL and text).




&B&(//�B67</( 6W\OH�RI�FHOO��

The style defines the color, font, font size,distances, etc. of the cell. The styles aredefined in the Cascading Style Sheet. TheCascading Style Sheet is assigned to thetemplate.

&B&(//�B67</( 6W\OH�RI�FHOO��

&B&(//�B67</( 6W\OH�RI�FHOO��



&B&(//�B67</( 6W\OH�RI�FHOO��

&B&(//�B7'B(;7(1' ([WHQVLRQ�RI�7'�WDJ��





&B&(//�B:,'7+ :LGWK�RI�FROXPQ��






)LOWHU�$UHD�RI�WKH�1DYLJDWLRQ�%ORFN

'HILQLWLRQ

You can adjust the contents of the filter cells of the navigation block with method1$9B%/2&.B9$/8(.

6WUXFWXUH

The area for the filter can be divided in up to 4 columns.

0HWKRG 1$9B%/2&.B9$/8(


,B,2%-10 7HFKQLFDO�QDPH�RI�WKH�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�RUVWUXFWXUH

,B,6B6758&785( 2EMHFW�LV�D�VWUXFWXUH

‘X’ = Yes, ‘ ’ = No

,B$;,6 $[LV�RQ�ZKLFK�WKH�FKDUDFWHULVWLFV��VWUXFWXUHDUH�DUUDQJHG�LQ�WKH�GULOOGRZQ

'X' = columns, 'Y' = rows

,B&$37,21 /DEHO�WH[W


'X' = Active


&B&(//�B,' ,'�RI�FHOO��

If you leave this parameter empty, the cell hasno ID. The ID can be used to process the cellcontents with JavaScript.

&B&(//�B,' ,'�RI�FHOO��

&B&(//�B,' ,'�RI�FHOO��

&B&(//�B,' ,'�RI�FHOO��


The cell contents themselves can be verysimple (for example only a number) or verycomplex (for example for hierarchy nodes:icons with expanded/collapsed URL and text).




&B&(//�B67</( 6W\OH�RI�FHOO��

The style defines the color, font, font size,distances, etc. of the cell. The styles aredefined in the Cascading Style Sheet. TheCascading Style Sheet is assigned to thetemplate.

&B&(//�B67</( 6W\OH�RI�FHOO��

&B&(//�B67</( 6W\OH�RI�FHOO��



&B&(//�B67</( 6W\OH�RI�FHOO��












6HUYLFH�0HWKRGV

'HILQLWLRQ


8VH

Service methods are offered along with methods for manipulating cell contents [Seite 340]. You needthese when creating new cell contents.

)XQFWLRQV

&UHDWLQJ�1DYLJDWLRQ�85/V

You generate command URLs using the method *(7B85/. This ensures that the request is sent tothe correct page instance of the current session.

0HWKRG *(7B85/


,B5B3$5$0(7(5 &RPPDQG�SDUDPHWHU

The command parameter is transferred withthe help of instances of the classCL_RSR_PARAMETER. Use the methods ofthis class, for example, ADD, to fill theparameter.

5HWXUQLQJ�3DUDPHWHU 'HVFULSWLRQ

5B85/ &RPPDQG�85/

,FRQV

You use IMG tags in HTML for icons. To fill the attribute SRC of the IMG tag, you need the path of theicon directory on the IST. The method *(7B,&21B3$7+ delivers this.

0HWKRG *(7B,&21B3$7+

5HWXUQLQJ�3DUDPHWHU 'HVFULSWLRQ

5B3$7+ 3DWK�IRU�LFRQ�GLUHFWRU\

This path can be used in the IMG tag by HTMLfor SRC. Only the screen name now needs tobe entered.

6HQGLQJ�0HVVDJHV

You use the method 6(1'B0(66$*( to compose messages. These appear at the start of the HTMLpage in a table. You use this function primarily to notify users of errors.

0HWKRG 6(1'B0(66$*(


,B&/$66 0HVVDJH�FODVV

,B7<3( 0HVVDJH�W\SH��,��:��(��$��;�

,B180%(5 0HVVDJH�QXPEHU

,B06*9� 0HVVDJH�YDULDEOH�YDOXH��






-DYD6FULSW�)XQFWLRQV

The method 6(7B-$9$6&5,37B)81&7,21�allows you to manage the JavaScript source codecentrally. The source code is set at the start of the HTML page. You can use this function to constructyour own JavaScript source code and, for example, call up manipulated cells from there.

0HWKRG 6(7B-$9$6&5,37B)81&7,21


,B1$0( 1DPH�RI�WKH�VHFWLRQ�RI�VRXUFH�FRGH

This name is unique. Any source code alreadystored that has same name is overwritten.

,B&2',1* -DYD6FULSW�VRXUFH�FRGH



$QDO\VLV��5HSRUWLQJ��%([�:HE�$SSOLFDWLRQV

8VH

BEx Web Applications are Web-based applications from the Business Explorer for data analysis,reporting and analytical applications on the Web.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You have formatted your data in the BEx Web Application Designer using Web items (table, filter,chart, map, document, and so on) and can now access them on the intranet or using an enterpriseportal.

)XQFWLRQV

A number of navigation options are available in the various Web items for the Web applications. Youget to these options either using the symbol or the context menu. Web items such as dropdownboxes, checkboxes and radio button groups serve as easy-to-use navigation items within a Webapplication. The navigation options in the Web applications range from selecting filter values, currencytranslation, sorting characteristics and calculating values as far as defining conditions and exceptions.You can also store the navigation status of a Web application as a bookmark or export the Webapplication as a CSV file or to MS Excel 2000. For further information, see Navigation Functions inWeb Applications [Seite 357].

Using a variable screen, you can fill variables with values when you display the Web application in theWeb browser. You can personalize the values for the individual components of the Web application orfor the entire Web application. For further information on settings in the Web Applications Designerthat affect the display of the variables screen and the on the functions of the variables screen, seeUsing Variables in Web Applications [Seite 372].

Using the Web items 6LQJOH�'RFXPHQW�and /LVW�RI�'RFXPHQWV, you can add documents containingadditional information and comments for the business data. For further information, see UsingDocuments in Web Applications [Seite 377].

When you analyze business data on a map using the 0DS�Web item, you have several navigationoptions within the map as well as various interaction options with other Web items in your Webapplication. For more information, see Navigating in Maps [Seite 379]



1DYLJDWLRQ�)XQFWLRQV�LQ�:HE�$SSOLFDWLRQV

8VH

You use the various navigation functions to change the view of the data that is displayed in a Webapplication to suit you. The range of available navigation functions depends on the Web items thathave been included in the Web application. Each navigation function is characterized by a symbol.There is also a context menu (for the Web items 1DYLJDWLRQ�%ORFN, 7DEOH, /LVW�RI�([FHSWLRQV, /LVW�RI&RQGLWLRQV, and /DEHO) that you can reach by left-clicking the mouse on a cell text (characteristic,characteristic value, structural component, description of an exception, description of a condition).

)XQFWLRQV

Use the icon to expand the Web item, and the icon to collapse the item.

1DYLJDWLRQ�%ORFN

You use the icon to expand an InfoObject by columns, and the icon to expand the InfoObject byrows. The InfoObject is expanded in the table accordingly. In the navigation block a symbolappears next to the InfoObject. Click on this symbol to remove the drilldown from the table.

You use the icon to choose filter values. The filter values you select are used to restrict thedrilldown in the table. The selected filter values are listed in the navigation block. Use the delete option to remove the filter.

In the navigation block [Seite 186] there is a context menu that refers to the description of thecharacteristic (building component, for example):

• %DFN

• %DFN�WR�6WDUW

• Select Filter Value [Seite 360]

• Drilldown → Across or down

• 6ZDSSLQJ�$[HV

• Sort characteristic→ Ascending according to key / Ascending according to name / Descendingaccording to key / Descending according to name

• Goto → Display documents / Documents for Navigation Status

• Currency Translation [Seite 362]

• %RRNPDUN

• ([SRUW�DV → &69�ILOH��06�([FHO��ILOH

• Properties [Seite 363]�(characteristic)

• Query Properties [Seite 366]

The contents of the enhanced context menu are listed in the table and in the descriptionfor the context menu functions for the navigation block With the menu entries (QKDQFHG0HQX and %DVLF�0HQX, you can switch the two versions around. The basic menu containsa submenu of the enhanced menu.

7DEOH

In the table [Seite 85], in addition to the context menu that you call from the description of thecharacteristic (building component, for example) there is also a context menu that refers to thecharacteristic values (casing, for example) or the structural components.

)XQFWLRQV�LQ�WKH�FRQWH[W )XQFWLRQV�LQ�WKH�FRQWH[W )XQFWLRQV�LQ�WKH�FRQWH[W



PHQX�IRU�FKDUDFWHULVWLFGHVFULSWLRQV

PHQX�IRU�FKDUDFWHULVWLFYDOXHV

PHQX�IRU�VWUXFWXUDOFRPSRQHQWV

• %DFN


• Select Filter Value [Seite360]

• Drilldown → Across orDown

• ([FKDQJH�&KDUDFWHULVWLF�

ZLWK → &KDUDFWHULVWLF��6WUXFWXUH

• 5HPRYH�'ULOOGRZQ

• 6ZDS�$[HV

• Sort Characteristic 1 →Ascending According tokey / Ascending Accordingto Name / DescendingAccording to Key /Descending According toName

• Goto → Displaydocuments / Documentsfor Navigation Status

• Currency Translation[Seite 362]

• %RRNPDUN

• ([SRUW�DV → &69�ILOH��06([FHO��ILOH

• Properties [Seite 363](characteristic)

• Query Properties [Seite366]

• %DFN


• .HHS�)LOWHU�9DOXH

• .HHS�)LOWHU�9DOXH�RQ�$[LV


• )LOWHU�DQG�'ULOOGRZQ

$FFRUGLQJ�WR →&KDUDFWHULVWLF��

• 'ULOOGRZQ →Characteristic��

• ([FKDQJH�&KDUDFWHULVWLF��

ZLWK → &KDUDFWHULVWLF��6WUXFWXUH

• 5HPRYH�'ULOOGRZQ

• 6ZDS�$[HV

• Sort Characteristic 1 →Ascending According tokey / Ascending Accordingto Name / DescendingAccording to Key /Descending According toName



• %RRNPDUN

• ([SRUW�DV → &69�ILOH��06([FHO��ILOH

• Properties [Seite 363](characteristic)


• %DFN


• .HHS�)LOWHU�9DOXH

• .HHS�)LOWHU�9DOXH�RQ�$[LV


• )LOWHU�DQG�'ULOOGRZQ

$FFRUGLQJ�WR →&KDUDFWHULVWLF��

• 'ULOOGRZQ →&KDUDFWHULVWLF��

• ([FKDQJH�6WUXFWXUH�ZLWK

→ &KDUDFWHULVWLF

• 6ZDS�$[HV

• 6RUW → 6RUW�$VFHQGLQJ��6RUW�'HVFHQGLQJ

• Calculate Result as →(Not Defined) / Summation/ Maximum / Minimum /Count All Values < > 0 /Average of All Values /Average of All Values < >0 / Standard Deviation /Variance / SuppressResult / First Value / LastValue

• Calculate Single ValuesAs → (Not Defined) /Normalization of Result /Normalization of TotalResult / Normalization ofQuery Total / Ranked List/ Ranked List (Olympic)

• &XPXODWHG



• %RRNPDUN

• ([SRUW�$V → &69�)LOH��06�([FHO��)LOH

• Properties [Seite 365]�(keyfigure)

• .H\�)LJXUH�'HILQLWLRQ




/LVW�RI�([FHSWLRQV

The List of Exceptions [Seite 195]�Web item displays the status of the exceptions for a stored queryview in the Web application, in the form of a table.

• For each exception, the status of the exception (active/not active) is also displayed. You canactivate or deactivate the exception by clicking on the symbol. Alternatively, you can click onthe description and choose $FWLYDWH or 'HDFWLYDWH in the context menu.

• To change the exception, click on the description of the exception and choose &KDQJH in thecontext menu. See Defining and Changing Exceptions [Seite 368].

• You can create a new exception by choosing &UHDWH. In the�'HILQLWLRQ�RI�DQ�([FHSWLRQ dialog box,you can describe your exception. See Defining and Changing Exceptions [Seite 368].

/LVW�RI�&RQGLWLRQV

The List of Conditions [Seite 196]�Web item displays the status of the conditions for a stored queryview in the Web application, in the form of a table. All the conditions that can be applied to the currentnavigation status for the query view are listed.

• With every condition that is displayed, the status of the condition is also displayed (active/notactive/not applicable/not used). You use the symbol to activate/deactivate the conditions.

• To change the condition, click on the description of the condition and choose &KDQJH in thecontext menu. See Defining and Changing Conditions [Seite 370].

• You can create a new condition by choosing &UHDWH. In the�'HILQLWLRQ�RI�D�&RQGLWLRQ dialog box,you can describe your condition. See Defining and Changing Conditions [Seite 370].

/DEHO

If you activate the CONTEXT_MENU attribute when you publish the Label [Seite 191] Web item, youget a context menu referring to the description of the characteristic or structural component that youselected (in the Web Application Designer). See 1DYLJDWLRQ�EORFN�→�&RQWH[W�PHQX�above.

'URSGRZQ�%R[��5DGLR�%XWWRQ�*URXS

These two Web items enable you to filter according to characteristic values in different, opticalconfigurations (a radio button group [Seite 182] or a dropdown box [Seite 180]). In the table, thedrilldown is displayed according to the value you selected.



6HOHFWLQJ�DQG�&KDQJLQJ�)LOWHU�9DOXHV

6HOHFWLQJ�)LOWHU�9DOXHV�IRU�&KDUDFWHULVWLFV�DQG�6WUXFWXUHV

The 6HOHFW�)LOWHU�9DOXH�IRU�� dialog box is divided into two areas:

• An upper area from which you can select single or a number of filter values

• A lower are in which you make more complex filter settings

You can make settings in each of the areas. The settings in both areas are used for your Webapplication.

6HOHFWLQJ�6LQJOH�)LOWHU�9DOXHV�RU�D�1XPEHU�RI�)LOWHU�9DOXHV

6HOHFWLQJ�)LOWHU�9DOXHV

You can choose from all possible values for the respective characteristic or structure in a query.Depending on the query setting, you are offered a key and/or identifier. You can select one or morevalues from this set of values.

• To select a single value, click on the value (the hand symbol shows you that it is a hyperlink). Thevalue is copied without your having to take any further actions.

• To select more than one value, mark the checkbox in front of the relevant values and choose7UDQVIHU. In this way you can also select a single value.

You can also sort the given values in increasing or decreasing order. To do so click on thehyperlink above the list of single values having the name of the characteristic or structure.The list will be sorted in increasing order for the first click and in decreasing order for thesecond click.

)LQGLQJ�)LOWHU�9DOXHV

As well as selecting filter values directly, you can also find them using a search. This search is usedon the selection list of the single values, that is the single values are restricted according to the searchcriteria.

1. Enter a search term.

2. Choose )LQG�

The list of single values displays the values corresponding to your search term.

3. To select one or more values proceed as described above.

You can also determine your selection of filter values by searching using attributes.

1. Choose 6HDUFK�E\�'LVSOD\�$WWULEXWHV�

An additional area is displayed displaying the attributes for a characteristic. You can hide thisarea by choosing 6HDUFK�E\�'LVSOD\�$WWULEXWHV�again.

2. Mark the checkbox for the corresponding attribute.

3. Enter the search term for the attribute.

4. Choose )LQG�

The set of filter values corresponding to the search criteria is displayed with the attributes yousearched for.

5. To select one or more values proceed as described above.

&RPSOH[�)LOWHU�6HWWLQJV

In the lower part of the dialog window, you can define a value area for filter values and exclude filtervalues or value areas for filter values.



To enter a value range:

1. Select the checkbox.

2. Select the operator in the dropdown box and enter the relevant values:

a. Choose [] for an interval and enter the lower limit of the interval in the first input field and theupper limit in the second input field.

b. Choose the corresponding operator for , � , !�and ! and enter the relevant value in the firstinput field.

Selecting the operator = corresponds to selecting a single value in the upper screen area.

3. Do not change the ,QFOXGH setting.

4. Choose 1HZ�5RZ to define further value areas.

5. Choose &RS\�

To exclude a value or a value range:

1. Perform steps 1 and 2 (see above).

2. To exclude a value or value range change the ,QFOXGH�setting to ([FOXGH.

3. Choose 1HZ�5RZ to exclude further values or value ranges.

4. Choose &RS\�

&KDQJLQJ�)LOWHU�9DOXHV

Filters must already have been set in your Web application.

• The 'HILQH�)LOWHU�9DOXHV�IRU��dialog window must have been enhanced by the area ([LVWLQJ�)LOWHU9DOXHV, in which the filter values that have already been set are maintained.

• The areas that have been described above are maintained under the area header 1HZ�)LOWHU9DOXHV, under the new area.

To change your filter settings proceed as follows:

• To delete existing filter settings deselect the checkbox in front of the filter setting in the ([LVWLQJILOWHU�YDOXHV area.

Filter values that are maintained in the ([LVWLQJ�)LOWHU�9DOXHV area are no longer available.

Settings for value areas and values to be excluded can be changed directly in the ([LVWLQJ)LOWHU�9DOXHV area.

• You make new filter settings in the 1HZ�)LOWHU�9DOXHV�area (see above).

To apply your changed filter settings to the Web application, choose 7UDQVIHU.




8VH

In the &XUUHQF\�7UDQVODWLRQ dialog box you can define the currency into which the key figures andstructure components of a query are going to be translated.

3URFHGXUH

You have the following options for changing the currency of structures and structure components:

• 'LVSOD\�RULJLQDO�FXUUHQF\ is the default setting. You can go back to the original currency from theone you changed it into here.

• To translate currency:

− Select a currency from the dropdown box for &XUUHQF\�7UDQVODWLRQ.

− Select a currency from the dropdown box for $FFRUGLQJ�WR�&XUUHQF\�7\SH.

− To take a WUDQVODWLRQ�W\SH�IURP�WKH�TXHU\�GHILQLWLRQ into consideration, mark the correspondingcheckbox.

− Choose &RS\�

5HVXOW

The key figures and structure elements are translated into the selected currency.



&KDQJLQJ�&KDUDFWHULVWLF�3URSHUWLHV

�3URFHGXUH

You have the option of changing a characteristic in the 'HILQH�3URSHUWLHV�IRU�� dialog box. Whichoptions are shown depends on the properties of the characteristic – characteristic with/withoutattributes, characteristic with/without hierarchies. Besides general settings that you can change foreach characteristic, you can display the additional options that are dependent on the properties of acharacteristic. The dialog box contains up to three additional areas:

• 'LVSOD\�WKH�)ROORZLQJ�$WWULEXWHV (Characteristics with Attributes)

• 3UHVHQWDWLRQ�+LHUDUFK\ (Characteristics with Hierarchies)

• 'LVSOD\�RI�+LHUDUFK\�1RGHV (Characteristics with Hierarchies)

Make your settings and choose 7UDQVIHU.

)RU�DOO�&KDUDFWHULVWLFV

• Under 'LVSOD\�you can determine the form in which you want your characteristic presented:

− .H\�DQG�1DPH

− 1DPH

− .H\

− 1DPH�DQG�.H\

− /RQJ�1DPH

− 0LGGOH�1DPH

• Under 6RUW�$FFRUGLQJ�WR��you determine how you want to sort.

− .H\

− 1DPH

− 6HOHFWLRQ

For characteristics with attributes, the following options are offered in the second dropdownbox:

− $WWULEXWH�.H\

− $WWULEXWH�7H[W

• Choose $VFHQGLQJ or 'HVFHQGLQJ for the 6RUW�GLUHFWLRQ.

• Under +LGH�UHVXOW�URZV you can determine whether the results rows are QHYHU, DOZD\V, orFRQGLWLRQDOO\�KLGGHQ.

'LVSOD\�WKH�)ROORZLQJ�$WWULEXWHV

• In order to display a specific attribute, select the checkbox in front of the attribute concerned.

• In order to determine the form in which the attribute is displayed, choose


− 1DPH

− .H\


− /RQJ�1DPH

− 0LGGOH�1DPH



• In order to determine the position of each attribute when you select several of them, select therespective 3RVLWLRQ in the dropdown box.

3UHVHQWDWLRQ�+LHUDUFK\

• Select $FWLYH�and select the name of the hierarchy that is to be displayed from the dropdown box

• In order to determine to which hierarchy level it should drilldown, select the ([SDQVLRQ�OHYHO in thedropdown box.

'LVSOD\LQJ�+LHUDUFK\�1RGHV

To determine the form in which the hierarchy nodes are displayed for the characteristic in question, inthe dropdown box for 7H[W�1RGHV��choose:


− 1DPH

− .H\


− /RQJ�1DPH

− 0LGGOH�1DPH



&KDQJLQJ�.H\�)LJXUH�3URSHUWLHV

3URFHGXUH

In the dialog box 'HILQH�3URSHUWLHV�IRU��, the options for changing a key figure are separated intothree areas:

• 1XPEHU�GLVSOD\

• 6RUWLQJ

• &DOFXODWLRQV


In order to display the column with the highlighted key figures concerned, select +LJKOLJKW.

How these highlighted items appear in the Web application depends on the definition ofthe affected classes in the Style Sheet.

1XPEHU�GLVSOD\

In order to determine the 6FDOLQJ�)DFWRU, select the affected factor from the dropdown box.

If you have determined the scaling factor to be 1000, this means that the value 12345 ITLis displayed as 12 ITL.

You can set the display of the scaling factor in Query Properties [Seite 366].

In order to determine the 1XPEHU�RI�'HFLPDO�3ODFHV, select the affected number from the dropdownbox.

6RUWLQJ

You have the following options for sorting the values of a key figure:

• /HDYH�6RUWLQJ

• $VFHQGLQJ�2UGHU

• 'HVFHQGLQJ�2UGHU

&DOFXODWLRQV

• In order to determine which values are to be calculated as a result, select the affected entry fromthe dropdown box for &DOFXODWH�5HVXOWV.

• In order to determine which values are to be calculated as single values, select the affected entryfrom the dropdown box for &DOFXODWH�6LQJOH�9DOXHV.

• In order to display the individual values cumulatively, select &XPXODWH.

• To transfer the affected single values for the individual values to the results, choose $OVR�$SSO\�WR5HVXOWV�



&KDQJLQJ�4XHU\�3URSHUWLHV

3URFHGXUH

In the /RFDO�3URSHUWLHV�RI�D�4XHU\ dialog box, you find the options for changing a query, divided intothree areas. In addition, a fourth, informational area is displayed.

• 'DWD�6WDJLQJ

• 'LVSOD\�2SWLRQV

• 'LVSOD\�IURP

• /DVW�&KDQJHG


'DWD�6WDJLQJ

In 'DWD�6WDJLQJ, two basic options that influence the query output are combined.

• You decide between a display in the 0XOWL�GLPHQVLRQDO�9LHZ and the 7DEXODU�9LHZ�

• In the standard, 0XOWL�'LPHQVLRQDO�9LHZ, you can make further settings.

− You can place characteristics that are split over several columns in one column in a hierarchy.To do this, select 'LVSOD\�&ROXPQV�+LHUDUFKLFDOO\��and specify in the dropdown box the nodeto which you want to drill down this hierarchy.

− You can place characteristics that are split over several rows in one row in a hierarchy. To dothis, select 'LVSOD\�5RZV�+LHUDUFKLFDOO\��and specify in the dropdown box the node to whichyou want to drill down this hierarchy.

'LVSOD\�2SWLRQV

There are several options in the 'LVSOD\�2SWLRQV�area:

• Under 5HVXOW�3RVLWLRQ, you determine where you want to display the results in tables.

− %RWWRP�ULJKW

− 7RS�OHIW

− %RWWRP�OHIW

− 7RS�ULJKW

• Under ��6LJQV�'LVSOD\, you choose how the minus sign is displayed.

− In front of the value – for example, �� is displayed

− Behind the value – for example, �� is displayed

− In parentheses – for example, ��is displayed

• Choose 6XSSUHVV�=HURHV to hide those rows or columns in which every cell contains the valuezero.

'LVSOD\�IURP

• Select 6FDOLQJ�)DFWRU to display the scaling factor.

The scaling factors are shown in a separate cell above the key figures column. You can setthe scaling factor in Key Figure Properties [Seite 365].

• Select 'RFXPHQWV�/LQNV to display the document links.

You can call up additional information for certain cells. Cells for which additional informationexists have the icon . By clicking on this icon, you can display the additional information in asecond browser window.



• Select 'UDJ�DQG�5HODWH�/LQNV�to display the drag and relate links.

Objects with which you can use drag and relate are indicated by the icon in the Webapplication.

/DVW�&KDQJHG

The information for the last change made to the query is displayed in this area:

• 2ZQHU

• /DVW�&KDQJHG�%\�

• 'DWH

• 7LPH



'HILQLQJ�DQG�&KDQJLQJ�([FHSWLRQV

'HILQLQJ�([FHSWLRQV

1. Specify a description for the exception in the 'HVFULSWLRQ field.

2. If you want to just define the exception, and do not want to execute it actively in the Webapplication, remove the check from the $FWLYH checkbox that is there by default.

3. In the (YDOXDWLRQ�IRU field, choose the structure elements, for which you want to create theexception.

4. Define the variant of the exception in the 9DOXH�RI�WKH�([FHSWLRQ area by creating one row for eachalert level.

a. Select the checkbox.

b. Select an operator from the dropdown box.

For the following operators use both input fields for entering a "from" and "to" value:

[ ] for entering values described within an interval

] [ for entering values outside an interval

For the remaining settings, enter the value in the first input field:

c. In the second dropdown box, enter the required priority of the exception as the alert level. Thepriority is displayed in the Web application with the appropriate background color for the tablecell. You can use a total of nine colors from dark green for good 1 to yellow for critical to darkred for bad 3.

The colors refer to the colors used in SAP’s Cascading Style Sheets.

d. With 1HZ�URZ you can show further rows if you need more than the three standard input rows.

5. Make your settings in &HOO�UHVWULFWLRQV to define the data cells of the report for which the exceptionshould be evaluated. One row is offered for each characteristic.

All the characteristics of a query used in the rows, columns or free characteristics can beused as characteristics.

a. Select an operator from the dropdown box.

b. Enter a value in the input field (only for operator (TXDO��6LQJOH�YDOXH as characteristic variantand for operator +LHUDUFK\�OHYHO as number).

You have the following operators:

2SHUDWRUV 0HDQLQJ

$OO The cell context is not restricted. The exceptionis valid for every drilldown status of thecharacteristic.

(TXDO��6LQJOH�YDOXH The exception is valid for only one particularvalue of the characteristic (“spare parts” under“product group”, for example). Specify thecharacteristic value you want to use in externalnon-compounded display format or call the

value help with to choose a characteristicvalue.



+LHUDUFK\�OHYHO The exception is valid only for a particularhierarchy level of the characteristic. Specify thehierarchy level you want to use as a number inthe input field.

In the hierarchy for thecharacteristic /RFDWLRQ, &RXQWU\ isthe second hierarchy level(FRQWLQHQW�±�FRXQWU\�±�VWDWH�±ORFDWLRQ) If you want the exceptionto be valid only for the hierarchylevel &RXQWU\, put the number 2into the 9DOXH field. If you want theexception to be valid only for thehierarchy level 6WDWH, put thenumber 3 into the 9DOXH field,because 6WDWH is the thirdhierarchy level.

5HVXOWV�RQO\ The exception is valid only for aggregatedvalues of the characteristic.

(YHU\WKLQJ�H[FHSW�UHVXOWV The exception applies to all values of thecharacteristic apart from aggregated values.

6. Choose &RS\�

&KDQJLQJ�6HWWLQJV�RI�DQ�([FHSWLRQ

1. In the Web item /LVW�RI�([FHSWLRQV click on an exception and select entry &KDQJH in the contextmenu. The 'HILQLWLRQ�RI�DQ�([FHSWLRQ dialog box appears.

2. Change the settings of your exception.

You can delete this setting by removing the check from the checkbox of a row in the9DOXHV�RI�WKH�([FHSWLRQ area. This row will no longer appear when the 'HILQLWLRQ�RI�DQ([FHSWLRQ dialog box is called again.

3. Choose &RS\� Your changes are copied.

5HVXOW

You have defined or changed an exception. The exception is evaluated in the Web application, that isthe cells in the table that are affected by the exception are displayed with the appropriate colorshading.

'HOHWLQJ�([FHSWLRQV

1. In the Web item /LVW�RI�([FHSWLRQV click on an exception and select entry 'HOHWH in the contextmenu.

2. The exception is deleted.



'HILQLQJ�DQG�&KDQJLQJ�&RQGLWLRQV

'HILQLQJ�&RQGLWLRQV

1. Specify a description for the condition in the 'HVFULSWLRQ field.

2. If you want to just define the condition, and do not want to execute it in the Web application,remove the check from the $FWLYH checkbox that is there by default.

3. You now have the following options:

− Choose $OO�&KDUDFWHULVWLFV�LQ�WKH�'ULOOGRZQ if you want to evaluate the individual conditions forall of the characteristics in the drilldown, independently of one another.

The condition row is 6DOHV�7RS�)LYH.

If the &XVWRPHU characteristic is the only one in the drilldown, the top 5 customers as faras sales are concerned are displayed because of the condition. If the 3URGXFWcharacteristic is the only one in the drilldown, the top five products with regards to salesare displayed. Additionally, if &XVWRPHU�and 3URGXFW are in the drilldown, the top fivecustomers and the top five products with regards to sales are displayed, as well as all 25combinations of the two.

− Choose 6HOHFWHG�&KDUDFWHULVWLFV�2QO\ and the relevant characteristic if you want to evaluatethe individual condition(s) only when this characteristic is in the drilldown.


You have selected &XVWRPHU as the only characteristic. The condition is only evaluated if&XVWRPHU�is in the drilldown. Only the top five customers with their sales are displayed.

− Choose 6HOHFWHG�&KDUDFWHULVWLFV�2QO\�and several characteristics if you want to evaluate theindividual condition(s) for combinations of characteristics.


You have selected the &XVWRPHU�and 3URGXFW characteristics. The condition is onlyevaluated if &XVWRPHU�and 3URGXFW are in the drilldown at the same time. The option $OO&KDUDFWHULVWLFV�LQ�'ULOOGRZQ displays the top five customer-product combinations withsales, meaning only five rows instead of 25 (see above).

4. Specify the values that satisfy the condition in the area /LVW�RI�6LQJOH�&RQGLWLRQV. A condition row isalways derived from the determination of a key figure or structure used in the query, an operator,and a value that matches the operator.

a. Select the checkbox.

b. In the dropdown box select the key figure or structure.

c. Select the operator from the second dropdown box.

For the following operators use both input fields for entering a "from" and "to" value:

− [ ] for entering values described within an interval

− ] [ for entering values outside an interval

For the remaining settings, enter the value in the first input field:

You have three input rows by default. You can show further rows with 1HZ�5RZ.

5. Choose &RS\�



&KDQJLQJ�&RQGLWLRQV

1. In the Web item /LVW�RI�&RQGLWLRQV click on a condition and select entry &KDQJH in the contextmenu. The 'HILQLWLRQ�RI�D�&RQGLWLRQ dialog box appears.

2. Change the settings of your condition.

You can delete this setting by removing the check from the checkbox of a row in the /LVWRI�6LQJOH�&RQGLWLRQV area. This row will no longer appear when the 'HILQLWLRQ�RI�D&RQGLWLRQ dialog box is called again.

3. Choose &RS\� Your changes are copied.

5HVXOW

You have defined or changed a condition for a query. The condition is evaluated in the Webapplication. Only those objects are displayed which fulfill the defined conditions.

'HOHWLQJ�&RQGLWLRQV

1. In the Web item /LVW�RI�&RQGLWLRQV� click on a condition and select 'HOHWH from the context menu.

2. The condition is deleted.



8VLQJ�9DULDEOHV�LQ�:HE�$SSOLFDWLRQV

8VH

Using variables [Seite 42] allows you to wait until the Web application is actually displayed in the Webbrowser before you fill individual parts of the query or the entire query with values. Variables act asplaceholders for characteristic values, hierarchies, hierarchy nodes, texts, and formula elements, andcan be processed in many different ways. There are variables with automatic substitution, substitutionfrom authorizations, or variables that are ready for input.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The query, on which the Web application is based, must contain variables.

6HWWLQJV�LQ�WKH�:HE�$SSOLFDWLRQ�'HVLJQHU

You can make settings for variables and the variable screen in the BEx Web Application Designer.Select the template concerned from the dropdown box in the header of the 3URSHUWLHV�window. On the:HE�,WHPV�tabstrip, under *HQHUDO you have the following options:

• $OZD\V�'LVSOD\�9DULDEOH�6FUHHQ

If $OZD\V�'LVSOD\�9DULDEOH�6FUHHQ�is not selected, the variable screen is only displayed whenthe mandatory variables are not filled. By selecting the $OZD\V�'LVSOD\�9DULDEOH�6FUHHQ, thevariable screen is displayed at all times.

• 5HVHW�9DULDEOH�9DOXHV�WR�'HIDXOW�9DOXHV

• 'LVSOD\�6DPH�9DULDEOHV�2QO\�2QFH

This ensures that the same variables for different queries are displayed only once.

See Determining Properties of a Web Template [Seite 74].

)XQFWLRQV�RI�WKH�9DULDEOH�6FUHHQ�LQ�WKH�:HE�$SSOLFDWLRQ

See Variable Screen [Seite 373].

6HH�DOVR�

Calling up the Variable Screen [Seite 242]

Default Variables for Web Applications [Seite 243]



9DULDEOH�6FUHHQV

8VH

You can fill variables - parameters of a query - with values when the Web application is displayed inthe Web browser using the variable screen. You can assign the following types values in the variablescreen:

• Variable types for characteristic values

A characteristic value variable is the placeholder for either a single value, an interval, or a setof selection options.

• Variables for hierarchy nodes

You can only enter hierarchy nodes as single values.

See Using Variables [Seite 42].

You can personalize the values for individual components or for the entire Web application. Thismeans that you assign a certain value to a variable. The variable has this value until you cancel thepersonalization. See Personalizing Variables [Seite 375].

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

At least one of the queries on which the Web application is based must contain variables.

3URFHGXUH

(QWHULQJ�9DOXHV�IRU�9DULDEOHV

In the 9DULDEOHV window, you can give values to the variables. If your Web application contains morethan one query, the variables screen is divided into several areas with one area for each query. Withinthese areas the input options for the variables depend on the variable type.

(QWHULQJ�&KDUDFWHULVWLF�9DOXH�9DULDEOHV�

• To enter a single value, enter the value in the input field following the characteristic ID. To entermore than one single value, choose 1HZ�5RZ. Another row for entering a single value isdisplayed.

• To enter an interval, enter the lower limit of the interval in the first input field after the characteristicID and the upper limit of the interval in the second input field.

• When entering a selection option you have various options for assigning a variable values:

− Define a single value

a. From the dropdown box select the operator =, and enter the value in the first input field. Thiscorresponds to entering a single value (see below).

b. Do not change the LQFOXGH setting.

c. To enter more than one single value, choose 1HZ�5RZ. A new input row appears.

− Define a value range

a. In the dropdown box choose the operator [] to define an interval and enter the lower limit of theinterval in the first input field and the upper limit of the interval in the second input field.

b. Alternatively you can select one of the operators �, � , !, ! �from the dropdown box andenter the upper or lower limit of the value range in the first input field.

c. Do not change the ,QFOXGH setting.

d. To enter more than one value range choose 1HZ�5RZ. A new input row appears.

− Exclude single values and value ranges

a. Describe the single value or value range (see above)



b. Change the LQFOXGH setting to H[FOXGH in the dropdown box.

c. To exclude more than one single value or value range choose 1HZ�5RZ. A new input rowappears.

Mandatory variables are marked with (*).

Choose to select the values using the value help.

(QWHULQJ�9DULDEOHV�IRU�+LHUDUFK\�1RGHV�

• To assign values to the variables for hierarchy nodes you must make your entry using the value

help ( ). Select a hierarchy node in the 9DOXH�+HOS dialog.

For hierarchy nodes entries must be forced using the value help because values that areentered manually might not be unique.

To check values that were entered manually for consistency, choose &KHFN.

To display the Web report with the entered variable values choose ([HFXWH.

By clicking on the pushbuttons $OO�9DULDEOHV�and )UHH�9DULDEOHV, you change the view from displayingall variables to displayed only the non-personalized variables. See Personalizing Variables [Seite 375].



3HUVRQDOL]LQJ�9DULDEOHV

8VH

You can personalize single variables or all variables in a Web application. This means that you assignthe variables to a value permanently or until you remove the personalization. Personalization meansthat you do not always have to make the settings for a variable, that is your personal settings,manually over and over again.

3URFHGXUH

3HUVRQDOL]LQJ�D�9DULDEOH

The icon tells you that your variable has not been personalized.

1. Assign a value to the variable. See Variables Screen [Seite 373].

2. To personalize a variable, click on the icon and choose 3HUVRQDOL]H�

3. The system removes the personalized variable from the variables screen.

• To display the personalized variables and their values, choose $OO�9DULDEOHV� The personalizedvariables are displayed. The icon shows that the variable has been personalized.

• To hide the personalized variables again, choose )UHH�9DULDEOHV� Only those variables that are notpersonalized are now displayed.

The option of hiding personalized variables relates to the basic idea of personalization:Personalized variables have a permanently defined value. Your attention is directed at thefree variables that have not been personalized.

'HOHWLQJ�3HUVRQDOL]DWLRQV

The icon tells you that your variable has been personalized.

1. To remove the personalization, click on the icon and choose 'HOHWH�3HUVRQDOL]DWLRQ�

2. The icon shows that the variable is no longer personalized.

If you want to set another value as the personalized value in the variables screen,overwrite the relevant value in the input field. You do not have to delete thepersonalization in this case.

3HUVRQDOL]LQJ�7HPSODWHV

You can also personalize templates. This means that all of your variable assignments for the templateare saved as you personal setting. This assignment is used until you remove the personalization.

3HUVRQDOL]LQJ�WKH�7HPSODWH

1. The template has not yet been personalized. The icon in the heading of the variables screenshows you this. In this screen, you personalize the entire template.

2. After you have given values to your variable, click on the icon and from the context menu,choose 3HUVRQDOL]H�

3. The icon shows that your template has been personalized.

'HOHWLQJ�WKH�3HUVRQDOL]DWLRQ�RI�WKH�7HPSODWH

1. The template has been personalized the template. The icon in the heading of the variablesscreen shows you this.



2. Click on the icon and from the context menu, choose 'HOHWH�3HUVRQDOL]DWLRQ�

3. The icon shows that the personalization of your template has been removed.



8VLQJ�'RFXPHQWV�LQ�:HE�$SSOLFDWLRQV

8VH

You can comment and enhance the structured business data that you provide for example in a tablewith unstructured information such as texts, diagrams and graphics with the Web items 6LQJOHGRFXPHQW and /LVW�RI�GRFXPHQWV.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You created documents [Extern] in the Administrator Workbench or in the master data maintenancescreen and inserted the Web item single document [Seite 220] or list of documents [Seite 221] in theWeb template when you published the Web application in the BEx Web Application Designer.

)XQFWLRQV

6LQJOH�'RFXPHQW

For example you can add several documents such as driving instructions and a picture of the localoffice for each value of a characteristic, such as %XVLQHVV�SDUWQHU. Depending on what setting youmade for the INPLACE attribute in the Web Application Designer, the document is displayed either inthe Web application (“X”) or in its own window (“ ”).

/LVW�RI�'RFXPHQWV

The /LVW�RI�'RFXPHQWV�allows you to call up or create context sensitive information for the transactiondata used in the Web browser. For more detailed information about context and further functions of theWeb item, see List of Documents [Seite 221]. For more information about creating new documents outof the list of documents, see Creating New Documents [Seite 378]



&UHDWLQJ�1HZ�'RFXPHQWV

8VH

In the Web application document display, you can create new documents for transaction data using2WKHU�)XQFWLRQV.

You can enter only text here. This function is primarily suitable for making comments andremarks about the data.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You reach the dialog box for creating new documents as follows:

• The Web application contains the Web item /LVW�RI�'RFXPHQWV. You restrict the validity range ofthe new document in the context of the Web item and select )XUWKHU�)XQFWLRQV → &UHDWH�1HZ'RFXPHQW.

• In the context menu of an InfoObject choose *RWR → 'LVSOD\�GRFXPHQWV or 'RFXPHQWV�IRU1DYLJDWLRQ�6WDWXV. The list of documents for this navigation status is displayed in a separatebrowser window. Choose )XUWKHU�)XQFWLRQV → &UHDWH�1HZ�'RFXPHQW.

3URFHGXUH

1. Give the new document a title.

This title is also the text of the hyperlink to the document and should therefore bedescriptive and meaningful.

2. The system automatically creates a unique key for the new document. This key is displayed in the1DPH field. You can change the name, but this name must be unique in all the documents of theclass (transaction data, metadata, master data).

3. You can define whether the document

a. is valid only for the current query

b. is valid only for the current InfoProvider

c. is valid for all InfoProviders in BW that contain the InfoObjects for which you already limitedthe document when you created it (neither checkbox is marked).

4. Enter the text of the document in the &RQWHQW field. (You can also enter HTML.)

5. Choose 6DYH�

6. Choose &ORVH�DQG�%DFN.

5HVXOW

You have created a new document. The Web application is automatically refreshed and the title of thedocument is displayed as a hyperlink in the list of documents.



1DYLJDWLQJ�LQ�0DSV

8VH

Once you have attached a map to your Web application using the BEx Web Application Designer, youcan analyze your business data geographically. There are several navigation options available within amap on the context menu, as well as various interactive options for other items of your Webapplication. These all help to simplify your geographical analysis.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You have created a Web application containing a map in the BEx Web Application Designer.

At least one more Web item (for example, a table) has to be attached for you to be able touse the interactive functions. You can control this item using the map.

To use the geographical filter functions, executed by clicking on the map renderer object,the parameters IMAGEMAP_PATTERN and INFLUENCED_DP_X have to be created inthe HTML code for the Web template (see Example of Interaction in Maps [Seite 380]).

)XQFWLRQV

The context menu for maps contains all the standard menu entries (see Navigation and NavigationFunctions [Seite 417]). The following two functions differ from those in the standard menu and providespecial functions for use with maps:

&RQWH[W�0HQX�(QWU\ 9DOXHV )XQFWLRQ

Drilldown All geo-relevant characteristicsof the current query that arenot already set as filters ordrilldowns.

Drills down on thecharacteristic that you clickedon in the map by anothercharacteristic.

Filter and drilldown accordingto ...

All geo-relevant characteristicsof the current query that arenot already set as filters ordrilldowns.

Sets a filter and drills down atthe same time on thecharacteristic that you clickedon in the map by anothercharacteristic.

$FWLYLWLHV

You can call up all navigation functions from the context menu. You open this menu by clicking in themap with the left mouse button.

You execute the control functions for other elements of your Web application by simply left-clicking themouse on the map renderer object.

([DPSOH

See Example of Interaction in Maps [Seite 380]



([DPSOH�RI�,QWHUDFWLRQ�LQ�0DSV

8VH

This example shows you how to use a map with the card layer attribute &RPPDQG�IRU�,QWHUDFWLRQ�inorder to analyze business data using geographic facts.

6FHQDULR

You want to analyze your business data in table form quickly and without complications based on ageographic representation.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

The template of your Web application contains a map and a table containing your business data.

The following lines must be adjusted correctly to your individual system environment in the HTML codeof the Web template.

Example:

<param name=’IMAGEMAP_PATTERN’ value=’FILTER_VAL’>

<param name=’INFLUENCED_DP_1’ value=’Revenue Cockpit’>

3URFHGXUH

1. Open your Web application in a browser.

2. Navigate in the map using the geographic function bar and select a representation that gives youan overview of the geographic facts about your query.

3. If during your analysis you find a city, region or country whose data you want to study more closelyin tabular form, for example because you suspect that it has unused market potential, click on therelevant object of the map renderer (bar chart, symbol, pie chart, color shading) in the map.

5HVXOW

Based on the geographic information, only the relevant values for the city, region or country aredisplayed in the table of data. In this way you can easily filter data based on geographic information.



%([�0RELOH�,QWHOOLJHQFH

3XUSRVH

With the help of BEx Mobile Intelligence, you can access your Web applications on the move. Youneed one of the following devices:

• WAP -enabled mobile telephone with WAP browser

• PDA (Personal Digital Assistant) with Microsoft Windows CE 3.0 Operating System and PocketInternet Explorer

Handheld devices, such as Palm Pilots, are also supported. The type of support dependson which browser is installed for the system.

The :LUHOHVV�$SSOLFDWLRQ�3URWRFRO��:$3� is used as the basis for data transfer with WAP-enableddevices and the +\SHUWH[W�7UDQVIHU�3URWRFRO��+773� with PDAs. The :LUHOHVV�0DUNXS�/DQJXDJH�:0/� for WAP-enabled devices and the Hypertext Markup Language (+70/ without stylesheets andwith restricted Java Script) for PDAs form the descriptive language basis.

You can either retrieve your Web application online (for which you need a connection to the BW 3.0Web Application Server) or use them in the form of static, pre-defined HTML pages offline (without aconnection). The preliminary calculation takes places with the help of the Reporting Agent.

An additional function of Mobile Intelligence is the ability to send a message using SMS to a mobileterminal as soon as a defined exception occurs in the mobile application. By doing this, you point outall the situations where you should pay close attention.

3URFHVV

0RELOH�,QWHOOLJHQFH�ZLWK�:$3

��

� �� !��

" ��$#%��'&�()�+*" ��,#%��'&+()��*

- " .0/�1"324- ��5��

�4&�6870&�6

- " .�/!1"924- ��!��

�4&�687:&�6

;�<�<0=?>�A@�BC��DFE�=+G!DF<0=?>�A@�BC��

>�HCIJ>0@�BA��

>�HCIFKML��NOCPQR L��CS�L�S!LCT%U+��

DJVOW

�0X�� QR U+

;0<�<:=?>�A@:B��A�

;�<:VOW

1. You connect to your mobile terminal with a WAP service provider by using your mobile terminal(for example, a WAP compatible mobile telephone). When you do this, you can use a WAPGateway or WAP server, which will enable you to transfer contents from the Internet to the mobileterminal.

2. In addition, the WAP gateway reaches the requested URL in the BW 3.0 Web Application Server.



3. A special service is specified in the requested URL (EZZDS) that indicates to the ITS, that WML isrequested instead of HTML. The ITS now calls up the BW system and requests the query data.

4. The data is transferred in raw form and converted into WML on the Web Application Server.

5. The result is returned to the WAP Gateway, which now converts the WML text data into acompressed bytecode and sends it to the mobile terminal.

By compressing the data, the transfer time is reduced.

0RELOH�,QWHOOLJHQFH�ZLWK�+773

See Creating Web Applications with the BEx Web Application Designer [Seite 69].

<RX�FDQ�ILQG�DGGLWLRQ�LQIRUPDWLRQ�LQ�WKH�IROORZLQJ�VHFWLRQV�

Creating Mobile Applications [Seite 383]

Alert Scenario [Seite 386]

Offline-Scenario [Seite 387]



&UHDWLQJ�0RELOH�$SSOLFDWLRQV

8VH

You want to create an application that you can later call up on a mobile device (for example, a WAP-enabled mobile telephone or PDA). This kind of application is called a mobile application.

3URFHGXUH

Basically, a mobile application is created in the same way in the BEx Web Application Designer as aWeb application (see Creating Web Applications with the BEx Web Application Designer [Seite 69] ).

However, there are restrictions on the various Web items that are supported by mobile devices. SeeSupported Web Items [Seite 384] to find out which Web items are supported by which devices.

You should also take into account when you create the application that the display options of somedevices are severely limited by the size of the display and also by their ability to display colors.

5HVXOW

A mobile application created in the Web Application Designer is called up using the correspondingURL, just like a Web application.

The BW 3.0 Web Application Server automatically recognizes what kind of mobile device is beingused to call up the mobile application (WAP device or PDA). Rendering is carried out according to theproperties of the device used (WML for WAP-enabled devices, HTML without stylesheets and withrestricted JavaScript for PDAs).



6XSSRUWHG�:HE�,WHPV

'HILQLWLRQ

When you create a mobile application, you create a template in the BEx Web Application Designer towhich you link various Web items.

Not all of the Web items available in the Web Application Designer are supported becauseof the various display options for the mobile end devices currently on the market. Thedisplay and operation of some of the Web items are also specially adapted to the enddevice.

:HE�,WHPV�LQ�3'$V

All Web items are supported in PDAs (Personal Digital Assistants).

The Web items are displayed exactly as in the Web browser although PDAs do not supportstylesheets. The stylesheet information is analyzed by the server and transferred to the browser of theend device as pure HTML.

When you navigate in the mobile application for PDAs, the context menu is displayed on a separatepage. The 'RZQORDG�7R�([FHO and 5HSRUW�5HSRUW�,QWHUIDFH functions are not available in the mobileapplication.

:HE�,WHPV�LQ�:$3�(QDEOHG�(QG�'HYLFHV

The following Web items are supported in WAP-enabled end devices:

:HE�,WHP 3UHVHQWDWLRQ�1DYLJDWLRQ�)XQFWLRQ

Table Presentation:

• Table is displayed in rows

• Information about the header line isbuffered and displayed in each new row.

Navigation:

• If the table is too large for the devicestorage, it is automatically distributed on anumber of pages. You can scroll betweenthese pages.

• Hierarchy nodes can be expanded andcollapsed.

• Exceptions are displayed with text symbols(+++, +/-, ---).

• A new row is marked by a separator (---------)

Generic Navigation Block Function:

• Drilldown on columns/rows or removedrilldown

• Select filter value for a characteristic



Charts Presentation:

• All chart types are possible.

• The size of a chart is adjustedautomatically to the display of the device.

You must select meaningful chartsettings in the Web ApplicationDesigner (for example hide legend,set background color to white, onlyuse black-and-white pattern as fillcolors).

Alert Monitor Function:

• Displays a list of Web Applications, inwhich an exception was detected in theReporting Agent.

Navigation:

• Link to the corresponding Web applications

List of Exceptions Function:

• Exceptions can be activated anddeactivated.

List of Conditions Function:

• Conditions can be activated anddeactivated.

Filters Function:

• Filters can be activated and deactivated.

Dropdown Box / Radio Button Group Presentation:

• Is displayed as a link list

Text Elements

Role Menu Presentation:

• Web applications, queries and externallinks of the selected role are displayed inthe role menu.

Navigation:

• You can branch to the subfolder.

• Menu entries are used as jumps to theexisting Web applications.

• You can return to the role menu.

• The Web application with role menu of a"mobile role" can be used with a bookmarkin the WAP device as the start page for themobile application .



$OHUW�6FHQDULR

'HILQLWLRQ

The�$OHUW�6FHQDULR is a function that sends an automatic SMS message to a mobile end device assoon as an exception occurs.

8VH

If you included an exception in your mobile application, you can have an SMS sent to your mobile enddevice as soon as the exception occurs using the Web item $OHUW�0RQLWRU. The SMS is created by theReporting Agent. The $OHUW�0RQLWRU Web item can be restricted to the current user and to a certainnumber of alerts.

You can access the relevant Web application with your WAP device.

6HH�DOVR�

Alert Monitor [Seite 197]



2IIOLQH�6FHQDULR

'HILQLWLRQ

The 2IIOLQH�VFHQDULR is a function that helps you to create a mobile application at a predefined time sothat it can be downloaded offline at a later time from a mobile end device.

8VH

You can determine when your mobile application should be generated so that you can access it offlinelater.

The Reporting Agent computes the HTML pages. The pages are downloaded with WAP-enableddevices using WebDav and WebFolder, for PDAs with ActiveSync.



$QDO\VLV��5HSRUWLQJ��%([�$QDO\]HU

8VH

The Business Explorer Analyzer (BEx Analyzer) is the analysis and reporting tool of the BusinessExplorer that is embedded in Microsoft Excel.

)XQFWLRQV

You can call up the BEx Query Designer in the BEx Analyzer, in order to define queries.Subsequently, you can analyze the selected InfoProvider data by navigation to the query created inthe Query Designer and create different query views of the data. You can add the different queryviews for a query or for different queries to a work book and save them there. You can save theworkbook in your favorites or in your role on the BW Server. You can also save the workbook locallyon your computer.

You can start queries in a standard view (with a standard Web template set up in the customizingimplementation guide) in the Web browser and forward the URL or continue to navigate on the Web.Similarly, you can export the Web query to MS Excel 2000.

Overview of the Functional Area of the BEx Analyzer:

• %([�WRROEDU

You access the functions of the BEx Analyzer from the BEx toolbar, which takes you to theBEx Open dialog box where you can open existing queries, or to the BEx Query Designerwhere you can create new queries or change existing queries.

See also:

BEx Toolbar Functions [Seite 390]

• (YDOXDWLQJ�4XHU\�'DWD

The BEx Analyzer offers convenient functions for evaluating and presenting InfoProvider datainteractively. In the BEx Analyzer, you can add queries to workbooks, navigate within themand refresh the data. You can also process the queries further in Microsoft Excel or displaythem in the Web browser in a default view.

Navigation of a query allows you, for example, to filter characteristics on a single value,drilldown on all values for a characteristic, regroup characteristics and key figures in the rowsand columns of the results area, or hide key figures. Navigation results in different views of theInfoProvider data. In addition, a range of further functions is available which allow you to edit aquery interactively (for example, sorting, cumulated output, among others). In addition, youcan use the editing functions in Microsoft Excel in order to set up individual format templates,to print results areas, or to create graphics.

See also:


• 4XHULHV�LQ�:RUNERRNV

Queries are inserted into workbooks so you can display them. When you insert a query, a linkis made between the cell areas of the worksheet with the data of the InfoProvider upon whichthe query is based. A link therefore exists between the Business Explorer and the BusinessInformation Warehouse Server (BW Server).

When inserting a query into the workbook, a VBA routine is automatically generated in theworkbook. You can also connect the Business Explorer with your own VBA programs (VisualBasic for Applications).

You can create workbook templates, into which you can insert your queries. Workbooktemplates can contain pre-determined items for the area of the query, formatting settings,logos, VBA macros, and so on.

See also:

Queries in Workbooks [Seite 458]



$FWLYLWLHV

To start the BEx Analyzer, choose 6WDUW�→ 3URJUDPV�→ 6$3�)URQWHQG�%XVLQHVV�,QIRUPDWLRQ:DUHKRXVH�→ 6$3�%XVLQHVV�([SORUHU�$QDO\]HU�

You can also access the BEx Analyzer via 6$3�(DV\�$FFHVV�→�6$3�%XVLQHVV�,QIRUPDWLRQ

:DUHKRXVH�→�6$3�0HQX�→�%XVLQHVV�([SORUHU�→$QDO\]HU�or in the Business Explorer Browser usingthe %XVLQHVV�([SORUHU�$QDO\]HU�symbol in the menu bar.



%([�7RROEDU�)XQFWLRQV

8VH

As you start the Business Explorer Analyzer, the toolbar appears in Microsoft Excel. It allows you toaccess all the important functions for navigating and analyzing the query data.

The BEx toolbar functions are also in the Microsoft Excel main menu under 6$3�%XVLQHVV([SORUHU�

)XQFWLRQV

6DYH *RWR 7RROV

%DFN )RUPDWWLQJ +HOS

2SHQ &KDQJH�4XHU\�9LHZ /D\RXW

5HIUHVK�4XHU\ 2/$3�)XQFWLRQV

IRU�$FWLYH�&HOOV

6HWWLQJV

2SHQLQJ

This symbol takes you to the BEx Open dialog. You can open the following object types:

• Workbooks

• Queries

• Saved query views

• Exceptions

Depending on the type of object that you have selected, the BEx Open dialog appears differently withthe specified functions.

6HH�DOVR�

Opening [Seite 394]

6DYLQJ

With the 6DYH function on the BEx toolbar you can:

• Save the workbook as a new workbook

• Save the workbook as an existing workbook

• Change the title of the workbook

• Save the query view as a jump target

• Save the query view globally

If you save the workbook, then the query is not detached. You can call the workbook at a later date,create a connection to the Business Information Warehouse Server, and refresh the queries containedin the workbook.

6HH�DOVR�



Saving [Seite 395]

5HIUHVKLQJ�4XHULHV

Refreshing the query means to request the current valid data from the BW Server. The query isautomatically refreshed when you insert it into the workbook and when you change the navigationalstatus, that is, unless you have activated the function 6WRS�$XWRPDWLF�5HIUHVK�(see also: Settings[Seite 414]).

Therefore, you only usually need the function 5HIUHVK�4XHU\ in the following cases:

• To update the data after you have opened a workbook

• When you fill the query with new variable values

A query can only be refreshed if a connection exists between the Business Explorer andthe Business Information Warehouse Server.

6HH�DOVR�

Refreshing Queries [Seite 396]

%DFN

Choose %DFN if you want to undo your last navigation step.

6HH�DOVR�

Navigation and Navigation Functions [Seite 417]

&KDQJLQJ�4XHULHV

You use the function &KDQJH�4XHU\�9LHZ�on the BEx toolbar if you:

• Want to change the arrangement of characteristics and key figures into rows, columns and freecharacteristics for the query and carry out several QDYLJDWLRQ�VWHSV one after the other (&KDQJH4XHU\�9LHZ�→�&KDQJH�TXHU\��/RFDO�9LHZ�

• Want to change the definition of the query (&KDQJH�4XHU\�9LHZ�→�&KDQJH�4XHU\��*OREDO'HILQLWLRQ��

6HH�DOVR�

Changing Queries [Seite 397]

*RWR

With this function you can:

• Display exceptions in the alert monitor, providing that some exceptions have been found for thisquery.

• Jump to a saved query view

• Activate the function 5HSHDW�MXPS�RQ�GRXEOH�FOLFN, to use double-click to jump to a saved view ofquery data

6HH�DOVR�

Goto [Seite 399]

2/$3�)XQFWLRQV�IRU�$FWLYH�&HOOV

If you choose 2/$3�IXQFWLRQV�IRU�DFWLYH�FHOO, you call the OLAP functions in the Business Explorer.They are available on the cells for the filter and results areas of a query. The context menu you call,depends on whether you select a cell in the filter area of the query, or a cell in the results area of thequery.



You can also jump to documents for single master data and characteristic values or documents for thenavigation status.

6HH�DOVR�


)RUPDWWLQJ

Formatting for the query underlines the type of data contained in a cell, highlighting the structure of thedelivered results. Query formatting consists of:

• Fonts

• Templates

• Borders

• Alignment

• Defining symbols for:

• Expanding hierarchically

• Collapsing hierarchically

• Expanding in other dimensions

• Linking to documents

• Hierarchy indentation

Small, normal, large, very large

You can change the format of the query to configure the display however you like.

6HH�DOVR�

Formatting [Seite 408]

/D\RXW

Using the layout functions, you can change the appearance of the screen for the query in theworkbook.

You use the layout functions to:

• Attach a diagram or a map

• Display text elements for the query

• Display exceptions or conditions

• Move the filter area or the results area

• Select queries in a worksheet

6HH�DOVR�

Layout [Seite 410]

7RROV

You use the functions under 7RROV�to:

• Display the query in a default view in the Web browser

• Edit queries (global definition)

• Insert, copy, remove queries

• Remove all queries, delete the results and detach queries from the workbook

• Activate SAP sheet protection



6HH�DOVR�

Tools [Seite 412]

6HWWLQJV

You use the functions under 6HWWLQJV�to determine whether:

• Queries are refreshed automatically

• There is a connection to the BW server

• Information about the BW server is displayed

• A new workbook it is created from scratch, selected from a list or based on an existing template

• OLAP functions are available using the right mouse button

• Warnings are suppressed

• Log book entries are recorded

6HH�DOVR�

Settings [Seite 414]



2SHQLQJ

8VH

With the 2SHQ�function on the BEx toolbar you can open existing workbooks or queries. You can alsodefine a new query for an InfoProvider.

)XQFWLRQV

You can select from the following functions on the left-hand side of the dialog box, 6$3�%([��2SHQ��:

• :RUNERRNV: All the workbooks that are assigned to your favorites or to your roles are displayed.

• 4XHULHV: All the Business Information Warehouse queries (for which you have authorization todisplay) are displayed. You can search for a query by its technical name or description.

• ([FHSWLRQV: All exceptions are displayed that the user is allowed to see in accordance with thebackground processing scheduling (see Defining the Exceptions Setting [Extern]). The exceptionsare listed starting with the InfoArea level up to the individual views, that is, the drilldowns you ranin the background.

See also: Displaying Exceptions: Alert Monitor [Seite 427]

&KDQJLQJ�4XHULHV��'HILQLQJ�4XHULHV

If you want to change an existing query or define a new one, choose 4XHULHV on the left-hand side ofthe dialog box. Select the query you want to change in the InfoArea/InfoProvider tree and choose&KDQJH to the right of the screen. To create a new query, either choose 1HZ directly from the right ofthe screen, or first select an InfoArea or InfoProvider for which you want to create the query, and thenchoose 1HZ.

$FWLYLWLHV

If you want to open an existing workbook or query, or if you want to define a new query, start theBusiness Explorer Analyzer, and, from the Microsoft Excel main menu, choose the function 6$3%XVLQHVV�([SORUHU�→�2SHQ� or alternatively, use the 2SHQ pushbutton on the BEx toolbar.

6HH�DOVR�




6DYLQJ

)XQFWLRQV

You insert a query into a workbook and, using navigation, generate various views ofthe data. You also alter settings for the characteristic display, or for the whole query.You can save this view of the data in the workbook.

With the 6DYH function on the BEx toolbar you can

• save the workbook as a QHZ�ZRUNERRN

• save the workbook as an H[LVWLQJ�ZRUNERRN

• save the FXUUHQW�YLHZ as a permanent view for the query

If you save the workbook, then the query is not detached. You can call the workbookat a later date, create a connection to the Business Information Warehouse Server,and refresh the queries contained in the workbook.

$FWLYLWLHV

6DYLQJ�DV�D�1HZ�:RUNERRN

Choose 6DYH�→�6DYH�DV�1HZ�:RUNERRN�� in the BEx toolbar. The 6$3�%([��6DYH�LQ'RFXPHQW�6WRUDJH popup appears. Enter a description for the workbook, and selectthe folder (favorites or roles) in which you want to store the workbook.

6DYLQJ�DV�DQ�([LVWLQJ�:RUNERRN

Select 6DYH�→�6DYH�DV�([LVWLQJ�:RUNERRN from the BEx toolbar. The activeworkbook is saved under the name that already exists.

6DYLQJ�D�9LHZ�IRU�D�4XHU\

Select 6DYH�→�6DYH�4XHU\�9LHZ in the BEx toolbar. The 6$3�%([��6DYH�9LHZ�IRU4XHU\ popup appears. Enter a description for the new view and select 2..�The view issaved permanently and is available for Web Reporting and navigation. You can call up the savedviews for a query by choosing *RWR -> (your query name) from the BEx toolbar. If you have justopened the workbook, this is only available after a refresh of the query.

6DYLQJ�D�:RUNERRN�/RFDOO\

In the Microsoft Excel main menu, choose )LOH → 6DYH�or )LOH → 6DYH�DV��, if you wantto save the workbook on your PC rather than in the BW system.

6HH�DOVR�


Detaching Queries [Seite 463]

Changing a Query View [Seite 397]



5HIUHVKLQJ�4XHULHV

)XQFWLRQV

To ensure the most current data in a query is always displayed, you must refresh thequery after each navigation and after each change to the settings. A query can onlybe refreshed if a connection exists between the Business Explorer and the BusinessInformation Warehouse Server.

During the refreshing the current report data is requested from the BusinessInformation Warehouse server . You can also stop the automatic refreshing. This isrecommended, for example, if you intend to undertake several settings changes andnavigational steps in succession without displaying the corresponding dataimmediately (see Settings [Seite 414]).

$FWLYLWLHV

After inserting a query into a workbook, you have to refresh the query to be able tocontinue navigating. Choose 5HIUHVK�from the BEx toolbar. If you have selected aquery on the worksheet, exactly this query is refreshed. If you have not selected aquery, then you can select all queries in all opened worksheets. You can only use thenavigation functions in the BEx toolbar and the context menu after refreshing thequery.

You can determine that the automatic refresh function for the queries when opening theworkbook. Choose 3URSHUWLHV�!�,QWHUDFWLRQ�!�5HIUHVK�4XHU\�RQ�2SHQLQJ�:RUNERRN fromthe context menu (right mouse-click) on any part of the query.

You can also determine that when you refresh the query, you restore the initial screen thatwas set up, instead of the last (current) navigation status. Choose 3URSHUWLHV�!�,QWHUDFWLRQ!�5HIUHVK�WR�5HVWRUH�*OREDO�'HILQLWLRQ from the context menu (right mouse-click) on anypart of the query.

See also:


Choose the function 5HIUHVK�4XHU\ if you, for example:

• switched off automatic refresh

• interrupted the connection to the Business Information Warehouse (BW Server)

• copied the query or moved the results area (see also Positioning Cell Areas of the Query [Seite464])

When refreshing a query, the formatting and the column width of the cell areasautomatically adjusts to the updated query data. You can specify the type of adjustment inthe Query Properties [Seite 450].

6HH�DOVR�




&KDQJLQJ�4XHULHV

8VH

You use the function &KDQJH�4XHU\�9LHZ�on the BEx toolbar if you:

• Want to change the arrangement of characteristics and key figures into rows, columns and freecharacteristics for the query in the current workbook (&KDQJH�4XHU\��/RFDO�9LHZ�

• Want to change the GHILQLWLRQ of the query in every workbook (&KDQJH�4XHU\��*OREDO�'HILQLWLRQ��

&KDQJLQJ�D�4XHU\��/RFDO�9LHZ�

The drilldown status of the query is displayed in the form of three directory trees: one tree shows thefree characteristics, the trees “rows” and “columns” show the characteristics�and�key�figures, which arearranged along the rows and columns axis. Characteristics that are displayed in the “rows tree” or the“columns tree” are drilled down upon. The tree “IUHH�FKDUDFWHULVWLFV” contains all characteristics thatare not currently drilled down upon.

The characteristics and key figures are displayed in the URZV�DQG�FROXPQV in the sequence in whichthey appear in the query. You can determine the position and sequence of the characteristics and keyfigures in the rows axis and columns axis of the query using drag and drop. You can also establishwhich characteristics you want to drill down on, free or filtered. The key figures can be hidden orshown. If the key figures are shown then they are available in the query. You can display and changethe properties of the characteristics. You change characteristic properties (for example, results display,attributes display, presentation hierarchy) by choosing a characteristic and selecting 3URSHUWLHV fromthe context menu.

In the lower right-hand area you will see a SUHYLHZ of the table for the results area that shows howyou change the view of the data via your navigational steps.

If you want to change not just your view of the data but also the selection of key figures andcharacteristics for the query, then you need to change the TXHU\�GHILQLWLRQ. From the toolbar, choose&KDQJH�4XHU\��*OREDO�'HILQLWLRQ�� .

You do not need authorization to use the function &KDQJH�4XHU\��/RFDO�9LHZ�.

&KDQJH�4XHU\��*OREDO�'HILQLWLRQ�

&KDQJHV�WKDW�\RX�PDNH�KHUH�HIIHFW�$//�REMHFWV�WKDW�DUH�XVHG�LQ�WKH�TXHU\�

− $//�WKH�ZRUNERRNV�WKDW�FRQWDLQ�WKLV�TXHU\��This means you are changing thequery definition for all the workbooks in which this query appears, not just the one youare working in.

− $OO�:HE�WHPSODWH�WKDW�XVH�WKH�TXHU\�DV�D�GDWD�SURYLGHU�IRU�:HE�LWHPV

− $OO�&U\VWDO�5HSRUWV�WKDW�XVH�WKH�TXHU\�DV�D�GDWD�VRXUFH�IRU�IRUPDWWHG�UHSRUWV

− $OO�5HSRUWLQJ�$JHQW�VHWWLQJV�WKDW�XVH�WKH�TXHU\�IRU�SUHFDOFXODWLQJ�:HEWHPSODWHV

Only users with the correct authorization can use the function &KDQJH�4XHU\��JOREDOGHILQLWLRQ�.

6HH�DOVR�

Query Design: BEx Query Designer [Seite 15]




6HH�DOVR�




*RWR

8VH

You can use the *RWR function to;

• 'LVSOD\�WKH�H[FHSWLRQV�RI�D�TXHU\

See also:

Displaying Exceptions: Alert Monitor [Seite 427]

• -XPS�WR�D�VDYHG�TXHU\�YLHZ

See also:

Saving [Seite 395]

• 5HDFK�WR�MXPS�WDUJHWV�YLD�WKH�5HSRUW�5HSRUW�,QWHUIDFH

The Report-Report-Interface (RRI) in R/3 enables you to perform a parameterized call-up ofprograms from other programs. This means that you can use it to jump from one report toanother report that delivers more information.

In BW you can use the RRI to start different actions from a query, for example:

− Starting another query where the entry variants are filled by the selection requirements andelement definitions of the selected cells of the sender query.

− Starting reports, functions, and transactions inside and outside of BW.

See also:

Overview: Report/Report Interface [Extern]

Editing Sender/Receiver Assignment to the R/RI in BW [Seite 62]

• 'LVSOD\�GRFXPHQWV�IRU�LQGLYLGXDO�PDVWHU�GDWD�DQG�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�YDOXHV�RU�GRFXPHQWV�IRUQDYLJDWLRQ�VWDWXV

You can display the documentation for the characteristics and key figures used in the query.Go to a cell that contains a characteristic or key figure (for example, in the query filter or in thecolumn headings) and from the context menu, choose *RWR�→ 'RFXPHQWV.

See also:

Documents [Extern]

$FWLYLWLHV

([FHSWLRQV

Choose *RWR�→�([FHSWLRQV from the BEx toolbar.�You get a list of alerts for the exceptions of theparticular query you are looking at.

*RWR

-XPSLQJ�WR�4XHU\�9LHZV

If you want to go to a saved query view, choose *RWR�from the BEx toolbar. The descriptions of thesaved views appear in the selection box. You can choose the view you want to jump to.

You can also use a double mouse click to jump to the saved view. In the BEx toolbar, choose *RWR�→5HSHDW�MXPS�ZLWK�'RXEOH�FOLFN. A checkmark appears next to 5HSHDW�MXPS�ZLWK�GRXEOH�FOLFN� to showthat this function is active.

By double-clicking, you can jump directly from a field in a query results area, to a saved query view (ofanother query). In this way, the field contents of the jump-query are included as parameters of thequery for which you saved a view.



*HWWLQJ�WR�-XPS�7DUJHWV�YLD�WKH�5HSRUW�5HSRUW�,QWHUIDFH

Choose *RWR�from the BEx toolbar. The jump targets that were previously assigned are displayed inthe selection window. One click will bring you to the target jump you want. A new workbook is openedevery time you do this. The selections, which are set up in the query definition, are then copied into thejump target.

If you want to go to a jump target that is not within BW, you must select a source systemand log on if necessary. You will only have to log on once per Excel session, even if youopen more than one workbook.

'LVSOD\�GRFXPHQWV�IRU�LQGLYLGXDO�PDVWHU�GDWD�DQG�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�YDOXHV�RU�GRFXPHQWV�IRUQDYLJDWLRQ�VWDWXV

If you created documents for master data in the Administrator Workbench, in a Web application or inthe master data maintenance, then you can display them for individual characteristic values that arecontained in the query. Go to a cell that contains a master data value (for example, in the query filteror in the leading columns for a characteristic) and from the context menu, choose *RWR�→ 'RFXPHQWV.

If you have created documents for transaction data in the Administrator Workbench or in a Webapplication, you can display the documents for the current navigation status by choosing, from thecontext menu, *RWR�→�'RFXPHQWV�IRU�1DYLJDWLRQ�6WDWXV� The documents that have the current,restricted characteristic values as attributes are displayed.



2/$3�)XQFWLRQV�IRU�$FWLYH�&HOOV

8VH

OLAP functions are functions that you access from the cells in the filter and results areas of the queryin the Business Explorer. You use either the context menu (right mouse click) or the 2/$3�)XQFWLRQVIRU�DFWLYH�FHOOV symbol from the BEx toolbar to call these functions. Exactly which functions you areable to call, varies according to the highlighted cell area of the query, and depends on whichcharacteristics and key figures are available, on which it is possible to navigate, and to make settings.

Cell areas that do not belong to the query have only the Excel context menu.

Choose 6HWWLQJV → 2/$3�IXQFWLRQV��ULJKW�PRXVH�FOLFN� to deactivate the OLAP functionsin the Business Explorer� When you deactivate the OLAP functions, the functions in theExcel context menu are the only functions available in the cell areas of the query. Thequery is not detached.

6HH�DOVR�


)XQFWLRQV�LQ�)LOWHU�&HOOV

The selection of functions that are available in the context menu of the filter cells depends on thenavigational status of the selected characteristic. The functions are:

• 6HOHFW�)LOWHU�9DOXH

• 5HPRYH�)LOWHU�9DOXH

• 'ULOOGRZQ�→�9HUWLFDOO\

• 'ULOOGRZQ�→�+RUL]RQWDOO\

• 3URSHUWLHV (See Query Properties [Seite 450])

6HOHFW�)LOWHU�9DOXH

Choose 6HOHFW�)LOWHU�9DOXH to restrict a free characteristic to one or more characteristic values, or torestrict a structure to one or more parts of a structure (key figures). You choose one or more valuesfrom a list that is displayed containing all the characteristic values/key figures. After you refresh thequery, only the data for the values you selected are displayed in the drilldown.

6HH�DOVR�

Selecting Filter Values [Seite 436]

5HPRYH�)LOWHU�9DOXH

Choose 5HPRYH�ILOWHU�YDOXH if you want to see all the characteristic values for the characteristic again.

'ULOOGRZQ

To display all the characteristic values for a characteristic along the rows axis or the columns axis ofthe results area, choose 'ULOOGRZQ�→�9HUWLFDO or 'ULOOGRZQ�→�+RUL]RQWDO. If the characteristic has beenfiltered previously, only the filtered values are drilled down upon.

)XQFWLRQV�IRU�WKH�&HOOV�LQ�WKH�5HVXOWV�$UHD

The selection of functions available from the context menu of the cells in the query results area,depends on the position and contents of the individual cell. The selection of functions that areavailable, depends on whether you have selected a cell that is related to a characteristic, a cellcontaining a characteristic value, for example, or whether you have selected a cell that is related to astructure element (key figure), a cell containing a key figure name, for example.

The following functions are explained under Navigation and Navigation Functions [Seite 417]:



• %DFN

• %DFN�WR�LQLWLDO�YLHZ

• .HHS�DV�ILOWHU�YDOXH

• )LOWHU�DQG�GULOOGRZQ�DFFRUGLQJ�WR

• ,QVHUW�GULOOGRZQ�DFFRUGLQJ�WR

• 6ZDS��ZLWK��

• $FWLYH�KLHUDUFK\

• ([SDQG�KLHUDUFK\

6RUW

You use this function to sort the characteristic values or attributes for a drilldown characteristic (therows and columns) according to various criteria, ascending or descending, for example. It is possibleto sort according to the key, the name, a display attribute, or a displayed value column. (Forinformation on activating display attributes, see Properties of the Query Components [Seite 55] →&KDUDFWHULVWLF�SURSHUWLHV.)

Keys are usually sorted according to internal formatting. If you want to sort according to externalformatting, you have to include this formatting with the InfoObject.

In hierarchy lists, the relationship between the upper-level/lower-level nodes is retained inthe hierarchy structures. Lower-level nodes, however, are usually displayed in thesequence in which they appear in the sort criteria. You use the 6RUW�DFFRUGLQJ�WR�KLHUDUFK\function to restore the original sequence as determined in the hierarchy definition.

6RUW�DFFRUGLQJ�WR�VHOHFWLRQ

If you have filtered the characteristic according to several single values, either in the query definition,or using a variable in the selection options, you use the 6RUW�DFFRUGLQJ�WR�VHOHFWLRQ function to sort thevalues accordingly. This also goes for selections in a dynamic filter (see Selecting Filter Values [Seite436]).

• The system attempts to make meaningful suggestions for each value. It attempts first of all to sortaccording to a selection.

• Time characteristics, characteristics without text, or characteristics that are displayed by defaultwith either NH\ or NH\�DQG�WH[W, are sorted according to key.

• Otherwise, the system sorts according to text. (6257��LWDE!��$6�7(;7��: Text fields aresorted automatically according to the language environment specified by the current user, that is,the language the current user is logged on to the system in. This means that the relative sequenceof characters, one after the other, is culture-specific, and corresponds to the current textenvironment. The text environment is set automatically and corresponds to the logon language ofthe current user.

&DOFXODWH

You use this function to recalculate, according to particular criteria, the results rows and single valuesthat are displayed in the query.

This function is found in the context menu of the filter cells in the results area, as well as inthe query definition [Seite 15]. In the query definition (local view or global definition), selectthe key figure you want to use, and choose 3URSHUWLHV�→�&DOFXODWLRQV from the contextmenu (right mouse click).

5HVXOWV�DV




• �QRWKLQJ�GHILQHG�

• 6XPPDWLRQ: The sum total of the values for the corresponding area is displayed as the result.

• 0D[LPXP: The maximum (greatest) value of the corresponding area is displayed as the result.

• 0LQLPXP: The minimum (smallest) values for the corresponding area is displayed as the result.

• &RXQWLQJ�DOO�YDOXHV: The number of values for the corresponding area is displayed as the result.

• &RXQWLQJ�DOO�YDOXHV<>��: The number of values for the corresponding area is displayed as theresult, with the exception of zeroes, meaning that values equal to 0 are not displayed.

• $YHUDJH�RI�DOO�YDOXHV: The average (sum divided by total number) of all the values for thecorresponding area is displayed as the result.

• $YHUDJH�RI�DOO�YDOXHV�<>��: The average (sum divided by total number) of all the values for thecoresponding area is displayed as the result, with the exception of zeroes, meaning that valuesthat are equal to 0 are not included.

• 6WDQGDUG�YDULDQFH: The standard variance is a measure used to show how the values are spreadin relation to the mean value (average). Standard variance = Root from the variance: SQRT(variance)

• 9DULDQFH: The following formula is used to calculate the variance:

(∑x² - (∑x)² / N) / (N-1) for N > 1 and QRWH[LVW�for N=1

• 6XSSUHVV�UHVXOW: The result is not displayed.

• )LUVW�YDOXH: The top most value from the corresponding area is displayed as the result.

• /DVW�YDOXH: The lowest value from the corresponding area is displayed as the result.

If the result is a totals row, the area belonging to it is the corresponding column.

If the result is a totals column, the area belonging to it is the corresponding row.

With higher totals, that is multiple drilldowns (with results and an overall result), all theaffected single values are taken into account (without results).

6LQJOH�YDOXH�DV


• �QRWKLQJ�GHILQHG�

• 1RUPDOL]H�UHVXOW: See 1RUPDOL]LQJ

• 1RUPDOL]H�RYHUDOO�UHVXOW: See 1RUPDOL]LQJ

• 1RUPDOL]H�TXHU\�VXP: See 1RUPDOL]LQJ

• 5DQNHG�OLVW: The single values for a characteristic are sorted according to the key figure you haveselected, and given a ranking.

It is possible, for example, to generate a ranked list of products, according to sales.

A 100 = Rank 1

B 50 = Rank 2

C 50 = Rank 2

D 20 = Rank 3

• 5DQNHG�OLVW��RO\PSLF�: The olympic ranked list is different to a normal ranked list, in that onlythree medals are ever awarded in an olympic ranked list.



In this example, product D is awarded rank 4, because products B and C have achievedsecond and third place.

A 100 = Rank 1

B 50 = Rank 2

C 50 = Rank 2

D 20 = Rank 4

&XPXODWHG

You use this function to cumulate the individual cells in an area. The first value is added to the secondvalue, the result is added to the third value, and so on. In the columns, the cells are cumulated fromtop to bottom, and in the rows, the cells are cumulated from left to right. With blocks of single values,that is, a drilldown in both the rows and the columns, the values are cumulated from top to bottom andfrom left to right.

This function is particularly useful with drilldowns on time characteristics (months, forexample). Using the functions 6LQJOH�YDOXH�DV�→�1RUPDOL]H�UHVXOWV, and 6RUW →'HVFHQGLQJ, on the corresponding value column, you get a cumulated list that is oftendescribed as an ABC list.

$OVR�DSSO\�WR�UHVXOWV

It is also possible to apply the recalculation you have selected to the results rows.

Note that the following functions FDQQRW be applied to hierarchy lists (active displayhierarchies), and cannot be used in conjunction with the characteristic containing thehierarchy.

− &DOFXODWH�→�5HVXOW�DV

− &DOFXODWH�→�6LQJOH�YDOXH�DV�→�5DQNHG�OLVW��5DQNHG�OLVW��RO\PSLF�

− &DOFXODWH�→�&XPXODWHG

�&KDUDFWHULVWLF��→�6XSSUHVV�+LHUDUFK\�1RGHV

If the characteristic has an active display hierarchy, you use this function to determine whether youwant to suppress the hierarchy nodes QHYHU, DOZD\V, or FRQGLWLRQDOO\.

• QHYHU: The hierarchy is displayed along with all the hierarchy nodes.

• always: The overall totals row is not displayed.

• FRQGLWLRQDOO\: A hierarchy node is suppressed only if it has H[DFWO\�RQH lower-level node. Thelower-level node (can be a lower-level node or hierarchy leaf) is displayed instead of thesuppressed hierarchy node, meaning it is given preference in the hierarchy level.

�&KDUDFWHULVWLF��→�1RGH�SRVLWLRQ

If the characteristic has an active display hierarchy, you position the hierarchy nodes either WRS(DERYH� or�ERWWRP��EHORZ�. The lower-level nodes for a node are expanded either upwards ordownwards.

�&KDUDFWHULVWLF��→�&XPXODWHG�GLVSOD\

If you choose this function, the system sorts the list in ascending order according to key. All thestructure elements (key figures) are subsequently aggregated to the Q��characteristic value, one afterthe other, for each of the Qth characteristic values. With time characteristics, the missing characteristicvalues are included wherever necessary.



If, for this function, you subsequently choose a different sorting method, the numbersbecome difficult to make sense of.

Do not chose the cumulate output function to use with more than one characteristic.

It is a good idea to use the function &DOFXODWH�→�6LQJOH�YDOXH�DV�→�&XPXODWHG��since thisfunction is more controllable, and more suitable in most cases.

This function allows you to display cumulated values for time-characteristics, cumulatedsales for calendar year / month, for example.

&DOHQGDU�\HDU�� 6DOHV &XPXODWHG�VDOHV

January 100 100

February 110 210 (January + February)

March 120 330 (January + February +March)

�&KDUDFWHULVWLF��→�1RUPDOL]LQJ

It is possible to normalize the query data from all key figures for various totals of this key figure – theresults are displayed as percentages.

Interim results are displayed as absolutes, not as percentages.

The normalization process refers to a particular characteristic each time, and has various settingsindependently for each characteristic.

Each key figure for a query has a TXHU\�WRWDO. This is the total of the key figure that results from theaggregation of all characteristics for the query.

In each view, an RYHUDOO UHVXOW�is displayed for the key figures. It is also possible to normalize data forthis total.

Finally, you also have the option of normalizing data for the UHVXOWV that are displayed in the resultsarea.

The overall result, and the query total, are identical to one another, provided that nocharacteristics have been filtered.

([FHSWLRQV

You activate / deactivate exceptions for a query.

&XUUHQF\�7UDQVODWLRQ

You translate according to a target currency or a database currency.

6HH�DOVR�

Translating Currencies [Seite 455]

$OO�&KDUDFWHULVWLFV

This is where you make the following settings for all characteristics:



'LVSOD\�DV

Characteristic values are displayed using different display forms. The display forms on offer depend onthe InfoObject properties that are set on the database. Under the display forms offered forcharacteristics, you choose, for example, whether the key, the name, or the long text of thecharacteristic, is displayed.

If you select the display form NH\�DQG�QDPH, the key is displayed using external format. If you selectthe display form QDPH�DQG�NH\, the shortest available text is displayed.

The various display options are also available for use with individual characteristics, andwith attributes. Highlight the characteristic or attribute that you want to use, and chooseFKDUDFWHULVWLF��DWWULEXWH�→�'LVSOD\�DV from the context menu (right mouse click).

For information on activating display attributes, see Properties of the Query Components[Seite 55] → &KDUDFWHULVWLF�SURSHUWLHV.

3RVLWLRQ�RI�WRWDOV�URZ

You choose whether you want the totals rows displayed on the top/left or bottom/right of the screen.

6XSSUHVV�WRWDOV�URZV

You determine whether the totals rows are suppressed never, always or under certain conditions.Conditional suppression of the totals rows means that the totals rows are not displayed if thecorresponding area contains only one characteristic value.

This function is also available for use with individual characteristics. Highlight thecharacteristic that you want to use, and choose �&KDUDFWHULVWLF��→�6XSSUHVV�WRWDOV�URZVfrom the context menu (right mouse click).

6XSSUHVVLQJ�]HURV

If you switch this function on, cells containing a zero value (0.00) are left empty. If all the cells for aparticular object in a characteristic value that has been drilled down upon are zero, and this function isactive, the whole characteristic value is excluded from the display.

1RUPDOL]DWLRQ

You are able to choose not to use normalization, or to normalize the characteristics using:

• query totals

• overall results

• Result

8QGR

It is possible to cancel individually the settings for the characteristic display, for the totals rows, and fornormalizing single characteristics. Alternatively, it is also possible to undo all the changes made tosettings, for all characteristics at once.

3URSHUWLHV

Under 3URSHUWLHV, you make settings affecting the display, interaction, and column width. Technicalinformation for the query or the workbook is found under ,QIRUPDWLRQ.

6HH�DOVR�

Query properties [Seite 450]

$FWLYLWLHV

Select any cell in the query and, using the right mouse button, call the context menu, or choose 2/$3IXQFWLRQV�IRU�DFWLYH�FHOOV from the BEx toolbar.



)RUPDWWLQJ

8VH

Formatting for a query consists of, among other things, font, font color, backgroundcolor and background pattern, frame, alignment and options for the hierarchy display.Different format templates and hierarchy symbols are used for the display of thevarious cell areas of queries (filter cells, results area, header information). Theformatting of the SAP format template serves to underline the type of data containedin a cell and, therefore, to emphasize the structure of the delivered results. You canchange the format templates and the symbols for the hierarchy display in order toconfigure the display according to your personal requirements.

)XQFWLRQV

The Business Explorer uses the concept of the IRUPDW�WHPSODWHV from Excel forformatting results areas, filter cells, and cell areas for header information. Formattingproperties such as font, pattern, frames and so on, are never directly assigned to acell. Instead they are summarized in format templates, and these are then assignedto the cells. Therefore, cells of the same type contain the same format template.

Every time you change a query the cell contents also changes and at the same timethe format of the cell is automatically adjusted to correspond with the new cellcontents. You can prevent this automatic adjustment by choosing 3URSHUWLHV→ $GMXVW�)RUPDW�DIWHU�5HIUHVK.

You can change the format of queries as much as you like using the concept of the formattemplates. For example, each change to the format template 6$3%(;VWG'DWD (choose)RUPDW → )RUPDW�7HPSODWHV�in the main menu) influences the display of all cells thatcontain data.

You can also use formatting in Workbook Templates [Seite 461].

The changes to the SAP format templates apply to the whole workbook and remain thesame when navigating and refreshing queries.

$FWLYLWLHV

To change the IRUPDW�WHPSODWH of query cell areas, select the relevant cell area andchoose the symbol for )RUPDW�in the BEx toolbar. Select the font, pattern, frame oralignment. Make the required changes and choose 2..

You can change the width of the hierarchy indentation and the hierarchy pushbuttonsfor the KLHUDUFK\�GLVSOD\.

• In order to change the KLHUDUFK\�EXWWRQV for hierarchy nodes and leaves, insert an autoshapesymbol into the workbook. Select this symbol and choose )RUPDW�→�+LHUDUFK\�%XWWRQV. Choosewhether you want the autoshape symbol to be labeled as “Expand” or “Compress”. When youexpand and compress the hierarchy, the changes to the hierarchy buttons come into effect.

• In order to change the width of the KLHUDUFK\�LQGHQWDWLRQ, choose )RUPDW�→�+LHUDUFK\,QGHQWDWLRQ� The indentation can be set to QDUURZ��QRUPDO��ZLGH and YHU\�ZLGH.



The maximum number of hierarchy levels that can be displayed is 13 for 1DUURZ, 7 for1RUPDO, 5 for :LGH�and 4 for 9HU\�:LGH. If you exceed the maximum number of hierarchylevels that can be displayed, then the next level will be displayed again under the levelabove.

You can also use the format template that you changed in other workbooks. In the mainmenu choose )RUPDW�→�)RUPDW�7HPSODWH�and select the workbook, for which you want totransfer the format to the active workbook. Select 0HUJH��

6HH�DOVR�

Cell Areas of a Query [Seite 459]




/D\RXW

)XQFWLRQV

With the help of the layout functions, you can determine the layout of the data analysis, and howqueries are displayed in a workbook. You can evaluate the data for a query using a diagram or a map(BEx Map). You can display text elements and move cell areas. You can also select queries in aworksheet.

$WWDFKLQJ�'LDJUDPV

You can display an Excel diagram for a query. The diagram evaluates all of the data in the currentnavigation state, meaning the diagram is always refreshed automatically whenever the query isrefreshed.

$WWDFKLQJ�0DSV

Using $WWDFK�0DS, you can evaluate the geo-relevant data for a query with the help of the BEx Map.The BEx Map is BW’s integrated Geographical Information System (GIS) in the Business Explorer.

6HH�DOVR�

BEx Map [Seite 441]

'LVSOD\LQJ�7H[W�(OHPHQWV

You have the option of displaying the text elements for a query (for example, author, last changed by,InfoProvider, generation time, and so on). The text elements are inserted into the cell area betweenthe filter cells and the results area of the query. Note that depending on the current query, only the textelements that are currently relevant are ever displayed (meaning not all text elements are displayed).

6HH�DOVR�

Displaying Text Elements [Seite 466]

'LVSOD\LQJ�([FHSWLRQV

If you have defined exceptions for a query, you can display them. The descriptions for the exceptionsare inserted into the cell area below the filter cells. You can activate/deactivate the exceptions with adouble-click or over the context menu (right mouse-click).

6HH�DOVR�

Exception Reporting [Seite 420]

'LVSOD\LQJ�&RQGLWLRQV

If you have defined conditions for a query, you can display them. The descriptions for the conditionsare inserted into the cell area underneath the filter cells. You can activate/deactivate the conditionswith a double-click or over the context menu (right mouse-click).

6HH�DOVR�

Using Conditions [Seite 434]

If you want to move or delete text elements or the descriptions of the exceptions orconditions, then move them or delete the relevant cells in Excel.

0RYLQJ�WKH�5HVXOWV�$UHD

You can move the results area for a query to another cell area. Enter the cell area that you want touse. When you move the results area, its contents are deleted. Refresh the query after you havemoved it, in order to display the contents of the results area again.



0RYLQJ�WKH�)LOWHU

You can move individual filter cells for a query to another cell area. Enter the cell area that you want touse.

6HOHFWLQJ�4XHULHV�LQ�D�:RUNVKHHW

By choosing 6HOHFW�4XHULHV�LQ�:RUNVKHHW, you can also display which cell areas of the worksheet areconnected to different queries. Arrows between the filter cells and the results area indicate where thequery-cell areas belong. If you select the function again, the highlighting is removed once more.

$FWLYLWLHV

Choose /D\RXW�from the BEx toolbar.

6HH�DOVR�




7RROV

)XQFWLRQV

6WDUW�LQ�:HE�%URZVHU�→�4XHU\��6WDQGDUG�9LHZ�

By using this function, the query that has been drilled down in the BEx Analyzer is displayed in theinitial view of the Web browser. The query is embedded automatically into a standard Web template.

You determine the standard Web template in the 6$3�5HIHUHQFH�,0*�→ %XVLQHVV,QIRUPDWLRQ�:DUHKRXVH�→�6HWWLQJV�5HOHYDQW�IRU�5HSRUWLQJ�→�:HE�%DVHG�6HWWLQJV�→'HWHUPLQH�6WDQGDUG�:HE�7HPSODWH�

(GLW�TXHULHV��JOREDO�GHILQLWLRQ�

Use this function to access the BEx Query Designer [Seite 15]. You can change the query definitionhere.

,QVHUWLQJ�D�4XHU\��

You select the function ,QVHUW�4XHU\��, if you want to insert an additional query into the activeworksheet of the workbook. The query is inserted into the worksheet, starting at the selected cell.

&RS\LQJ�4XHULHV

You can copy the query to a new position in the workbook. Enter the position you want to copy thequery to. After copying, you have to refresh the query if you want to display current data.

5HPRYLQJ�4XHULHV

Using this function you delete RQH�selected query from the workbook. The query definition itself is notdeleted. You can therefore insert this query into this or another workbook if necessary.

Please note that the information on where the areas are positioned in the workbook, isretained when you delete the query. The workbook looks empty. When you insert anotherquery into the workbook, the positions are already there.

6HH�DOVR�

Removing Queries from Workbooks [Seite 462]

$OO�4XHULHV�LQ�WKH�:RUNERRN

5HPRYLQJ

Using the function $OO�TXHULHV�LQ�WKH�ZRUNERRN�→�5HPRYH��you remove DOO the queries contained in theworkbook. The query definitions are QRW deleted by this procedure.

6HH�DOVR�

Deleting Query Objects [Seite 59]

'HOHWLQJ�5HVXOWV

Using the function $OO�TXHULHV�LQ�WKH�ZRUNERRN�→�'HOHWH�UHVXOWV��you delete DOO the results areas of allthe queries contained in the workbook. You can recreate the results areas by choosing the 5HIUHVKsymbol on the toolbar.

6HH�DOVR�




'HWDFKLQJ

The function $OO�4XHULHV�LQ�WKH�:RUNERRN�→ 'HWDFK deletes the link between the cell areas of thequeries and the data. If you detach the queries, the data area that is visible on the worksheet remainsintact, but it can no longer be navigated or refreshed.

The function 'HWDFK TXHU\�can no longer be undone.

6HH�DOVR�


6$3�6KHHW�3URWHFWLRQ��

6$3�VKHHW�SURWHFWLRQ allows you to protect the current worksheet from changes. The function isactivated after you enter a password, and enables you to continue using the navigation functions ofthe Business Explorer.

If sheet protection is activated, then not all the toolbar functions are available.

6HH�DOVR�

Sheet Protection [Seite 470]

$FWLYLWLHV

In the BEx toolbar, choose 7RROV.



6HWWLQJV

)XQFWLRQV

You can make settings for connection to the Business Information WarehouseServer, for using a workbook template, for the availability of the context menu in theresults area of the query and for managing a log book.

6WRS�DXWRPDWLF�UHIUHVK

If you switch this function on, you can stop the query from being refreshedautomatically after the following functions:

• Selecting Filter Values [Seite 436]

• Changing a Query (local view) [Seite 397]

• Properties [Seite 450]

With the help of the function 6WRS�$XWRPDWLF�5HIUHVK, you can make severalnavigational steps in one or more queries without there being a delay after everystep. Then deactivate the function. The stopped queries are now refreshed accordingto the new navigational status.

&RQQHFWLRQ�WR�WKH�%:�6HUYHU

You can terminate the connection between the BEx Analyzer and the BusinessInformation Warehouse Server, or you can set up a new connection.

'LVSOD\LQJ�,QIRUPDWLRQ�RQ�WKH�%:�6HUYHU

Choose 'LVSOD\�,QIRUPDWLRQ�RQ�%:�6HUYHU if you want to know if and how you logged on tothe Business Information Warehouse Server. A dialog box then tells you, either thatno connection exists to the Business Information Warehouse Server, or it shows youthe parameters of the current connection (user name, host server, system name andso on).

6HH�DOVR�

Information Functions [Seite 456]

1HZ�:RUNERRNV�ZKHQ�(PEHGGLQJ

With this function, you can determine into which workbook a query is embedded.

LV�FUHDWHG�HPSW\

Choose the function LV FUHDWHG�HPSW\ if you want to insert the query into an emptyworkbook.

LV�VHOHFWHG�IURP�OLVW

Choose the function LV�VHOHFWHG�IURP�OLVW if you want to choose beforehand, theworkbook into which you want to insert the query.

LV�EDVHG�RQ�SHUPDQHQW�WHPSODWH

Choose the function LV�EDVHG�RQ�SHUPDQHQW�WHPSODWH if you want to insert the queryinto the workbook that you have defined as a SHUPDQHQW�ZRUNERRN�WHPSODWH.

6HH�DOVR�




3HUPDQHQW�:RUNERRN�7HPSODWH��

With this function, you determine which workbook is the permanent workbooktemplate. You can then insert new queries into this kind of permanent workbooktemplate. If you choose the function 1HZ�ZRUNERRN�RQ�HPEHG�→�LV�EDVHG�RQSHUPDQHQW�WHPSODWH� then all queries are inserted automatically into a new workbookthat is based on the permanent workbook template.

6HH�DOVR�

Creating Workbook Templates [Seite 461]

2/$3�)XQFWLRQV�ZLWK�5LJKW�0RXVH�&OLFN

You can determine whether interactive functions such as navigation or sorting on thecell area of the query, are possible using the context menu or not.

6HH�DOVR�


6XSSUHVV�:DUQLQJV

If you switch on this function, you can stop warning messages appearing.

/RJ�%RRN

Use the information function /RJ�ERRN�if you want to log the activities of the BusinessExplorer in Excel.

You empty the log book by switching the log book record off and back on again. Save thecontents of the log book before you turn off the /RJ�function.

6HH�DOVR�

Information Functions [Seite 456]

'LVSOD\LQJ�WKH�/RJ�%RRN

You can display the list of activities by choosing 'LVSOD\ /RJ.

The log book display is not constantly updated, meaning you must repeat the command'LVSOD\�ORJ�ERRN from time to time in order to see the most current entries.

$FWLYLWLHV

In the BEx toolbar, choose 6HWWLQJV.



(YDOXDWLQJ�4XHU\�'DWD

8VH

You analyze the dataset of the Business Information Warehouse in the BEx Analyzer by insertingqueries into Excel workbooks and then interactively evaluate and present the query data.

After inserting a query into a workbook, the distribution of the characteristics and key figures orstructures in the rows and columns from the query definition is shown in the first view.

With the help of QDYLJDWLRQ�IXQFWLRQV (such as the expansion of a hierarchy, filtering of acharacteristic to a characteristic value) you can change the query and thereby generate further viewsof the InfoProvider data. The BEx Analyzer functions you need to do this are in the standard toolbarand in the context menu of the filter and results area cells. You can change the display of thecharacteristics and key figures in the axes of the rows and columns belonging to the query. You canmake settings that affect the display of the entire query, the characteristics, the key figures or the data.You can define sort orders (for example, ascending or descending according to the key or the name ofthe characteristic values) and determine output conditions (such as a currency translation) in order toconfigure the presentation of the data in accordance with your requirements. In addition, you can usethe editing functions in Microsoft Excel in order to set up individual format templates, to print resultsareas, or to create graphics.

If you have created the required view of the data for the InfoCube, you can save it in the workbook andstore it, for example, in your favorites.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

At least one query must be defined for an InfoProvider in the Business Information Warehouse.

)XQFWLRQV

The navigation allows you to view and evaluate the query data from different points of view. When younavigate, you change the query and create new views of the query data.

The basic navigation functions are:

• Displaying a hierarchy

• Filtering a characteristic by a characteristic value

• Drilling down according to a characteristic and changing the drilldown status

• Filtering a characteristic and drilling down by another characteristic

• Distributing the characteristics and key figures along the row axes and the column axes of thequery

• Putting the characteristics and key figures in order

• Hiding and showing key figures

• Activating and deactivating conditions and exceptions

• Evaluating geographical data (for example, characteristics such as customer, sales region,country) on a map.



1DYLJDWLRQ�DQG�1DYLJDWLRQ�)XQFWLRQV

8VH

A query shows views of the data of an InfoProvider, upon which the query is based. You use thenavigation functions to generate different views of the query data (known as the navigation status).These views are subsequently displayed in the results area of the query. Switching between thedifferent views is called navigation. In the Business Explorer, navigation is used to analyzeInfoProvider data. In the query definition, you specify which view of the data is displayed first after youhave inserted the query into the workbook.

Other views that you navigate to, are stored in the workbook. If - after saving and opening theworkbook again! - you: refresh the query in the workbook, the navigation status that you reached thelast time the query was open is displayed, only this time it contains the most current data from theInfoProvider.

If, after refreshing the query, you want the system to display automatically the initial queryview, as defined in the global definition, choose 3URSHUWLHV�→�,QWHUDFWLRQ�→�5HWXUQ�WRJOREDO�GHILQLWLRQ�RQ�UHIUHVK�(see also: Query Properties [Seite 450]).

In addition to the navigation functions, you are also able to use characteristic-basedsettings to change the view of the data. These characteristic-based settings include howcharacteristics and totals rows are displayed. Various sorting functions are also available.

6HH�DOVR�


)XQFWLRQV

The basic navigation functions are:

• Filtering a characteristic according to characteristic values or hierarchy nodes

• Drilling down according to a characteristic and changing the drilldown status

• Filtering a characteristic, and drilling down according to a different characteristic

• Distributing the characteristics and key figures along the row axes and the column axes of thequery

• Changing the sequence of characteristics and key figures on an axis

• Expanding a hierarchy

• Hiding and displaying key figures.

If you want to change the way the characteristics and key figures are distributed amongthe rows and columns of the query, or if you want to carry out several navigational stepsat once, select the symbol on the toolbar for &KDQJH�4XHU\�9LHZ�→�&KDQJH�4XHU\��ORFDOYLHZ�. 6HH�DOVR��Changing Query Views [Seite 397]

)XQFWLRQV

%DFN

Choose %DFN if you want to undo a navigational step. This function is also available directly on thetoolbar (green arrow pointing to the left).



Note that only one navigational step is undone. Other settings, such as GLVSOD\ (GLVSOD\DV) or VRUW are not affected by this (see OLAP Functions for Active Cells [Seite 401]).

%DFN�WR�LQLWLDO�YLHZ

The initial view of the data is the view that is displayed directly after you insert the query into aworkbook. The initial view is determined in the query definition, by the distribution of key figures andcharacteristics into rows, columns, and free characteristics. Choose the function ,QLWLDO�9LHZ if youwant to return to this view after navigating in the query.

.HHS�DV�ILOWHU�YDOXH

Choose .HHS�DV�ILOWHU�YDOXH to retain a characteristic you have selected as a characteristic value orhierarchy node. When you refresh the query, only the data that refers to the fixed characteristic valueis displayed.

)LOWHU�DQG�GULOOGRZQ�DFFRUGLQJ�WR

Choose )LOWHU�DQG�'ULOOGRZQ�$FFRUGLQJ�WR to fix a characteristic to a value in one step (meaning to filterit) and to drilldown according to another characteristic on the same axis (row axis or column axis).

,QVHUW�GULOOGRZQ�DFFRUGLQJ�WR

Choose ,QVHUW�'ULOOGRZQ�$FFRUGLQJ�WR to drilldown on a characteristic highlighted on the worksheetaccording to another characteristic.

6ZDS��ZLWK��

Choose 6ZDS��ZLWK��, to switch the roles of two characteristics. In this way you swap characteristicsbetween the row axes and the column axes of the results area.

$FWLYH�KLHUDUFK\

You use this function to switch active hierarchies on and off.

([SDQG�KLHUDUFK\

Choose ([SDQG +LHUDUFK\�→ 7R�/HYHO�� if you want to display more levels of the hierarchy.Alternatively, click on the hierarchy symbol to expand the hierarchy.

6HH�DOVR�

Working with Hierarchies [Seite 453]

$FWLYLWLHV

You access the various navigation functions either by double-clicking, via the context menu for thefilter cells and the results area, or by using the &KDQJH�4XHU\ function on the toolbar.

You carry out the more basic navigational steps by GRXEOH�FOLFNLQJ. For example, you use a double-click to move characteristics into or out of the drilldown:

• Double-clicking on the filter cell of a characteristic that has been drilled down upon, removes thecharacteristic from the drilldown, and converts it into a free characteristic.

• Double-clicking on a characteristic value in the results area, filters the characteristic according tothis characteristic value, and also removes the characteristic from the drilldown.

Navigational steps such as )LOWHU or�([FKDQJH�ZLWK are found in the FRQWH[W�PHQXV�of the filter cells,or the results area. You call up the context menu by selecting the relevant characteristic or key figure,and pressing the right mouse button. Alternatively, it is possible to call up these functions by selectingthe relevant characteristic or key figure, and choosing the symbol for 2/$3�)XQFWLRQV�IRU�$FWLYH�&HOOon the toolbar.



For a complex navigation involving several navigational steps, it is best to use the function&KDQJH�4XHU\��ORFDO�YLHZ�.

6HH�DOVR�

Changing Query Views [Seite 397]




([FHSWLRQ�5HSRUWLQJ

8VH

In exception reporting you select and highlight objects that are in some way different or critical. Resultsthat fall outside a set of predetermined threshold values (exceptions) are highlighted in color. Thisenables you to identify immediately any results that deviate from the expected results.

Exception reporting allows you to determine the objects that are critical for a query, both online, and inbackground processing.

,QWHJUDWLRQ

You define exceptions in the Business Explorer Analyzer, and evaluate them online when you executea query. If you want to evaluate exceptions for a large number of queries, this is done in thebackground. These exceptions are scheduled for background processing in the Reporting Agent of theAdministrator Workbench.

%([$QDO\]HU

4XHU\'HILQLWLRQ

([FHSWLRQ'HILQLWLRQ

5HSRUWLQJ$JHQW�6HWWLQJV

([FHSWLRQ

/RJ

([FHSWLRQ0RQLWRU

5HSRUWLQJ$JHQW�

6FKHGXOLQJ

Mail,

....

2/$3�6HUYHU

%XVLQHVV�([SORUHU

5HSRUWLQJ$JHQW

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You have defined a query which you want to use for exception reporting.

)XQFWLRQV

Exception reporting is made up of three functional areas: The H[FHSWLRQ�GHILQLWLRQ, the RQOLQHHYDOXDWLRQ of exceptions, and the evaluation of exceptions in EDFNJURXQG�SURFHVVHV.

• 'HILQLQJ�([FHSWLRQV

Exceptions are determined in the query definition and are valid globally for a particular queryin all workbooks.

The H[FHSWLRQ�GHILQLWLRQ includes:

• determining threshhold values or intervals and assigning a priority to them (bad, critical,good). The priority given to an exception corresponds to preassigned colors that becomemore ‘intense’ the greater the deviation. Up to 9 different shades of the traffic light colorsred, yellow, and green are used. These traffic light colors are also used in the AlertMonitor to display the results of exception reporting. See also Displaying Exceptions: AlertMonitor [Seite 427]



• determining cell restrictions. You use the cell restrictions to specify for which evaluation(cell area) you want the condition to apply.

See also:

Defining Exceptions [Seite 422]

• (YDOXDWLQJ�([FHSWLRQV�2QOLQH

The cell areas in the results area of an executed query are colored if they contain values thatdo not fall within the exceptions you defined previously.

• (YDOXDWLQJ�([FHSWLRQV�LQ�WKH�%DFNJURXQG

Settings that you make in the Reporting Agent are processed in the background. The result isdisplayed in the Alert Monitor, and logged in the exception log. If exceptions do occur, it ispossible to trigger a follow-up action in the Reporting Agent (a mail is sent to the personresponsible, for example). The Alert Monitor is part of the Business Explorer. You access theAlert Monitor from the open dialog in the BEx Analyzer toolbar. The number of exceptions thatoccur is displayed according to the selection of traffic light colors. The system will run anauthorization check before displaying the exceptions, if you want it to. The exceptions aredisplayed in a hierarchy with the following levels: InfoArea, InfoProvider, query, view, andexception.

See also:

Reporting Agent [Extern]

Defining the Exceptions Setting [Extern]

Displaying Exceptions: Alert Monitor [Seite 427]




3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You have executed a query. You want to define one or more exceptions for this query, and havechosen &KDQJH�4XHU\��JOREDO�GHILQLWLRQ� from the BEx toolbar.

3URFHGXUH


�� Choose 1HZ�([FHSWLRQ. (This menu path is under the pushbutton with the arrow pointing to theright, next to the ([FHSWLRQ symbol). You get to the 'HILQLQJ�([FHSWLRQV dialog box.

2. Give a name for the exception in the 'HVFULSWLRQ field.

If you want to just define the exception, and do not want to execute it actively in the query,remove the check from the DFWLYH field that is there by default.

3. In the (YDOXDWLRQ�IRU field, choose the structure elements, for which you want to evaluate theexception. Choose a structure element individually for every structure used, or use the HYHU\WKLQJsetting to apply the exception to all the structure elements.

You want to evaluate the exception for the key figure 6DOHV. Choose the value 6DOHV fromthe selection field for the NH\�ILJXUHV structure�

4. Choose the ([FHSWLRQ�YDOXHV�WDEVWULS.

Add one or more alert level rows to the list. See Conditions/Exceptions: Inserting, Changing,Deleting Rows [Seite 426]

An alert level row consists of:

− From-value

− To-value

− Alert Level

Specify floating point numbers for the from and to values. If you want to, you can leave HLWKHUthe from RU the to value blank.

The format depends on the country setting in the operative system.

The following convention makes it easier to handle numbers with many zeros:

An apostrophe after the number means multiplied by one thousand, a quotation markmeans multiplied by one million, and three apostrophe marks means multiplied by onebillion, for example 1.5” = 1.5 mil = 1,500,000.

Assign the exception priority you want to use as an Alert level. In the Excel formattingtemplates, used as standard in the BEx Analyzer, a color ramp is used to display the prioritygiven to an exception (dark green = good 1,...yellow = medium 5,...dark red = bad 9). Thereare a total of nine color shades, corresponding to nine different evels of priority. If you want toassign your own colors, choose )RUPDWWLQJ�→�3DWWHUQ from the BEx toolbar. (See also:Formatting [Seite 408])

All sales below 1,000 are bad, all sales above 100,000 are good, and all sales betweenthese two values are medium. Define three Alert level rows to correspond to these threecategories:



)URP 7R $OHUW�/HYHO

1.000 9 (bad)

1.000 100.000 5 (medium)

100.000 1 (good)

For report data, the alert level rows are processed in order. The alert level goes to the firstrow that is relevant for the report data.

5. Choose the &HOO�5HVWULFWLRQV�WDEVWULS, if you want to define more precisely, for which data cellsof the report the exception is evaluated.

Add one or more cell restriction rows to the list. See Conditions/Exceptions: Inserting,Changing, Deleting Rows [Seite 426]

A restriction row consists of

− Characteristic

− Operator

− a value (only with the operator IL[HG�YDOXH as a characteristic value, and the operator OHYHO asa number)

Choose from any of the free characteristics, or any of the characteristics from the rows andcolumns, that are used in a query. You cannot use characteristics that have already beenused in another restriction row in the list.

Choose from the following operators:

2SHUDWRUV 0HDQLQJ

HYHU\WKLQJ The cell context is not restricted. The exceptionis valid for every drilldown status of thecharacteristic.

WRWDOV�RQO\ The exception is valid only for aggregatedvalues of the characteristic.

HYHU\WKLQJ�H[FHSW�WRWDOV The exception applies to all values of thecharacteristic apart from aggregated values.

IL[HG�YDOXHV The exception is valid for only one particularvalue of the characteristic (“spare parts” under“product group”, for example). Specify thecharacteristic value you want to use in externalnon-compounded display format, or call thevalue help (the pushbutton with the magnifyingglass symbol) to choose a characteristic value.



/HYHO The exception is valid only for a particularhierarchy level of the characteristic. Specify thehierarchy level you want to use as a number inthe 9DOXH field.

In the hierarchy for thecharacteristic /RFDWLRQ, &RXQWU\ isthe second hierarchy level(FRQWLQHQW�±�FRXQWU\�±�VWDWH�±ORFDWLRQ) If you want the exceptionto be valid only for the hierarchylevel &RXQWU\, put the number 2into the 9DOXH field. If you want theexception to be valid only for thehierarchy level 6WDWH, put thenumber 3 into the 9DOXH field,because 6WDWH is the thirdhierarchy level.

The standard default cell restriction RQO\�WRWDOV��UHFRPPHQGHG�ZLWK�DEVROXWH�YDOXHV� is applied to allthose characteristics where you have not restricted the cells individually. This setting means that theexception is only valid for the aggregated values of this characteristic.

You are also able to use the default restriction HYHU\WKLQJ��UHFRPPHQGHG�IRU�UHODWLYHYDOXHV��in the field 'HIDXOW�RSHUDWRU�XVHG�IRU�DOO�FKDUDFWHULVWLFV�WKDW�DUH�QRW�GLVSOD\HG. Thissetting means that the exception is valid independently of the drilldown status of acharacteristic, whose cell context has not been restricted. This does not qualify as arestriction.

We recommend that you only use this setting with relative values, percentage deviations,for example.

3. Choose 2.. You return to the query definition.

4. Choose 6DYH�

&KDQJLQJ�([FHSWLRQV

1. Choose &KDQJH�H[FHSWLRQ� (This menu path is under the pushbutton with the arrow pointing to theright, next to the ([FHSWLRQ symbol). You get to the selection window for the exceptions that havealready been defined.

2. Select the exception you want to use, and choose 2.. You get to the dialog box 'HILQLQJH[FHSWLRQV� This is where you make the changes.

3. In the query definition, choose 6DYH.

'HOHWLQJ�([FHSWLRQV

1. Choose ([FHSWLRQ. You get to the selection window for the exceptions that have already beendefined.

2. Select the exception you want to use, and choose 'HOHWH�

3. In the query definition choose 6DYH.

5HVXOW

You have defined or changed an exception for a query. Execute the query. The exception is evaluatedonline. The cells that are affected by the exception are displayed with the appropriate color shading inthe results area of the query.



The descriptions of the exceptions are displayed in the query view, where youactivate/deactivate them by double-clicking on them individually, or by choosing /D\RXW�→'LVSOD\�([FHSWLRQV�from the context menu (right mouse click). The descriptions for theexceptions are inserted into the cell area below the filter cells.

Exceptions are evaluated in the background, if they involve a large number of queries, for example.Schedule the exceptions for background processing in the Administrator Workbench Reporting Agent.

See Reporting Agent [Extern], Defining the Exceptions Setting [Extern].



&RQGLWLRQV�([FHSWLRQV��,QVHUWLQJ��&KDQJLQJ��'HOHWLQJ�5RZV

8VH

When you define conditions, you must set up condition rows. When you defineexceptions, you can create alert level rows and restriction rows.

3URFHGXUH

,QVHUWLQJ�D�QHZ�URZ

1. Choose 1HZ.

2. Select the settings you want in the entry field under the list.

3. Choose &RS\. A new entry appears in the list with the new settings. You can now immediatelycreate a new row in the entry field.

&KDQJLQJ�URZV

1. Select the required row in the list.

2. Make the required changes in the entry field under the list.

3. Choose &RS\. The row has now been changed accordingly.

'HOHWLQJ�URZV

1. Select the required row in the list.

2. Choose 'HOHWH.

The procedure applies when you are creating

− Condition rows (see Defining Conditions [Seite 431])

− Alert level and restriction rows (see Defining Exceptions [Seite 422])



'LVSOD\LQJ�([FHSWLRQV��$OHUW�0RQLWRU

8VH

The Alert Monitor lists and displays exceptions containing values outside the specified thresholdvalues.

,QWHJUDWLRQ

Exceptions are displayed both in the BEx Analyzer and the Reporting Agent Scheduler of theAdministrator Workbench. In addition, you can display exceptions as alert monitors in a Webapplication (see Alert Monitors [Seite 197]).

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You have defined one or more exceptions (see Defining Exceptions [Seite 422]) and chosen thefollow-up action $OHUW�0RQLWRU for background processing in the Reporting Agent of the AdministratorWorkbench (see Defining the Exceptions Setting [Extern]).

)XQFWLRQV

Exceptions that trigger the follow up action $OHUW 0RQLWRU are logged in the exception log, and displayedin the Alert Monitor. If you activated the authorizations check when you set up the follow up action, thetype of recipient, and the recipient’s authorizations, are taken into account when the exceptions aredisplayed.

%([�$QDO\]HU�GLVSOD\

In the BEx Analyzer, the exceptions are listed starting with the InfoArea level up to the individualviews, that is the drilldowns you ran in the background. Views are named according to:

• the characteristic values of the characteristics in the filter

• the name of the characteristic in the drilldown

Double clicking on a view jumps you from the Alert Monitor directly into the corresponding view in thequery. You get the information about the key figures from this view, and you can also continue tonavigate from here.

Note that data for this view is taken from the current dataset. The exceptions that appearin the Alert Monitor however, refer to the data status that was valid at the time of the lastbatch run. The number of exceptions in the Alert Monitor may therefore be different to thenumber of exceptions in the query view.

5HSRUWLQJ�$JHQW�6FKHGXOHU�GLVSOD\

The Alert Monitor is displayed in the Reporting Agent up to the exceptions level. The number of red,yellow and green alerts is listed for each exception.

$FWLYLWLHV

%([�$QDO\]HU�GLVSOD\

1. Start the BEx Analyzer, and choose 2SHQ.

2. Choose ([FHSWLRQV.

You can also display the alerts out of a workbook. Choose *RWR�→�([FHSWLRQV from theBEx toolbar. You get a list of alerts for the exceptions of the particular query you arelooking at.

5HSRUWLQJ�$JHQW�6FKHGXOHU�GLVSOD\



In the right-hand tree of the Reporting Agent Scheduler, choose $OO�SDFNHWV�→�([FHSWLRQ�UHSRUWLQJ�→$OHUW�0RQLWRU�



&RQGLWLRQV

8VH

In the BEx Analyzer, you formulate conditions for efficient data analysis. In the results area of thequery, the data is restricted according to the conditions so that only the part of the results area thatyou are interested in is displayed.

Conditions do not affect the results lines, that is, the results lines correspond to the query results lineswithout this condition.

You can define several conditions for one query. You can link several conditions logically using AND,to make different conditions apply to the query at the same time, as long as they are all active.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You have defined and executed a query, and now want to define one or more conditions for this query.

)XQFWLRQV

Conditions help you restrict how you view query data in the following way:

• $EVROXWH�&RQGLWLRQV: A line is filtered independently of the other lines, when its reference valueexceeds a specified threshold value.

• 5DQNHG�/LVWV: Here, all lines of the displayed list are considered and their relationship to eachother decides whether the lines are displayed. Ranked lists are always sorted automatically.

The following operators help you to create rank lists:

• 7RS�1��%RWWRP�1: The ranked list is arranged according to a particular number.

Customers: Top 3 or bottom 5 sales volumes

You get a list of the three customers with the highest sales, and also the five customerswith the lowest sales.

• 7RS�SHUFHQW��ERWWRP�SHUFHQW��The ranked list is arranged according to a particular percentage.

Material: Top 25% of sales revenue

You get a list of materials with the highest sales volume that account for 25% of the totalrevenue.

Material: Bottom 25% of sales revenue

You get a list of materials with the lowest sales volume that account for 25% of totalrevenue.

• 7RS�WRWDO��ERWWRP�WRWDO� The ranked list is arranged according to a particular totals value.

Products: Top total 20,000 EUR of sales volume

You get a list of products with the lowest sales volume, whose combined sales volumemakes a total of 20,000 EUR. First, all sales volumes are sorted in descending order andthen totals are formed until the threshold value of 20,000 is exceeded. Those productsthat exceed the 20,000 EUR threshold are left in the list.

The ranked list for this condition might look like this:

3URGXFW 6DOHV�9ROXPH

A 11,000 EUR



B 7,000 EUR

C 5,000 EUR

Product C is included in the list, even though it means the total sum is greater than 20,000EUR. All the products that have a lower sales volume than product C are no longerdisplayed.

If you want to create a ranked list of the products with the lowest sales volume whosecombined sales total a certain amount, use the %RWWRP�WRWDO operator.

6HH�DOVR�

Defining Conditions [Seite 431]




3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You have executed a query. You want to define one or more conditions for this query and havechosen &KDQJH�TXHU\��JOREDO�GHILQLWLRQ� from the BEx toolbar.

3URFHGXUH


�� Choose 1HZ�&RQGLWLRQ. (This menu path is under the pushbutton with the arrow pointingdownwards on the right next to the &RQGLWLRQ symbol). You get to the dialog box 'HILQH�FRQGLWLRQV.

2. Specify a name for the condition in the 'HVFULSWLRQ field.

If you want to just define the condition and do not want to execute it actively in the query,remove the check from the DFWLYH field that is there by default.

3. You now have the following options:

− In the field (YDOXDWH�FRQGLWLRQV�EHORZ�IRU, choose the option $OO�FKDUDFWHULVWLFV�LQGHSHQGHQW�LQGULOOGRZQ if you want to evaluate the lower condition rows separately for all the characteristicsin the drilldown.

The condition row is 6DOHV�7RS��.

If the characteristic &XVWRPHU is the only one in the query, the top 5 customers as far assales are concerned are displayed because of the condition. If the characteristic 3URGXFWin the query is the only one in the drilldown, the top five products with regards to sales aredisplayed. Additionally, if &XVWRPHU�and 3URGXFW are in the drilldown, the top fivecustomers and the top five products with regards to sales are displayed, as well as all 25combinations of the two.

− In the field (YDOXDWH�FRQGLWLRQV�EHORZ�IRU, choose the option 6LQJOH�FKDUDFWHULVWLFV�RUFKDUDFWHULVWLF�FRPELQDWLRQV if you want to evaluate only on certain drilldowns of definedcharacteristics or characteristic combinations. You can then make entries in the list ofcharacteristics which are used in the queries in rows, columns, or free characteristics.

a. If you only want to evaluate the condition if it is in the drilldown, select it with a check.


You have selected &XVWRPHU as the only characteristic. The condition is only evaluated if&XVWRPHU�is in the drilldown. Only the top five customers with their sales are displayed.

b. Select several characteristics with a check, if you want to evaluate the condition forcharacteristic combinations.


You have selected the characteristics &XVWRPHU and 3URGXFW with a check. The conditionis only evaluated if &XVWRPHU�and 3URGXFW are in the drilldown at the same time. Theoption $OO�FKDUDFWHULVWLFV�LQGHSHQGHQW�LQ�GULOOGRZQ displays the top five customer-productcombinations with sales, meaning only five rows instead of 25 (see above).



If you have defined several conditions for a query, there may be conflicting conditions thatrefer to the same characteristics. In this case, certain rules of priority apply. It is generallythe most specific condition that applies when there are conflicts.

One condition defines the WRS�ILYH�VDOHV for the characteristic &XVWRPHU, and a secondcondition defines the ERWWRP�WKUHH�VDOHV in the customer-product combination.

If only the characteristic &XVWRPHU is in the drilldown, only the first condition applies. So,only the condition WRS��VDOHV is used for the characteristic &XVWRPHU.

If &XVWRPHU and�3URGXFW are in the drilldown at the same time, you can use bothconditions according to their definitions. In this case, the second condition applies since itis more specific due to its reference to the characteristic combination.

4. In the field 3UHVHQW�DOO�YDOXHV�WKDW�IXOILOO�DW�OHDVW�RQH�RI�WKH�IROORZLQJ�FRQGLWLRQV, enter one or morecondition rows into the list. See Conditions/Exceptions: Inserting, Changing, Deleting Rows [Seite426]

A condition row is always derived from the determination of an element for every structureused in the query (usually one or two structures), an operator, and a value that matches theoperator.

You can choose from the following operators for threshold conditions:

− LV�HTXDO�WR

− LV�QRW�HTXDO�WR

− LV�OHVV�WKHQ

− LV�JUHDWHU�WKDQ

− LV�OHVV�WKDQ�RU�HTXDO�WR

− LV�JUHDWHU�WKDQ�RU�HTXDO�WR

− LV�EHWZHHQ��LV�LQ�WKH�LQWHUYDO�

− LV�QRW�EHWZHHQ��LV�QRW�LQ�WKH�LQWHUYDO�

These operators demand a floating point number as a value. For the operators LV�LQ�LQWHUYDOand LV�QRW�LQ�LQWHUYDO, you must enter a value area, that is, a lower and an upper thresholdvalue.

You can choose from the following operators for ranked list functions:

− 7RS�1

− %RWWRP�1

− 7RS�SHUFHQW

− %RWWRP�SHUFHQW

− 7RS�VXP

− %RWWRP�VXP

For 7RS�%RWWRP�1 you must enter a whole, positive number as the value. For 7RS�%RWWRPSHUFHQW enter a number between 0 and 100. For 7RS�%RWWRP�VXP you can also enter a floatingpoint number (for example, 15.7).

The format depends on the country setting in the operative system.

The following convention makes it easier to handle numbers with many zeros:



An apostrophe after the number means multiplied by one thousand, a quotation markmeans multiplied by one million, and three apostrophe marks means multiplied by onebillion, for example 1.5” = 1.5 mil = 1,500,000.

A group of condition rows is logically linked with OR. This means that at least one of thecondition rows has to be filled for the entire condition to be filled for one characteristicvalue.

5. Choose 2.. This takes you back to the query definition.

6. Choose 6DYH�

&KDQJLQJ�&RQGLWLRQV

4. Choose &KDQJH�FRQGLWLRQ� (This menu path is under the pushbutton with the arrow pointingdownwards on the right next to the &RQGLWLRQ symbol). You get to the selection window for theconditions that have already been defined.

5. Choose the condition you want to use, and then choose 2.. You get to the dialog box 'HILQLQJFRQGLWLRQV, where you make the changes.

6. In the query definition, choose 6DYH.

'HOHWLQJ�&RQGLWLRQV

4. Choose &RQGLWLRQ. You get to the selection window for the conditions that have already beendefined.

5. Choose the condition you want, and then choose 'HOHWH.

6. In the query definition choose 6DYH.

5HVXOW

You have defined or changed a condition for a query. Execute the query. Only those objects aredisplayed which fulfill the defined conditions.

Display the descriptions of the conditions in the query view, and activate/deactivate themwith a double-click or with the right mouse button. Choose /D\RXW�→�'LVSOD\�FRQGLWLRQV.

6HH�DOVR�

Using Conditions [Seite 434]



8VLQJ�&RQGLWLRQV

8VH

You can define several conditions for a query. Activate/deactivate the conditions to create differentviews of the data for displaying in the BEx Analyzer.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You have defined several conditions for a query.

)XQFWLRQV

'LVSOD\LQJ�FRQGLWLRQV�DV�WH[W�HOHPHQWV

You can display the descriptions of the conditions in the query view. In the BEx Analyzer, choose/D\RXW�→�'LVSOD\�FRQGLWLRQV.

8VLQJ�VHYHUDO�FRQGLWLRQV�LQ�D�VLQJOH�YLHZ

If you have set a condition to DFWLYH in the definition, then the status DFWLYH appears next to thedescription of the condition. Using several conditions at the same time can create a conflictingsituation, and the condition is deactivated automatically. The following status descriptions appear inthe display:

• FDQQRW�EH�DSSOLHG

The condition refers to:

− a characteristic that has not been drilled down

− a characteristic that has been drilled down with an active presentation hierarchy

You can use the condition by drilling down on the aggregated characteristic or the activepresentation hierarchy. The status DFWLYH�appears�in the display.

• QRW�XVHG

The condition refers to a characteristic that is already being used in another active condition.There is a collision. Only when you deactivate the other condition does this condition comeinto effect. The status appears as DFWLYH in the display.

Condition 1: Customers: Top 3 or bottom 5 sales volumes

Condition 2: Customers and products: Purchase order value > 50,000

If the characteristics &XVWRPHUV�and 3URGXFWV�have been drilled down and condition 2 isactive, then condition 1 automatically has the status QRW�XVHG�� If you deactivate condition2, condition 1 is automatically activated. If you activate condition 1, condition 2 isautomatically QRW�XVHG.

If you activate a FRQGLWLRQ�IRU�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�FRPELQDWLRQV�(condition 2 in the aboveexample), then the UHVXOWV�URZ�is automatically RPLWWHG.

$FWLYDWLQJ��GHDFWLYDWLQJ�FRQGLWLRQV

• If you have displayed the conditions as text elements, you can activate/deactivate the condition bydouble clicking on the corresponding status descriptions DFWLYH and QRW DFWLYH�

Alternatively, choose $FWLYDWH�FRQGLWLRQ or 'HDFWLYDWH�FRQGLWLRQ from the context menu (rightmouse button on the status description).

• If you call the context menu for the results area (right mouse click in the results area), you have afurther option of activating/deactivating the conditions there under &RQGLWLRQV.



6HOHFWLQJ�)LOWHU�9DOXHV

8VH

You use the value selection in the Business Explorer Analyzer to select filter values for characteristics.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You have executed a query in an Excel workbook. You have also selected a characteristic in the filtercells, and chosen 6HOHFW�ILOWHU�YDOXH�� from the context menu (right mouse button).

3URFHGXUH

6HOHFWLQJ�VLQJOH�YDOXHV

This function is used only if the characteristic does QRW�have an active display hierarchy.

1. In the top left of the selection field, choose VLQJOH�YDOXH� and �IODW�OLVW� as the hierarchy.

2. Select one or more values from the list of available values displayed in the left-hand window, anddrag the value(s) into the 6HOHFWLRQ box on the right (alternatively, use the pushbutton with thearrow pointing to the right to move the values).

Only those values for which there are data records in the InfoProvider, and which you areauthorized to use are displayed. The number of available values in the left-hand window isrestricted to 100. It is possible to remove this restriction, or to choose the displayed valuesaccording to other criteria. See Filter Values: Formulating Selection Conditions [Seite439].

6HOHFWLQJ�YDOXH�UDQJHV

This function is used only if the characteristic does QRW�have an active display hierarchy.

1. Choose YDOXH�UDQJH from the top left of the selection field, and the operator that you want to use(top right).

The following operators are possible:

− LV�EHWZHHQ




− LV�OHVV�WKDQ

2. If you choose the operator EHWZHHQ, first select the upper and lower limits of the interval from thelist of available values in the left-hand window, and choose the button with the arrow pointing tothe right. The characteristics for the interval you select appear in the right-hand 6HOHFWLRQ�window.

If you choose one of the operators LV�JUHDWHU�WKDQ�RU�HTXDO�WR, LV�OHVV�WKDQ�RU�HTXDO�WR, LVJUHDWHU�WKDQ� or LV�OHVV�WKDQ, select a value from the list of available values in the left-handwindow, drag it across, and drop it into the 6HOHFWLRQ window on the right (alternatively use thebutton with the arrow pointing to the right to move the value across into the 6HOHFWLRQ window).

Intervals are formed using a key and not according to the displayed texts. For example,[January; November] also contains August.



6HOHFWLQJ�KLHUDUFK\�QRGHV

This function is used only if the characteristic has an active display hierarchy.

If VLQJOH�YDOXHV is set in the top left of the selection field, the active display hierarchy appears in the topright corner of the screen.

If the display hierarchy for the characteristic is active, the standard hierarchy (IODW�OLVW) isnot displayed, and you cannot select any value ranges.


5. Select one or more hierarchy nodes, and drag the node(s) into the 6HOHFWLRQ window on the right(alternatively, use the button with the arrow pointing to the right to move the node(s)).

6HDUFKLQJ�IRU�YDOXHV

1. Specify a search term in the entry field (bottom left).

2. Choose )LQG� The system searches locally in the displayed value list (not on the server). The firstvalue found that fits the search string is underlined.

3. Click on the )LQG�button again to move through the list of values that the system has foundmatching the search term.

'LUHFW�HQWU\

This function is used only if you want to restrict a characteristic to a value or a valuerange. You cannot make an entry directly when you are selecting structure elements (keyfigures, for example) and hierarchy nodes.

3. In the entry field (bottom left) specify a characteristic value in external format.

4. Choose the button with the arrow pointing to the right.

The system checks whether this value exists. If the value does not exist, you get an errormessage.

Note the following conventions for making entries for value ranges and intervals:

9DOXH�UDQJH: <operator><value>, for example, >= 1995

,QWHUYDOV: <lower limit>�<upper limit>, for example, A01; Z99

'HOHWLQJ�YDOXHV�IURP�WKH�VHOHFWLRQ�ZLQGRZ

If you want to delete values from the selection, highlight the relevant values in the 6HOHFWLRQ window onthe right-hand side of the screen, and drag them back into the window on the left (alternatively, use thebutton with the arrow pointing to the left to move the values).

([FOXGLQJ�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�YDOXHV

You use this function to select the values that you do not need for your report.

This function is only used with single values.

1. In the right-hand window, select the value that you want to exclude.

2. Choose ([FOXGH�IURP�VHOHFWLRQ from the context menu (right mouse click)�



If you want to include the value in the selection again, choose ,QFOXGH�LQ�VHOHFWLRQ from thecontext menu (right mouse click).

'LVSOD\LQJ�YDOXH�NH\V

Characteristic values can also be displayed as value keys.

1. Select a characteristic value from either the left-hand or right-hand window.

2. Choose 7HFKQLFDO�QDPHV�from the context menu (right mouse click)�

The characteristic values appear as value keys in 6HOHFWLRQ window on the right-hand side ofthe screen. On the left-hand side, you see the value keys in a separate column to the right ofthe characteristic value name.

5HVXOW

You have filtered a characteristic by certain characteristic values. Choose 2..

The query is reconstructed according to the selection criteria you specified. The selected characteristicvalues are displayed in the filter cells, on the right, next to the corresponding characteristic. Only thecharacteristic values you selected are included in the results area.



)LOWHU�9DOXHV��)RUPXODWLQJ�6HOHFWLRQ�&RQGLWLRQV

8VH

The filter values displayed in the selection dialog in the left-hand window (seeSelecting Filter Values [Seite 436]) are restricted to 100 values in the extended help. It ispossible to remove this restriction, or to choose the displayed values according toother criteria.

This function is not available for displaying hierarchy nodes, or choosing structureelements.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You have executed a query. You have also selected a free characteristic from thefilter cells, and chosen the 6HOHFW�ILOWHU�YDOXH function from the context menu (rightmouse button).

3URFHGXUH

Choose 'LVSOD\�2WKHU�9DOXHV (button with yellow arrow, bottom left). You get to the 6HOHFWLRQ&RQGLWLRQV dialog box.

This is where you

• formulate selection conditions

• deactivate the 100 values restriction.

If there are a lot of characteristic values, and you choose to deactivate RQO\�WKH�ILUVW��YDOXHV� the value selection process may take a long time.

The RQO\�WKH�ILUVW��YDOXHV option is inactive if there are less than 100 values available.

)RUPXODWLQJ�6HOHFWLRQ�&RQGLWLRQV

1. Choose the attribute (the characteristic is itself always an attribute) that you want to restrict from5HVWULFWLRQ�V� in the left window.

2. Choose an operator.

The following operators are possible:

− LV�HTXDO�WR




− LV�OHVV�WKDQ

− LV�EHWZHHQ

− FRQWDLQV�SDWWHUQ

3. Specify a characteristic value in external format. If you want to use the help function to choose theattribute values, click on the pushbutton with the three dots next to the field.



If you choose the operator EHWZHHQ, you have to specify both the upper and lower valuesof the interval.

4. Choose the button with the arrow pointing to the right, to apply the restriction. The dialog staysopen so that you are able to add further restrictions to your selection condition.

5. Choose 2.. The list of available values displayed in the left-hand window of the selection dialog,is now restricted according to the selection conditions you specified.

If, in the InfoObject maintenance, under the settings for the Business Explorer, youspecify, that you want the characteristic display to contain text (only text, or text and key)and there are in fact texts available for the characteristic, a 7H[W attribute is offered in the5HVWULFWLRQ�V� in the left-hand window. In this case, the operators HTXDO�WR and FRQWDLQVSDWWHUQ, are available. The following is an example of the kind of selection condition youmight want to apply:

“Display all products that contain the text WRRWKSDVWH”

“Display all values containing the text SOXJ, for the characteristic 0DWHULDO”

&KDQJLQJ�6HOHFWLRQ�&RQGLWLRQV

1. In the right-hand window, highlight the restriction that you want to change.

2. The settings appear in the 5HVWULFWLRQ�V� left-hand window, where you are able to make thechanges.

3. Choose the button with the arrow pointing to the right, to apply the changes.

'HOHWLQJ�6HOHFWLRQ�&RQGLWLRQV

1. In the right-hand window, highlight the restriction that you want to delete.

2. Choose the button with the arrow pointing to the left. This removes the restriction from theselection.



%([�0DS

3XUSRVH

Many characteristics in the Business Information Warehouse, for example, customer, sales region,and country, contain important geographical information. You evaluate geographical information in theBEx Map, along with key figures that are relevant to business. The BEx Map is BW’s GeographicalInformation System (GIS). It is integrated into the Business Explorer.

,QWHJUDWLRQ

The BEx Map is part of the %XVLQHVV�([SORUHU��It is used for reporting on geo-relevant data.

Geo-relevant InfoObjects are stored and maintained in the 0HWDGDWD�5HSRVLWRU\. The master data forgeo-InfoObjects is equipped with geo-attributes. InfoObjects are geocoded using an external tool:ArcView from ESRI (Environmental Systems Research Institute).

)XQFWLRQV

With the BEx Map, you prepare and evaluate data of a geographical nature (characteristics such ascustomer, sales region, and country, for example). The geo-relevant data is displayed graphically on amap. Using enhanced navigation options (“geographical drilldown”), regional information can beevaluated more easily at different levels of detail. A map shows the spatial proximity of places andregions, allowing geographical connections to be more clearly represented.

3URFHVV

The following graphic illustrates how geographical data is evaluated using the BEx Map:

��

��

��! #"�$%"'&)(+*�,-(+.�*/0.�*�132%45$5657

8 (+,)9�":$%9<;�$59�":$%48 (+,)9�":$%9<;�$%9�"'$�4

=?>%@?A=?>%@?A

BDCFEHGJI�K-LNMNOP�QNOFRHMJS)T3QFR�QBDCFEHGJI�K-LNMNOBDCFEHGJI�K)LNMFOP�QNOFR�MJS)T5QFR�QP�QNOFR�MJS)T5QFR�Q

�U$�,3VDW)X-4%*�Y$%,3V'W)X-45*

Z *�"'�<[,-(+,Z *\"D�<[�,-(�, ] ,5^_[�,-(+,] ,3^`[,-(+,

>%@?A>%@?A

acb �Yded!*�.�6)4)&)&5.�*acb �fded�*+.�6)4)&)&5.�*

g�*�.ihf&34%*g*�.ihj&345*

P�MFRHQ�T3QFR�Qk5M?l?G-O?m R�G)S:nP�MFR�Q�T3QFR�Qk3MJl?GJOJm R�G)S:n

Z 43.�63.%��":$%9

Zpo'8o $iqr. a 2tsu4)6)(

Z 43.�vw .�.�*��":$%,)(�4-&

2. In the InfoObject maintenance, flag the geo-relevant characteristics (country, for example) that youwant to use as geo-characteristics.

3. You load the corresponding shapefiles [Extern] into the BW system. You maintain the assignmentof shape file and master data (mapping between geo-characteristic and shape file). SeeSAPBWKEY Maintenance for Static Geo-Characteristics [Extern]

If you want to use the BEx Map to report on geo-characteristics that show information in pointform (customer, plant, sales office, for example) you have to geocode these characteristics.See Geocoding [Extern]



4. You define a query with geo-characteristics, and insert the query into a workbook. Choose /D\RXW→ �$WWDFK�0DS� Query data of geographical relevance is displayed on the map in the BusinessExplorer, or on the Web. You navigate around the map to report further on the geo-relevant data.

See:

Geographical Data Analysis with BEx Map [Seite 443]

Maps [Seite 202]

Navigating in Maps [Seite 379]



*HRJUDSKLFDO�'DWD�$QDO\VLV�ZLWK�%([�0DS

8VH

With the BEx Map that is integrated into the BEx Analyzer, you can prepare andanalyze data that has geographical relevance. The geo-relevant data is displayed ona map, so that you can see regional features and geographical connections at aglance.

,QWHJUDWLRQ

The BEx Map is part of the BEx Analyzer, and appears in a new worksheet in theworkbook. The size of the BEx Map corresponds to the initial size of the workbook.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

In the BEx Analyzer, you have to execute a query containing at least one geo-relevant characteristic, meaning that the query contains at least one InfoObject(characteristic) that has been defined as a VWDWLF�JHR�,QIR2EMHFW in the InfoObjectmaintenance, and for which data with geographical relevance exists.

)XQFWLRQV

The BEx Map allows you to analyze regional features at different levels of detail. Thebasic concept underlying the BEx Map, is that of laying different map layers, eachcontaining various geographical data, one on top of the other, and displaying at themon one map. A map layer behaves in the same way as a transparent slide, which canbe changed from visible to invisible. For every map layer, you can choose varioustypes of graphical presentation (Renderers) to display your data, for example, colorshading, bar charts or pie charts. You can arrange the map layers hierarchically, forexample, continents → countries → states → districts, and navigate from one maplayer to the next.

Choosing various renderers to display your data, also means that you can displayseveral key figures on a single map layer, for example, as bar charts and colorshading.

$FWLYLWLHV

Execute a query that has geo-relevant data. Choose /D\RXW�→�$WWDFK�0DS from theBEx standard toolbar. A new worksheet appears in the workbook with the name ofyour query in the title line.

The BEx Map consists of the following parts:

0DS�'HVLJQ

In the map design area (left) you define the navigation state for the query that youwant to see on the map. Here, you can specify the map layer on which you want tonavigate, and set the key figures that you want to display.

0DS�9LHZ

The maps are displayed in the chosen setting in the map view area (middle). Usingthe symbols from the BEx Map toolbar, you can pan, zoom in and zoom out, anddetermine the sequence of the map layers. The buttons found under the map, display



which map layers are visible, and allow you to display and remove the different maplayers quickly.

/HJHQG

The legend (to the right) helps to explain the data displayed on the map. The legendgets its values from the query, and adjusts itself dynamically to the currentnavigational state.

6HH�DOVR�

Analyzing Data Geographically Using the BEx Map [Seite 445]



$QDO\]LQJ�'DWD�*HRJUDSKLFDOO\�8VLQJ�WKH�%([�0DS

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You have executed a query with geo-relevant data, and chosen /D\RXW�→�$WWDFK�0DS from thetoolbar.

3URFHGXUH

0DS�'HVLJQ�6HWWLQJV

You can see your key figures and characteristics of your query in the map design. The static geo-relevant characteristics are displayed as tabstrips. In every tabstrip, the remaining key figures andcharacteristics of the query are ready for you to select. The fields with the key figures andcharacteristics they contain, are arranged in a way that enables you, for example, to make thefollowing settings: “6KRZ�PH the key figure (sales figures, for example) E\�the characteristic (calendaryear/month, for example) XVLQJ the renderer (bar chart, for example)”.

1. In the tabstrips, choose the map layer that you want to work with.

You can choose from the following settings options:

'LVSOD\�D�NH\�ILJXUH 1. Choose a key figure from the 6KRZ�PH�� field.

2. In the XVLQJ�� field, choose a renderer (color shading, bar chartor pie chart).

If you want to display only one key figure on the map,we recommend that you display it as color shading.

'LVSOD\�VHYHUDO�NH\ILJXUHV

1. Choose the key figures you want to display from the 6KRZ�PH��field.


We recommend that you display several key figures asbar charts or pie charts, because with color shading, youcan only display one key figure.

'LVSOD\�NH\�ILJXUHVUHVWULFWHG�E\FKDUDFWHULVWLF

1. In the 6KRZ�PH�� field, select a key figure (sales figures, forexample) and, in the E\ field, choose a characteristic (calendaryear/month, for example) that you want to use to drilldown onthe characteristic.


If you want to see both the relative values and the sumof the characteristic values, we recommend that you usea pie chart.

If you want to see an absolute comparison of theindividual values, we recommend that you choose a barchart.



6XSHULPSRVH�NH\�ILJXUHV 1. In the 6KRZ�PH�� field, select the key figures you want todisplay, and choose a renderer (color shading, bar chart or piechart) in the XVLQJ�� field.

Since the underlaid key figure is displayed automaticallyas color shading, we recommend that you display thesekey figures as bar charts or pie charts.

2. Choose 2YHU. A window appears in which you choose theoverlaid key figure. This is displayed automatically as colorshading.

2. Choose $SSO\�WR�PDS.

'LVSOD\LQJ�'\QDPLF�*HR�FKDUDFWHULVWLFV

You can also display dynamic geo-characteristics on the map (VHH�DOVR��Static and Dynamic Geo-characteristics [Extern]). Since dynamic geo-characteristics deal with regional information (customer /vendor addresses, for example) the regional location display enables you to see distribution within aregion.

1. Choose 6KRZ in the 5HJLRQDO�/RFDWLRQV area.

2. Select the geo-characteristic you want to use.

3. Choose $SSO\�WR�PDS.

6HWWLQJ�XS�WKH�3URSHUWLHV�RI�WKH�*UDSKLFDO�'LVSOD\V

You determine the properties of the graphical displays as follows:

�� Choose the 6HWWLQJV�� button located next to the XVLQJ�� field. You reach the 5HQGHUHU�3URSHUWLHVdialog box.

�� You can change the title of the legend here: Choose &KDQJH�'HIDXOW�7LWOH�and enter a title in thefield /HJHQG�7LWOH.

�� You can set the following properties for every renderer:

&RORU�VKDGLQJ %DU�&KDUW 3LH�FKDUW

• Color selection

• Color ramp

• Number of colors used

• Color selection

• Bar height

• Bar width

• Color selection

• Maximum pie size

• Minimum pie size

6HWWLQJ�5HJLRQDO�/RFDWLRQ�6\PERO�3URSHUWLHV

You determine the properties of the regional location symbols as follows:

1. Choose the 3URSHUWLHV button in the 5HJLRQDO /RFDWLRQV area. You get to the 6\PERO�6HWWLQJVpopup.

�� You can change the title of the legend here: Choose &KDQJH�'HIDXOW�7LWOH�and enter a title in thefield /HJHQG�7LWOH.

3. You can set the following properties for the regional location symbols:

− Symbol type: Circle, square, triangle, cross

− Symbol color

− Symbol size



1DYLJDWLRQ�2SWLRQV�LQ�WKH�0DS�9LHZ

'HIDXOW�1DYLJDWLRQ

• You can ]RRP�LQ�RQ�D�GHWDLOHG�YLHZ.

Lasso a part of the map that you want to look at in more detail (hold down the left mousebutton and select the section you want to see by dragging the cursor across the relevantarea). You get a detailed view of this part of the map.

• You can XVH�JHR�GULOOGRZQ WR�QDYLJDWH�LQ�WKH�ORZHU�OD\HUV.

By double clicking on a region on the map, you get to the next lower map layer. The mapdesign settings are transferred automatically to this map layer. At the same time, you zoom inon the region you lassoed. The buttons located under the map show you which map layers arecurrently visible.

1DYLJDWLRQ�XVLQJ�6\PEROV�IURP�WKH�%([�0DS�7RROEDU

)XOO�([WHQW

=RRP�,Q

=RRP�2XW

3DQ

0DS�3URSHUWLHV

• )XOO�([WHQW

Choose )XOO�([WHQW if you want to see a view of the whole map.

• =RRP�,Q

Choose =RRP�,Q if you want to display a more detailed view of the current map.

• =RRP�2XW

Choose =RRP�2XW if you want to display a less detailed view of the current map.

• 3DQ

Choose 3DQ� if you want to look at adjoining areas of the map, but do not want to change thesize of the map. The mouse cursor appears as a “hand”. By holding down the left mousebutton, you can pan all over the map.

• 0DS�3URSHUWLHV

You can determine the sequence of the map layers, and the properties of a map layer.

1. Choose 0DS�3URSHUWLHV. You reach the 0DS�3URSHUWLHV�dialog box.

2. Choose 0RYH�8S or 0RYH�'RZQ��if you want to change the sequence of the map layers.



Note that, in some cases, the regions in the layer above may hide the regions in the layerbelow.

3. Choose /D\HU�3URSHUWLHV, if you want to change the settings for a map layer. You reachthe 0DS�/D\HU�6HWWLQJV dialog box. Here you can make the following settings for everymap layer.

• Fill color

• Fill type: Solid fill, transparent, diagonal, diagonal stripes

• Outline color

• Outline width

8VLQJ�%XWWRQV�WR�6KRZ�+LGH�0DS�/D\HUV

The buttons found underneath the map show you which map layers are visible. The arrangement fromleft to right corresponds to the sequence of the map layers from bottom to top. You can show severalmap layers at any one time. If you choose to show a map layer, the tabstrip belonging to it appearsautomatically in the 0DS�'HVLJQ.



6DYLQJ�4XHU\�9DULDQWV

8VH

A query variant is a query for which the variable values have already been selected. You can also usethe variants for opening the query in the online display and for background processing.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You have defined a query that contains at least one variable that is ready for input.

3URFHGXUH

1. Open the query with the variables that are ready for input.

2. You get to the dialog window for entering variables. Choose 6DYH�DV�9DULDQW�� from the contextmenu on the dialog box.

3. Enter a name and a description for the variant. Choose whether you only want to use the variantfor background processing (then the variant is no longer available for online display) and whetheryou want to protect the variant (then only you can change the variant).


5HVXOW

The query variant can now be

• called up when you next open the query

• assigned to a setting for background printing or exception reporting in background processing.

See: Defining the Print Setting [Extern], Defining the Exceptions Setting [Extern]

6HH�DOVR�




4XHU\�3URSHUWLHV

)XQFWLRQV

The properties of the query offer options for configuring GLVSOD\, LQWHUDFWLRQ�and FROXPQ�ZLGWK�in thequery. You can determine whether:

• The formatting of the query is to be adjusted after refreshing

• Identical keys are displayed

• You want to process queries further using a VBA exit.

• Links to documents for metadata master data are displayed

• Interactive functions are available in the query

• Variable values are saved and reused

• Formatting and column width of the cell area are adjusted after the refreshing of the updatedquery data

Under LQIRUPDWLRQ you can find the technical details of the query and the workbook.

'LVSOD\

$GMXVWLQJ�IRUPDW�DIWHU�UHIUHVKLQJ

Formatting for the query underlines the type of data contained in a cell, highlighting the structure of thedelivered results. As a rule, after refreshing the position and size of the cell area in the results area ofthe query changes. The function $GMXVW IRUPDW�DIWHU�WKH�UHIUHVK�guarantees that the format is adjustedafter the refreshing of the updated data. The function is active by default.

You can also stop the adjusting function for the format, for example, if you want to display the datamore quickly or if you use a workbook with your own format template.

6HH�DOVR�


6XSSUHVVLQJ�LGHQWLFDO�NH\V�LQ�WKH�UHVXOWV�DUHD

You can display characteristic values with a key and name. If you have selected the key for thecharacteristic display then you can determine whether identical keys should be displayed in the querydisplay. The setting 6XSSUHVV�LGHQWLFDO�NH\V is active as standard, so that only the first key is displayedper characteristic and further, identical keys are suppressed.

'LVSOD\LQJ�VFDOLQJ�IDFWRUV�IRU�NH\�ILJXUHV

You can display the scaling factor for key figures (for example, “in 1000 $”) in the row or columnheader. This function is QRW active by default.

'LVSOD\LQJ�ILOWHU�FHOOV�IRU�VWUXFWXUHV

Filter cells did not have filter cells in Release 1.2. This function allows you to show the key figurestructure filter cells in 1.2 workbooks.

'LVSOD\LQJ�/LQNV�WR�$VVLJQHG�'RFXPHQWV

For query metadata and master data, you can display links to documents [Extern] that you havecreated for these objects in the Administrator Workbench. If documents exist for these objects, thesymbol appears next to the metadata and master data. If you click on this symbol, you jump towhere the document is displayed in the Web.



,QWHUDFWLRQ

$OORZLQJ�LQWHUDFWLYH�IXQFWLRQV

Interactive functions, such as the navigation functions 6RUW and 6WRUH�DV�ILOWHU�YDOXH��are available asdefault for the query. You can deactivate these interactive functions if you want to stop the reportviews from being changed, for example.

6DYLQJ�DQG�UHXVLQJ�YDULDEOH�YDOXHV

If variables that are ready for input are used in a report, then you can enter the desired values for thevariables or confirm the default values when embedding the query in an Excel worksheet. If you wishto save and reuse variable values select the setting 6DYH�DQG�UHXVH�YDULDEOH�YDOXHV. This function isQRW active by default.

5HIUHVKLQJ�WKH�TXHU\�ZKHQ�RSHQLQJ�WKH�ZRUNERRN

As long as the workbook is saved on the BW Server, you can use this function to refresh the queryautomatically when you open it. This function is QRW active by default.

5HIUHVKLQJ�UHVWRUHV�JOREDO�GHILQLWLRQ

When you refresh the query, the last navigation status is usually restored. Instead, you can use thisfunction to go back to the initial screen set up in the query global definition. This function is QRW activeby default.

&ROXPQ�ZLGWK

$GMXVWLQJ�FROXPQ�ZLGWK�DIWHU�UHIUHVKLQJ

As a rule, after refreshing the position and size of the cell area in the results area of the querychanges. With the function $GMXVW FROXPQ�ZLGWK�DIWHU�UHIUHVKLQJ�you determine which cell areas shouldbe adjusted in the Excel worksheet. You can choose between the settings 'R�QRW�DGMXVW�FROXPQ�ZLGWK,$GMXVW�UHVXOWV�DUHD or $GMXVW�ZKROH�FROXPQ. The option $GMXVW�ZKROH�FROXPQ is activated by default.

,QIRUPDWLRQ

The following technical details are available to you:

• 4XHU\�,'��ORFDO�: Technical identification number of the query in the workbook, which for example,helps distinguish between VBA routines if there are several queries in the workbook.

The technical identification number of the query is displayed as the query ID and cannotbe changed. You can use the ID of the query in user-defined VBA routines.

6HH�DOVR�

Integration with Visual Basic for Applications [Seite 471]

• 4XHU\�,'��6HUYHU�: Technical identification number of the query on the BW Server.

• :RUNERRN�,'��6HUYHU�: Technical identification number of the workbook, as long as the workbookis saved on the BW Server.

• 2ULJLQDO�V\VWHP�RI�WKH�ZRUNERRN� Name of the BW Server

$FWLYLWLHV

You can change the properties of queries by choosing

• 3URSHUWLHV in the FRQWH[W�PHQX of the results area (right mouse button)

• or the symbol for 2/$3�IXQFWLRQV�IRU�DFWLYH�FHOOV�→�3URSHUWLHV�on the WRROEDU.

Make the settings you need and choose OK. The settings are also valid for the active query in theactive workbook.



If you want to save the settings for all queries in the active workbook, choose 2.�IRU�DOOTXHULHV.



:RUNLQJ�ZLWK�+LHUDUFKLHV

8VH

You can present the characteristic elements hierarchically in the Business ExplorerAnalyzer and evaluate the data of a query for the individual hierarchy levels.

,QWHJUDWLRQ

Hierarchies for characteristics can be loaded from the source system or created inthe Business Information Warehouse. You can find further information on hierarchiesin the Hierarchies [Extern] section of the Administrator Workbench documentation.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You can use this function if the characteristics of the query have hierarchies.

)XQFWLRQV

<RX�FDQ�H[SDQG�RQO\�RQH�FKDUDFWHULVWLF�RI�WKH�TXHU\�LQ�D�KLHUDUFKLFDO�GLVSOD\�

If you expand another characteristic, the characteristic you displayed hierarchicallydisappears from the list.

Note also that you can only have hierarchies on row axes, not column axes.

The hierarchical display of a characteristic takes place one step at a time. You get adrilldown with the hierarchy nodes of the selected hierarchy. You can get to the lowerhierarchy levels using a new drilldown by hierarchy (or by clicking on the hierarchysymbol). Characteristic values that are not arranged in the hierarchy, appear in theresults area in the row marked ‘Not assigned’. If a characteristic with a hierarchy issorted according to key and name, then the node ‘Not assigned’ appears at the end.

You can configure the hierarchy display (width of the hierarchy indentation and hierarchybuttons) individually, by using the function )RUPDW on the BEx toolbar.

See also:


$FWLYLWLHV

You can evaluate data for the individual hierarchy levels with the query. To display acharacteristic as a hierarchy instead of a list, choose $FWLYH�+LHUDUFK\ from thecontext menu with a right mouse-click. You can now expand the hierarchy to the levelyou require. Expanding a hierarchy level means that the display of the level, wherethe cursor is positioned, is extended by one more level, meaning that the level ismoved to a position one level lower down. Conversely, the hierarchy can also bereduced by one level (compressed). Choose ([SDQG�+LHUDUFK\�→ /HYHO��from thecontext menu (right mouse click)� You can also expand or compress the hierarchy byclicking on the hierarchy symbol.

You can determine the hierarchical display of a characteristic as early as when you definea query.



• Choose &KDQJH 4XHU\�9LHZ from the BEx toolbar.

• Select the characteristic you want and choose 3URSHUWLHV�from the context menu (rightmouse click).

• In the field, choose 3UHVHQWDWLRQ�+LHUDUFK\�$FWLYH.

In the field 3UHVHQWDWLRQ�+LHUDUFK\ you can also set up the 6WDUW�([SDQG�/HYHO, that is, towhat hierarchy level you want to drilldown to in the initial view.

6HH�DOVR�





3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You can use this function if you already created currency translation types [Extern] in theAdministrator Workbench.

3URFHGXUH

1. Select a cell in the results area of the query.

2. Using the right mouse button, choose &XUUHQF\�7UDQVODWLRQ from the context menu�

3. Specify if you want to translate the values of the query

− into a joint target currency,

− into the database currency,

− or into the currencies set up in the query definition (see also Translating Currencies [Seite 52])

7UDQVODWLQJ�LQWR�D�-RLQW�7DUJHW�&XUUHQF\

4. Enter the name of the required currency translation type.

5. If the currency translation type does not specify a target currency, enter the required targetcurrency.

6. Confirm your entries.

5HVXOW

The values of the query are translated into the desired target currency / currenciesusing a translation type.

You can find further information in the section on Currency Translation in the BusinessExplorer [Extern] in the Administrator Workbench documentation.



,QIRUPDWLRQ�)XQFWLRQV

8VH

The information functions allow you to prepare information on the working method ofthe Business Explorer. You can call up the information functions if you:

• want to know which cell areas of the worksheet belong to a query

• want to log the activities of the Business Explorer in Excel and display the log (for example, iferrors occur during certain editing processes)

• want to know if and how you are logged on to the Business Information Warehouse Server(information on the BW Server).

)XQFWLRQV

6HOHFWLQJ�TXHULHV�LQ�D�ZRUNVKHHW

You can display which cell areas of the worksheet belong to which query by choosing/D\RXW�→�6HOHFW�4XHULHV�LQ�:RUNVKHHW from the BEx toolbar. Arrows between filtercells and the results area indicate the relevance of various cell areas to a query. Ifyou choose the function again (or refresh any query), the selections are removed.

6HH�DOVR�


/RJ�%RRN

The log book function gives you the opportunity of logging all activities of theBusiness Explorer in Excel. In the log book information is held, for example, on whenwhich query is executed and with which parameters, on when you log on and log offfrom a particular Business Information Warehouse Server, on how a query isautomatically processed further after refreshing using a VBA-Exit, and so on.

On the BEx toolbar, choose 6HWWLQJV →�/RJ, in order to begin and end the recording ofinformation. As soon as you have requested the recording of a log book, you candisplay its contents by choosing the function 6HWWLQJV�→ 'LVSOD\�/RJ�%RRN. You cansave the contents of the log book as a text file.

You empty the log book by switching the logbook record off and back on again. Save thecontents of the log book before you turn off the /RJ�function.

It can also be the case that the system suggests you log off from the BW Server when youactivate the log. This is because when you activate the log, the PC also starts logging thesteps on the BW Server, which is only of use if it is started when you log on to BW. If youwant to stop the steps being logged on the BW Server, choose &DQFHO.

The log book display is not constantly updated, meaning you must repeat the command'LVSOD\�ORJ�ERRN from time to time in order to see the most current entries.

'LVSOD\LQJ�,QIRUPDWLRQ�RQ�WKH�%:�6HUYHU

This function allows you to display your logon parameters and the systemparameters, meaning you get information on if and how you are logged onto theBusiness Information Warehouse Server. Choose 6HWWLQJV → 'LVSOD\�,QIRUPDWLRQ�RQ�WKH



%:�6HUYHU from the BEx toolbar��A dialog box then tells you, either that no connectionexists to the Business Information Warehouse Server, or it shows you the parametersof the current connection (user name, host server, system name and so on).

$FWLYLWLHV

Call up the information functions with the help of the BEx toolbar.



4XHULHV�LQ�:RUNERRNV

8VH

Queries are inserted into workbooks so you can display them. When you insert a query, a link is madebetween the cell areas of the worksheet with the data of the InfoProvider upon which the query isbased. A link therefore exists between the Business Explorer and the Business InformationWarehouse Server (BW Server). This link stays in place until you interrupt it (see Settings [Seite 414]).

When you open a query and insert it into a workbook, the query is calculated and the view (initial view)of the data established in the query definition [Seite 15] is displayed.

If variables [Seite 42] that are ready for input are used in the query, you can enter the required valuesfor the variables or confirm the default values when you insert the query.

Workbooks into which queries are inserted are no different in appearance than otherExcel workbooks. They can be saved as files, copied, sent and (using Excel functions)edited however you like and even supplemented with other data.

)XQFWLRQV

You can choose whether you want to insert a query into a new workbook, into an existing one, or intoa workbook template:

If you want to LQVHUW�D�TXHU\�LQWR�D�QHZ�ZRUNERRN:

1. Choose the symbol for 2SHQ��from the BEx toolbar. This brings you to the screen 2SHQ�6$3�%([:

2. Select 4XHULHV from the left column.

3. Select a query from all those available. The queries are arranged according to InfoProviders.

4. Double-click on the required query or choose 2..

If you want to LQVHUW�D�TXHU\�LQWR�WKH�DFWLYH�ZRUNERRN:

Open a workbook and choose 7RROV�→ ,QVHUW�4XHU\��from the BEx toolbar. The query is theninserted into the current worksheet starting at the active cell.

If you want to LQVHUW�D�TXHU\�LQWR�D�ZRUNERRN�WHPSODWH:

1. Create a workbook template.

2. Insert the query into the workbook template.

See: Creating Workbook Templates [Seite 461]

If you use the function EDVHG�RQ�SHUPDQHQW�WHPSODWH (see Settings [Seite 414]), theBusiness Explorer queries of all these workbooks will have the same formatting when youinsert them.

6HH�DOVR�

Opening [Seite 394]




&HOO�$UHDV�RI�D�4XHU\A query consists of the filter cells and the results area. The results area is divided into rows andcolumns. You also have the option of displaying text elements (header information) for the query.

You can highlight a query by clicking with the mouse on of the query cell areas.

The following graphic shows the various cell areas of a query:

Merkmal 1Merkmal 2

Merkmal 3

Zeilenachse

Zeilenachse

SpaltenköpfeSpaltenköpfe SpaltenachseSpaltenachse

DatenbereichZeilenköpfeRoiwleH ö f

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Filter-zellen

Resultats-bereich

A B C D

A query consists of:

• A current YLHZ of the data (initial state). This view shows the distribution of key figures andcharacteristics in the rows in the columns and drilldown characteristics that were established in thequery definition.

• A ILOWHU�FHOO�for each characteristic of the query. You can position these filter cells wherever youlike in the worksheet.

6HH�DOVR�

Positioning Query Cell Areas [Seite 464]

• A highlighted cell (the “anchor” of the results area) in the worksheet, which indicates the top leftcorner of the UHVXOWV�DUHD. Characteristics and key figures can be arranged along the rows orcolumns axis in the results area.

• A cell area in the workbook that you can freely select, in which WH[W�HOHPHQWV (header information)for the query are displayed. The header information can include such things as the title and authorof the query, the InfoProvider upon which the query is based, the last change date, statements onstatistical filters, or variables that are used in the query. This header information is shown onceyou have individually collected it.

6HH�DOVR�


You can display which cell areas of the worksheet belong to which query by selecting/D\RXW�→�6HOHFW�4XHULHV�LQ�:RUNVKHHW from the toolbar. Arrows between filter cells andthe results area indicate the relevance of various cell areas to a query.

6HH�DOVR�

Layout [Seite 410]

)RU�D�GHWDLOHG�GHVFULSWLRQ�RI�WKH�IXQFWLRQDOLW\�LQ�D�TXHU\��VHH�





Detaching queries [Seite 463]


Query properties [Seite 450]



&UHDWLQJ�:RUNERRN�7HPSODWHV

8VH

You can create workbook templates, into which you can insert your queries. Workbook templatescontain the following elements:

• Preset positions for the different areas (title, filter cells, results area, text element)

• Format settings: You can change the background pattern, color scheme, and so on.

• Logo, Bitmaps

• VBA macros

See: Integration with Visual Basic for Applications [Seite 471]

3URFHGXUH

1. Insert a query into a workbook.

2. Format the workbook (see Formatting [Seite 408])

3. Add other elements if required:

− Logo

− Bitmaps

− VBA macros and control elements that start the macros.

4. Save [Seite 395] the workbook.

If you do not use the preset positions for the areas of the query, skip step 1. In this case,new queries are inserted into the workbook template from the active cell onwards.

5HVXOW

The saved workbook can now be used as a workbook template. If you now want to insert a query intothis workbook template, you have the following options:

• From the BEx toolbar, choose 6HWWLQJV�→�1HZ�ZRUNERRN�RQ�HPEHG�→�LV�VHOHFWHG�IURP�OLVW� Youcan now select the required workbook as a template.

• From the BEx toolbar, choose 6HWWLQJV�→�1HZ�ZRUNERRN�RQ�HPEHG�→�LV�VHOHFWHG�IURP�OLVW�

When you insert a query into the workbook template, the last query (not all queries!) that you added isdeleted and swapped with the new query that is embedded.

If you delete the query that you used to create the workbook template (step 1) and thatholds the invisible position data for the query before you save the workbook (step 4), theposition data is destroyed and can lead to undesired results.



5HPRYLQJ�4XHULHV�IURP�:RUNERRNV

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

At least one query has been inserted in the workbook.

3URFHGXUH

You can either remove a single query from the workbook, or all of the queries of theworkbook in one step.

5HPRYLQJ�D�6LQJOH�4XHU\

1. Select the query that you want to delete.

2. Select 7RROV�→�5HPRYH�4XHU\�

5HPRYLQJ�DOO�4XHULHV�IURP�WKH�:RUNERRN

1. Select 7RROV�→�$OO�TXHULHV�LQ�WKH�ZRUNERRN�→�5HPRYH�

2. Confirm the removal of all queries with <HV.

When you insert a query into a workbook, you not only save the information on the querydefinition, but also where the areas are placed (title, filter cells, results area and textelements) in the Excel cells. The information is stored in a hidden place.

Please note that the information on where the areas are positioned in the workbook, isretained when you remove the query. The workbook looks empty. When you insertanother query into the workbook, the positions are already there. In this way, theworkbook acts as a workbook template (see Creating Workbook Templates [Seite 461]).

If you want to embed the areas of the new query in other places, you first have to removethe Excel cells in which the parts of the old query were displayed.

To find out where the parts of the old query were, choose /D\RXW�→�6HOHFW�4XHULHV�LQ:RUNVKHHW from the BEx toolbar.

The query definition remains the same if you only remove the query by deleting the Excelcells. If you refresh the query by mistake, for example, by refreshing all the queries in theworkbook (see Refreshing Queries [Seite 396]), the message 5HVXOWV�DUHD�FRXOG�QRW�EHDVVLJQHG appears. You can assign the query to a new results area. If you really want toremove deleted queries, choose &DQFHO. The query is automatically removed from theworkbook.

6HH�DOVR�

Tools [Seite 412]



'HWDFKLQJ�4XHULHV

)XQFWLRQV

A query inserted in a workbook can be recognized by the connection between cellareas of the worksheet (filter and results area) with the data of the query in theBusiness Information Warehouse server (OLAP-Server). In a hidden part of theworkbook, information is held on the displayed views of the data. This guarantees thetechnical connection. This connection remains even if the connection between theBusiness Explorer and the R/3 System is interrupted. After the interruption, you candisplay the current report data for the current report view by refreshing the query. Aslong as there is a connection to the server, the functions of the OLAP server(functions of the context menu and the toolbar) are offered for filter cells and theresults area.

The function 'HWDFK�4XHU\ deletes the connection between the cell areas of thequery and the report data. If you detach the query then the visible data area on theworksheet remains but can no longer be navigated through and also no longer berefreshed.

The function 'HWDFK TXHU\�can no longer be undone.

$FWLYLWLHV

You can delete the connection between the cell areas of the queries and the data, bychoosing 7RROV → $OO 4XHULHV�LQ�WKH�:RUNERRN → 'HWDFK in the toolbar.

6HH�DOVR�




3RVLWLRQLQJ�4XHU\�&HOO�$UHDV

8VH

You can arrange queries and their cell areas in any number of ways on theworksheet by moving or, where necessary, deleting them again.

If you copy the whole query to a new worksheet the position of the cell areas for thequery remain the same.

)XQFWLRQV

You can choose from the following functions:

)XQFWLRQ 3URFHGXUH 9DOLG�IRU

Moving within a worksheet Move the relevant cells inExcel:

1. Select the cell area.

2. Place the cursor on theedge of the cell and drag itto where you want it.

• Text elements

• Filter cells

• Results area

• Displaying exceptions

• Displaying conditions

Moving to other worksheets In the BEx toolbar, choose/D\RXW�→�0RYH�)LOWHU�or�0RYH5HVXOWV�$UHD.

• Filter cells

• Results area

Copying to other workbooks Choose 7RROV�→�&RS\�4XHU\from the BEx toolbar.

• complete queries only

)LOWHU�FHOOV

The filter cells for a query can be moved or copied freely.

If you want to undo the changed position of the filter cells, delete all filter cells andrefresh the query. By doing this you have repositioned all cell areas for the query.

With the function /D\RXW�→�6HOHFW�TXHULHV�LQ�ZRUNVKHHW you can see which filter cellsbelong to which query.

7H[W�(OHPHQWV

You can display the query text elements by group and selectively move or deletethem.

6HH�DOVR�


0RYLQJ��&RS\LQJ�4XHULHV

You can change the position of the query within the workbook. You can either copythe entire query or move the results area into the workbook. The properties of thequery remain the same after the position has been changed. After moving or copyingyou must refresh the query in order to display the current data.

6HH�DOVR�

Tools [Seite 412]




'LVSOD\LQJ�7H[W�(OHPHQWV

8VH

You have the option of displaying different text elements for a query (for example, author, last changedby, InfoProvider, generation time, and so on). These text elements are called the “header information”of the query.

3UHUHTXLVLWHV

You have already inserted one or more queries into a workbook.

3URFHGXUH

1. Select a query.

2. Select /D\RXW�→�'LVSOD\�WH[W�HOHPHQWV�

3. You can either display DOO the text elements or single ones (JHQHUDO��ILOWHUV��YDULDEOHV). The textelements available are displayed between the filter cells and the results area. You can also deleteor move single text elements by deleting or moving their cells in Excel.

([SODQDWLRQ�RI�7H[W�(OHPHQWV

The meaning of the most important text elements is outlined below:

• $XWKRU��The user who defined the query

• /DVW�FKDQJHG�E\� The user who last changed the query definition so that the query has beenregenerated. Small “changes” that you can also make by using navigation are not real definitionchanges.

• ,QIR3URYLGHU��The InfoProvider with the data reported on in the query

• 4XHU\�WHFKQLFDO�QDPH� Technical name for the query that you enter when you save it

• .H\�GDWH��The key date is the date for which time-dependent master data is selected. Youdetermine the key date either in the query definition (query properties) or supply the value using avariable. If the key date has not been defined, then the system date is automatically made into thekey date.

• &KDQJHG�RQ��This time tells you when the query definition was last changed.

• 9DOLGLW\�RI�GDWD��This is the point in time when data for the latest request that can be used forreporting was posted to the InfoProvider.

For MultiProviders, the current InfoPackages are determined from the individual basiccubes and from these, the basic cube with the oldest data validity date is called.

• &XUUHQW�XVHU��The user who has this query open or has inserted it into a workbook.

• /DVW�UHIUHVK��When the query data was last refreshed. This is the point at which you display thetext elements, since refreshing the query is necessary for displaying the text elements.

• 9DULDEOHV��ILOWHU�YDOXHV��FRQGLWLRQV��H[FHSWLRQV��Additional text elements can be variables, filtervalues, conditions, or exceptions, depending on the current query definition. You can display thedescriptions of the conditions and exceptions as text elements by choosing /D\RXW → 'LVSOD\&RQGLWLRQV or �'LVSOD\�([FHSWLRQV from the BEx toolbar (VHH�DOVR��Layout [Seite 410]).

6HH�DOVR�


Positioning Query Cell Areas [Seite 464]



%DFNJURXQG�,QIRUPDWLRQ�RQ�([FHO�)XQFWLRQV

6FUROO�%DUV

If there is no scroll bar displayed in a workbook:

1. Choose ([WUDV → 2SWLRQV from the Excel main menu. This brings you to the 2SWLRQV�dialog box.

2. Select 9LHZ > :LQGRZ�2SWLRQV�!�+RUL]RQWDO�6FUROO�%DU or 9HUWLFDO�6FUROO�%DU�


If, on the other hand, you do not want to see the scroll bars, deactivate the options+RUL]RQWDO�6FUROO�%DU or 9HUWLFDO�6FUROO�%DU�

)UHH]LQJ�&ROXPQV

If you want to freeze a column:

1. Select the column on the right of the column that you want to freeze.

2. Choose :LQGRZ → )UHH]H�from the Excel main menu. The columns you freeze do not move whenyou use the scroll bar.

If you want to stop the freeze function, choose :LQGRZ�→�5HPRYH�)UHH]H.

You can also use this function for rows. You can also freeze individual cells with a columnand row freeze.

6KHHW�3URWHFWLRQ

If you activate the sheet protection function in Excel (under ([WUDV�→�3URWHFWLRQ�→6KHHW...), you put most of the Business Explorer functions out of use. Therefore, usethe SAP Sheet Protection [Seite 470] instead.

)RUPDWWLQJ

You can format the workbook cells by using Excel functions. This goes for the cells ofthe query, too (title, filter cells, text elements, results area). However, when yourefresh the query, the standard formatting for the query cells is restored and thesettings for these cells are lost.

The Business Explorer Analyzer uses the Excel concept of IRUPDW�WHPSODWHVFormatting [Seite 408] results areas, filter cells, and cell areas for header information.Cells of the same type always have the same format template assigned to them. Theformat template applies to the entire workbook.

Changing the format template in the current workbook:

1. Choose )RUPDW�→�)RUPDW�7HPSODWH from the Excel main menu. This brings you to the )RUPDW7HPSODWH�dialog box.

2. Choose &KDQJH��and make the required settings.

We recommend you change the formatting of query cells by using the BEx toolbar.

a. Select the cells where you want to change the format.

E�� Choose )RUPDWWLQJ→�)RQW�3DWWHUQ�%RUGHU�$OLJQPHQW



c. Make the required changes and choose OK.

See also: Formatting [Seite 408]

If you need a specific format template to format a workbook in the BEx Analyzer, andthe template does not exist yet in the workbook, copy the standard definition of allBEx-specific format templates as well as the BEx-specific standard color chart.

Choose from the following options:

• To set the formatting before inserting the query into the workbook, create the required formattemplate in an empty workbook and use that workbook as the workbook template.

See also: Creating Workbook Templates [Seite 461]

• To set the formatting after inserting the query into the workbook, change the format templateand/or the color chart or import them from a different workbook.

You can use the file SAPBEXS.XLA to help you. If you load this file, Excel creates a sheetthat contains all the format templates in use.

Importing all format templates from another (open) workbook:

1. Choose )RUPDW�→�)RUPDW�7HPSODWH from the Excel main menu. This brings you to the )RUPDW7HPSODWH�dialog box.

2. Select 0HUJH��

Copying color chart from another (open) workbook:

4. Choose ([WUDV → 2SWLRQV from the Excel main menu. This brings you to the 2SWLRQV�dialog box.

5. Choose the &RORUV tabstrip and make the required changes.



6KHHW�3URWHFWLRQ

8VH

The 6$3�VKHHW�SURWHFWLRQ allows you to protect the current worksheet against changes. Cell areas ofthe query can then, for example, no longer be deleted and no further queries can be inserted if thesheet protection is active.

,QWHJUDWLRQ

The function 6$3�6KHHW�SURWHFWLRQ�corresponds to the�Excel function 6KHHW�SURWHFWLRQ. If you activatethe sheet protection from the Excel menu, then the majority of the functions in the Business Explorerare no longer executable. The SAP variant of the sheet protection, however, allows you to protectworksheets, without hindering the functionality of the Business Explorer (for example, the navigationfunctions). It is possible to turn off the SAP sheet protection with the Excel function 7XUQ�RII�VKHHWSURWHFWLRQ��.

6FRSH�RI�IXQFWLRQV

The 6$3�VKHHW�SURWHFWLRQ�protects the current worksheet against changes but does, however, allowthe further use of the functions of the Business Explorer. If the sheet protection is active then thefunctions, that are called up with the symbol 7RROV, are no longer available. You activate the functionwith the entry of a password. The protection can only be lifted later with the entry of the correctpassword.

$FWLYLWLHV

To DFWLYDWH the sheet protection select the symbol 7RROV�→ 6$3�6KHHW�SURWHFWLRQ on the toolbar.Enter the password twice.

In order to UHPRYH the sheet protection, select the symbol 7RROV�→ 6$3�VKHHW�SURFHVVLRQ� Enter thepassword, with which you activated the sheet protection.

6HH�DOVR�

Tools [Seite 412]



,QWHJUDWLRQ�ZLWK�9LVXDO�%DVLF�IRU�$SSOLFDWLRQVYou can also connect the Business Explorer (BEx) with your own VBA programs (Visual Basic forApplications). The BEx add-in can trigger your own VBA routines or you can control BEx add-infunctions from your own VBA routines.

&RQWUROOLQJ�IURP�WKH�%([�$GG�LQ

When inserting a query into the workbook, the following VBA routines are automatically generated inthe workbook:

6XE�6$3%(;RQ5HIUHVK�TXHU\,'�$V�6WULQJ��UHVXOW$UHD�$V�5DQJH�

(QG�6XE

This routine is always called if the BEx Analyzer has filled the results area of the query. This routinehas the parameters 4XHU\�,'�and the 5HVXOWV�$UHD as the Excel range. You can use this routine totrigger your own processes after you refresh the query.

You can display the ID of a query by choosing 3URSHUWLHV�→�,QIRUPDWLRQ�in the contextmenu.

6HH�DOVR�


You want the current date and the time to be entered in the cells directly above the upper left area ofthe result area every time the query is refreshed.

You supplement the VBA routine as follows:

6XE�6$3%(;RQ5HIUHVK�TXHU\,'�$V�6WULQJ��UHVXOW$UHD�$V�5DQJH�

��,I�TXHU\,'� �³6$3%(;T��´�7KHQ

��:LWK�UHVXOW$UHD�5HVL]H��

��2IIVHW�� /DVW�FDOFXODWHG�DW��

��2IIVHW�� 1RZ

��(QG�:LWK

��(QG�,I

(QG�6XE

“6$3%(;T��” is the query ID here. You can display the query ID under the query properties.

If you require the same behavior for all queries in the workbook then the ‘If’ statement is omitted.

&RQWUROOLQJ�WKH�%([�$GG�LQ

You can call up various VBA routines of the BEx add-in, with which you control the Business ExplorerAnalyzer functions. The following call-ups are available:

)XQFWLRQ�6$3%(;JHW:RUNERRN,'�ZE1DPH�$V�6WULQJ��$V�6WULQJ

'HWHUPLQLQJ�WKH�,'��XQGHU�ZKLFK�D�ZRUNERRN�LV�VDYHG�LQ�WKH�,QIR&DWDORJ�

The workbook must be opened in Excel; its current name in the collection $SSOLFDWLRQ� :RUNERRNVmust be entered in the parameter ZE1DPH. You will see that the technical name of the workbookgenerally differs from the title in the window.

The function provides an empty string if the workbook is not found in the collection $SSOLFDWLRQ:RUNERRNV, or if it is established that it has not yet been saved in the InfoCatalog.



)XQFWLRQ�6$3%(;UHDG:RUNERRN�ZE,'�$V�6WULQJ��$V�6WULQJ

5HDGLQJ�D�ZRUNERRN�IURP�WKH�,QIR&DWDORJ�

The ID for the workbook in the InfoCatalog must be entered in the parameter ZE,'.

You can use the function 6$3%(;JHW:RUNERRN,' to determine a workbook ID. However, you will seethat an ID is generally only valid in a certain InfoCatalog.

If the reading process was successful, the function shows the Excel name of the open workbook as aresult, or the empty string.

If there is no connection to an OLAP server, the function starts a logon dialog.

)XQFWLRQ�6$3%(;VDYH:RUNERRN�ZE1DPH�$V�6WULQJ��$V�,QWHJHU

6DYLQJ�D�ZRUNERRN�LQ�WKH�,QIR&DWDORJ

In the parameter ZEQDPH, you must enter the Excel name of the workbook you want to save. Thename must be derived from the InfoCatalog and is saved there “as a new version”.

If there is no connection to an OLAP server, the function starts a logon dialog.

)XQFWLRQ�6$3%(;JHW(UURU7H[W��$V�6WULQJ

This return code can be interpreted as an error code for all API functions, that provide a result of typeinteger:

�� Context error, this means that the function cannot be used on the cell in question

� The function was executed without errors

!�� An error occurred in the function

In the last case, the text on the error can then be requested with 6$3%(;JHW(UURU7H[W�(until the nextcall-up of an API function).

)XQFWLRQ�6$3%(;VHW)LOWHU9DOXH�LQW9DOXH�$V�6WULQJ��2SWLRQDO�KLHU9DOXH�$V�6WULQJ��2SWLRQDODW&HOO�$V�5DQJH��$V�,QWHJHU

)LOWHULQJ�ZLWK�FHOO�DW&HOO�(if this parameter is missing, then the active cell is taken as the basis)

The LQWHUQDO filter value must be entered in the parameter�LQW9DOXH. Please note that this valuecan be displayed differently from the external value displayed in the filter cell. You can eitheruse 6$3%(;JHW)LOWHU9DOXH or carry out the filter process once manually with the log bookfunction switched on in order to determine the internal value for a known external value. Theinternal filter value is noted in the log.

Enter the parameter KLHU9DOXH when dealing with a node of a certain characteristic hierarchy with thefilter value.

“LQW9DOXH� ��EODQN!” means “do not filter anymore”

If no connection to a BW server exists the function starts a logon dialog.

The function produces a context error if DW&HOO is not a filter cell.

)XQFWLRQ�6$3%(;JHW)LOWHU9DOXH�LQW9DOXH�$V�6WULQJ��KLHU9DOXH�$V�6WULQJ��2SWLRQDO�DW&HOO�$V5DQJH��$V�,QWHJHU

'HWHUPLQLQJ�WKH�LQWHUQDO�ILOWHU�YDOXH (and, where necessary, the characteristic hierarchy used) withcell DW&HOO (if this parameter is missing, then the active cell is taken as the basis).

The result is displayed in the parameters LQW9DOXH and KLHU9DOXH, which you subsequently have totransfer to “E\5HI”. As no byRef parameter transfer is supported when calling up this function with theExcel method "Run", both of the values can alternatively be queried using the help functionsSAPBEXgetFilterValue_intValue and SAPBEXgetFilterValue_hierValue after the call-up ofSAPBEXgetFilterValue, for example.:

if run("SAPBEX.XLA!SAPBEXgetFilterValue", myValue, myHier) = 0 then

myValue = run("SAPBEX.XLA!SAPBEXgetFilterValue_intValue")

endif




6$3%([FRS\)LOWHU9DOXH�)XQFWLRQ��IURP&HOO�$V�5DQJH��2SWLRQDO�DW&HOO�$V�5DQJH��$V�,QWHJHU

Copying a Filter Value from Filter Cells IURP&HOO to Filter Cells DW&HOO�(if this parameter is missing, theactive cells are used as a basis).

Both filter cells have to relate to the same InfoObject which means that they have to belong to differentqueries. Both queries have to be embedded in the same workbook.

The return value is as SAPBEXgetFilterValue, and so on.

The function produces a context error if DW&HOO�or IURP&HOO are not filter cells.

)XQFWLRQ�6$3%(;VHW'ULOO6WDWH�QHZ6WDWH�$V�,QWHJHU��2SWLRQDO�DW&HOO�$V�5DQJH��$V�,QWHJHU

&KDQJH�GULOOGRZQ�VWDWXV�ZLWK�FHOO�DW&HOO�(if this parameter is missing, then the active cell is taken asthe basis).

“QHZ6WDWH� ��” means “do not drilldown anymore”

“QHZ6WDWH� ��” means “drilldown vertically””

“QHZ6WDWH� ��” means “drilldown horizontally”



)XQFWLRQ�6$3%(;JHW'ULOO6WDWH�FXUUHQW6WDWH�$V�,QWHJHU��2SWLRQDO�DW&HOO�$V�5DQJH��$V�,QWHJHU

'HWHUPLQLQJ�WKH�GULOOGRZQ�VWDWXV�ZLWK�FHOO�DW&HOO�(if this parameter is missing, then the active cell istaken as the basis).

The result is returned in the parameter FXUUHQW6WDWH, that must subsequently be transferred to “E\5HI”.As no byRef parameter transfer is supported when calling up this function with the Excel method"Run", the value can, alternatively, be queried after the call-up of SAPBEXgetDrillState using the helpfunction SAPBEXgetDrillState_currentState (see SAPBEXgetFilterValue).


)XQFWLRQ�6$3%(;UHIUHVK�DOO4XHULHV�$V�%RROHDQ��2SWLRQDO�DW&HOO�$V�5DQJH��$V�,QWHJHU

DOO4XHULHV� �)$/6(� Refreshing the query with cell DW&HOO�(if this parameter is missing, then the activecell is taken as the basis). In this variant, the function produces a context error, if DW&HOO does notbelong to a results area or is a filter cell.

DOO4XHULHV� �758(��Refreshing all queries in the active workbook.

If no connection to a BW server exists the function starts a logon dialog. - provided no queries have tobe refreshed.

6XE�6$3%(;SDXVH2Q��

6WRSSLQJ�WKH�SURFHVV�UXQ�LQ�WKH�DGG�LQ

You switch on 6WRS�$XWRPDWLF�5HIUHVK in the BEx Analyzer when you call this function. This meansthe changes you make are noted with some of the navigation operations, but the query is notimmediately refreshed. This applies above all to the API call 6$3%(;VHW)LOWHU6WDWH.

6XE�6$3%(;SDXVH2II��

&RQWLQXLQJ�WKH�SURFHVV�UXQ�LQ�WKH�DGG�LQ

All changes that are noted since the process run in the add-in (invoked either by user interaction or bycalling up 6$3%(;SDXVH2Q) are now fetched by refreshing the queries in question.

If no connection to a BW server exists the function starts a logon dialog. - provided no queries have tobe refreshed.

)XQFWLRQ�6$3%(;ILUH&RPPDQG�I&RGH�$V�6WULQJ��2SWLRQDO�DW&HOO�$V�5DQJH��$V�,QWHJHU

([HFXWLQJ�DQ�2/$3�IXQFWLRQ�ZLWK�FHOO�DW&HOO�(if this parameter is missing, then the active cell istaken as the basis).



The cell in question must belong to the results area of a query and this query must have beenrefreshed in the current session.

You must enter the code of the OLAP function. In order to determine this code you carry out the OLAPfunction once manually with the logging function switched on. The OLAP function code is noted in thelog.

To be sure that you can use the OLAP function on specified cell, always call up6$3%(;FKHFN&RQWH[W�

The function produces a context error if DW&HOO does not belong to a results area.

)XQFWLRQ�6$3%(;FKHFN&RQWH[W�I&RGH�$V�6WULQJ��2SWLRQDO�DW&HOO�$V�5DQJH��$V�,QWHJHU

Checks whether a given OLAP function can be used with cell DW&HOO (if the parameter�DW&HOO is missing,then the active cell is taken as the basis).


This function produces a context error if the check produces negative results, if the active cell does notbelong to a results area, or if the query has not been refreshed during the current session.

)XQFWLRQ�6$3%(;JHW)LOWHU9DOXH�LQW9DOXH�$V�6WULQJ��KLHU9DOXH�$V�6WULQJ��2SWLRQDO�DW&HOO�$V5DQJH��$V�,QWHJHU

Jumps to a view, which you have to define in the workbook. The parameter MXPS7\SH must always byset to “v“(“v“ for view, other jump types are in development). The name of the view is displayed in theparameter MXPS7DUJHW. If no connection to a BW server exists the function starts a logon dialog.

The function evokes a context error if the active cell does not belong to a results area.

)XQFWLRQ�6$3%(;VKRZ7H[W(OHPHQWV��2SWLRQDO�VHOHFW*URXS�$V�6WULQJ��2SWLRQDO�DW&HOO�$V5DQJH��$V�,QWHJHU

6KRZ�WH[W�HOHPHQW�IRU�TXHU\�LQ�ZKLFK�WKHUH�LV�DQ�DW&HOO�UHVXOWV�DUHD (if this parameter is missing,active cells are used as a basis)

selectGroup = blank or “*”: Show all text elements

selectGroup = “C”: Show only general text elements (created by, changed on,...)

selectGroup = “F”: Show filter only

selectGroup = “V”: Show variables only

The return value is as SAPBEXgetFilterValue, and so on.


)XQFWLRQ�6$3%(;HPEHG4XHU\�JHQ8,'�$V�6WULQJ��2SWLRQDO�DW$FWLYH&HOO�$V�%RROHDQ��$V�6WULQJ

(PEHGGLQJ�D�TXHU\�WKDW�LV�JLYHQ�E\�JHQHUDWHG�XQLTXH�,'��JHQ8,'�

atActiveCell = true: Embed at active cell

atActiveCell = false: Embed in the permanent workbook template of the user (if this is not available, anempty workbook is used)

If successful, the internal workbook ID (SAPBEXq0001, SAPBEXq0002, ...) of the embedded query isreturned.

)XQFWLRQ�6$3%(;JHW5HVXOW5DQJH%\,'�TXHU\,'�$V�6WULQJ��2SWLRQDO�FKDU1DPH�$V�6WULQJ��$V�5DQJH

'HWHUPLQLQJ�D�FHOO�DUHD�IRU�D�TXHU\�LQ�WKH�DFWLYH�ZRUNERRN

You have to specify the internal workbook ID (SAPBEXq0001, SAPBEXq0002, ...), for the query that isbeing searched for, in the query ID parameters.

charName = blank: Results area of the query is returned

charName = name of the characteristic: Filter area is delivered (normally a range of two cells) for thecharacteristic charName



The function delivers 1RWKLQJ if the are you searched for is not found (query does not exist,characteristic is not in the query or the area has been deleted/is not available).



)RUPDWWHG�5HSRUWLQJ��&U\VWDO�5HSRUWV�,QWHJUDWLRQ

3XUSRVH

Formatted reporting:

• Denotes the layout of reports using master data, ODS objects and multi-dimensional InfoProviders

• Contains every degree of freedom for formatting reports and enables you to assign reportelements to a degree of one pixel It is especially suitable for form-based reports and printedreports

• Does not offer any analytical functions You can specify the options for interaction only when youdesign the report

With BW, the customer receives as Business Content not only OLAP queries, but also formattedreports that were created by SAP using the &U\VWDO�5HSRUWV�'HVLJQHU on the basis of existing BWqueries.

These formatted reports display the full range of formatting elements and correspond particularly wellto the requirements of form-based reports. Using the &U\VWDO�(QWHUSULVH�server component, you canpublish these reports on the Web, making them available to your users.

If, in addition to the reports delivered by SAP as Business Content, you want to create your ownformatted reports, you will need the Crystal Reports Designer. This tool is not delivered as standardwith BW but is a component of the &U\VWDO�(QWHUSULVH�±�6$3�(GLWLRQ solution offered by SAP and SAPPortals.

,PSOHPHQWDWLRQ�&RQVLGHUDWLRQV

The following overview shows both client and server components of the &U\VWDO�(QWHUSULVH�±�6$3(GLWLRQ solution, and their availability.

6HUYHU

&OLHQW

'HVLJQ 9LHZC

rystal Connector

Business ContentActivation

Administration

Ans

ehen

� �� "!#�%$&� � ��'�)(*�&�%+��&� � ��,�� .-�/�0

� ��1 2(,� �*� �3�4� ��5��4�6�� -�7� � � �

� � &�%$&+��*8��/,�%+9 �� : �<;,-�� &��!>=,�%+�+,��+>��/�4��?�� /�+ � 2+�@1*� ��/%� �%�9 -4/*�2�</*�

� ��<�"��&�,+ ��)�� 4�

,QWHJUDWLRQ

The integration of Crystal Reports into BW enhances the Web application options in BW. Formattedreporting allows you to create formatted and form-based reports.

You can choose different views for the same query:

• The flat view for building Crystal Reports



• The multi-dimensional view for building workbooks

+RZ�GRHV�LW�ILW�LQWR�6$3�%:"

)XQFWLRQV

Integrating Crystal Reports into BW enhances the SAP BW Business Explorer with the followingfunctions:

,

%XVLQHVV�([SORUHU

•Query design usingthe Desktop or Web•Multi-dimensional(OLAP) analyses(MS Excel or Web-based)•Geographicalanalyses•Ad-hoc reporting•Alerts•Publishing iViews•Seamlessintegration of Web-and MS Excel-basedanalyses

�� !��"�#�$�%�#��

& %��#��!��'��(��$ �� )+*, � -�!�� !

./��0*0(�(�� 1�� 2��!��

3��4��)'��(��#�$ � 5 ��+�� 1��

687 9;:0<0="92>8?A@CB,DFEGB8<�72<+H�IKJ68B0BK?#I

L/7�MONAPK<+9 H"="B8<0IRQN+P8<+9 H"="B,<,>8?;S/T�72>;I

•Layouts exact toone pixel•Wizard-basedlayout definition•Static, formattedreports•Form-basedreports•Pre-definedCrystal Reportsin BusinessContent•Publishing onthe Web•Convenientprinting options

•Online andoffline scenarios•WAP device andPDA support•Automatic devicerecognition•Publishing usingthe WebApplicationDesigner•Device-specificoutput•Alerts, charts•Integration intothe mobile portal

•Web ApplicationDesign•Interactive analyticalContent on das Web•Information cockpitsand dashboards•Basis for creatinganalytical applications•Creation of iViewsfor the portal•Wizard-basedvisualisation APIs foradditional, highlyindividual Web design



•Personalization ,collaboration,profile generation


&RPSRQHQWV�RI�WKH�&U\VWDO�(QWHUSULVH�±�6$3�(GLWLRQ�6ROXWLRQ

The following overviews of the integration architecture show the components that you can use with the&U\VWDO�(QWHUSULVH�±�6$3�(GLWLRQ solution to create formatted and form-based reports:

• Report definition (layout) using the &U\VWDO�5HSRUWV�'HVLJQHU component

• Saving in BW



6HUYHU

&OLHQW

'HVLJQ 9LHZ

�Creating new

reports�

Opening /saving reports�

Changingreports�

Loadingreports into BW

��

• Publishing reports on &U\VWDO�(QWHUSULVH, the server component for executing, scheduling, andcaching reports and outputting reports on the Web.

• Supporting several languages

• Integration into the SAP roles and user concept

6HUYHU

&OLHQW

'HVLJQ 9LHZ

Crystal C

onnector

Publishing reports on the

Crystal Enterprise Server

Translation into otherlanguages

Synchronization of rolesand users

�� "!#�$�&%('��)�*��

• Integration into the SAP BW Administrator Workbench

• Using the SAP BW report/report interface (as recipient)



6HUYHU

&OLHQW

'HVLJQ 9LHZ

Crystal C

onnector

Metadata Retrieval

Reading Data from BW

Queries


��

• Presentation of formatted reports in the Web browser

• Supporting single sign-on

• Integration into the Enterprise Portal

• Printing reports with additional print options

6HUYHU

&OLHQW

'HVLJQ 9LHZ

Crystal C

onnector


Administration

��! ��"�#

Single Sign On#

ePortfolio

$&%'() (%

&UHDWLQJ�DQG�'LVWULEXWLQJ�5HSRUWV

The following overview shows you how to create and publish reports using the�IXOO�scope of functionsin the &U\VWDO�(QWHUSULVH�±�6$3�(GLWLRQ solution.



4. Save the report inthe BW repository

6HUYHU

&OLHQW

'HVLJQ 9LHZ

Crystal C

onnector


Administration

Vie

w

6. View the reportfrom anyFrontend (forexample, Webbrowser, SAPGUI, portal,ePortfolio)

5. Publish thereport toCrystal Enterprise

2. Select the Queryand retrieve metadata

1. Start the CrystalReports Designer

3. Structure andpreview the report

1 & 2: Using the &U\VWDO�5HSRUWV�'HVLJQHU, create report definitions with the object type &U\VWDO�5HSRUW

You use BW queries as the basis for Crystal Reports:

− BW queries that exist already in the BW system

− BW queries that you create by jumping from the Crystal Reports Designer to the BEx QueryDesigner

3. With the Crystal Reports Designer you can use the full range of formatting elements to display datafrom BW according to your requirements:

− Fonts

− Font sizes

− Colors

− Styles

− Diagrams

− Pictures

− Maps

− Free texts

Using the Crystal Report Designer, you can improve the layout of reports and how they aredisplayed on the Web since you can assign data freely and execute form-based reports to theaccuracy of one pixel.

You can

− Install the layouts delivered by SAP as Business Content

− Adjust the layouts delivered by SAP as Business Content

− Create unrestricted customer-specific layouts

You also have extended print options

4. The Crystal Reports are stored in the BW system and managed in the Administrator Workbench.They are integrated into the BW system infrastructure in such a way that they can be transportedwith BW. The Crystal Reports are published on the &U\VWDO�(QWHUSULVH�server component at thesame time as they are saved in BW.



5. By activating Business Content, you publish those Crystal Reports that are delivered with SAPBusiness Content on the &U\VWDO�(QWHUSULVH�server component. This means that any user with therelevant authorization can then execute these Crystal Reports in the browser.

A Crystal Report that is scheduled in Crystal Enterprise is called a UHSRUW�LQVWDQFH. Unlike aCrystal Report, data is saved in a report instance. There can be several report instancesexecuted at different times for any report. These instances are managed on the CrystalEnterprise server.

For further information, see Crystal Reports Administration [Extern]

5HVWULFWLRQV

In order to create a new formatted report yourself, you need the complete &U\VWDO�(QWHUSULVH�±�6$3(GLWLRQ solution.



2UJDQL]LQJ��%([�%URZVHU

8VH

The Business Explorer Browser (BEx Browser) makes it possible for you to access all types ofdocument in the Business Information Warehouse that are assigned to your role or that you havestored in your favorites. You can select and open documents assigned to you, or store and managenew documents in the BEx Browser.

Document types that you can work with in the BEx Browser are:

• BW workbooks

• Documents that are stored in the Business Document Service (BDS)

• Links (references to file system, shortcuts)

• Links to Internet sites (URLs)

• SAP transaction calls.

• Web applications and Web templates

• Crystal Reports

,QWHJUDWLRQ

Workbooks from the %XVLQHVV�([SORUHU�$QDO\]HU�(see also: Evaluating Query Data [Seite 416]), aswell as links and documents from the %XVLQHVV�'RFXPHQW�6HUYHU, are managed in the BusinessExplorer Browser.

The Business Explorer Browser displays all a user’s roles and favorites.

The term 5ROH�(from Release 2.0B) was called $FWLYLW\�*URXS in Release 2.0A, and&KDQQHO in Release 1.2B.

A user’s roles are assigned in the role maintenance screen [Extern] (transaction PFCG) or inthe user maintenance screen (transaction SU01), (see also the documentation on theAdministrator Workbench: Setting up Authorizations with Role Maintenance [Extern]).

The user can maintain favorites either directly in the BEx Browser, or in the 6$3�(DV\�$FFHVV�menu.

Note that roles can be shown or hidden in the SAP Easy Access menu.

If your roles are not displayed in the SAP Easy Access menu:

• From SAP Easy Access, choose 0HQX�→�8VHU�PHQX.

• Choose ([WUDV�→�6HWWLQJV�→ 6KRZ�)LUVW�/HYHO.

The names of your roles are also shown in your user menu.

)XQFWLRQV

With the help of the Business Explorer Browser you can access all workbooks and other documentsthat are assigned to you using your roles and tasks (activity groups). You can also work in theBusiness Explorer Browser with all of the workbooks and other documents that you have saved in yourfavorites (SAP Easy Access menu).

$FWLYLWLHV

To start the BEx Browser, choose 6WDUW�→ 3URJUDPV�→ 6$3�)URQWHQG�%XVLQHVV�,QIRUPDWLRQ

:DUHKRXVH�→ 6$3�%XVLQHVV�([SORUHU�%URZVHU�



You can also get to the BEx Browser from the BEx Analyzer in the main menu bar %XVLQHVV�([SORUHU

→�%URZVHU



6HOHFWLQJ�DQG�2SHQLQJ�'RFXPHQWV

8VH

With the help of the browser you can open any workbooks, internet sites, programs, and transactions.

3URFHGXUH

1. Start the Business Explorer Browser. Select 6WDUW�→�3URJUDPV�→�6$3�)URQWHQG�%XVLQHVV

,QIRUPDWLRQ�:DUHKRXVH�→�6$3�%XVLQHVV�([SORUHU�%URZVHU�

It is also possible to start the Business Explorer Browser from the Business ExplorerAnalyzer. In the main menu for Microsoft Excel in the BEx Analyzer, choose 6$3

%XVLQHVV�([SORUHU�→�%XVLQHVV�([SORUHU�%URZVHU.

2. Choose one of the folders (one of the folders in the Favorites, for example) by clicking with themouse on the folder name on the left-hand side of the screen.

3. All the workbooks and other document types that are in the file you selected are displayed for youon the right side of the screen. The workbooks and other document types are usually collectedtogether into groups that are represented by graphical symbols (folder symbols).

Note that the last two hierarchy levels of a folder are only displayed on the right side of thescreen. This means that all pages and all files that have no subfolders appear only on theright side of the screen in the BEx browser. All levels, however, are displayed in the SAPEasy Access Menu.

If you create a new folder on the left side of the screen in the BEx browser, this folder onlyappears on the left side of the screen and is QRW displayed on the right side of the screen.

It is also possible to create your own folder symbols [Seite 488].

4. To display the document, choose 2SHQ from the context menu (right mouse click). It is possible,for example, to open a BW workbook in the Business Explorer Analyzer.

5HVXOW

The document is opened. If you have opened a workbook, you can display all the queries contained init and analyze the query data using navigation.

6HH�DOVR�




:RUNLQJ�ZLWK�WKH�%XVLQHVV�([SORUHU�%URZVHU

8VH

You can select and organize documents in the BEx Browser. You can work with the following types ofdocument in the BEx Browser:

• BW workbook

• Document

• Link

• Internet address

• SAP transaction

• Web template

• Web application

• Crystal Report

You can determine the spatial (positioning on the screen) and graphical (colors, symbols) presentationof all folders and their contents. You can maintain your )DYRULWHV and add new folders or objects toyour favorites. These favorites then also appear in your user-specific initial menu (SAP Easy AccessUser Menu).

)XQFWLRQV�$FWLYLWLHV

,QVHUWLQJ�1HZ�)ROGHUV�RU�'RFXPHQWV

Select the right-hand area of the BEx Browser (folders), and choose 1HZ�from the context menu (rightmouse click)� You can create new objects (IROGHUV��ZRUNERRNV��,QWHUQHW�DGGUHVVHV��6$3�WUDQVDFWLRQV�GRFXPHQWV�RU�OLQNV).

$UUDQJLQJ�'RFXPHQWV�6SDWLDOO\

Select a document and, using drag and drop, move it to the position you want. You can also assign adocument to a folder using drag and drop. The document symbol then adjusts itself to match the colorof the folder.

You can also determine the sequence of the documents in the folder using drag and drop.

$UUDQJLQJ�)ROGHUV�6SDWLDOO\

Select a folder and, using drag and drop, move it to the position you want.

&KDQJLQJ�WKH�*UDSKLFDO�'LVSOD\�RI�)ROGHUV

Select a folder, and choose 6HOHFW�6\PERO�DQG�&RORU from the context menu (right mouse click).�Selectthe folder symbol or color for the object symbols that you want to use.

You can replace the folder symbols with company-specific images, and create your ownlogos (see Creating Logos and Folder Symbols [Seite 488]).

&RS\LQJ�)ROGHUV�DQG�'RFXPHQWV

You can copy individual documents and entire folders, along with all their assigned documents, toother roles or tasks in the favorites and roles. To do this, select the folder or document and, using dragand drop, move it onto the tree structure in the left-hand area of the BEx Browser. If there areadditional hierarchy levels, the tree structure opens up automatically to the position where you dragthe folder or object.



It is not possible to copy a folder or an object to a folder in the tree structure, this is displayed (thesymbol changes accordingly), for example, if you are not authorized to copy an object to a particularfolder.

&UHDWLQJ�/LQNV

You can create links (shortcuts) to any files on your PC. You can also store BEx Browser objects aslinks on your Windows Desktop (using drag and drop).

6WRULQJ�'RFXPHQWV

You can manage any number of files in the BEx Browser. These files are then stored in the BusinessDocument Service. Using the context menu, select 1HZ in the right-hand area of the BEx Browser.'RFXPHQW. Select the document you want. It is then loaded into the BW system, and you can access itat any time using the BEx Browser.



%([�%URZVHU��$GPLQLVWUDWLRQ

8VH

With the Business Explorer Browser, you can access workbooks and other object types that areassigned to you using role maintenance (transaction PFCG) in your roles and tasks, or that youyourself have created in your favorites (either in the BEx Browser or in the menu of SAP Easy Access,transaction SESS).

)XQFWLRQV

Administration of the Business Explorer Browser has changed completely from Release 2.0. With thehelp of the reports available in BW Customizing, you can convert existing channels and favorites to thelatest technological developments. You can also convert those channels and favorites from beforeRelease 2.0A that are maintained in the InfoCatalog.

The following task distribution is valid from Release 2.0 for managing the contents displayed in theBusiness Explorer Browser.

• You select and organize documents in the %([�%URZVHU. You determine the spatial (positioningon the screen) and graphical (colors, symbols) presentation of all folders and their contents. Youcan maintain your IDYRULWHV� and add new folders or objects to your favorites (similar to thefunctions in the SAP Easy Access menu).

6HH�DOVR�

Working with the Business Explorer Browser [Seite 485]

• 5ROH�PDLQWHQDQFH�(activity group maintenance) is the basis for administration of the roles andtasks displayed in the BEx Browser. In role maintenance (transaction PFCG) you can create newroles (activity groups), assign users to these roles (activity groups), and maintain authorizations. Inrole maintenance, you can also create links to transactions and Internet links (URLs), or evencreate new folders. However, you can only maintain the spatial (positioning on the screen) andgraphical (colors, symbols) representation of the folders and their contents, in the BEx browser.

6HH�DOVR�

Role Maintenance [Extern]

• In the 6$3�(DV\�$FFHVV menu (transaction SESS), users can maintain their own favorites,meaning, for example, that they can add the transactions they use the most to their list offavorites, or create new folders. However, you can only maintain the spatial (positioning on thescreen) and graphical (colors, symbols) representation of the folders and their contents, in the BExbrowser.

Make the following setting, if you want to display the names of your roles (activity groups)in your user menu (SAP Easy Access) in the same way that you do in the tree structure ofthe Business Explorer Browser: In the initial screen menu (SAP Easy Access Menu)choose 0HQX�→�8VHU�0HQX. Select ([WUDV�→�6HWWLQJV�and then the option 6KRZ�ILUVWOHYHl. The names of the roles (activity groups) that you are assigned to are also displayedin your user menu.



&UHDWLQJ�/RJRV�DQG�)ROGHU�6\PEROV

8VH

It is possible to replace the existing folder symbols in the BEx Browser with company-specific images and logos. The folder symbols are used to identify a foldergraphically, and are found in the right half of the BEx Browser. The logo is displayedin the upper-right corner of the white title line in the BEx Browser.

)XQFWLRQV

You can assign different folder symbols to different systems. All the users in a system are givenidentical folder symbols. There are no user-specific folder symbols.

)ROGHU�6\PEROV

A maximum of 32 different folder symbols are possible. Each folder has two foldersymbols assigned to it. One folder symbol is for the normal display of the folder, anda second folder symbol is used when the folder has been selected, that is when themouse pointer is positioned over the folder.

Only complete pairs of folder symbols (normal and selected) that are numberedconsecutively are loaded into the system.

/RJRV

There must always be a logo with the file name "wdbblogo.bmp", because this file isused to check the validity of the folder symbols on the local PC. If you do not want todisplay a logo, the image used for the file "wdbblogo.bmp" can also be made‘transparent’.

1RUPDO�IROGHUV\PERO

6\PERO�XVHG�ZKHQWKH�IROGHU�LV�VHOHFWHG

/RJR

Properties Appears in the normalfolder display

Appears wheneverthe folder is selected,meaning when themouse pointer ispositioned over thefolder

Appears in the upper-right corner of thewhite title line of theBEx Browser

File name ZGEEI[[Q�EPS

“xx” represents aconsecutive indexfrom 0 to 31

ZGEEI[[V�EPS

“xx” represents aconsecutive indexfrom 0 to 31

ZGEEORJR�EPS

Size Recommended size:150x150 pixels

Recommended size:150x150 pixels

Height = 27 pixels

The width is adjustedaccording to the sizeof the window.



Colors You can use a maximum of 256 colors that you can get from the SAPEnjoy color palette.

You find examples for folder symbols that use the SAPEnjoy color palette on the installation CD under"gui\Windows\Win32\bw\themes", or on your local PC under"c:\program files\sappc\sapgui\themes\default".

Use the color index 253 to generate a transparentbackground.

You use the color settings in the SAP GUI settings to modify the colorswith indexes from 73 to 96. You the SAP GUI symbol in the start toolbarto make color settings for the SAP GUI.

Blend these colors to create interesting effects for the normal foldersymbols. It is best to use contrasting colors for the selected foldersymbols, to emphasize that the folder is selected.

$FWLYLWLHV

The folder symbols are downloaded to your local PC (client) the first time you log on,and are stored under "c:\program files\sappc\sapgui\themes\bw\<SID>" Duringloading, the logo behaves in the same way as the folder symbols. The folder symbolsare only downloaded again if they have been changed. When the system checks thevalidity of the folder symbols, it compares the date of the last change in the BWsystem with an entry in the registry(HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\SAP\Bex\Browser\<SID>). The date the foldersymbols were last changed on your local PC is not checked.

$GPLQLVWUDWLRQ

Call "c:\program files\sappc\bw\wdbbapp.exe /Upload" to load company-specificfolder symbols into a system.

Note the spelling: There is a space between the speech marks (�) after �H[H and the slash(�) in front of 8SORDG.

Choose 6WDUW�→�([HFXWH. There is no specific command for loading in the BExBrowser itself. The folder symbols are loaded from the local directory for the currentsystem ("c:\program files\sappc\sapgui\themes\bw\<SID>"). The user who uploadsthe folder symbols into the system must have authorization for transaction RRMB.

It is not possible to transport folder symbols between BW systems. Upload the foldersymbols into the different systems.



%XVLQHVV�([SORUHU�%URZVHU�RQ�WKH�:HE

8VH

With the Business Explorer Browser on the Web (BEx Browser on the Web), the contents of the BExBrowser (roles, tasks, favorites) are displayed on a web browser.

You can also use the BEx Browser on the Web if QR�%([�)URQWHQG has been installed.

You can call up HTML pages or Web applications from the BEx browser in the Web that you createdusing the BEx Web Application Designer and that contain one or more tables, charts, maps and so on.You can also call up any other intranet or Internet sites from the BEx browser on the Web. You cansearch for objects within the browser.

Note that you have to release the function module for Web-based reporting to use the BExbrowser in the Web You can find notes on the necessary settings via the transactionSPRO. Then choose 6$3�5HIHUHQFH�,0*�→ %:�&XVWRPL]LQJ�,PSOHPHQWDWLRQ�*XLGH�→%XVLQHVV�,QIRUPDWLRQ�:DUHKRXVH�→ 5HSRUWLQJ�UHOHYDQW�VHWWLQJV�→ :HE�EDVHG�VHWWLQJV�

5HVWULFWLRQV

Folders and objects cannot be repositioned using drag and drop. It is not possible to maintain user BWfavorites in the BEx Browser on the Web.

In contrast to the Business Explorer Browser, on the Frontend, URLs that are not assigned to a folderare also displayed in the tree structure.



6WHS�%\�6WHS�,QVWUXFWLRQV

4XHU\�'HVLJQ

'HILQLQJ�1HZ�4XHULHV�>6HLWH��@

6DYLQJ�4XHU\�9DULDQWV�>6HLWH��@

5HVWULFWLQJ�&KDUDFWHULVWLFV�>6HLWH��@

5HVWULFWLQJ�&KDUDFWHULVWLFV��+LHUDUFKLHV�>6HLWH��@

6HOHFWLQJ�+LHUDUFKLHV�>6HLWH��@

5HVWULFWLQJ�.H\�)LJXUHV�>6HLWH��@

&DOFXODWLQJ�.H\�)LJXUHV�>6HLWH��@

7UDQVODWLQJ�&XUUHQFLHV�>6HLWH��@

'LVSOD\LQJ�DQG�&KDQJLQJ�([LVWLQJ�4XHULHV�LQ�WKH�4XHU\�'HVLJQHU�>6HLWH��@

&UHDWLQJ�5HXVDEOH�6WUXFWXUHV�>6HLWH��@

6DYLQJ�4XHULHV�>6HLWH��@

'HOHWLQJ�4XHU\�2EMHFWV�>6HLWH��@

&RS\LQJ�4XHULHV�EHWZHHQ�,QIR&XEHV�>6HLWH��@

(GLWLQJ�6HQGHU�5HFHLYHU�$VVLJQPHQWV�WR�WKH�5�5,�LQ�%:�>6HLWH��@

&UHDWLQJ�,QIR6HW�4XHULHV�DV�5HFHLYHU�5HSRUWV�>6HLWH��@

:HE�$SSOLFDWLRQ�'HVLJQ

&UHDWLQJ�:HE�$SSOLFDWLRQV�ZLWK�WKH�%([�:HE�$SSOLFDWLRQ�'HVLJQHU�>6HLWH��@

6HWWLQJ�XS�WKH�%([�:HE�$SSOLFDWLRQ�'HVLJQHU�>6HLWH��@

'HVLJQLQJ�WKH�/D\RXW�RI�:HE�7HPSODWHV�>6HLWH��@

'HWHUPLQLQJ�7HPSODWH�3URSHUWLHV�>6HLWH��@

:RUNLQJ�ZLWK�WKH�/LEUDU\�IRU�:HE�,WHPV�>6HLWH��@

5HSRUWLQJ��$QDO\]LQJ�LQ�%([�:HE�$SSOLFDWLRQV

'HILQLQJ�DQG�&KDQJLQJ�([FHSWLRQV�>6HLWH��@

'HILQLQJ�DQG�&KDQJLQJ�&RQGLWLRQV�>6HLWH��@


6HOHFWLQJ�DQG�&KDQJLQJ�)LOWHU�9DOXHV�>6HLWH��@

&KDQJLQJ�&KDUDFWHULVWLF�3URSHUWLHV�>6HLWH��@

&KDQJLQJ�.H\�)LJXUH�3URSHUWLHV�>6HLWH��@



&KDQJLQJ�4XHU\�3URSHUWLHV�>6HLWH��@

9DULDEOHV�6FUHHQ�>6HLWH��@

3HUVRQDOL]LQJ�9DULDEOHV�>6HLWH��@

&UHDWLQJ�1HZ�'RFXPHQWV�>6HLWH��@

([DPSOH�RI�,QWHUDFWLRQ�LQ�0DSV�>6HLWH��@

0RELOH�,QWHOOLJHQFH

&UHDWLQJ�0RELOH�$SSOLFDWLRQV�>6HLWH��@

%XVLQHVV�([SORUHU�$QDO\]HU

4XHULHV�LQ�:RUNERRNV

5HPRYLQJ�4XHULHV�IURP�:RUNERRNV�>6HLWH��@

&UHDWLQJ�:RUNERRN�7HPSODWHV�>6HLWH��@

'LVSOD\LQJ�7H[W�(OHPHQWV�>6HLWH��@

(YDOXDWLQJ�4XHU\�'DWD


$QDO\]LQJ�'DWD�*HRJUDSKLFDOO\�8VLQJ�WKH�%([�0DS�>6HLWH��@

'HILQLQJ�&RQGLWLRQV�>6HLWH��@

'HILQLQJ�([FHSWLRQV�>6HLWH��@

&RQGLWLRQV�([FHSWLRQV��,QVHUWLQJ��&KDQJLQJ��'HOHWLQJ�5RZV�>6HLWH��@

6HOHFWLQJ�)LOWHU�9DOXHV�>6HLWH��@

)LOWHU�9DOXHV��)RUPXODWLQJ�6HOHFWLRQ�FRQGLWLRQV�>6HLWH��@

%XVLQHVV�([SORUHU�%URZVHU

6HOHFWLQJ�DQG�2SHQLQJ�'RFXPHQWV�>6HLWH��@

:DUHKRXVH�0DQDJHPHQW

6WHS�E\�6WHS�,QVWUXFWLRQV�>([WHUQ@

BEx Tutorial and User Guide

Documents

Transcript of BEx Tutorial and User Guide